Home

Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and

1. 06 01 01 Project 01 0001 Landis Surveyor Ce orate e Name Weather Cea O 6 mph N hot Station Foint or BS Hl or FS Elevation Remarks B M 523 645 25 69 19 560 Tap of pr e cap in cancrete man marked BIM 524 EL E19 860 TPO 6 11 19 58 Set nail in ground Break setup TPO 2 24 21 82 19 58 Tap pf nail TFO2 10 50 1 52 RR apike n Lelepnone pale corner Athens ST and Georgia Aye MWO 1245 9 69 Top pf caping at MWOT GSO 14 84 6 98 Ground ghat at MWCI WSCS 14 37 745 Water burface of cypress wamp Weir O1 12 54 9 28 Invert of weir 01 Bouth af plant Break setup to run levels back TPO2 7 69 19 41 1152 RR pike in belephone pale NW dorher Athene t and Georgia Ave TBM 01 8 22 1119 Set nail in 24 oak for temporary bench mark 01 Break petug TBM 01 9 59 2078 11 19 Top of nail in 24 oak B M 523 125 19 55 Checked Into BM 523 aff O O Break eebup Iput inetrument away Example 1 Figure 15 3 1 Field notation for differential leveling 15 3 5 Procedures for Trigonometric Leveling The total station theodolite or instrument is usually set up above a benchmark and the elevation of the instrument H I must be obtained The theodolite is attached to the plate of the tripod by a fastening screw and the bubble in the bullseye level is centered or brought level by adjusting the three screw leveling heads accordingly Once the bullseye bubble is centered the theodolite is rotated 90 degrees at a time and the horizontal level bu
2. uslesselele eese 9 3 9 4 1 Tntrod tion PCR SBME IESE Ge hoe SONGS SERS ho Res Shes 9 3 9 4 2 Conventional Sampling Inorganic Parameters 0 0 00 eee eee eee 9 4 9 4 3 Metals MP 9 4 9 4 4 Extractable Organic Compounds Pesticides and PCBs 9 5 9 4 5 Automatic Sampler Security 2 4esszedaseskesrik etk R9 a eR ES AREE RS 9 5 9 4 6 Automatic Sampler Maintenance Calibration and Quality Control 9 5 9 5 Manual Sampling s eo e a rh he y ERESREER TEE EA 9 5 9 6 Special Sample Collection Procedures 0 000 c cece eens 9 6 9 6 1 Organic Compounds and Metals zesk Rd deel RE e ER RARE RE RES 9 6 EISOPQAM ToC vi November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 96 2 Bacteriological s RT 9 6 3 Immiscible Liquids Oil and Grease 0 0 0 2 eee eee 9 6 4 Volatile Organic Compounds 0 cece eee eee eens 9 7 Special Process Control Samples and Tests 0 0000 9 8 Supplementary Data Collection 20 0 0 00 cee 9 9 Sample Preservation lues 9 10 References cius ebaredok e cC bae pac aded e Ob CR ERU KO Rd Cice SECTION 10 Surface Water Sampling u eseseeeee eese 10 1 Introduelldl oes 646 650 5552 5S T REFRCPRETPRER PIX C REPRE SA TREND RE 10 2 Surface Water Sampling Equipment 0 00000 eee 10 2 1 Dipping Using Sample Container 4 2
3. 23 Annual Book of ASTM Standards Water Standard D 1253 86 92 24 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 330 1 1983 25 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 330 5 1983 26 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition Method 4500 CL D 1992 27 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition p 4 100 Method 4500 CL G 1992 28 Instruction Manual DR 100 Colorimeter Model 41100 02 DPD Method for Chlorine Hach Company June 1983 Salinity 29 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition p 2 47 Method 2520 B 1992 30 Instruction Manual RS5 3 Portable Salinometer Beckman Instruments Inc Revised March 1973 Flash Point 31 Rapid Tester Model RT 1 Technical Manual Operations and Service November 1 1989 EISOPQAM 16 17 November 2001 SECTION 17 AIR MONITORING SAFETY EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 17 1 Introduction This section gives specific procedures to be followed when calibrating air monitoring instrumentation Calibrations defined in these procedures will result in instrument response accuracy within the capabilities of the instruments The following practices shall be followed with calibration gases e Calibrations should demonstrate proper operation of the monitor and insure that results give an acceptably accurate indication of conditions upon which to base safety
4. Was clean plastic sheeting placed around the wells to prevent contamination of sampling equipment and containers Comments Were total depths and depths to water determined before purging Comments What device was used to determine depths Comments Were measurements made to the nearest 0 01 ft Comments Was the measuring device properly cleaned between wells Comments Was the standing water volume in each well determined Comments How was the volume determined Comments Was a sufficient volume purged prior to sampling Comments How many volumes Comments How was the purged volume measured Comments What was the method of purging Comments EISOPQAM 2 36 November 2001 18 Were pH conductivity temperature and turbidity measurements taken and recorded at least once during each well volume purged Comments 19 Were pH conductivity temperature and turbidity readings stable prior to sampling Comments 20 How many wells were sampled Upgradient Downgradient Comments 21 How were the samples collected Bailer Pump Comments If a pump was used what type Comments If a pump was used was it properly cleaned before and or between wells Comments What were the cleaning procedures Comments Did bailers have Teflon coated wire leaders to prevent rope from coming into contact with water Comments Were bailers open or closed top Comments Was a clean bailer and new rope
5. Well in a Well The borehole is advanced to the desired depth Atthis point a 1 inch well screen and sufficient riser is inserted into a 2 inch well screen with sufficient riser and centered Filter pack material is then placed into the annular space surrounding the 1 inch well screen to approximately 6 inches above the screen The well is then inserted into the borehole This system requires twice as much well screen and casing with subsequent increase in material cost The increased amount of well construction materials results in a corresponding increase in decontamination time and costs If pre packed wells are used a higher degree of QA QC will result in higher overall cost 6 10 6 Backfilling EISOPQAM 6 17 November 2001 Itis the generally accepted practice to backfill the borehole from the abandoned temporary well with the soil cuttings Use of cuttings would not be an acceptable practice if waste materials were encountered or a confining layer was inadvertently breached Likewise where the borehole is adjacent to or downslope of contaminated areas the loose backfilled material could create a high permeability conduit for the contaminant migration If for some reason the borehole cannot be backfilled with the soil cuttings then the same protocols set forth in Section 6 9 should be applied Section 5 15 should be referenced regarding disposal of IDW 6 11 Temporary Monitoring Well Installation Using the Geoprobe Screen Point 15
6. Meus Tapio Meuse G e a C Herc cue Nitrite 000000 Nutrients Ammonia TKN NO2 NO3 N 2L ML pH lt 2 ice total phosphorus EISOPQAM A 4 November 2001 Water and Waste Water Inorganic Compounds continued ARI e oe mE Oil and Grease sd and Grease po aso HSO pH lt 2 ice ice a ee O a cd mud mea e e oaa 5 mem u CS mesas e e usos n sms pe de O RN rg Sulfates ss Sulfides 1 L 2 ml zinc acetate RENT ONERE ice Temperature 000 500ml ml Imm ASAP EISOPQAM A 5 November 2001 Waste Organic Compounds Analysis Amt Container Preservative Holding a el ae Alcohol Percent Percent Extractable Organic Compounds pesticides r Extractable Extractable Organic Compounds TCLP Compounds TCLP C E occae dts e je dt ocsam e e m pm Vonc orgni composar em je 1m e a e E Waste Inorganic Compounds Analysis Amt Container Preservative Holding ae I Cc Ash Ash Content IG w fee ee Mew e od im a 735 3 es e s w 1 acras CC m s pem em je Jn 1 Sulfides ie 85531 Qjojajao aQj ajaoajaoj q a Tr Z ttt Q EISOPQAM A 6 November 2001 Footnotes 1 Amount The amounts listed must be considered approximate requirements that are appropriate f
7. Present safety protocols to ensure that all operations are conducted in a manner which protects worker safety and meets compliance with all OSHA regulations and EPA safety policies 4 1 Introduction The following parts of this section define safety protocols that are to be used by Branch investigators while conducting field operations This section also covers the necessary training equipment and experience that is needed to conduct safe environmental investigations at hazardous waste sites The Division safety program is jointly coordinated by the Occupational Health and Safety Designee OHSD a Division Safety Health and Environmental Manager SHEM coordinator and a Branch safety officer The OHSD appoints the SHEM to perform the following duties 1 classify employees into safety categories based upon the type of work they are engaged in 2 make requests for hazardous duty status 3 provides and tracks safety related training 4 notifies management of safety deficiencies and 5 reviews project specific safety plans The employees immediate supervisor is responsible for ensuring that their employees meet training and medical monitoring requirements Specific projects will include a Site Safety Officer SSO whose responsibility is to ensure that the site safety plan is adhered to during the course of work Other SSO responsibilities and duties are listed in Section 4 3 1 Responsibility for the safe conduct of site operations is ultima
8. Sampling strategy Nature and extent of contamination Contaminant fate and transport In emergencies samples are usually collected quickly and analyzed on a fast turn around basis In these cases Team personnel may provide printed copies of sample data to the requestor as soon as practical Where appropriate a letter report detailing the field activities associated with the emergency field investigation will be prepared and transmitted to the requestor Internal Peer Review and Report Recipients All Superfund reports will be reviewed internally Final copies of the report will be sent to the requestor If facility or state personnel request a copy of the report this will be indicated in the report transmittal memo The Regional Superfund programis responsible for distribution of data and reports to site owners or operators and to the public All requests for such information should be referred to the proper program official for action EISOPQAM 2 13 November 2001 2 7 RCRA Inspections Investigations and Overview Activities 2 7 1 Introduction RCRA field activities include comprehensive ground water monitoring evaluations CME RCRA facility assessments RFAs case development inspection evaluations CDIE for the RCRA programs and field investigations for the Criminal Investigations Division CID and on site field overviews OV of state RCRA contractor and federal facility personnel 2 71 2 RCRA Investigation Types Com
9. V Volume dye released in tidal day Investigations of industrial and municipal facilities for NPDES permit compliance require measurements of discharge rates Often encountered during these investigations are flow measuring devices such as orifices and magnetic meters which are inaccessible for measurements of flow by standard equations relating to hydraulic head and structure size The following provides a direct technique for measurement of flow through these devices using dye tracers Calculation The discharge rate through any structure can be defined by the following mass balance equation MASS BALANCE EQUATION C q C Q q Q C Q C q C Where Q pipe flow rate C tracer concentration after mixing q tracer injection rate C tracer injection concentration Assuming a constant discharge rate and complete mixing of the tracer in the waste stream the task is 1 to inject into the waste stream a tracer at a constant rate and constant concentration and 2 to measure the concentration of the tracer after mixing with the waste stream EISOPQAM 15 26 November 2001 It is suggested that at least three injection rates and resulting mixed tracer concentration measurements be used to calculate the discharge rate EPA s Technical Support Document also provides guidance for conducting a quick saltwater dilution assessment using a dye tracer 15 15 4 3 Current Measurement Current measure
10. 13 November 2001 Press 2 Display Delay 9 Press 1 Short 10 Press 3 Calib Mode 11 Press 12Manual or 2 Auto User choice but Manual recommended Auto Instrument analyzes the gas sample until values stabilize and then stores the final value Manual User monitors gas sample measurements in counts and presses ENTER to store the value 12 Press EXIT Other settings should not need to be changed 13 Press EXIT again to return to SETUP MENU CALIBRATION MENU SPAN CONCENTRATION 1 Press 1 Calibration 2 Press 4 GasConc 3 Press 2 PID DOWN arrow will change units of measure select ppm with 1 decimal point Enter concentration of toluene e g 97 3ppm 4 Press Enter Accept 5 Press 4 GasConc 6 Press 3 FID DOWN arrow will change units of measure select ppm with 1 decimal point Enter concentration of methane e g 76 5ppm 7 Press Enter Accept RESPONSE FACTOR 8 Press 5 Response Factor 9 Press 1 Both and enter value of 1 00 10 Press Enter Accept EISOPQAM 17 14 November 2001 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE If the instrument has been warmed up for approximately 30 minutes continue with calibration Fill appropriate teflon bags with calibration gases Toluene PID Methane FID Zero Air Both 1 2 10 10 11 12 From Calibration Menu Press 1 Zero Press 1 Both Connect Zero Air bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mo
11. 16 November 2001 Regardless of the method s used elevation surveys should be based on established control points A network of vertically and horizontally located control data points has been established and is continually maintained by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA through its National Ocean Survey formerly U S Coast and Geodetic Survey The system of vertical control points or Benchmarks B Ms are referenced to a surface of fixed and precisely known elevation above mean sea level and is referred to as the datum or datum plane The datum for vertical control elevation is called the National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 NGVD29 formerly known as the 1929 sea level datum or the soon to be established North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 Sources of existing information on benchmark data and their locations may be obtained from local state or federal departments or agencies Typically engineering or public works departments of counties cities or towns may have data on file that is near the particular site being investigated State or federal agencies that are good sources of useful data include e State highway or transportation departments e State geodetic or land surveying offices e State natural or water resources bureaus e State geological surveys e NOAA National Ocean Survey e United States Geological Survey Corps of Engineers Department of the Army Soil Conservation Ser
12. 1s used when i i Materials being handled require a high degree of splash or contact protection NOTE 1 Modified Level C operations require decontamination of personnel and equipment Also zones of protection are required Modified Level C is not normally considered hazardous because adequate safety precautions have been taken to reduce the degree of risk to a negligible level Modified Level C could be considered hazardous in a situation where atmospheric contamination was not the determining factor NOTE2 When wearing a chemically resistant splash suit Level B e Cool vests are required when wearing a chemically resistant suit for more than 30 minutes and the temperature is 80 F to 90 F e Cool vests are required when wearing an chemically resistant suit for more than 15 minutes and the temperature is above 90 F e At the discretion of the SSO a lack of shade may result in the need for cool vests regardless of the temperature e Heat stress monitors are optional unless mandated by the SSO EISOPQAM 4 11 November 2001 LEVEL B MODIFIED LEVEL C without the requirement for splash shield ELSA and REQUIRED APR OPTIONAL Level B Positive pressure full face piece self contained breathing apparatus SCBA airline system Boot covers disposable a HE hat ELSA Cool vests and heat stress monitors if ambient temperature is 80 F or BL i Splashshield O shield The type and concentration of at
13. 28 November 2001 EXHIBIT 4 2 FLOAT PLAN Complete this plan before going boating and leave it with a reliable person who can be depended upon to notify the Coast Guard or other rescue organization should you not return as scheduled Do not file this plan with the Coast Guard PROJECT DATES if overnight date returning 1 NAME OF PERSON REPORTING TELEPHONE NUMBER 2 2 6 4 3 T s T T 4 TRIP EXPECTATIONS LEAVE AT TIME FROM GOING TO EXPECTED TO RETURN BY TIME AND IN NO EVENT LATER THAN TIME 5 IF NOT RETURNED BY TIME CALL THE COAST GUARD OR LOCAL AUTHORITY TELEPHONE NUMBERS 6 SURVIVAL EQUIPMENT CHECK AS APPROPRIATE PFDs FLARES MIRROR SMOKE SIGNALS EPIRB CLOTHING FLASHLIGHT FOOD PADDLES WATER OTHERS ANCHOR RAFT OR DINGHY 7 RADIO YES NO TYPE FREQS 8 ANY OTHER PERTINENT INFO 9 FOR SINGLE BOAT OPERATION AUTOMOBILE LICENSE TYPE TRAILER LICENSE COLOR MAKE OF AUTO WHERE PARKED 10 OTHER EISOPQAM 4 29 November 2001 4 3 8 FIELD PROCEDURES FOR HANDLING PATHOGENIC SAMPLES Whenever there is a possibility that water soil or sediment may contain pathogenic materials all precautions should be taken to prevent exposure to those collecting and handling the samples 1 Latex neoprene gloves shall be worn as well as boots waders and respirators when necessary for the collection of possible pathogenic samples 2 After sample co
14. A visual test can also be made by examining the cement concrete core that is collected when the seal is cored with a diamond coring bit If the seal leaks detected by pressure testing and or the core is cracked or shattered or if no core is recovered because of washing excessive down pressure etc the seal is not acceptable The concern over the structural integrity of the grout seal applies to all double cased wells Any proposed method of double casing and or seal testing will be evaluated on its own merits and will have to be approved by a senior field geologist before and during drilling activities if applicable When the drilling is complete the finished well will consist of an open borehole from the ground surface to the bottom of the well There is no inner casing and the outer surface casing installed down into bedrock extends above the ground surface and also serves as the outer protective casing If the protective casing becomes cracked or is sheared off at the ground surface the well is open to direct contamination from the ground surface and will have to be repaired immediately or abandoned Another limitation to the open rock well is that the entire bedrock interval serves as the monitoring zone In this situation it is very difficult or even impossible to monitor a specific zone because the contaminants being monitored could be diluted to the extent of being nondetectable The installation of open bedrock wells is generally not
15. Comments Were any duplicate samples collected Comments Were samples properly field preserved Comments Were preservative blanks utilized Comments Were field and or trip blanks utilized Comments 23 Were samples adequately identified with labels or tags Comments Were samples sealed with custody seals after collection Comments What security measures were taken to insure custody of the samples after collection Comments 26 Were chain of custody and receipt for samples forms properly completed Comments Were any samples shipped to a laboratory Comments If yes to No 27 were samples properly packed Comments If shipped to a CLP lab were Traffic Report Forms properly completed Comments What safety monitoring equipment protection and procedures were used prior to and during sampling Comments 3 Was safety monitoring equipment properly calibrated and calibrations recorded in a bound field log book Comments EISOPQAM 2 35 November 2001 SECTION 2 SAMPLING GROUND WATER Type of wells sampled monitoring potable industrial etc Comments Were wells locked and protected Comments Were identification marks and measurement points affixed to the wells Comments What were the sizes and construction materials of the well casings Comments Were the boreholes sealed with a concrete pad to prevent surface infiltration Comments Was there a dedicated pump in the well Comments
16. FIGURE 4 2 DECONTAMINATION ZONE FOR LEVEL C Q HSVH L JONVHO 3odilruvo E SANSA VO H3100 ANY S3 019 S1008 3AO0W3H l13aHS SILSV1d ANOZ LYOddNS O H3lvM 1N3ATOS 3SNIH NO23Q HSV amp L O S3A019 YALNO AREAN S LHSVM 4NLHSYM 133HS OlLSV d WOGdlddo9 NOLLOnQ338 NOLLVNIAVLNOO Oo 31 Sddnaaoosdd NOOAG 3NOZ NOISN19X4 JGSOP CDR 031296 November 2001 4 20 EISOPQAM Site Safety Plans Site safety plans will be developed for every hazardous waste site project conducted The plan will use the form included in this section MSDSs will be attached for contaminants anticipated at the site The plan will be submitted to the Branch safety officer and the OHSD for approval Prior to commencing site activities investigators will be briefed on the contents of the safety plan The plan s emergency instructions and directions to the closest hospital will be posted in a conspicuous location at the site command post and in each field vehicle When there is more than one organization involved at the site the development of the safety plan should be coordinated among the various groups EISOPQAM 4 21 November 2001 EXHIBIT 4 1 SITE SAFETY PLAN SAFETY PLAN Site Name Contact Address Phone Number Purpose of Visit Proposed Date of Work Directions to Site SITE INVESTIGATION TEAM PERSONNEL SAFETY CATEGORY RESPONSIBILITIES All employees have been trained medically monitored in accordance w
17. How many aliquots were taken for the composite sample Comments What type of equipment was used to collect the samples Comments What procedures were used to collect the samples Comments Were solid semi solid waste samples thoroughly mixed prior to putting them into the sample containers Comments Were samples properly placed into sample containers Comments For what analyses were the samples collected Comments Was equipment field cleaned Comments Was clean equipment properly wrapped and stored in a clean area Comments 14 Were the cleaning and decontamination procedures conducted in accordance with the Appendix B of the EISOPQAM Comments Were the study s objectives accomplished Comments If samples were split what were the sample station numbers for these Comments Were any special safety measures taken during collection of the samples Comments EISOPQAM 2 42 November 2001 18 What level of safety protection was required for collection of the samples Comments 19 Other comments or observations EISOPQAM 2 43 November 2001 SECTION 6 MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION GENERAL Were the wells installed in the proper locations in accordance with the study plan and or project operations plan POP Comments Were the wells installed starting in the least contaminated area and proceeding to the most contaminated area Comments Were proper safety protocols employed during the well
18. Introduction The name and location of the project study dates requestor reason for request e g NPDES compliance problems project leader and a list of EPA and other appropriate study contacts and telephone numbers Study Objectives A detailed description of the primary objectives of the project Sampling Schedule A detailed table showing all projected sampling stations sampling parameters and the total number of samples to be analyzed The study plan may include more detailed information depending on the nature and complexity of the project Copies of the study plan should be provided to Clean Water Act Section staff EISOPQAM 2 9 November 2001 2 5 4 NPDES Compliance Inspection Reports The results of all compliance inspections shall be reported utilizing the NPDES Compliance Inspection Report Form EPA Form 3560 3 The completed form formal narrative report and transmittal memorandum constitute a compliance inspection report for all routine compliance inspections conducted by Branch personnel The completed inspection reports are forwarded to appropriate parties for action and follow up The state and regional program office are kept fully informed via copies of all correspondence In cases where EPA is involved in litigation with a permittee no reports will be sent to the permittee without permission from legal counsel Completion of NPDES Compliance Inspection Report Form EPA Form 3560 3 General instruct
19. Occasionally the ground water source may not be in the ideal location to meet a particular objective e g to track a contaminant plume In that case either a temporary or permanent monitoring well should be installed An experienced and knowledgeable person will need to locate the well and supervise its installation so that samples will be representative of the ground water Additional guidance is given in RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Guidance 1 and Chapter 11 of SW 846 2 The ground water sampling procedures described in this SOP will meet or exceed the requirements of these documents Ground water sampling procedures can be sub divided into two areas purging and sampling each of which has different goals and objectives Within the topic of purging it is necessary because of the inherently different characteristics of the two types of wells to address permanent and temporary wells separately The procedures and techniques which follow in this section reflect these differences 7 2 Purging 7 2 1 Purging and Purge Adequacy Purging is the process of removing stagnant water from a monitoring well immediately prior to sampling causing its replacement by ground water from the adjacent formation which is representative of actual aquifer conditions In order to determine when a well has been adequately purged field investigators should 1 monitor the pH specific conductance temperature and turbidity of the ground water remo
20. SECTION 1 GENERAL PROCEDURES SAFETY RECORDS QA QC CUSTODY ETC 1 Type samples collected Comments 2 Were sampling locations properly selected Comments 3 Were sampling locations adequately documented in a bound field log book using indelible ink Comments 4 Were photos taken and a photolog maintained Comments 5 What field instruments were used during this study Comments Were field instruments properly calibrated and calibrations recorded in a bound field log book Comments Was sampling equipment properly wrapped and protected from possible contamination prior to sample collection Comments Was sampling equipment constructed of Teflon glass or stainless steel Comments Were samples collected in proper order least suspected contamination to most contaminated Comments 1 11 Were gloves changed for each sample station Comments Was any equipment field cleaned Comments 1 1 Type of equipment cleaned Comments 0 2 Were clean disposable latex or vinyl gloves worn during sampling Comments 14 Were proper field cleaning procedures used Comments 1 Were equipment rinse blanks collected after field cleaning Comments 16 Were proper sample containers used for samples Comments 3 5 EISOPQAM 2 34 November 2001 17 Were split samples offered to the facility owner or his representative Comments 18 Was a Receipt for Samples form given to facility representative
21. Station ID text 30 EISOPQAM Muniwsupply point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Indwell point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Waste point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 15 11 Surfwater point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Sediment point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Groundwater point Sample ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 November 2001 Precipitation point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Other unknown point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Other biota point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Munipwater point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Indprocwater point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Wipesample point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 FIshsample point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Vegetation point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Macroinvertibrates point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Wastewater point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Sludgenonrcra point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Uicinjectionwells point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Petrotanks point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Ambair point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Ind
22. The dye may be missed altogether by overestimating the time required for it to travel downstream Much time may be wasted on the other hand waiting for it to arrive if the time of travel is underestimated All information that will contribute to the best possible preliminary estimate of the time required should be used There are two primary methods by which the stream water can be sampled and analyzed for dye A submersible pump can be used to pump the dye continuously through a fluorometer or the stream samples can be grabbed either by hand or by automatic sampler at specified frequencies and then placed into the fluorometer individually Readings directly from the fluorometer scale or conversion to dye concentration can be manually plotted against time EISOPQAM 15 24 November 2001 A version of the grab sampling technique would be to use an automatic water sampler which discharges into separate bottles The samples collected at preset intervals are analyzed and the concentrations are plotted against time Ideally dye samples should continue to be analyzed until the stream background concentration following the peak is measured With a time versus concentration plot from background level to peak to background level the centroid and thus actual travel time can be determined Where it is infeasible to continue monitoring to the stream background concentration the trailing edge of the dye cloud shouldat least be monitored until the in str
23. Waste samples that require particle size reduction are often too large for standard sample containers If this is the case the sample should be secured in a clean plastic bag and processed using normal chain of custody procedures Section 3 Note that the tags that will be required for the various containers should be prepared in the field and either inserted into or attached to the sample bag The bag should then be sealed with a custody seal EISOPQAM 13 11 November 2001 Because of the difficulty in conducting particle size reduction it is typically completed at the Field Equipment Center FEC The following procedure may be used for crushing and or grinding a solid sample l Remove the entire sample including any fines that are contained in the plastic bag and place them on the standard cleaned stainless steel pan Using a clean hammer carefully crush or grind the solid material safety glasses are required attempting to minimize the loss of any material from the pan Some materials may require vigorous striking by the hammer followed by crushing or grinding The material may be subject to crushing grinding rather than striking Continue crushing grinding the solid material until the sample size approximates 0 375 inch Attempt to minimize the creation of fines that are significantly smaller than 0 375 inch in diameter Pass the material through a clean 0 375 inch sieve into a glass pan Continue this process until sufficient
24. sampling equipment and sample containers near drum s to be sampled AIR MONITORING FOR TOXIC VAPORS AND EXPLOSIVE GASES AND OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERES SHOULD BE CONDUCTED DURING DRUM SAMPLING Liquids Slowly lower the COLIW ASA or drum thief to the bottom of the container Close the COLIWASA with the inner rod or create a vacuum with the sampler s gloved thumb on the end of the thief and slowly remove the sampling device from the drum Release the sample from the device into the sample container Repeat the procedure until a sufficient sample volume is obtained Solids Semi Solids Use a push tube bucket auger or screw auger or if conditions permit a pneumatic hammer drill to obtain the sample Carefully use a clean stainless steel spoon to place the sample into container s for analyses 8 Close the drums when sampling is complete Segregate contaminated sampling equipment and investigative derived wastes IDW containing incompatible materials as determined by the drum screening procedure Step 5 Ata minimum contaminated equipment should be cleaned with laboratory detergent and rinsed with tap water prior to returning it from the field IDW should be managed according to Section 5 15 and Region 4 s Contaminated Media Policy EISOPQAM 13 7 November 2001 FIGURE 13 1 DRUM DATA FORM Date Page SAMPLE COLLECTED Y N PROJECT NO SITE NAME CITY STATE EPA DRUM ID OTHER DRUM ID DRUM OBSERVATIONS 1 OVERPACK Y N M
25. Because of the potential for cross communication between vertical intervals this technique is appropriate only for screening the upper portion of the saturated zone Samples are pumped or bailed directly from the well casing Because turbidity is likely to be a problem using this technique care should be taken when using the samples for metals screening Depth of the investigation is limited only by the capability of the drill rig and cross contamination considerations See section 6 10 for temporary well installation procedures EISOPQAM 5 15 November 2001 e Geoprobe Slotted steel pipe is hydraulically pushed or hammer driven to the desired sampling depth Samples are usually acquired with a peristaltic pump The device is subject to cross communication at threaded rod joints It requires some knowledge of the saturated interval The Geoprobe is most useful at depths less than 30 to 40 feet below ground surface e Hydropunch A larger more versatile device similar to the Geoprobe which is pushed to sampling depths with a drill rig It requires some knowledge of saturated intervals to use successfully Depths of investigation with this technology are roughly correlated to the capability of the drill rig used to push the sampling device e Hydrocone This is a pressure sealed sampling device that is hydraulically pushed to the desired sampling depth It is capable of collecting a discrete sample from any depth at which it can b
26. Choose 1 Manual or 2 Auto Auto Instrument analyzes the gas sample until values stabilize and then stores the final value Manual User monitors gas sample measurements in counts and presses ENTER to store the value 10 Press EXIT EISOPQAM 17 8 November 2001 11 Press 2 Save Mode 12 Choose 1 Manual or 2 Auto User choice but Manual is recommended 13 EXIT 14 Press DOWN arrow 15 Press 1 RF calc mode Press 1 Factor 16 Press EXIT SPAN CONCENTRATION 1 Press 2 SpanConc DOWN arrow will change units of measure select ppm with 1 decimal point 2 Press 2 PID and enter concentration of toluene e g 97 3ppm 3 ENTER Accept 4 Press 2 SpanConc DOWN arrow will change units of measure select ppm with 1 decimal point 5 Press 3 FID and enter concentration of methane e g 76 5ppm 6 ENTER Accept RESPONSE FACTOR 1 Press 5 RF Select RF0 DEFAULT Response Factor will be 1 2 ENTER Accept CALIBRATION PROCEDURE If the instrument has been warmed up for approximately 30 minutes continue with calibration Fill appropriate teflon bags with calibration gases Toluene PID Methane FID Zero Air Both 1 2 From Calib Menu Press 3 Zero Press 1 Both Connect Zero Air bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically EISOPQAM 17 9 November 2001 10 11 12 Press 4 Span Press 2 PID Connect Tol
27. Imp OL Travel axorkekcis eS sah oes oud REX ERE A REA TRE 15 23 1542 3 Dilution epa IR ER ak DE RGR RO ERA REG CR ER pa Lb eee 15 25 15 4 3 Current Measurement iaecaseceseerktreRsezaqe ee sreewaderAc4aada rede 15 27 15344 Bgulpieno cosi edere SURE UO ERE den ERR Ue RII DRE EE EAE E 15 27 15 4 5 General Quality Assurance Procedures 0 00 00 eee eee eee 15 28 15 4 6 Data Records Management 21202 csc eeccieracadaverieeseibhiabadheneas 15 28 15 5 Ground Water Level Measurements 0000000000 eee 15 28 15 5 1 enpral aoa epequa eL bredi ht breue RET E Pera REA a bir d wd 15 28 15 5 2 Specific Ground Water Level Measuring Techniques Less 15 29 15 5 3 Total Well Depth Measurement Techniques 0 000 000 eee eee 15 29 15 5 4 Equipment Available 22 s2cecceri nas RR am RR RR RE RE RS 15 29 15 5 5 Specific Quality Control Procedures 222 34 420easeesoeeene Rer 15 30 15 6 Surface Geophysical Studies illie eee 15 31 150 1 G neral CEDUIB su ead exa odes er Saks Rag aec POP beds d pee 15 30 15 6 2 Specific Surface Geophysical Methods 0 cee eee eee 15 31 15 6 3 Instrument Operations 12 240 eR a Rr REG HERRERA LE RR E ERR 15 33 EISOPQAM ToC ix November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 15 6 4 Specific Instrument Quality Control Procedures 0 0 0 0 00000 15 34 15 7 References Map r 15 35 SECTION 16 Field M
28. In addition as water re enters a well that is in an evacuated condition it may cascade down the sand pack or the well screen stripping volatile organic constituents that may be present and or introducing soil fines into the water column It is particularly important that wells be sampled as soon as possible after purging If adequate volume is available the well must be sampled immediately If not sampling should occur as soon as adequate volume has recovered Equipment Available Monitoring well purging is accomplished by using in place plumbing and dedicated pumps or by using portable pumps equipment when dedicated systems are not present The equipment may consist of a variety of pumps including peristaltic large and small diameter turbine electric submersible bladder centrifugal gear driven positive displacement or other appropriate pumps The use of any of these pumps is usually a function of the depth of the well being sampled and the amount of water that is to be removed during purging Whenever the head difference between the sampling location and the water level is less than the limit of suction and the volume to be removed is reasonably small a peristaltic pump should be used for purging Appendix E of this SOP contains the operating instructions for all pumps commonly used during Branch ground water investigations EISOPQAM 7 3 November 2001 Bailers may also be used for purging in appropriate situations however their us
29. Standard Calibration Photometer e Calibration systems will be verified against the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST Standard Reference Photometer 10 before use e Monitor enclosures will meet the specifications of monitor reference equivalent designation for temperature control Probes must meet the requirements stated in 40 CFR Part 58 for materials and sample residence time All flow calibrations will be traceable to a primary standard Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 760 mm Hg e Chain of custody must be maintained at all times EISOPQAM 14 1 November 2001 Monitoring Procedure Monitoring will be conducted using the procedure as described and in accordance with 40 CFR Part 50 APPENDIX A Procedures detailed in the approved instrument manual will be used for installation calibration QA checks maintenance and repairs Monitors will be calibrated at the beginning and end of each study and at least quarterly during the study Calibration procedures detailed in the approved instrument manual will be used for all calibrations Monitors will be calibrated after major maintenance or when a quality assurance QA check shows an out of control condition exists A zero span check will be conducted daily on all monitors Precision checks of all monitors will be conducted at least weekly Quality assurance audits as specified in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A wi
30. TT 17 19 Sampling and Analysis of Mercury in Ambient Air Using Arizona Instrument Mercury Dosimeter Tubes and the Model 511 Gold Film Mercury Vapor Analyzer SECTION 18 Flow Measurement 5 02252 652c00 20058 sce dae edad Dae e GORGE RON ARCH RR On 18 1 18 1 Introduction cos cere 4h cti kae eaa HES Bh ei e eee REPE S EE YE ARE ES 18 1 18 2 Wastewater Flow Measurement 0 cece e 18 1 18 2 1 Introduction sve cs y Rees ep beled ead RR ULP LIRE VES A eR eS 18 1 18 2 2 MILE SClECHON RR ET Dm 18 1 18 2 3 Flow Measurement Systems leeeeeeeeeeeee e eee 18 2 18 2 4 Use of Existing Flow Measurement Systems eeeeeeee eee 18 2 18 2 5 Specific Techniques esa ca sea eb RE GUERRE IACUELEE thaw eas eta wed 18 3 18 2 6 Open Channel Flow Measurements 0 0 cece eee eee nee 18 4 18 2 7 Closed Conduit Flow Measurements 0 0 e cece n 18 5 18 3 Surface Water Flow Measurements esses 18 6 18 3 1 IntrOQUCtlOTE iiec ds ee opo ego oe es oboe Gon Rare o o e RAW Ro Rer oO 18 6 18 4 Quality Assurance Procedures 00 0 ccc eee ees 18 7 18 5 Equipment sls eth eb RR bee eG huge ned a diee See Pa ER abs 18 7 18 6 References ode AE O Ur o adem aedi eds ds 18 8 SECTION 19 SOIL GAS SAMPLING esee 19 1 19 1 l trod uclH 1 2 Ex EAR I Redhat eas RU ERN ad REN CR dH a 19 1 EISOPQAM ToC x November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 19 1 1 GORE SORBER
31. and sealed in solvent washed cans by the extraction laboratory prior to use e Chain of custody shall be maintained for all samples PUF Cleaning The Air Monitoring Staff has responsibility for buying the PUF media and cutting the PUF plugs PUF media should be specified as not containing any fire retardants It should be stored in the dark to prevent photo oxidation It should be less than two years old and should be stored in a pesticide free environment EISOPQAM 14 10 November 2001 Care should be exercised in cutting the PUF It should be thoroughly wet with tap water prior to cutting A drill press and stainless steel PUF cutting die should be used The drill press area should be free of oil and a polyethylene cutting block should be used to stop the die at the bottom of the drill press stroke do not use wood Water should be sprayed on the die to help prevent snagging as the PUF is cut After the plugs are cut they should be rinsed with tap water and followed by a rinse with analyte free water Finally the excess water should be squeezed out The PUF XAD cartridges are assembled using a modified glass sleeve containing an extra extra coarse frit to retain the XAD resin in the following manner A 3 4 inch layer of XAD resin is poured on top of the frit followed by a 12 inch PUF plug to retain the XAD resin The assembled PUF XAD cartridges are delivered to the extraction laboratory for cleaning and checking The extraction laborator
32. apply any necessary correction factor and proceed with measuring the temperature of the standard solutions within 0 5 C If the temperatures do not agree within 4 C the unit must be repaired or replaced Substitute the NIST traceable thermometer for temperature readings and apply necessary corrections Check and record the temperatures of the standards and the samples The pH of the sample to be tested should be estimated either from historical data or by using a four color pH indicator paper or equivalent Using this information calibrate the pH meter with the two buffers that bracket the expected pH range Select either pH 4 and 7 or pH 7 and 10 buffer solutions Rinse the probe with de ionized water blot dry and immerse it into the first buffer pH 7 and calibrate the meter to read the correct pH Rinse the probe with de ionized water blot dry and immerse it into the second buffer and calibrate the meter to read the correct pH Record the buffer values temperatures used to calibrate the meter Rinse the probe with de ionized water blot dry and immerse it into the original buffer pH 7 and read as a sample If the meter reads within 0 1 pH unit of the known value of the buffer record the value returned by the meter Rinse the probe with de ionized water blot dry and immerse it into the second buffer used pH 4 or 10 and read as a sample If the meter reads within 0 1 pH unit of the known value of the buffer record the val
33. e A zero span check will be conducted daily on all monitors e Precision checks of all monitors will be conducted at least weekly Quality assurance audits as specified in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A will be conducted quarterly or at least once for short duration studies e Datatelemetry systems not equipped with electronic strip chart capability will be run in parallel with strip chart recorders Strip charts electronic or paper will serve as a permanent record and diagnostic tool After completion ofthe study all monitoring equipment will be returned for inspection maintenance and repair prior to storage All field documentation will be retained by the Air Monitoring Staff 14 2 5 Sampling of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air as PM The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the sampling of particulate matter as PM in air This summary is adapted from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix L Reference Method For the Determination of Fine Particulate Matter as PM in the Atmosphere EPA Implementation Plan PM Federal Reference Method Performance Evaluation Program EPA Quality Assurance Guidance Document 2 12 EPA Quality Assurance Document Quality Assurance Project Plan for the Performance Evaluation Program EPA Quality Assurance Guidance Document Method Compendium Field Standard Operating Procedures for the PM Performance Evaluation Program and EPA Quality Assurance Document Method Compen
34. pesticide grade methylene chloride may be substituted for pesticide grade isopropanol In addition 1 1 nitric acid may be substituted for the 10 nitric acid solution When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared they should be cleaned in standard sized lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5 14 1 Wash bottles and jars Teflon liners and caps in hot tap water and soap 2 Rinse three times with tap water 3 Rinse with 10 nitric acid solution 4 Rinse three times with analyte free water 5 Rinse bottles jars and liners not caps with solvent 6 Oven dry bottles jars and liners at 125 C Allow to cool 7 Place liners in caps and close containers 8 Store in contaminant free area C 6 4 Glass Bottles for Volatile GC MS and TOX Analyses These procedures are to be used only if the supply of pre cleaned certified sample bottles is disrupted The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper implementation of these procedures When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared they should be cleaned in standard sized lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5 14 1 Wash vials bottles and jars Teflon liners and septa and caps in hot tap water and laboratory detergent 2 Rinse all items with analyte free water 3 Oven dry at 125 C and allow to cool 4 Seal vials bottles and jars with liners or septa as a
35. sea wall caps clarifier cat walks etc When recording water level dynamics in relation to a particular flow device the datum is established in relation to the flow device reference point The flow through rectangular and V notch weirs for instance are proportional to the water level referenced to the weir crest or in the case of partially filled pipes the flow rate is proportional to the depth of flow Therefore when employing a water level recorder or tape down on primary flow devices the reference or datum is the weir crest or in the case of pipes the invert see Section 18 Wastewater Flow Measurement 15 4 2 2 Time of Travel Three principal methods are used to determine time of water travel time in streams i e surface floats measurements of cross sectional velocity and tracers such as dye A very rough method for preliminary estimates of time of water travel consists of dropping sticks or other buoyant objects in the stream reach under observation and noting the time required for them to float an estimated 10 feet or some other convenient distance The velocity estimates are too inaccurate for use in interpretation of data or final reporting but can be useful in preliminary planning of studies and in subsequent more precise measurements of time of water travel Stream velocities at gaging stations measured by the U S Geological Survey in developing rating curves may be applied to the entire reach under observation to estim
36. the first three feet of a power bored hole will be dug using a post hole digger hand auger Personnel involved in the drilling will wear eye and head protection in addition to normal safety gear appropriate for the required level of protection The SSO will insure that all personnel remove watches rings and other jewelry as well as securing loose fitting or dangling articles of clothing while in the vicinity of the drilling operations Additionally the SSO will insure that a 90 degree clear zone is maintained for a radius of at least 6 feet behind the drill rig The following items will be visually checked daily by the designated driller 1 All control mechanisms for adjustment wear and lubrication 2 Guy wire tension 3 Air and hydraulic systems for deterioration or leakage 4 Rope reeving 5 Hoist brakes clutches and operating levers 6 Kill switches EISOPQAM 4 26 November 2001 4 3 7 Boating Operations The skipper must be familiar with the capabilities of their vessel care and maintenance of engines batteries emergency procedures and rules of navigation as prepared by the United States Coast Guard The skipper is responsible for everything that happens on the vessel When participating in field work make sure that your field party knows where you will be working a float plan and the expected hour of your return When deploying equipment on station make sure that it is secured and not a danger to fellow worker
37. the meter is counting After a few seconds press the RES button and note that the meter returns to zero Calibration 1 Read and record the background radiation level 2 Place the GMT probe flat against the casing of a certified Sr90 standard 3 Adjust the multifunction switch until the meter reading remains on scale EISOPQAM 17 17 November 2001 T Read and record the meter s response Calculate the detector s efficiency as follows E Meter Reading Background Activity Check to insure that the calculated efficiency is within 0 1 of the efficiency rating placarded on the meter Set the multifunction switch to X0 1 before entering the site 17 8 MiniRAE Introduction The MiniRAE RAE is a programmable photoionization detector PID that measures organic vapors in hazardous environments It incorporates a sampling pump and data download capabilities for continuous toxic monitoring site survey and leak detection The RAE can measure double bonded organic vapors with its supplied 10 6 eV gas discharge lamp The RAE is calibrated with toluene The RAE is intrinsically safe Only key steps are listed below Almost all set up functions on the RAE have been pre set The keys you will need to press will generally deal with calibration The battery on the RAE drains slowly even when turned off If the unit has not been charged for 4 5 days the battery voltage will be low If the unit is left to charge overnight i
38. this does not constitute a flash 9 Liftthelid Clean out any material which was being tested with Chem wipes Also clean the injection port with a pipe cleaner Shut Down Procedures 1 Close the control valve on the butane cylinder 2 Disconnect the hose 3 Open the control valve on the butane cylinder approximately 5 turns 4 Turn the instrument off 5 IMPORTANT Clean the instrument See step 9 above Allow ample time for the instrument to cool down before storing 16 10 Halogen Test This method is used to qualitatively screen wastes for the presence of halogenated compounds Test using copper wire and flame Equipment e Propane fuel cylinder with a torch Igniter source matches flint bar striker etc Stainless steel rod approximately 1 foot long and to 1 2 inch in diameter Note The smaller diameter rods cool down more quickly Thermally resistant handle or thermally resistant gloves e 16or 18 gauge copper wire e Wire cutters Procedure 1 Wrap approximately 4 feet of copper wire around the tip of the rod 2 Clean the wire and rod tip using the flame of the propane torch Note When a blue flame with small yellow orange streaks appears the wire and rod are clean Allow the copper wire to become red hot during the cleaning process this takes from 1 to 1 minute EISOPQAM 16 14 November 2001 3 Allow the rod and wire to cool for a minimum of 15 minutes Note The wire and rod can be immersed in water
39. 0 0 0 e eee eee B 4 B 2 3 Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic Inorganic Compounds 0 0 eee eens B 4 B 2 4 Well Sounders or Tapes 4 es ees bee aeess RR ER e rx uy d B 4 B 2 5 Goulds Pump Cleaning Procedure 0 cece cece ee ee ee ee ee eens B 5 B 2 6 Redi blo2 Pump qus rsdn y Pere danS RU Us S30besdo xo PS Qasl tues B 5 B 2 7 Automate Sampler Tubing 2 3c2 lt g deue4 lt ds Rrxuer e Er AR REPETI T ERES B 5 B 3 Downhole Drilling Equipment 0 0 00 B 6 B 3 1 ING POGUCNON she cxaena dese ee Khas EG eee Se SRE eee eS DER E RTT E eee B 6 B 3 2 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection 0 0 eee eee ee eee B 6 B 3 3 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure oa ess atr RRREEER ERR LE ERRRES B 6 B 3 4 Field Cleaning Procedure for Drilling Equipment 0 0 B 7 B 4 Emergency Disposal Sample Container Cleaning B 7 APPENDIX C Field Equipment Center Standard Cleaning Procedures C 1 C 1 Introduction eese sae de pet enh RGR A RE Eds E ee E Dok wake Boh C 1 C 1 1 Specifications for Cleaning Materials 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee nee C 1 C 1 2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions 0 0 0 0 ce ee eee ee C 2 C 1 3 Disposal of Spent Cleaning Solutions 0 0 cece eee eee ae C 2 C 1 4 Safety Procedures for Cleaning Operations 0 0 c eee eee eee eee C 3 C 1 5 Handling and Labeling of Clea
40. 11 2 2 Dredges For routine analyses the Peterson dredge can be used when the bottom is rocky in very deep water or when the stream velocity is high The dredge should be lowered very slowly as it approaches bottom since it can displace and miss fine particle size sediment if allowed to drop freely The Eckman dredge has only limited usefulness It performs well where the bottom material is unusually soft as when covered with organic sludge or light mud It is unsuitable however for sandy rocky and hard bottoms and is too light for use in streams with high velocities It should not be used from a bridge that is more than a few feet above the water because the spring mechanism which activates the sampler can be damaged by the messenger if dropped from too great a height The Ponar dredge is a modification of the Peterson dredge and is similar in size and weight It has been modified by the addition of side plates and a screen on the top of the sample compartment The screen over the sample compartment permits water to pass through the sampler as it descends thus reducing turbulence around the dredge The Ponar dredge is easily operated by one person in the same fashion as the Peterson dredge The Ponar dredge is one of the most effective samplers for general use on all types of substrates The mini Ponar dredge is a smaller much lighter version of the Ponar dredge It is used to collect smaller sample volumes when working in industrial tank
41. 3 5 16 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS Multiple Source Area Grided Programs 0 ce cece eee eee ee 5 15 Typical Ground Water Screening Devices lseeleleeeeeee 5 15 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling Designs 5 16 Sampling Site Selection 2 2 2 osos EI pe Rag 5 16 Rivers Streams and Creeks eee nh 5 17 Lakes Ponds and Impoundments 2 VeL e EI Ee ew eda while Eee aw 5 19 Estuarine Wales 45 exu SLE uUa Lh LA o er LA put E 5 20 Control Stations 74 sve hte gs fete pede eMe aal eee ete fete 5 21 Waste Sampling Designs nnana 0 ccc ce eee ens 5 21 troduction ioo wat Sone bo he eat RYE dried v ad ds 5 2 Waste Investigation Objectives 445 viec V ees audes 5 22 Considerations for Waste Sampling Designs 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 22 Waste Sampling Equipment 22550249225 PSVELeISEY dus uU EE Eu sce 5 23 Biel SCEeenIBe cus Sa dog aon dope e i CR OE exo ioe and ecg aed E edle Lee gl Aes 5 23 Figure 5 1 RCRA Waste Characterization Flow Chart 5 25 Wastewater Sampling Designs 0 000s 5 26 UST and UIC Sampling Designs 0 0 0 ccc eee 5 27 Air Toxics Monitoring Designs 00 00 c eee eee 5 27 Data Quality Objectives lullllsseseeee e 5 28 Specific Sample Collection Quality Control Procedures 5 31 Introduction 263 504 deeveee REF Rete A Rx RETIA daw Reed ge ia LE 5 31 Expe
42. 3 2 Sampling Techniques Wells with In Place Plumbing 7 7 7 3 3 Sampling Techniques Wells without Plumbing eese 7 8 71 3 4 Sample Preservation si22cice s cR ERRARE RA REEF ERRARE E ERE TERRE Ep 7 9 7 3 5 Special Sample Collection Procedures dezvsel oe rr x re Re 7 9 7 3 6 Specific Sampling Equipment Quality Assurance Techniques 7 11 7 3 1 Auxiliary Data Collection Laune dudes hRI EO REED d hb um PR 7 11 7 4 Referentes 442A AR EERE ARA ER CREER E KR SA e CR Rn os d 7 12 SECTION 8 Sampling of Potable Water Supplies 8 1 Introduction 5 ata chk prawn arecarebaewbarad REX Gra b ER cae RE Rd 8 1 8 2 Sampling Site Selection 0 0 0 0 0 00 ccc eee tenes 8 1 8 3 iis V 8 3 SECTION 9 Wastewater Sampling lselesee ee 9 1 9 1 Introduction uu horade sees bier accel deeedeciaerebesciowseheciaerand 9 1 9 2 Site S lection 4295 42 guy bs wears Rae Ses RN ERE OU ee Ba oe oS 9 1 9 2 1 ng ine 65a ee be eS Errate a r E r Ne a E E EER ENN 9 2 9 2 2 lg Dr HPor aes 9 2 9 2 3 Pond and Lagoon Sampling xu2194x2 d RIO RARE PSU RE RAE DURER PY aS 9 2 9 3 Sample Types c cua exeX ER ERE RE AREE dad nix Rad ec E da pis ge 9 2 9 3 1 Grab Samples cs rerrrnerr d Seeur EER dee Poe AE ested Se Er 9 2 9 3 2 Composite Samples qu foe kee dueee eee ibe ence qoa MORE RC exa rq dace RN 9 2 9 4 Use of Automatic Samplers
43. 4 Sampling equipment contaminated during waste sampling investigations should be cleaned with laboratory detergent and rinsed with tap water prior to returning the equipment from the field Contaminated sampling equipment that is to be discarded must be properly disposed according to Section 5 15 and should be specified in the site specific study plan 13 1 2 Quality Control Procedures In some instances special decontamination procedures will be necessary and should be developed on a case by case basis according to the specific material encountered Any cleaning procedures and equipment repairs conducted in the field which deviate from those specified in Appendix B or the study plan should be thoroughly documented in the logbooks All air monitoring and field analytical screening equipment should be checked and calibrated before being issued for field studies as specified in Sections 16 and 17 of this SOP 13 1 3 Collection of Auxiliary Information and Data The collection of auxiliary information and data is particularly important when collecting waste samples Any field analyses or field screening results should be recorded in a logbook as outlined in Section 3 5 Sketches of waste units sampling locations containers tanks and ancillary equipment markings labels etc should be fully documented in logbooks Photographs are extremely useful for recording this information and may be used during waste sampling operations A field log of t
44. 4 7 Concrete Surface Pad 13scebecltbersqetiereaabeet3ex ee Choe eases Pera 6 7 6 4 8 Surface Protection Bumper Guards 0 000 e eee eee ee eens 6 7 6 5 Construction Techniques 0 0 0 0 eee 6 7 6 5 1 Well InetallatiDB oua og esee n RP I E Sex Ter Repub e Sedes pu e pa 6 7 6 5 2 Double Cased Wells 112522 rREexe RR E Es RECFA Des ERR EG d UESTRE RES 6 9 6 6 Well Construction Materials slesesleee eee 6 10 6 6 1 InttOdUbHon is eee ek naika E KP ENSE MERERI EIER E RE 6 10 6 6 2 Well Screen and Casing Materials llle 6 10 6 6 3 Filter Pack Materials og debere DX E ed CFI ER Owe end AE eC P a 6 11 6 6 4 Filter Pack and Well Screen Design 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 11 6 7 Safety Procedures for Drilling Activities 0 0 00 0000 6 12 6 8 Well Development 4 o o5 casas eseaeseed saves sees ede RC RR 6 14 6 9 Well Abandonment 2 2 202 abe gh RE ER RAREERNA bee ui eye nes 6 15 6 9 1 Abandonment Procedures up es ep ue bad oS RS SLED KO ex ken RR 6 15 6 10 Temporary Monitoring Well Installation 0 6 16 6 10 1 Inir Gellio 2a ere rd E PARERE CPI ETC HM ed td E RS E P MS 6 16 5 10 2 Data DIMINUER SA PRA AREA TEES ERES 6 17 6 10 3 Temporary Well Materials 52 0c200e dedweav RR Rr mr yw 6 17 6 10 4 Temporary Monitoring Well Borehole Construction 04 6 17 6 10 5 Temporary Monitoring Well Types ssseeeee RI 6 17 6 100
45. 4 November 2001 4 Atthe desired target sampling depth remove the drive cap to access inside of probe rod 5 Couple extension rods and extension rod handle together and insert into probe rod Using handle turn the extension rods inside probe rod This should engage the piston stop pin and remove it from the drive head attached to the top of the sample tube Retrieve extension rods and attached piston stop pin 6 Add addition probe rod if required reattach drive cap to top of probe rod and push probe rod and Large Bore sampler 24 inches to fill sampler 7 Attach pull cap and retrieve tool string 8 When retrieved remove the piston rod with piston tip and the drive head 9 Using the Large Bore wrench unscrew the cutting shoe from the down hole end of the sample tube 10 Remove the cutting shoe and attached liner and sample from sample tube 11 Sample has now been collected and is contained in the liner At this time it can be sub sampled per analytical requirements Special Considerations for Large Bore Soil Sampling Liner Use and Material Selection Due to the mode of operation the Large Bore soil sampler must be used with a liner Liners are available in the following materials stainless steel brass cellulose acetate butyrate CAB and Teflon For the majority of environmental investigations conducted by EIB either CAB or Teflon liners are used If samples are collected for organic compound analyses Teflon lin
46. 40 ml VOC vials will be transported to the field For routine studies these samples will be prepared by lab personnel Investigators shall request that these samples be provided at least one week in advance of scheduled field investigations and inspections and never except in emergency situations less than two days in advance of scheduled field investigations and inspections These samples should not be picked up earlier than the morning of departure for the scheduled inspection investigation These field blanks will be handled and treated in the same manner as the water samples collected for volatile organic compounds analysis on that particular study These samples will be clearly identified on sample tags and Chain of Custody Records as trip blanks 2 Soil Sample VOC Trip Blank A soil sample VOC trip blank is required for every study where soil samples are collected for VOC analysis The required containers are specified in section 12 4 The preparation and pick up of this sample will be the same as for the water sample VOC trip blank Encore containers two for SESD laboratory or 3 for CLP will be transported to the field These field blanks will be handled and treated by Branch personnel in the same manner as the soil samples collected for volatile organic compounds analysis on that particular study These samples will be clearly identified on sample tags and Chain Of Custody Records as trip blanks The following blanks are prepared in the fi
47. 92 ft 31 04 ft 5 23 ft 131 73 ft EISOPQAM 15 20 November 2001 Example 3 The elevation at point D in Figure 15 3 3 is 100 00 ft The instrument is set up 5 92 ft above point D which makes the height of the instrument H I 105 92 ft Given a slope distance Ds shot to the prism distance DE of 323 88 ft and a negative vertical angle V FDE of 5 30 the difference in elevation between point F and point E is computed by substituting in the trigonometric formula elevation difference 323 88 ft x sin 5 30 31 04 ft The distance that the prism is held above the point in question must be subtracted from the resulting elevation of the prism to obtain the elevation of the point The elevation of point E is 105 92 ft 31 04 ft 5 23 ft 69 65 ft 02 01 96 Project 96E 0001 Landis Surveyor Region 4 Site Name Ben Chmark e Weather Clean O 5 mph N City Stat Station Foint Jl orFS Elevation 100 00 FE DExsin FDE 323 86 x 0958 51 0 E 105 92 31 04 5 25 Example 3 Figure 15 3 3 Trigonometric level notation showing side view when elevation of point desired is below instrument Example 4 When the measurement of the slope distance is not possible differences in elevation can be determined
48. Backfilling lioe sukaes4 ikke ERE RRSad ax ERE E Ra Sad C ed ad 6 18 6 11 Temporary Monitoring Well Installation Using Geoprobe Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler sesssseeeeee eee 6 19 6 11 1 InttoduellDll uevia evt e dx echan ed acea ep ac eR gat aoe rd cres 6 19 6 11 2 A Assembly of Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler Lus 6 19 6 11 3 Installation of Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler 6 19 6 11 4 Special Considerations for Screen Point 15 Installations 6 20 6 12 Dp iig MMT m 6 21 EISOPQAM ToC v November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS SECTION 7 Ground Water Sampling 0 0 0 0 cece teens 7 1 7 1 Introduction osuere ok donee cost ER RS a vakero ieuan n inerea 7 1 7 2 PUP UD cvs oe y Ra ra GRE Ra E eod CR IRE FORE RIE GRE DS 7 1 7 2 1 Purging and Purge Adequacy 430442004 4eeueve iene caguedesaayen ieee aes 7 1 Table 7 2 1 Well Casing Diameter vs Volume Gals Feet of Water 7 3 7 2 2 Purging Techniques Wells Without Plumbing or In Place Pumps 7 4 7 2 3 Purging Techniques Wells with In Place Plumbing 7 5 7 2 4 Purging Techniques Temporary Monitoring Wells uses 7 6 7 2 5 Investigation Derived Waste iaecebechcecskkeetibPee95ereceka eR 3 pr Re 7 7 7 3 Sampling MT rS 7 7 7 3 1 Equipment Available ununun annan 7 7 7
49. Cleaned Equipment After cleaning equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean latex gloves to prevent re contamination After the cleaned equipment is wrapped in aluminum foil and sealed in plastic the date that the equipment was cleaned should be written on the plastic If the equipment was not cleaned according to the procedures outlined in this appendix this should also be noted on the plastic EISOPQAM C 3 November 2001 C 1 6 Initial Processing of Returned Equipment Field or sampling equipment that needs to be repaired will be identified with a repair tag Any problems encountered with the equipment and specific required repairs shall be noted on this tag as well as the date and the initials of the investigator Field equipment or reusable sample containers needing cleaning or repairs will not be stored with clean equipment sample tubing or sample containers All coolers plastic wrapped equipment containers and tubing not used in the field may be placed back into stock after the following precautions are taken e Soap and hot water rinse plastic containers Allow to air dry If plastic wrapping leaks after soap water rinse remove the equipment and place it into the standard cleaning process C 2 Trace Organic and Inorganic Constituent Sampling Equipment Sampling equipment used to collect samples undergoing trace organic and or inorganic constituent analyses should be thoroughly cleaned The following
50. Each type of grout selected should be evaluated as to its intended use and integrity Bentonite grout shall be a 30 solids pure bentonite grout with a minimum density of 10 Ib gal Drilling muds are not acceptable for grouting The grout should be placed into the borehole by the tremie method from the top of the bentonite seal to within 2 feet of the ground surface or below the frost line whichever is the greater depth The bentonite pellet seal or filter pack should not be disturbed during grout placement either by the use of a side discharge port on the tremie tube or by maintaining clearance between the bottom of the tremie tube and the bentonite seal or filter pack The grout should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours before the concrete surface pad is installed The preferred method of achieving proper solids content is by measurement of ingredients per the manufacturer s specifications during mixing Bentonite grouts should have a minimum density of 10 Ibs gal to ensure proper gelling and low permeability The density of the first batch of grout should be measured while mixing to verify proper measurement of ingredients In addition the grouting operation should not cease until the bentonite grout flowing out of the borehole has a minimum density of 10 Ibs gal A mud balance should be used to measure the specified grout density of the bentonite grout Estimating the grout density is not acceptable Neat cement grouts are generally dic
51. Grab Sample Collection Before a grab sample is collected for VOC analysis in a Summa Silcosteel canister the canister inlet valve should be fitted with a pre cleaned stainless steel particulate filter At the sample collection location the main valve should be opened and the canister allowed to fill After about one minute when no audible sound of rushing gas can be heard the main valve of the Summa canister should be closed and capped EISOPQAM 14 9 November 2001 Time Integrated Sample Collection This sample collection method involves the use of a flow controller or a sampler containing a flow controller to slowly meter the flow of air entering a Summa Silcosteel canister With this method a sample is collected over a longer period of time than with a grab sample If a constant flowrate was maintained the resulting sample will have a VOC content that is the average of the VOC concentrations during the sampling interval The following procedures should be followed to collect time integrated samples e Cleaning and Adjustment All sampler systems should be checked for contamination prior to use or after any major repair This is accomplished by metering zero air or nitrogen to the inlet of the sampler Excess zero air or nitrogen should be vented with a Swagelok tee from the sampler inlet to atmosphere The evacuated canister should then be filled at the normal sampling rate with the zero gas and verified by the laboratory t
52. Groundwater Sampler 6 11 1 Introduction The Geoprobe Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler is a discrete interval ground water sampling device that can be pushed to pre selected sampling depths in saturated unconsolidated materials opened and sampled as a temporary monitoring well It is a sealed sample device opened at the desired depth yielding a representative uncompromised sample from that depth Using knock out plugs this method also allows for grouting of the push hole during sample tool retrieval after sample collection The Screen Point 15 sampler consist of four parts drive point screen sampler sheath and drive head with an assembled length of 52 inches 1321 mm and a maximum OD of 1 5 inches 38 mm When opened it has an exposed screen length of 41 inches 1041 mm It is typically pushed using 1 25 inch probe rod The following is a step by step description of the components and procedures used to install a Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler 6 11 2 Assembly of Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler 1 Install O ring on expendable point and firmly seat in the necked end of the sampler sheath 2 Place a grout plug in the lower end of the screen section 3 When using a stainless steel screen place another O ring in the groove on the upper end of the screen and slide it into the sampler sheath 4 Place an O ring on the bottom of the drive head and thread into the top of the sampler sheath 5 The Screen Point 15 Groun
53. NAMS SLAMS Describe any changes which will be made within the agency s monitoring program the next calendar year What is the most current official SLAMS Network Description Lesewmenpenenpom E II Does it include the following for each site weemceomsem 00 smmeeamawaa DeO i a a mein O EE 58 Modification since last audit date of last audit EE Number of Monitors EISOPQAM H 2 November 2001 2 Network Design and Siting Indicate by Site ID any non conformance with the requirements of 40 CFR 58 Appendices D and E Site ID Reason for Non Conformance Have NAMS hard copy information reports been prepared and submitted for all monitoring sites within the network Does each site have the required information including Who has custody of the current network documents Name Title Does the current level of monitoring effort site placement instrumentation etc meet requirements imposed by current grant conditions How often is the network design and siting reviewed Frequency Date of last review Provide a summary of the monitoring activities conducted as the SLAMS NAMS network by the agency I Monitoring is seasonal for indicate pollutant and month of high and low concentrations Pollutant High Concentrations Low Concentrations EISOPQAM H 3 November 2001 II Monitoring is year round for indicate pollutant Pollutant Collocated
54. Section 3 5 9 9 Sample Preservation All sample collection and preservation procedures should comply with the requirements outlined in 40 CFR Part 136 3 e Table 11 9 EISOPQAM 9 8 November 2001 9 10 References 1 NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual United States Environmental Protection Agency September 1994 Code of Federal Regulations 40 CFR Part 136 3 Table II latest issue US EPA Activated Sludge Process Control Testing ESD Water Compliance Unit Athens GA October 2000 US EPA Process Control Manual Aerobic Biological Treatment Facilities MD 14 EPA 430 09 77 006 Office of Water Washington D C 1977 Metcalf and Eddy Inc Wastewater Engineering Treatment Disposal Reuse McGraw Hill Book Co New York NY 1991 California State University Sacramento Operation of Wastewater Treatment Plants Volumes I IL III Sacramento California Operation Of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Manual Of Practice No 11 Fifth Edition Water Environment Federation 1996 Design Of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plants Manual Of Practice No 8 Fourth Edition Water Environment Federation and ASCE 1998 40 CER Part 136 e Table 11 EISOPQAM 9 9 November 2001 SECTION 10 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To collect a representative sample of the surface water of interest 10 1 Introduction Surface water sampling techniques and equipment are
55. Site history description and results of previous studies EISOPQAM 2 18 November 2001 e Summary Summary of the field investigation and resulting analyses which constituents are present direction of plume movement if determined possible sources of contamination and potable well owners names phone numbers addresses if appropriate e Sketches maps Showing sampling locations location of injection well s other pertinent information e Methodology Reference to field and laboratory SOPs Internal Peer Review and Report Recipients UIC reports will be reviewed internally Final copies of the report will be sent to the requestor in the GW amp UIC Section If private or public potable water supplies are sampled refer to Section 2 2 for reporting requirements 2 10 Ambient Air Monitoring Evaluations And Audits 2 10 1 Introduction In 1979 the US EPA established a plan for obtaining reliable ambient air quality data The plan includes a network of State and Local Air Monitoring Stations SLAMS The regulations governing the network 40 CFR 58 cover the data collection and reporting requirements for state and local air pollution control agencies The purpose of this section is to provide procedures for the inspection and evaluation of the SLAMS network Each SLAMS site must meet criteria for network design instrument exposure sample inlet etc 2 10 2 NAMS SLAMS Site Evaluations State and Local Air Monitoring Station
56. The measurement of the ground water level in a well is frequently conducted in conjunction with ground water sampling to determine the free water surface This potentiometric surface measurement can be used to establish ground water flow direction and gradients Total well depth and ground water level measurements are needed to determine the volume of water in the well casing prior to purging the well for sampling purposes All ground water level and total depth measurements should be made relative to an established reference point on the well casing and should be documented in the field records To be useful for establishing ground water gradient the reference point should be tied in with the NGVD National Geodetic Vertical Datum or a local datum For an isolated group of wells an arbitrary datum common to all wells in that group may be used if necessary EISOPQAM 15 28 November 2001 15 5 2 Specific Ground Water Level Measuring Techniques Measuring the depth to the free ground water surface can be accomplished by the following methods 9 Method accuracies are noted for each of the specific methods described below Electronic Water Level Indicators This instrument consists of a spool of dual conductor wire a probe attached to the end and an indicator When the probe comes in contact with the water the circuit is closed and a meter light and or buzzer attached to the spool will signal the contact Penlight or 9 volt batteries are no
57. When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to remove materials it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with Step 1 If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures it should be discarded C 4 4 Glass Tubing New glass tubing should be cleaned as follows 1 Rinse thoroughly with solvent 2 Air dry for at least 24 hours 3 Wrap tubing completely with aluminum foil and seal in plastic one tube pack to prevent contamination during storage EISOPQAM C 8 November 2001 C 5 Cleaning Procedures for Miscellaneous Equipment C 5 1 Well Sounders and Tapes 1 Wash with soap and tap water 2 Rinse with hot tap water 3 Rinse with analyte free water 4 Allow to air dry overnight C 5 2 Goulds Pump CAUTION Never plug the pump in while cleaning Cleaning 1 Remove garden hose if attached and clean separately 2 Using a brush or scrub pad scrub the exterior of the hose electrical cord and pump with soap and tap water Do not wet the electrical plug 3 Rinse with analyte free water 4 Air dry 5 Place pump and hose in clean plastic bag and label C 5 3 Redi Flo29 Pump CAUTION Make sure that the controller is not plugged in CAUTION Do not wet the controller Controller Box Cleaning 1 Wipe the controller box with a damp cloth Immediatel
58. activities include investigations of potential Superfund hazardous waste sites for National Priority Listing NPL purposes technical assistance studies at municipal wastewater treatment plants studies involving water quality and permitting issues studies and inspections of abandoned hazardous waste sites air quality studies and a broad range of studies for national programs as well as technical assistance studies for state and local agencies However studies and data derived from non enforcement type investigations could be used for enforcement purposes Field investigations include all environmental media i e surface and ground water air soils sediments and wastes EISOPQAM 2 1 November 2001 2 2 Potable Water Supply Investigations Potable water supply investigations are usually conducted as part of a larger investigation such as a spill leaking tanks nearby superfund site etc However an investigation may be conducted independently of a potential contamination source Potable water supply investigations may include collecting samples from wells surface waters distribution systems private residential wells etc Special procedures apply when a sample is collected from a private or public potable water supply Investigators should always obtain the following information from the residents and or owners in the event contaminants are detected in the sample resident s and or owner s name resident s and or owner s mailing
59. against the Winkler method as a QC check if desired Procedures 1 2 3 When making measurements be sure that the ME stirring apparatus is working Adjust the temperature and salinity compensators if equipped Read the dial to the nearest 0 1 mg l and record the measurement To Collect a Sample 1 2 When possible measure the DO in situ with a field probe otherwise Collect the sample by completely filling a 300 ml BOD bottle stopper and measure the DO with a laboratory type probe Note Special care should be exercised to avoid entrainment of atmospheric oxygen or loss of DO The sample should be collected with a DO Dunker APHA type for depths less than five feet below water surface BWS A Kemmerer type sampler is recommended for depths greater than five feet BWS If an APHA type DO Dunker is not available and a shallow depth sample is needed a bucket may be used to collect a sample of water A siphon tube should be coiled into the bucket such that the fill end is nearest the bottom Using a 300 ml BOD bottle allow the siphoning sample to fill and overflow the bottle for a minimum of three volumes If a Kemmerer sampler is used the BOD sample bottle should be filled to overflowing by inserting the outlet tube of the sampler to the bottom of the bottle The tube should be withdrawn slowly as the bottle is allowed to overflow three times its volume Care must be exercised to prevent turbulence or the formati
60. agency s laboratory standards NE CS fee fs bue PSS EE O a a EM BR 3 4 E32 Eme L LL ee eere HESS ES Comment on the traceability of chemicals used in the preparation of calibration standards Question 00000000 0 Ye No Comments Comment Does the laboratory purchase standard solutions such as those for use with lead or other AA analysis Are all calibration procedures documented Where Z Z title revision Are at least one duplicate one blank and one standard or Identify analyses for which this is routine operation spike included with a given analytical batch Briefly describe the laboratory s use of data derived from blank analyses Qusim ves Ne Comment 0000000000000 Do criteria exist which determine acceptable non acceptable blank data EISOPQAM H 10 November 2001 How frequently and at what concentration ranges does the lab perform duplicate analysis What constitutes acceptable agreement How does the lab use data from spiked samples Please indicate what may be considered acceptable percentage recovery by analysis Please complete the table below Pollutant Recovery Acceptance Criteria Question Do criteria exist for real time quality control based on the results obtained for the mid range standards ag Are appropriate acceptance criteria documented for each type of analysis conducted Are they known to the analysts wor
61. air and restabilize to pre well construction conditions Because of the danger of introducing contaminants with the airstream the possibility of entraining air in the aquifer and the violent forces imparted to the formation air surging is the least desired method of development The selected development method s should be approved by a senior field geologist before any well installation activities are initiated 6 9 Well Abandonment When a decision is made to abandon a monitoring well the borehole should be sealed in such a manner that the well can not act as a conduit for migration of contaminants from the ground surface to the water table or between aquifers To properly abandon a well the preferred method is to completely remove the well casing and screen from the borehole clean out the borehole and backfill with a cement or bentonite grout neat cement or concrete In order to comply with state well abandonment requirements the appropriate state agency should be notified if applicable of monitoring well abandonment However some state requirements are not explicit so a technically sound well abandonment method should be designed based on the site geology well casing materials and general condition of the well s 6 9 1 Abandonment Procedures As previously stated the preferred method should be to completely remove the well casing and screen from the borehole This may be accomplished by augering with a hollow stem auger over the wel
62. all of the calculations 15 4 Hydrological Studies 15 4 1 Scope and Applicability Hydrological studies are an important component of virtually all Branch field studies and include activities such as time of travel studies current circulation studies dye dilution surveys flow measurement and stage discharge relationship development Time of travel surveys are frequently required as part of water quality model calibration surveys or as a component of other activities such as reaeration measurements Dye dilution studies are extremely useful for evaluating the mixing of effluents with receiving waters Activities such as water quality enforcement studies NPDES permit compliance monitoring water quality survey monitoring reconnaissance surveys and research rely on accurate flow measurement For example NPDES permit limits often limit the mass loading of a particular pollutant that may be discharged Stage measurement and the determination of stage discharge relationships are also important hydrological data collected by the Branch For example stage discharge studies are extremely useful for determining flow in conjunction with TMDL storm event sampling efforts As much attention and care should be given to hydrological measurements in the design of a sampling program as to the collection of samples and subsequent laboratory analysis 15 4 2 Methods 15 4 2 1 Surface Water Stage Tape Down Water level recorders provide a time series record of w
63. and flushed down the sanitary drain in the washroom Solvent All solvents used should be captured properly labeled and stored on the premises of the FEC until arrangements for proper disposal are made Used solvents can be classified as either solvent for recovery or solvent for disposal Solvent for recovery is that which was used in the standard field cleaning or FEC cleaning of equipment Solvent used for cleaning badly contaminated equipment e g tar removal etc should be designated for disposal The two groups should be labeled For Recovery or For Disposal and stored separately at the FEC C 1 4 Safety Procedures for Cleaning Operations Some materials used to implement the cleaning procedures outlined in this Appendix are harmful if used improperly Caution should be exercised and all applicable safety procedures shall be followed At a minimum the following precautions shall be taken in the washroom during these cleaning operations Safety glasses with splash shields or goggles a neoprene apron and neoprene gloves will be worn during all cleaning operations When cleaning heavy items such as hollow stem augers or other drill rig equipment safety boots will be worn All solvent rinsing operations will be conducted under a fume hood or in the open never in a closed room e No eating smoking drinking chewing or any hand to mouth contact shall be permitted during cleaning operations C 1 5 Handling and Labeling of
64. and will not cause an inadvertent chemical reaction 13 3 Equipment Selecting appropriate equipment to sample wastes is a challenging task due to the uncertainty of the physical characteristics and nature of the wastes It may be difficult to separate homogenize and or containerize a waste due to its physical characteristics viscosity particle size etc In addition the physical characteristics of a waste may change with temperature humidity or pressure Waste streams may vary depending on how and when a waste was generated how and where it was stored disposed and the conditions under which it was stored disposed Also the physical location of the wastes or the unit configuration may prevent the use of conventional sampling equipment Given the uncertainties that a waste may present it is desirable to select sampling equipment that will facilitate the collection of samples that will meet the study s objective and that will not unintentionally bias the sample by excluding some of the sample population that is under consideration However due to the nature of some waste matrices or the physical constraints of some waste units it may be necessary to collect samples knowing that a portion of the desired population was omitted due to limitations of the equipment Any deviations from the study plan or difficulties encountered in the field concerning sample collection that may have an effect on the study s objective should be documented in a log
65. ao 33 2 a A 32 43 Azimuth TP1 to MCTS 159 2754 567 FFB H lt Z De Dh Coordinates Station Set H lt EET 88 98 N 7935 07 MELE 159 2754 acid 88 97 E 6178 78 e eee aay WHERE 502 64 N 7645 65 MCT3 TPLA 125 26 8 89 44 06 ea Eee adai 57555 N 7724 22 MCT3 TP1 MW5 124 09 12 90 0721 sere E aar Set H lt TPI A sose ogah ote 54 je mA 470 94 N 7328 60 TP A B 228 0054 20 3254 ARE EEA Set H lt AD 48 0054 bm m 13 68 N 7437 83 A B MW2 343 5521 90 2154 Boal Eeee ES aon 76246 N 7718 72 A B C 300 4627 89 59 54 de peces Set H lt BS oser 0000 R SADDA F 69824 N 8394 28 B C D 14 40 24 89 4939 Ceai Eco os i M s 152 967 N 7840 01 B C MW1 24 1121 90 2112 152 96 E 5627 62 E 56 FE 612 76 N 8265 45 B C MW3 26 50 36 89 44 45 ouo ll elsecs as Example 5 Figure 15 2 5 Traverse field notation with site map showing traverse points used to locate monitoring wells f i j 02 01 96 Project 96E 0001 Landis Surveyor Region 4 Site Name Ben Chmark City State Weather Clear O 5 mph N uto H z lt De Dh Coordinates tation C D SebH J 0 194 40 24 er DAS 755 66 N 8666 95 C D E 67 56 5 90 03 48 Fi oes AA mS SEES 16514 N 8265 20 C D MWS 142 751 89 45 03 16314 E 5859 80 Set H lt D E 2TEES como D E MCT2 154 2709 90 04 33 4090P g NREOrAT s Set H lt N 8297 79 EMETA 334 2709 E 6598 14 e5 sga 654 28 N 7643 60 E MCT2 A 180 5142 B9 562
66. are used but in general the Van Dorn or similar type horizontal sampler or peristaltic pump are suitable Samples are normally collected at mid depth in areas where the depths are less than 10 feet unless the salinity profile indicates the presence of a halocline salinity stratification In that case samples are collected from each stratum Depending upon the study objective when depths are greater than 10 feet water samples may be collected at the one foot depth from the surface mid depth and one foot from the bottom Generally estuarine investigations are two phased with study investigations conducted during wet and dry periods Depending upon the freshwater inflow sources estuarine water quality dynamics cannot normally be determined by a single season study 5 7 5 Control Stations In order to have a basis of comparison of water quality the collection of samples from control stations is always necessary A control station upstream from the waste source is as important as are stations downgradient and should be chosen with equal care to ensure representative results In some situations it is desirable to have background stations located in similar nearby estuaries which are not impacted by the phenomena or pollutants being investigated At times it may be desirable to locate two or three stations downstream from the waste inflow to establish the rate at which the unstable material is changing The time of water travel between t
67. as it pertains to ground water often involves the use of some form of temporary well point or direct push technology DPT for rapid in field screening and plume delineation These techniques are discussed in Section 6 Samples obtained using these techniques are usually analyzed immediately using an on site field laboratory or are sent to an off site laboratory for quick turnaround analyses In this manner delineations of both a horizontal areal and vertical nature can be rapidly achieved in the field These delineations can then be used as the basis for locating and installing permanent ground water monitoring wells The degree of complexity for these delineations varies depending on a number of factors which include The known or anticipated size of the suspected source area e Site stratigraphy e The amount of information regarding hydrogeological conditions thickness of aquifers or water bearing units depth to confining units ground water flow direction etc e The type of contamination aqueous phase light non aqueous phase liquid LNAPL or dense non aqueous phase liquid DNAPL In addition to the design considerations imposed by the preceding factors screening program designs may be either simple iterative or grid based Grid based may even transform at some point to a more or less iterative program 5 6 1 Single Source Iterative Programs The simplest case is one in which there is a small source area of an aqueo
68. available for use by Branch personnel It is a hand held instrument complete with a belt mounted battery supply and radio signal receiver Information necessary to define a profile line or survey grid is input into the hand held unit After a transmitter is selected the operator occupies a measurement point and presses the measurement keypad At any time during the survey the instrument will interpret any anomalies that are identified The complete data may also be post processed to create anomalie maps EISOPQAM 15 32 November 2001 Primary electromagnetic radio waves are generated by the VLF transmitters The Wadi measures the vertical and horizontal in phase and out of phase components of the secondary electromagnetic field which is induced in the more conductive geological structures water filled faults fractures etc The measurements are displayed as the vertical in phase field expressed as percentage of the horizontal field and recalculated as current density Magnetic Method Magnetometry 17 18 25 26 The science of magnetism is called magnetics The earth s magnetic field has both direction and a magnitude or intensity Generally magnetometers have been designed to detect and accurately measure changes in the earth s magnetic field The magnetic field of the earth resembles the characteristics of a bar magnet The magnetic south pole is located near the geographic north pole Magnetic field lines always move from the north pol
69. be augered to depths of 150 feet or more depending on the auger size but generally boreholes are augered to depths less than 100 feet 6 3 2 Solid Stem Auger This type of auger consists of a solid stem or shaft with a continuous spiraled steel flight welded on the outer side of the stem connected to an auger bit and when rotated transports cuttings to the surface This auger method is used in cohesive and semi cohesive soils that do not have a tendency to collapse when disturbed Boreholes can be augered to depths of 200 feet or more depending on the auger size but generally boreholes are augered to depths less than 150 feet Both of the previously discussed auger methods can be used in unconsolidated soils and semi consolidated weathered rock soils but not in competent rock Each method can be employed without introducing foreign materials into the borehole such as water and drilling fluids minimizing the potential for cross contamination Minimizing the risk of cross contamination is one of the most important factors to consider when selecting the appropriate drilling method s for a project 6 3 38 Sonic Methods These methods alternately advance concentric hollow drill stems using rotation in conjunction with axial vibration of the drill stem After each stage of drill stem advancement the inner string is removed with EISOPQAM 6 2 November 2001 acore of drill cuttings while the outer string remains to hold the borehole open T
70. be used in designing the filter pack and well screen Before designing the filter pack and well screen the following factors should be considered 1 Select the well screen slot openings that will retain 90 percent of the filter pack material 2 The filter pack material should be of the size that minimizes head losses through the pack and also prevents excessive sediment sand silt clay movement into the well 3 A filter material of varying grain sizes is not acceptable because the smaller particles fill the spaces between the larger particles thereby reducing the void spaces and increasing resistance to flow Therefore filter material of the same grain size and well rounded is preferred 4 The filter pack design is based on the gradation of the finest aquifer materials being analyzed Steps to design a filter pack in aquifers 1 Construct a grain size distribution curve on a grain size distribution graph from the sieve analysis of the aquifer materials The filter pack design as stated above is based on the gradation of the finest aquifer materials 2 Multiply the d30 size from the grain size distribution graph by a factor of four to nine Pack Aquifer ratio A factor of four is used if the formation is fine grained and uniform Cu is less than 3 six if it is coarse grained and non uniform and up to nine if it is highly non uniform and contains silt Head losses through filter packs increase as the Pack Aquifer P A ratios dec
71. become upset This results in an output in the form of a meter deflection and or audio signal Electromagnetic Induction EM 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 EM induction instruments measure true soil conductivity in uniform homogeneous subsurface conditions and can also measure apparent soil conductivity in layered soils or other geologic material The EM data measurements have also been called ground or terrain conductivities or reciprocal resistivities EM units are very effective for rapid site reconnaissance and detection of buried drums pipes metallic type conductors or trenches were the conductivity of the disturbed soil would differ from the native soil EM induction instruments are not limited by frozen ground or wet or dry soils Two EM instruments available for use by Branch personnel are the EM31 D and the EM34 3 The EM31 D is a fixed coil separation instrument with an intercoil separation of 3 66 meters and is capable of providing both terrain conductivity and metal detection data The effective depth of investigation with the EM31 D is approximately 5 to 5 5 meters 15 to 18 feet depending on location relative to the ground surface The EM31 D can be connected to a data logger for logging EM data during surveys This data can later be down loaded into a PC for post processing The EM34 3 utilizes variable coil spacing however and is capable of providing a much greater depth of investigation though only for terrain conductivity With
72. before leaving sampling location Do not bring back hose with water in it Do not pump dry Do not run generator without checking oil Do not put pump in trailer with generator EISOPQAM E 4 November 2001 E 2 6 Trouble Shooting Loose connections at i Check wiring at pump No Power to Pump pump Repair as needed Generator Off generator water Generator Running kinked Generator output Put load on generator failing and check output or check voltage output meter Sediment or other Remove material from Sluggish Discharge material clogging screen screen 2 Kinked hose 2 Unkink hose E 3 QEDO Bladder and Purge Pumps E 3 1 Introduction Several QED bladder pumps and purge pumps no bladder which can be used for purging monitoring wells are available Bladder pumps have a very low efficiency when used near the top of the water column and will generally not purge more than 0 5 gallon per minute The purge pump however can achieve pump rates of several gallons per minute in these situations The efficiency of the bladder pumps is restricted by the rigid Teflon bladder which requires significant hydrostatic head for rapid and complete filling The purge pump having no bladder fills much faster under the same conditions Both pumps operate by cycling a pressurized gas on and off in a discharge and refill cycle The gas usually atmospheric air is pressurized and regulated by a compressor regulator com
73. book reviewed with the analytical data and presented in the report EISOPQAM 13 3 November 2001 13 3 1 Waste Sampling Equipment Waste sampling equipment should be made of non reactive materials that will neither add to nor alter the chemical or physical properties of the material that is being sampled Table 13 3 1 lists some conventional equipment for sampling waste units phases and some potential limitations of the equipment Another reference for selecting sampling equipment is the ASTM Standard Guide for Selection of Sampling Equipment for Wastes and Contaminated Media Data Collection Activities D 6232 98 13 3 2 Ancillary Equipment for Waste Sampling In addition to the equipment listed in Table 13 3 1 which provides the primary device used to collect various waste samples ancillary equipment may be required during the sampling for safety and or analytical reasons Some examples of these types of equipment are glass mixing pans particle size reducers remote drum opening devices and spark resistant tools See Section 13 7 for particle size reduction procedures Any influences that these types of ancillary equipment may have on the data should be evaluated and reported as necessary EISOPQAM 13 4 November 2001 TABLE 13 3 1 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT for VARIOUS WASTE UNITS Equipment Waste Units Phases Limitations scoop with impoundments piles Can be difficult to collect deeper phases in bracket conduit containers tanks liquids
74. collected for volatile organic compound analyses must be collected prior to any sample homogenization as described in Section 5 13 8 Regardless of the method used for collection the aliquot for volatile organic compound analyses must be collected directly from the sampling device to the extent practical using equipment and methods described in Section 12 4 The aliquot should be collected directly from the device such as a hand auger bucket or scoop if possible If a device such as a dredge is used the aliquot should be collected after the sample is placed in the mixing container prior to mixing In some cases the sediment may be soft and not lend itself to collection by plunging Encore or syringe samplers into the sample matrix In these cases it is appropriate to open the sample device i e the Encore barrel or syringe prior to sample collection and to carefully place the sediment in the device filling it fully with the required volume of sample EISOPQAM 11 4 November 2001 SECTION 12 SOIL SAMPLING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES To collect a soil sample that is representative of conditions as they exist at the site By selecting the appropriate sampling device s By taking measures to avoid introducing contamination as a result of poor sampling and or handling technique By reducing the potential of cross contamination between samples 12 1 Introduction Prior to conducting a soil sampling investigation a sampling strategy
75. completely document all field activities Each project should have a dedicated logbook The project leader s name the sample team leader s name if appropriate the project name and location and the project number should be entered on the inside of the front cover of the logbook It is recommended that each page in the logbook be numbered and dated The entries should be legible and contain accurate and inclusive documentation of an individual s project activities At the end of all entries for each day or at the end of a particular event if appropriate the investigator should draw a diagonal line and initial indicating the conclusion of the entry Since field records are the basis for later written reports language should be objective factual and free of personal feelings or other terminology which might prove inappropriate Once completed these field logbooks become accountable documents and must be maintained as part of the official project files All aspects of sample collection and handling as well as visual observations shall be documented in the field logbooks The following is a list of information that should be included in the logbook sample collection equipment where appropriate field analytical equipment and equipment utilized to make physical measurements shall be identified e calculations results and calibration data for field sampling field analytical and field physical measurement equipment property n
76. consist of the following Field split samples not to include inter lab splits e Water VOC trip blank samples e Soil VOC trip blank samples e Inorganic sample preservative blanks e Equipment field rinse blanks e Field organic analyte free water system blanks and e Material blanks The QA Officer will evaluate all data received and immediately attempt to resolve any problems found A written report will be issued on the quality control checks during each calendar quarter The report will be submitted to appropriate personnel Investigation Derived Waste IDW Types of IDW Materials which may become IDW are Personnel protective equipment PPE This includes disposable coveralls gloves booties respirator canisters splash suits etc Disposable equipment This includes plastic ground and equipment covers aluminum foil conduit pipe composite liquid waste samplers COLIWASAs Teflon tubing broken or unused sample containers sample container boxes tape etc Soil cuttings from drilling or hand augering Drilling mud or water used for water rotary drilling Ground water obtained through well development or well purging Cleaning fluids such as spent solvents and washwater Packing and shipping materials Table 5 15 1 lists the types of IDW commonly generated during investigations and current disposal 5 15 2 Management of Non Hazardous IDW Disposal of non hazardous IDW from hazardous waste sites sh
77. data can be initiated 5 13 11 Special Quality Control Procedures for Water Samples for Extractable Organic Compounds Pesticides or Herbicides Analyses Matrix Duplicate Duplicate water samples shall be submitted to the laboratory for extractable organic compounds pesticides and or herbicides analyses from at least one sampling location per project and laboratory used These samples should be collected from a location expected to be relatively free from contamination since the samples will be used for laboratory quality control purposes The duplicate samples should be clearly identified as Duplicate Sample for Matrix Spike on the sample tag Chain Of Custody Record in the field logbook and on the Contract Laboratory Program CLP Traffic Report Form if appropriate This procedure shall be followed for all projects where water samples are collected for the indicated analyses 5 13 12 Special Quality Control Procedures for EPA Contract Laboratories On a case by case basis field investigators may be required to collect split samples or duplicate samples if appropriate for analyses by both the Region 4 laboratory and contract laboratories The split samples are to be submitted to the Region 4 laboratory using established procedures The contract laboratory involved shall not be notified that samples were split i e there should be no indication on Chain Of Custody Records or CLP Traffic Report Forms submitted to the contract laboratories
78. data collected by a state local agency are submitted to the AIRS system the NO and or NO channel must be audited using either cylinder dilution or gpt EISOPQAM 2 27 November 2001 2 10 5 Air Monitoring Technical System Audit Introduction A technical system audit TSA is an on site review and inspection of a state or local agency s ambient air monitoring program to assess its compliance with established regulations governing the collection analysis validation and reporting of ambient air quality data To promote uniformity in the evaluation of state and local agencies monitoring programs and performance the air monitoring staff will use a modified version of the questionnaire see Appendix H in The QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book The scope of the systems audit includes an appraisal of network management field operations laboratory operations data management quality assurance and reporting The TSA results should present a clear complete and accurate picture of the agency s collection and reporting of ambient air monitoring data Frequency of Systems Audits The EPA Regional Office retains regulatory responsibility to evaluate agency performance on a three year rotation unless problems occur The determina
79. described and in accordance with 40 CFR Part 50 APPENDIX F Procedures detailed in the approved instrument manual will be used for installation calibration quality assurance QA checks maintenance and repairs Monitors will be calibrated at the beginning and end of each study and at least quarterly during the study Monitors will be calibrated after major maintenance or when a QA check shows an out of control condition exists A zero span check will be conducted daily on all monitors Precision checks of all monitors will be conducted at least weekly Quality assurance audits as specified in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A will be conducted quarterly or at least once for short duration studies Data telemetry systems not equipped with electronic strip chart capability will be run in parallel with strip chart recorders Strip charts electronic or paper will serve as a permanent record and diagnostic tool After completion ofthe study all monitoring equipment will be returned for inspection maintenance and repair prior to storage All field documentation will be retained by the Air Monitoring Staff 14 2 4 Monitoring Sulfur Dioxide in Ambient Air The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the continuous monitoring of sulfur dioxide in air This summary is adapted from the Federal Register equivalent method designation 40CFR Part 53 and The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measu
80. determined for pinholes and other imperfections Are unexposed filters equilibrated in controlled conditioning If no why not environment which meets or exceeds the requirements of 40 CFR 50 Is the conditioning environment monitored o indicate frequeney 000000000000 Indicate frequency Are the monitors properly calibrated Loo he Indicate frequency Is the balance checked with Class S weights each day it is 5 If no indicate frequency of such checks used Is the balance check information placed in QC logbook Dn If no where is it recorded Is the filter weighed to the nearest milligram Is the filter weighed to the nearest milligram f Wmotwharmasinreme If not what mass increment Are filter serial numbers and tare weights permanently If no indicate where recorded Are filters packaged for protection while transporting to and from the monitoring sites How often are filter samples collected Indicate average lapse time hrs between end of sampling and laboratory receipt Are exposed filters reconditioned for at least 24 hrs in the same If no why not conditioning environment as for unexposed filters Are exposed filters removed from folders etc before eer ae rer Is the exposed filter weighed to the nearest 1s the exposed filter weighed to the nearest milligram Are exposed filters archived Where Indicate retention period Are blank filters re weighed PM2 5 If no explain why not If yes
81. double woven stainless steel mesh with 0 0057 inch 0 15 mm pore openings A 14 inch long screen is available for use only with the 1 25 inch diameter probe rod The following procedures are used by EIB to install a permanent soil gas sampling implant using the Geoprobe These are general procedures which are used with either 1 0 inch or 1 25 inch diameter probe rod Attention should be given to rod diameter when ordering points and point holders Installation of Permanent Soil Gas Sampling Implants 1 Attach O ring to implant point anchor 2 Press implant point anchor into point holder and attach to first section of probe rod 3 Push implant point anchor to the desired depth for implant installation 4 When the desired depth has been reached attach the implant to the sample delivery tubing This is accomplished by loosening or removing the Swagelok fitting and pressing the tubing into the implant When the end of the tubing is sufficiently engaged in the end of the implant the Swagelok fitting is tightened to secure the tubing in the implant It is critical that the tubing be securely attached to the implant so that it does not pull off during subsequent steps of the installation EISOPQAM 19 4 November 2001 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Feed the tubing into the probe rod until the implant reaches the implant point anchor At this point cut the tubing to allow enough tubing to remain for sampling usually three t
82. each sample Liners are made of either stainless steel Teflon or plastic The type of core liner and its composition to collect sediment cores should be based on the contaminants to be evaluated Ogeechee Sand Pounders and gravity Cores are hand held devices that use a standard size 2 core barrel The core tube and liner are interchangeable between the two units The Ogeechee uses a slide hammer mechanism attached to the core head that allows the sampler to pound the core tube into the sediment The Ogeechee is good for sandy more consolidated sediments The gravity core uses a guiding fin mechanism with a built in gravity type check valve The gravity core is placed in the water and released at the surface to free fall to the bottom The fin mechanism keeps the core tube upright and free from spinning in the water column as it descends The core tube stabs the bottom forcing the sediment into the tube Both coring devices are equipped with removable nose pieces on the core barrel and disposable core catchers for the liner tubes The core catchers are designed to cap the liner tube to avoid loss of the core when retrieved from the bottom The gravity core can be modified to attach a slide hammer mechanism similar to the Ogeechee to further pound the core into the sediment further if deemed necessary Sediment cores collected from most hand operated coring devices can suffer from either spreading or compaction when driven into the sediment de
83. either measured or calculated using an approximation technique Refer to Section 18 3 for Surface Water Flow Measurements 18 2 7 Closed Conduit Flow Measurements The accuracy of closed conduit flow measuring devices may be difficult to verify Occasionally it may be necessary to verify accuracy by making an independent flow measurement preferably using a dilution technique EABSOP Section 14 2 3 3 Below are some of the more commonly used closed conduit devices Venturi Meter The Venturi meter employs a conversion of static head to velocity head whereby a differential is created that is proportional to flow The typical accuracy of a Venturi meter is at 1 to 2 percent 9 10 11and 12 Orifice Meter The orifice meter is a pressure differential device that measures flow by the difference in static head Orifice meters require from 40 to 60 pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of the installation They can be accurate e g within 0 5 percent although their usable range is limited 9 EISOPQAM 18 5 November 2001 Flow Nozzle The basic principle of operation is the same as that of the Venturi meter The flow nozzle has an entrance section and a throat but lacks the diverging section of the Venturi meter Flow nozzle accuracies can approach those of Venturi meters 9 Electromagnetic Flow Meter The electromagnetic flow meter operates according to Faraday s Law of Induction where the conductor is the liquid stream and the fi
84. equipment or containers E 2 3 Pre loadout Checkout Procedure 1 2 Check the oil and gasoline in generator filling up as needed Take generator outside and start it Place a load on the generator if possible Inspect the pump and all hose rope and electrical cord and connections EISOPQAM E 3 November 2001 E 2 4 Operation E 2 5 1 Erect tripod over well head and load hose spool Connect pump to steel winch cable Using winch crank lower pump hose and electrical cord into the well If no tripod is available lower the pump into the well by hand This will require at least three people one to lower pump with the rope one to feed the hose and cord into the well maintaining proper tension and one to feed rope hose and electrical cord from cart NOTE Keep all hose electrical cord and cable off of the ground at all times Do not allow the rope cord or the hose to scrape or rub on the well casing 2 Place pump five feet below the top of the water column Start generator then connect power cord from pump After starting pump closely observe operation to determine if drawdown is occurring in well If the water level is not pulled down significantly keep pump at initial level and continue to purge If the water level drops lower the pump to keep up with the drawdown Do not allow the pump to run dry as this will damage it Maintenance and Precautions Do not put up wet Empty hose of contaminated water
85. examples are well numbers NPDES permit numbers Air permit numbers AOC numbers Grid numbers Site designations etc or combinations of these as appropriate Sample ID Required Any combination of letters or numbers Maximum of 8 characters NOTE For QA QC samples the Sample ID must begin with the letters QA for the sample to be properly identified Media Code Required Choose the code that most closely describes the sample Environmental Samples SF Surface Soil 0 12 WP Wipe Sample SB Subsurface Soil 212 FI Fish Sample PW Potable Water VG Vegetation MS Municipal Water Supply MI Macroinvertebrates IW Industrial Well WW Wastewater WA Waste SL Sludge non RCRA SW Surface Water UI UIC Injection Wells SD Sediment US Underground Storage Tanks GW Groundwater PT Petroleum Tanks PC Precipitation AA Ambient Air OT Other Unknown IA Indoor Air OB Other Biota ME Municipal Eff Wastewater MP Municipal Proc Wastewater IE Industrial Eff Wastewater IP Industrial Proc Wastewater PE Periphyton TI Tissue Field QA QC Samples TS Trip Blank Soil TW Trip Blank Water TP Trip Blank Wipe FB Filter Sand Blank EB Equipment Rinse Blank OW Organic Free Water Blank GR Grout Blank PB Preservative Blank MB Drilling Mud Blank GB Glove Blank DB Potable Decon Blank BO Bottle Blank BB Bentonite Blank FL Field Blank FA Field Blank Air IB Dry Ice Blank BK Other Blank EISOP
86. exposure to contaminants and is accomplished by 1 providing site security to exclude unnecessary personnel 2 limiting the number of workers and equipment on site to the minimum required for effective operations 3 conducting operations to reduce personal exposure and minimize the potential for airborne dispersion and 4 implementing decontamination procedures Work Zones To control access of personnel and equipment to possible contaminants the site will be divided into work zones Three categories of zones and one command post are utilized For all operations except Level D work zones will be designated as follows 1 Support Zone Along with the command post this is the outermost boundary of the site Contamination of personnel and equipment in this area is unlikely 2 Contamination Reduction Zone This area serves as a corridor between the exclusion zone and the support zone All personnel and equipment passing through this corridor from the exclusion zone to the support zone must undergo appropriate decontamination 3 Exclusion Zone This is an area within the support zone where actual operations are being conducted Access to this area is limited to personnel and equipment being utilized at that particular time The risk of contamination in this area is high Decontamination Prior to exiting a hazardous waste site all personnel and equipment as needed must undergo a thorough decontamination The purpose of this deconta
87. fitting will be inspected for damage before cleaning Any damaged valve will be replaced with a previously cleaned see procedure above valve After replacing any valve the canister will be cleaned and analyzed to verify that it is free of contamination If any canister is used to sample a high concentration source it must be cleaned and analyzed to verify it is free of contamination before it can be used again e Chain of custody must be maintained for all samples 1 The nitrogen should be certified 99 999 pure by the manufacturer A molecular sieve scrubber should be attached to the nitrogen line after the regulator to remove any trace impurities Sample Collection Two types of samples for VOC analysis can be collected with SummaG Silcosteel 9 canisters The canister can be opened and allowed to fill rapidly to obtain a grab sample or filled slowly by using a flow controller to collect a time integrated sample With either type of sample the following general procedures should be followed e AChain Of Custody Record should be completed detailing time of sampling sampling interval and signed by the person collecting the sample e After the sample has been collected the Summa Silcosteel canister should be capped an EPA pre numbered tag should be completed and attached to the canister and the canister should be placed in a shipping container with a copy of the Chain Of Custody Record and sealed with EPA sample custody tape
88. form The sample station number date and time of sample collection composite or grab sample designation whether or not split samples were collected yes or no should be entered under the split sample column the tag numbers of samples collected which will be removed from the site a brief description of each sampling location and the total number of sample containers for each sample must be entered EISOPQAM 3 7 November 2001 e The bottom of the form is used to document the site operator s acceptance or rejection of split samples The project leader must sign and complete the information in the Split Samples Transferred By section date and time must be entered If split samples were not collected the project leader should initial and place a single line through Split Samples Transferred By in this section The operator of the site must indicate whether split samples were received or declined and sign the form The operator must give their title telephone number and the date and time they signed the form If the operator refuses to sign the form the sampler s should note this fact in the operator s signature block and initial this entry The Receipt for Samples form is serialized and becomes an accountable document after it is completed A copy of the form is to be given to the facility or site owner operator The original form must be maintained in the project files 3 5 Field Records PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To accurately and
89. from a surface water body 11 1 Introduction Sampling techniques and equipment are designed to minimize effects on the chemical and physical integrity of the sample If the guidance in this section is followed a representative sample of the sediment should be obtained The physical location of the investigator when collecting a sample may dictate the equipment to be used Wading is the preferred method for reaching the sampling location particularly if the stream has a noticeable current is not impounded However wading may disrupt bottom sediments causing biased results If the stream is too deep to wade the sediment sample may be collected from a boat or from a bridge To collect a sediment sample from a water body a variety of methods can be used e Dredges Peterson Eckman Ponar Coring tubes augers Scoops BMH 60 standard scoop and spoons Vibracore Electronic Vibratory Core Tube Driver Regardless of the method used precautions should be taken to insure that the sample collected is representative of the water body These methods are discussed in the following paragraphs 11 2 Sediment Sampling Equipment 11 2 1 Scoops and Spoons If the surface water body is wadeable the easiest way to collect a sediment sample is by using a stainless steel scoop or spoon The sampling method is accomplished by wading into the surface water body and while facing upstream into the current scooping the sample along the bo
90. have been collected and containerized the outside of the sample containers should be cleaned with water paper towels and or oil wipes to remove any spilled material from the exterior of the container It should be noted that each sample container should be tagged and sealed placed in a plastic bag and the bag securely closed Samples collected from materials that did not demonstrate any hazardous characteristics during the screening process may be placed in coolers and handled as non hazardous samples in accordance with Appendix A Field investigators will use knowledge gained of site practices and processes labels and marking on waste containers field screening results and personal observations made during their investigation to determine the hazard potential of a sample Samples considered to be hazardous by the field investigators will be placed in secondary containment for transport to the SESD laboratory and for subsequent handling upon arrival The tagged sealed and bagged samples will be placed in a 6 quart plastic pail packed with vermiculite and sealed with a tight fitting lid The project number for the sampling investigation and the specific sample station number will be marked on the secondary container in indelible ink A standard SESD Hazard Communication Label will be affixed to the side of the secondary container The appropriate hazard s for the sample Health Flammability and or Reactivity will be indicated with an X Additi
91. how frequently Are analyses performed on filters Indicate analyses other than Pb and mass which are routinely performed uwao Is analysis for lead being conducted using atomic absorption If not has the Agency received an equivalency designation spectrometry with air acetylene flame of their procedure Is either the hot acid or ultrasonic extraction procedure being Which followed precisely Is Class A borosilicate glassware used throughout the analysis BEBE EISOPQAM H 13 November 2001 Question Is a calibration curve available having concentrations that cover the linear absorption range of the atomic absorption instrumentation Is the stability of the calibration curve checked by alternately remeasuring every 10th sample a concentration lt lug Pb ml lt 10 ug Pb ml Are measured air volumes corrected to reference conditions as given in CFR regulations Q of 760 mm Hg and 25 C prior to calculating the Pb concentration In either the hot or ultrasonic extraction procedure is there always a 30 min H O soaking period to allow HNO trapped in the filter to diffuse into the rinse water Is a quality control program in effect that includes periodic quantification of 1 lead in 3 4 x 8 glass fiber filter strips containing 100 300 ug Pb strip and or 2 a similar strip with 600 1000 4g strip and 3 blank filter strips with zero Pb content to determine if the method as being used has any bias Are blank
92. installations Comments Were samples of the drilling mud water bentonite pellets filter pack materials etc collected for quality control analyses Comments EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION Were the drilling rig s backhoe s etc properly cleaned according to the SOP Appendix B prior to arriving on site Comments What was the condition of the drilling and sampling equipment when it arrived on site Comments Was a decontamination area located where the cleaning activities would not cross contaminate clean and or drying equipment Comments Was clean equipment properly wrapped and stored in a clean area Comments Was the drilling rig s properly cleaned between well borings Comments Were the cleaning and decontamination procedures conducted in accordance with the SOP Comments What type of drilling method s was used to install the wells Comments 12 Was this drilling method s the same as proposed in the study plan and or POP Comments Were soil samples collected for logging and analyses as the wells were installed Comments If yes to 13 at what intervals and by what method Comments If air rotary was used was an in line organic air filter employed Was a cyclone velocity dissipator used Comments EISOPQAM 2 44 November 2001 16 What diameter borehole s were installed Comments 17 Were surface outer casings used Comments 8 9 1 If yes to 17 what size and to what depth Comment
93. instrument lines 2 How often are lines changed Please comment briefly and prioritize your currently identified instrument needs 2 Quality Control Please indicate frequency of multi point calibrations ee CO o ee E eco o Please list the authoritative standards used for each type of flow measurement indicate the frequency of calibration standards to maintain field material device credibility Primary Standard Frequency of Calibration EISOPQAM H 6 November 2001 Please complete the table below for your agency s site standards Primary Standard Secondary Standard Recertification Frequency usi e e em Are level 1 zero and span z s calibrations or calibration checks made for all continuous monitoring equipment and flow checks made for PM 10 and PM2 5 samplers Does the agency have acceptance criteria for zero span checks NENNEN EE I Are these criteria known to the field operations personnel II Are they documented in standard operating procedures If not indicate document and section where they can be III Do the documents discussed in II above indicate when zero span adjustments should and should not be made In keeping with 40 CFR 58 regulations are any necessary zero If no why not and span adjustments made after precision checks Are precision checks routinely performed within concentration Please comment on any discrepancies ranges an
94. insuring that all chain of custody and quality control procedures for sampling flow measurements field analyses record keeping etc are followed All field personnel participating in criminal investigations must understand and follow the chain of custody and quality control procedures relative to their assignments Following completion of the field activities the Project Leader or designee shall account for all field documentation e g field logbooks sample tags and chain of custody records and verify that they are complete Sample tags will remain on the sample containers in the custody of the laboratory until relinquishment to the court or final disposition of the case EISOPQAM F 3 November 2001 F 6 Laboratory Support A senior analyst shall assist in determining the analytical needs of the investigation and provide overall coordination of sample analyses and data reporting Upon delivery of samples to the Science Ecosystem Technology Center custody room the samples shall be transferred via chain of custody procedures from the Project Leader or designee to the laboratory Sample Custodian or designee The Sample Custodian shall document the condition of the samples and verify the uniformity of information on the sample tags and chain of custody records prior to placing the samples in the sample custody room All sample handling sample preparation and analyses shall be in strict conformance with the Analytical Support Branch Operati
95. intercoil spacings of 10 20 and 40 meters depths of investigation may reach 15 30 or 60 meters 45 90 or 120 feet respectively The EM34 3 does not allow electronic data logging Both instruments may also be operated with the coil dipoles in different orientations effectively providing for a different investigation depth at each measurement point The principle of operation of EM instruments is as follows A small AC voltage at an audio frequency is sent through the transmitter coil causing a current to flow The transmitter coil on the EM 31D generates an alternating magnetic field that directs induced electrical current loops into the ground which produce primary and secondary magnetic fields These magnetic fields are then sensed or detected by the receiver coil and then amplified and stored on a data logger The ratio of the primary and secondary fields are incorporated into the design of the EM instruments such that the meter readings are true or apparent ground soil conductivities Very Low Frequency VLF 17 24 VLF geophysical instruments utilize the long distance high power very low frequency radio transmissions that the military has developed for submarine communications At least 15 VLF transmitters are at various locations around the world and continuously operate at 15 30 kHz VLF transmitters can be used at distances up to 10 000 kilometers 6 214 miles from a powerful transmitter The ABEM Wadi is the VLF instrument
96. ionized water and then cap the cell 5 Use a non abrasive lint free paper or cloth preferably lens paper to wipe off excess water and streaks EISOPQAM 16 6 November 2001 Ti 8 Procedures 8 9 Open the cover and insert the cell arrow to the front into the unit and close the cover Press READ and wait for the light bulb icon to go off Record the reading Using the Gelex standards repeat steps 4 5 and 6 Record all measurements note anomalies Collect a representative sample or use a portion of the sample that is collected for pH temperature or conductivity analysis and pour off enough to fill the cell to the fill line about 15 mL and replace the cap on the cell Wipe off excess water and any streaks with a soft lint free cloth lens paper Press I O and the instrument will turn on Place the meter on a flat sturdy surface Do not hold the instrument while making measurements Insert the sample cell in the in the instrument so the diamond or orientation mark aligns with the raised orientation mark in the front of the cell compartment Close the lid Select manual or automatic range selection by pressing the range key Select signal averaging mode by pressing the Signal Average key Use signal average mode if the sample causes a noisy signal display changes constantly Press Read The display will show NTU Then the turbidity in NTU Record the result after the lamp symbol turns off Rinse
97. is handled packaged and transported in the same manner as all other wipe samples with the exception that it is not exposed to actual contact with the sample medium Grout Blanks a sample of the material used to make seals around the annular space in monitoring wells Filter Pack Blanks a sample of the material used to create an interface around the screened interval of a monitoring well Construction Water Blanks a sample of the water used to mix or hydrate construction materials such as monitoring well grout Organic Analyte Free Water Blanks a sample collected from a field organic analyte free water generating system The sample is normally collected at the end of sampling activities since the organic analyte free water system is recharged prior to use on a study On large studies samples can be collected at intervals at the discretion of the project leader The purpose of the organic analyte free waterblank is to measure positive bias from sample handling variability due to possible localized contamination of the organic analyte free water generating system or contamination introduced to the sample containers during storage at the site Organic analyte free water blanks differ from field blanks in that the sample should be collected in as clean an area as possible a usual location for the organic analyte free water system so that only the water generating system containers are measured EISOPQAM 5 4 November 2001 5 3 Samplin
98. it by diffusion or longitudinal mixing as it moves downstream to produce an increasingly wider band The peak concentration remains near but somewhat downstream of the center line of the band and decreases as longitudinal mixing proceeds The times of water travel to downstream points are the differences between the time the dye was added to the stream and the times the centroid of the dye mass arrives at downstream points The length of the dye cloud and the peak concentrations produces a measure of instream dispersion If Rhodamine WT dye is used as the tracer peak concentrations from 1 0 to 50 ppb allow satisfactory definition of the dye concentration curve Most methods of calculating the dosage of dye needed at the upstream point involve estimates of one or more stream characteristics such as flow velocity length of reach volume in the reach cross sectional area average depth or the roughness coefficient n of Manning s formula The USGS has produced excellent publications regarding time of travel techniques i e Measurement of Time of Travel and Dispersion by Dye Tracing 12 and Fluorometric Procedures for Dye Tracing 10 The stream should be sampled frequently as the dye arrives at the downstream point to define the tracer concentration versus time curve with special emphasis on the peak The frequency may be varied from continuously to every 60 minutes or more depending on the duration of the dye cloud at the sampling point
99. maintained on file See Standard Methods Use either 1 cm or 2 5 cm cells depending upon concentration range of the sample Inspection e Each meter should be visually inspected before and after each use Report any problems to the FEC e Check the battery strength e Insure that the reagents are fresh before field trips Calibration e The calibration scales must be calibrated onsite with a minimum of three points a blank and two known standards that bracket the expected sample concentrations Note If the DPD kit is used the method must adhere to the requirements set forth in Standard Methods Reagents Standards DPD total residual chlorine powder packets Note The packets deteriorate in the presence of moisture or high temperature The packets should be discarded if they have caked or have turned brown Always wear gloves when handling the DPD oxalate Do not ingest the DPD oxalate If accidentally spilled on skin rinse off immediately e Chlorine demand free water See Standard Methods Method 4500 Cl for directions in preparing the ASTM Standard D1193 Consumption of Potassium Permanganate EISOPQAM 16 10 November 2001 e Potassium permanganate stock Prepare a stock solution containing 891 mgs 1000 mls Keep stock cool and store in the dark e Potassium permanganate intermediate stock 10 ppm Prepare intermediate stock solution containing 10 mg l KMnO by diluting 10 mls of stock solution to 1 liter N
100. maintenance report Check operation of safety shower and eye wash Check all batteries in the Charged Battery Area with the load tester Any batteries testing below the green arc of the load tester should be removed from their battery box red tagged with the notation Failed Monthly Check and date of check and placed in the Discharged Battery Area G 4 November 2001 FIGURE G 1 BATTERY LOG BATTERY DATE CHARGE INIT BATTERY DATE CHARGE INIT NUMBER CHARGED YES NO NUMBER CHARGED YES NO EISOPQAM G 5 November 2001 FIGURE G 2 BATTERY BUILDING MAINTENANCE REPORT DATE COMMENTS 1 Floor Clean Y N 2 Trash Can Empty Y N 3 Carboy Under Half Full Y N 4 Acid Spill Kit OK Y N 5 First Aid Kit OK Y N 6 Safety Shower Eye Wash OK Y N 7 Charged Battery Status Enter In Stock SIGNED NOTE SEND COMPLETED REPORT TO BRANCH SAFETY OFFICER EISOPQAM G 6 November 2001 APPENDIX H TECHNICAL SYSTEMS AUDIT FORM QUESTIONNAIRE Agency Address Telephone Number Reporting Period beginning ending dates Organization Director Air Program Supervisor Data Management Supervisor Quality Assurance Officer Questionnaire Completed date by On Site Visit Date Audit Team Members Affiliation of Audit Team EISOPQAM H 1 November 2001 A NETWORK MANAGEMENT 1 General Complete the table below for each of the pollutants monitored as part of your air monitoring network
101. may be utilized for sampling several horizontal layers if the strata are horizontally oriented A simple random sampling approach is typically utilized for sample collection within each strata The use of a stratified random sampling strategy may result in the collection of fewer samples 5 3 10 Systematic Grid Sampling Systematic grid sampling involves the collection of samples at fixed intervals when the contamination is assumed to be randomly distributed This method is commonly used with populations when estimating trends or patterns of contamination This approach may not be acceptable if the entire population is not accessible or if the systematic plan becomes phased with variations in the distribution of contaminants within the matrix This approach may also be useful for identifying the presence of strata within the population The grid and starting points should be randomly laid out over the site yet the method allows for rather easy location of exact sample locations within each grid Also the grid size would typically be adjusted according to the number of samples that are required 5 3 11 Adaptive Cluster Sampling Adaptive sampling designs are ones in which additional decisions units or sample locations are selected depending on the interpretation of measurements or observations made during an initial survey 8 Additional sample locations are selected when a contaminant of concern in one or more units exceeds some predetermined acti
102. multiphase wastes Depth constraints solids sludges spoon impoundments piles Similar limitations as the scoop Generally containers solids sludges not effective in sampling liquids push tube piles containers cohesive Should not be used to sample solids with solids sludges dimensions gt the diameter of the tube Depth constraints auger impoundments piles con Can be difficult to use in an impoundment or tainers solids a container or for solidified wastes sediment sampler impoundments piles Should not be used to sample solids with solids sludges dimensions gt the diameter of the tube ponar dredge impoundments solids Must have means to position equipment to sludges desired sampling location Difficult to decon COLIWASA or drum impoundments containers Not good with viscous wastes Devices 27 thief tanks liquids require 2 samplers to use effectively Dipstick impoundments containers Not recommended for tanks gt 11 feet deep Mucksucker tanks liquids sludges Devices gt 7 require 2 samplers to use effectively bacon bomb impoundments tanks Not good with viscous wastes liquids bailer impoundments tanks Only if waste is homogeneous Not good liquids with viscous wastes peristaltic pump impoundments tanks Cannot be used in flammable atmospheres with vacuum jug liquids Not good with viscous wastes assembly back hoe bucket piles solids sludges May be difficult to access desired sa
103. of three stations on the other hand may support each other and indicate the true pattern of water quality in the subreach To determine the effects of certain discharges or tributary streams on ambient water quality stations should be located both upstream and downstream from the discharges In addition to the upstream and downstream stations bracketing a tributary a station should be established on the tributary at a location upstream and out of the influence of the receiving stream Unless a stream is extremely turbulent it is nearly impossible to measure the effect of a waste discharge or tributary immediately downstream from the source Inflow frequently hugs the stream bank due to differences in density temperature and specific gravity and consequently lateral cross channel mixing does not occur for some distance Tributaries should be sampled as near the mouth as feasible Frequently the mouths of tributaries are accessible by boat Care should be exercised to avoid collecting water samples from stratified locations which are due to differences in density resulting from temperature dissolved solids or turbidity Actual sampling locations will vary with the size of the water body and the mixing characteristics of the stream or river Generally for small streams less than 20 feet wide a sampling site should be selected where the water is well mixed In such cases a single grab sample taken at mid depth at the center of the channe
104. opened e g paint sticks spray paint cones etc EISOPQAM 13 6 November 2001 LEVEL B PROTECTION IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES 3 Before opening ground each metal drum that is not in direct contact with the earth using grounding wires alligator clips and a grounding rod or metal structure If a metal drum is in an overpack drum the metal drum should be grounded 4 Touch the drum opening equipment to the bung or lid and allow an electrical conductive path to form Slowly remove the bung or drum ring and or lid with spark resistant tools brass beryllium 5 Screen drums for explosive gases and toxic vapor with air monitoring instruments as bung or drum lid is removed Depending on site conditions screen for one or more of the following radioactivity cyanide fumes halogen vapors pH and or flash point requires small volume of sample for testing Note the state quantity phases and color of the drum contents Record all relevant results observations and information in a logbook Drum Data Form or Drum Data Table Figure 13 1 is an example of a Drum Data Form Review the screening results with any pre existing data to determine which drums will be sampled 6 Select the appropriate sampling equipment based on the state of the material and the type of container Sampling equipment should be made of non reactive materials that will meet the study s objective s 7 Place oil wipe as necessary
105. or defective battery Plug in the AC or DC adapter which will turn on the red charge status LED first If the battery is fully charged it will turn to green quickly A completely discharged battery will be charged to its full capacity within 10 hours In the survey mode the user may re calibrate the RAE This is a two point calibration process using Zero Gas and a Standard Reference Gas 1 2 First a zero gas which contains no detectable organic vapors is used to set the zero point CO Second a standard reference gas is used to set the second point of reference C1 Zero gas Calibration Use a gas bag 1 liter and zero concentration gas from your air box 1 Fill the gas bag with zero concentration gas Zero gas calibration option is the 5th menu option Display shows CO xxx x where x xxx is the gas reading based on current calibration of the instrument EISOPQAM 17 19 November 2001 2 Attach the gas bag to the inlet tube and open the bag so that the instrument can begin pumping the zero concentration gas The display should be reading zero If this reading is not zero press the enter key to zero it If the reading still shows a small value after a few seconds press the enter key again to zero it Repeat this process until the reading is stabilized around zero or 0 1 ppm This completes the zero gas calibration Press the menu key to exit zero gas calibration while the bag is still on the instrument Ent
106. organic compounds but limits its sensitivity to around 10 ppm under ideal circumstances The OVA s best response is to single bonded hydrocarbons such as methane and dichloroethane THE LACK OF A RESPONSE ON THIS METER DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE ENVIRONMENT IS SAFE Operational Checks 1 2 10 Connect the hand readout unit s electrical and pneumatic fittings to the side pack assembly Connect probe to the hand readout unit Place the PUMP switch in the ON position Check the battery s condition by placing the INSTR switch to the BATT position and observe the response on the hand readout unit Place the INSTR switch in the ON position Set the Calibration Switch to the X10 position Use the CALIBRATE knob to set the readout to a reading of 6 Using the Alarm Level Adjustment Knob on the back of the readout obtain an audible response to the reading of 6 Set the Calibration Switch to the X1 position Use the CALIBRATE knob to set the readout to a reading of 0 and check to insure that the flame out alarm is audible Place the PUMP switch in the ON position and observe that the SAMPLE FLOW RATE indicator shows flow Open the H TANK VALVE and the H SUPPLY VALVE one turn each Allow fuel to flow for about 1 minute EISOPQAM 17 16 November 2001 11 Press ignitor button and hold until readout unit indicates ignition 12 Use CALIBRATE knob to set readout to a reading of 0 Note a small
107. placed in the caps Teflon side to be in contact with the sample in the laboratory prior to the beginning of the sampling program EISOPQAM 5 33 November 2001 The vials should be completely filled to prevent volatilization and extreme caution should be exercised when filling a vial to avoid any turbulence which could also produce volatilization The sample should be carefully poured down the side of the vial to minimize turbulence As a rule it is best to gently pour the last few drops into the vial so that surface tension holds the water in a convex meniscus The cap is then applied and some overflow is lost but the air space in the bottle is eliminated After capping turn the bottle over and tap it to check for bubbles If any bubbles are present repeat the procedure with another clean 40 ml vial Since the VOC vials are pre preserved caution should be exercised when the vials are used as the collection device for surface water samples in order to prevent the loss of the preservative When collecting water samples for VOCs Three 40 ml vials containing preservative should be filled the with sample Soil samples for VOC analyses should be collected and handled as specified in section 12 4 Soil and sediment samples collected for VOC analyses should not be mixed 5 13 10 Estimating Variability Spacial Variability The following spacial duplicate sampling procedures should be used during the collection of samples as a measure of variabili
108. positive offset above 0 may be necessary to prevent activation of the flame out alarm Calibration 1 Assemble a calibration manifold as described in Section 17 1 using methane as the calibration gas Remember to omit the use of a Teflon bag 2 Set the CALIBRATION SWITCH to the appropriate position for the concentration of the calibration gas usually X10 3 Connect the instrument s probe to the calibration manifold and allow it to sample the calibration gas 4 The readout should indicate a value which is close to the concentration of the calibration gas plus any offset which may have been added 5 Place the CALIBRATION SWITCH in the X1 position before entering the site 17 7 Ludlum Model 3 Radiation Survey Meter Introduction The Ludlum Model 3 is a portable radiation survey meter The instrument is set for 900 volt Geiger Mueller Tube GMT measurement of beta and gamma radiation The range of the meter is from 0 to 200 milliroentgen per hour It is important that the operator realizes that this meter will not respond to most alpha radiation THE LACK OF A RESPONSE ON THIS METER DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE ENVIRONMENT IS SAFE Operational Checks 1 Place the multifunction switch in the BAT position and note the meter s reading 2 Place the multifunction switch in the X0 1 position the F S switch in the S position and the AUDIO switch in the ON position Note that an audible clicking sound can be heard while
109. proper length of tubing positioning it in the wastewater stream and sampler programming Protective gloves should be worn to reduce exposure and to maintain the integrity of the sample For a time composite sample the sampler should be programmed to collect at least 100 milliliter aliquots at a frequency that provides a representative sample and enough sample volume to conduct all required analyses For a flow proportional sample the sampler should be programmed to collect a minimum of 100 milliliters for each sample aliquot with the interval predetermined based on the flow of the monitored stream Atthe end of the compositing period the sample collected should be properly mixed and transferred into the respective containers followed by immediate preservation if required For routine inspections the permittee should be offered a split sample 9 4 3 Metals When an automatic sampler is used for collecting samples for metals analyses the entire sampler collection system should be rinsed with organic analyte free water and an equipment blank should be collected Approximately one half gallon of rinse water should be pumped through the sample tubing into the composite container and discarded Nitric acid must be added to the metals blank container for proper preservation The sampler may then be positioned in the appropriate location and the sampler program initiated If the sampler tubing is attached to a metal conduit pipe the sampler in
110. properly sealed on top of and or between the samples Fill all remaining space between the bottles or cans with vermiculite D 2 November 2001 10 11 EISOPQAM Securely fasten the top ofthe large garbage bag with tape preferably plastic electrical tape Place the Chain of Custody Record and the CLP Traffic Report Form if applicable into a plastic bag and tape the bag to the inner side of the cooler lid Close the cooler and securely tape preferably with fiber tape the top of the cooler shut Chain of custody seals should be affixed to the top and sides of the cooler within the securing tape so that the cooler cannot be opened without breaking the seal Shipping containers must be marked THIS END UP and arrow labels which indicate the proper upward position of the container should be affixed to the container A label containing the name and address of the shipper should be placed on the outside of the container Labels used in the shipment of hazardous materials e g Cargo Only Air Craft Flammable Solids etc are not permitted to be on the outside of containers used to transport environmental samples D 3 November 2001 D 4 References 1 Dangerous Goods Regulations International Air Transport Authority IATA Current Edition which changes annually 2 EPA Order 1000 18 February 16 1979 3 Final Regulation Package for Compliance with DOT Regulations in the Shipment of Environmental Laboratory Samples Memo
111. qn OL A SL1nS3H NYOS DOA SO 3903 IMONM NO asva c NOLLVAS3S80 91314 NO Q3sva L 400d 3T8VLINOI 100a JI8YLIN I 13431 94H X 02 SLNJNLILSNOO INY OL BEDEA SLNANLILSNGO qns OL JIdNYS A SOOA veiez FIN OL A Xe rez 3 18VLINOI LON A vc cR HOW 9608 ec ee cese suu I A 2 095 2 097 diquH jJ gt dois bd 5 V L92 ALPISVLINSI EMEN N doOls ON Y0 fs S1dWVS ON 4 TWH ID O I4 dld MOI x e T SALATWNY 4 ADALVULS ONS 4 Hd 220 dla did SNIN3332 073l4 3503 IMONM ALSVM 8 SSADOUd NOILVZIMSALOVYVHD ALSVM MOlvinoss y THNNOS3 3d Alva Vaoud November 2001 5 24 EISOPQAM 5 9 Wastewater Sampling Designs Introduction Wastewater sampling studies focus primarily on collecting wastewater samples of the influent or effluent at domestic and non domestic facilities Sampling activities are usually conducted for National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NPDES compliance compliance assistance civil and criminal investigations and water quality studies Collection of wastewater samples is necessary in order to aobtain reliable data that can support compliance or enforcement activities Specific sampling criteria for the collection of wastewater samples is given in Section
112. rapids and the quiet water sections e To isolate major discharges as well as major tributaries Dams and weirs cause changes in the physical characteristics of a stream They usually create quiet deep pools in river reaches that previously were swift and shallow Such impoundments should be bracketed with sampling stations When time of water travel through the pools are long stations should be established within the impoundments Some structures such as dams permit overflow and cause swirls in streams that accomplishes significant reaeration of oxygen deficient water In such cases stations should be located short distances upstream and downstream from the structures to measure the rapid artificial increase in dissolved oxygen which is not representative of natural reaeration When major changes occur in a stream reach an upstream station a downstream station and an intermediate station should be selected Major changes may consist of A wastewater discharge A tributary inflow e Non point source discharge farms or industrial sites and A significant difference in channel characteristics The use of three stations is especially important when rates of change of unstable constituents are being determined If results from one of only two stations in a subreach are in error for some unforeseen reason it may not be possible to judge which of the two sets of results indicate the actual rate of change Results from at least two
113. sample is obtained Thoroughly mix the sample as described in Section 5 13 8 of this SOP Transfer the contents of the glass pan into the appropriate containers Attach the previously prepared tags and submit for analyses EISOPQAM 13 12 November 2001 13 8 REFERENCES 1 2 Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Parts 260 265 US EPA July 1 2000 ASTM Standard Guide for Selection of Sampling Equipment for Wastes and Contaminated Media Data collection Activities D 6232 98 1998 ASTM Standard Guide for Sampling Stategies for Heterogeneous Wastes D 5956 96 1996 Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Physical Chemical Methods SW 846 Third Edition Draft Update IVB US EPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response Washington D C November 2000 Compendium of ERT Waste Sampling Procedures US EPA EPA 540 P 91 008 OSWER Directive 9360 4 07 January 1991 Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual Volume 1 Site Investigations US EPA EMSL Las Vegas EPA 600 4 84 075 April 1985 Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual Volume II Available Sampling Methods 2nd Edition US EPA EMSL Las Vegas EPA 600 4 84 076 December 1984 Federal Register Volume 55 Issuse 26 Page 26990 Friday June 29 1990 EISOPQAM 13 13 November 2001 SECTION 14 AMBIENT AIR MONITORING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To present the standard operating procedures and sample collect
114. ses cae ono eee et n a E p xS ex eb Rx 3 7 3 5 Field Records ui oadea scerss rqi etre d qo a PE CLR a a a aaa Hc rd d 3 8 3 6 Document Control asy eue nS Ero p e deir dE E 3 9 3 7 Disposal of Samples or Other Physical Evidence 3 10 3 8 Field Operations Records Management System FORMS 3 10 Figure 3 1 Chain of Custody Form 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 3 11 Figure 3 2 Media Codes iussis iaa te REG HRIG dA RET REG RUE 3 12 Figure 3 3 Sample Tag 4209 erxG RR PER IIR tonr CE REEREPRDE AP E ES 3 13 Figure 3 4 Receipt for Samples Form 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 14 Figure 3 5 EPA Custody Seal lt 2o22 lt 9 ouheeeutous REESE REPRE P FARE 3 15 SECTION 4 Branch Safety Protocols 0 0 0 0 0 cc ccc teens 4 1 EISOPQAM ToC ii November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 4 1 Introduction oocecec cr tkoe RR RE RECRA TRECE RET RE ERE 4 1 4 2 Hazard Communication Procedure 0 0000 cee eee 4 2 4 2 1 liceo M 4 04 98 ho 8 Behe E AO gO BANOS 4 ARS ERATE ORES 4 2 4 2 2 vv zt C PICPP rrrEERT 4 2 4 2 3 Labels and Other Forms of Warnings 0 0 ee ee eee eee ee 4 2 4 2 4 Material Safety Data Sheets MSDSs 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 3 4 2 5 The Hazard Chemical Inventory 23 os 00es442ee8eays REY wueesR ERR eX cats 4 4 4 3 Safety Protocols iino rbd 405948 3 IC RICH OE OP e ec 4 5 4 3 1 mite Safety Officer Duties 13229223422 RE AR
115. should be collected to measure sample handling variability An interactive approach may be used in an authoritative design to determine the extent of contamination on a site when the source can be identified Samples are typically collected using a pattern that radiates outward from the source The direction of contaminant migration may not be known which will result in the collection of more samples and in this case field screening would be desirable to help in determining appropriate sampling locations 5 5 4 Systematic Grid Sampling Designs for Soil Investigations In cases where both the presence of contaminants and the extent of contamination needs to be determined an authoritative design is inappropriate as site variability cannot be estimated without collecting an inordinate number of samples A systematic design is normally used during investigations when determining the extent of contamination such as remedial investigations and removal actions Once asite has reached the stage where the extent of contamination becomes an issue access to data from previous sampling efforts screening investigations which used an authoritative design is normally available The preliminary data can be used to estimate the variability of contaminant concentrations as a function of area and or depth for purposes of planning the more extensive systematic design In the absence of previous sampling data a variability study should be conducted An alternative wo
116. standard solutions within 0 5 C If the temperatures do not agree within 4 C the unit must be repaired or replaced Substitute the NIST traceable thermometer for temperature readings and apply necessary corrections Check and record the temperatures of the standards and the samples 2 Rinsethe probe with de ionized water and blot dry before immersing it in the standard solution One standard should be close to 1412 umhos cm 0 01 M KCL and the other standard should be in the expected range of the samples being measured 3 Immerse the probe in the first standard solution 0 01 M KCL and record the results The difference between the standard and the measured result is how the cell constant is determined Document the measurement in the logbook to calculate the cell constant to be used in the calculations if necessary 4 Rinse the probe blot dry and immerse it into the second standard solution and record results If the meter is not accurate to within 10 of the second standard the cell should be repaired or replaced if possible If this is not possible the cell constant can be adjusted by pressing the C TC C key until the cursor in right LCD display indicates TC Adjust TC to 0 00 by using the up down scroll keys Press the C TC C key to select the C mode Immerse cell into a solution of known conductivity e g 445 umhos cm 25 C Press the up down scroll keys until the meter indicates the known conductivity of the soluti
117. suggest that the guard call their superior on the telephone If the field investigators know the name of the responsible official they are to see they should request the guard call this individual directly If the company provides a general sign in sheet it is acceptable to sign it Field investigators shall not sign a release of liability waiver when entering a facility under the authority of Federal law If entry is refused field investigators shall not contest the issue with the facility representative but will immediately do the following Obtain the name and position of the individual denying entry to the facility and record the date and time Cite the appropriate EPA authority to conduct the inspection ask if the individual denying entry heard and understood the reason for your presence and record the answer and any reasons given for denial of entry Leave the premises immediately After leaving the facility the field investigators shall at the earliest possible time inform their immediate supervisor and the Office of Regional Counsel by telephone of the events which took place and seek guidance on how to proceed EISOPQAM 2 4 November 2001 2 3 4 Requesting Information The various laws and statutes under which EPA operates address the protection of trade secrets and confidential information As a general policy field investigators should not accept confidential information unless it is necessary for ca
118. supply wells or private residential wells where a well may be equipped with a dedicated pump from which a sample would not normally be collected Discretion should always be used in obtaining a sample 7 3 1 Equipment Available Because of the problems with most pumps described in the preceding paragraph only three devices should be used to collect ground water samples from most wells These are the peristaltic pump vacuum jug assembly a stainless steel and Teflon bladder pump and a closed top Teflon bailer Other monitoring equipment used during sampling includes water level indicators pH meters thermometers conductivity bridges and nephelometers turbidity meters 7 3 2 Sampling Techniques Wells With In Place Plumbing Samples should be collected following purging from a valve or cold water tap as near to the well as possible preferably prior to any storage pressure tanks that might be present Remove any hose that may be present before sample collection and reduce the flow to a low level to minimize sample disturbance particularly with respect to volatile organic constituents Samples should be collected directly into the appropriate containers see Standard Sample Containers Appendix A It may be necessary to use a secondary container such as a clean 8 oz sample jar or a stainless steel scoop to obtain and transfer samples from spigots with low ground clearance Also refer to the Potable Water Supply discussion in Section 2
119. tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and date During steps 1 through 5 as outlined above and immediately after assembling pressure should be applied to the apparatus after each rinse step water and acid to drive the rinse material through the porous glass filter holder in the bottom of the apparatus When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to remove materials it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with the first step In extreme cases it may be necessary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step 1 If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures it should be discarded C 5 10 Organic Analyte Free Water Storage Containers NOTE These containers will be used only for transporting organic analyte free water 1 Wash containers thoroughly interior and exterior with hot tap water and laboratory detergent using a bottle brush to remove particulate matter and surface film 2 Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water 3 Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid 4 Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water 5 Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water 6 Rinse containers thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 7 Cap with aluminum foil or T
120. the cell with de ionized water For the next sample repeat Steps 1 8 Operational check 1 2 Units Periodically check the turbidity meter during the day by using the gelex secondary standards provided Preform a post calibration at the end of the day and record all measurements Turbidity measurements are reported in nephelometric turbidity units NTUs Itis important to note that if the turbidity measurements are for NPDES reporting purposes all values above 40 NTU must be diluted with turbidity free water and calculated by multiplying by a dilution factor EISOPQAM 16 7 November 2001 16 6 Salinity Salinity is the measure of salts of the alkali metals or of magnesium found in water This measurement is based on the direct proportionality between the magnitude of an induced electric current and the electrical conductivity of the water in which itis induced Salinity is the total amount of salts in grams in 1 Kg of sea water expressed as parts per thousand Meters available Beckman Model RS5 3 Portable Salinometer e Hydrolab Surveyor II e Scout e Datasone Salinometer Calibration Maintenance Follow the manufacturer s instructions e Routinely check the Beckman meter against a resistor matched to the meter Procedures The Beckman has an accuracy of 0 3 parts per thousand ppt salinity 0 05 C temperature and 0 5 millimhos cm specific conductance The Hydrolab Surveyor II Scout and Dat
121. the month date and UTC hour in the data files as indicated above and also in the same year in Pathfinder Office software on the PC select Utilities then Differential Correction Select the rover file s more than one may be selected to be differentially corrected If the base station files were placed in the Base subdirectory as mentioned above select Local Search and the base station files that match the data files will be highlighted Select Ok The differentially corrected files will be placed in the Project directory with a cor extension and the processing should be set to Smart Code and Carrier Phase Processing After all of the above procedures are followed select Ok to start the differential correction process To view the corrected files select File then Open and the corrected files should be highlighted Select Ok to view then scan through the features to make sure all positions were differentially corrected Export to ARC INFO Arcview GIS In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select Utilities then Export Select the Input Files for export highlighted By default the Output Folder where files are exported is C Pfdata Project Export In Choose an Export Setup select Sample Arcview Shapefile Setup then click Properties Data Type of data to export Features Positions and Attributes and pulldown Export All Features Position Filter Filter by GPS Position Info Minimum Satellites 3d 4 or more Svs Maximum PDO
122. the new employee will be permitted to perform all facets of field investigations including sampling under the direction and supervision of senior investigators 5 13 3 Traceability Requirements All sample collection activities shall be traceable through field records to the person collecting the sample and to the specific piece of sampling equipment where appropriate used to collect that sample AII maintenance and calibration records for sampling equipment where appropriate shall be kept so that they are similarly traceable See Sections 3 1 through 3 6 for specific procedures to be utilized that insure traceability 5 13 4 Chain of Custody Specific chain of custody procedures are included in Sections 3 1 through 3 6 of this SOP These procedures will insure that evidence collected during an investigation will withstand scrutiny during litigation To assure that procedures are being followed it is recommended that field investigators or their designees audit chain of custody entries tags field notes and any other recorded information for accuracy 5 13 5 Sampling Equipment Construction Material Sampling equipment construction materials can affect sample analytical results Materials used must not contaminate the sample being collected and must be easily decontaminated so that samples are not cross contaminated EISOPQAM 5 31 November 2001 5 13 6 Sample Preservation Samples for some analyses must be preserved in order to mainta
123. their initial assignment and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area Information provided to personnel will consist of the following e Requirements of this Hazard Communication Procedure e Operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present and e Location and availability of this Hazard Communication Procedure in this SOP the Hazardous Chemical Inventory List on the LAN and the locations of MSDSs as stated in Section 4 2 4 EISOPQAM 4 4 November 2001 Training provided to personnel will consist of Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area e g monitoring conducted by the Branch Safety Officer or a designee continuous monitoring devices visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released etc The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area Measures such as appropriate work practices emergency procedures and personal protective equipment to be used by personnel to protect themselves from these hazards and specific procedures to be implemented to protect them from exposure to hazardous chemicals and The details of this Hazard Communication Procedure including an explanation of the labeling system and the MSDSs and how personnel can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information 4 3 Safety Protocols 4 3 1 Site Safety Officer Duties The following is a list of duties that
124. this document The analyst should read and understand the manual for a complete description of the manual calibration process The manual calibration is initiated using the front panel control The steps are outlined as follows From the MAIN MENU screen use the arrow keys to highlight CALIBRATE and press lt Enter gt to start the calibration From the CALIBRATE MENU screen highlight TYPE and press Enter Select the INJECT option and press lt Enter gt From the CALIBRATE MENU screen highlight CALIB and press Enter From the CALIBRATE CYCLE screen highlight FULL and press lt Enter gt From the CALIBRATE CALIB screen highlight BOTH and press Enter EISOPQAM 14 15 November 2001 The calibration begins with the Clean Cartridge A cycle and proceeds to the Clean Cartridge B cycle followed by the Zero Cartridge A Zero Cartridge B Span Cartridge A and finally Span Cartridge B cycle During the Span cycles the instrument will prompt the analyst when it is time to inject the primary standard The amount of standard required is calculated and preset during method development After a successful calibration the instrument will calculate the results for both cartridges including their Blank Correction Blcorr and Response Factor Respfctr The operator should ensure that the response factor does not change more than 10 between calibrations or corrective maintence may be necessary Now the instrument is ready to measur
125. time different from the original sample The time selected for the temporal duplicate sample will be within the same span of time for which the original sample is designed to be representative in the project work plan Data from temporal duplicates will be examined by the project leader to determine if samples represent the time span intended in the project work plan Sample Handling Variability The effectiveness of sample handling techniques will be measured by collecting split and blank samples Split Samples Split samples will be collected by initially collecting twice as much material as is normally collected fora sample After mixing the material will be apportioned into two sets of containers Both sets of containers will be submitted for analyses with one set designated as an original sample the other designated as a split sample Data from split samples will be examined by the Quality Assurance Officer to determine sample handling variability On large studies more than 20 samples no more than 10 percent of all samples will be collected as split samples EISOPQAM 5 34 November 2001 Blank Samples The following blank samples will be prepared by the laboratory and obtained by the project leader prior to traveling to a sample site 1 Water Sample VOC Trip Blank A water sample VOC trip blank is required for every study where water samples are collected for VOC analysis Two sealed preserved or unpreserved if appropriate
126. to speed up the cool down time This will not bias the results Allow the water to evaporate completely and the rod tip should be cool to the touch before using it in the test CAUTION DO NOT IMMERSE A HOT ROD INTO A POTENTIALLY FLAMMABLE MATERIAL 4 Immerse the cooled wire and rod tip into the test material for approximately 10 seconds 5 Remove the wetted wire tip from the test material and allow the excess material to drip back into the container Note Highly viscous material which sticks to the tip may produce a large flame 6 Place wetted wire into the flame and observe the color produced Note A bright green flame indicates the presence of halogenated material EISOPQAM 16 15 November 2001 16 11 References Temperature 1 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition p 2 59 Method 2550 B 1992 2 Methods for Chemical Analyses of Water and Wastes US EPA 170 1 1983 Specific Conductance Conductivity 3 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition p 2 43 Method 2510B 1992 4 Annual Book of ASTM Standards Vol 11 1 Water Standard D1125 91A P 202 5 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 120 1 1983 6 Instruction Manual SoluBridge RB 5 RB 6 Beckman Instruments Inc Rev January 1982 7 Surveyor II Operating Manual Hydrolab Corporation Rev A February 1985 8 YSI Model 3560 Water Quality Monitoring Syst
127. unit with a range of 0 to 14 and equipped with a temperature compensation adjustment Meter s available e Orion Model 230A or 290A e Hydrolab Surveyor II e YSI 3530 3500 Water Quality Monitoring System Calibration Because of the wide variety of pH meters and accessories detailed operating instructions cannot be incorporated into this method Each analyst should become acquainted with the operation of the meter used and follow manufacturer s instructions The following calibration guidelines are minimum requirements The meter is calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions by the FEC before it is taken into the field A two point calibration verification should be used to ensure the accuracy of the meter All field pH meters are verified against a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST traceable thermometer the Hanna Instruments CheckTemp 1 or equivalent at least semi annually These verification checks are documented in a logbook and maintained at the FEC Labels are placed on the pH meters to indicate when the next temperature verification check is required EISOPQAM 16 4 November 2001 Note Procedures 1 Make sure the meter is warmed up as per manufacturer s directions Verify the meter s internal temperature sensor against a NIST traceable Fisher brand stem type digital thermometer or equivalent and note any differences in the logbook If the temperature readings agree within 4 C
128. used the sample must be transferred to the final sample container EnCore or 40 ml pre prepared vial as soon as possible not to exceed 30 minutes EISOPQAM 12 6 November 2001 NOTE After collection of the sample into either the EnCore Sampler or other container the sample must immediately be stored in an ice chest and cooled Soil sediment samples may be prepared for shipping and analysis as follows EnCore M Sampler the sample may simply be capped locked and secured in a plastic bag Syringe Add about 3 7 cc approximately 5 grams of sample material to 40 ml pre prepared containers Secure the containers in a plastic bag Do not use a custody seals on the container place the custody seal on the plastic bag Note When using the syringes it is important that no air is allowed to become trapped behind the sample prior to extrusion as this will adversely affect the sample Stainless Steel Laboratory Spatulas Add between 4 5 and 5 5 grams approximate of sample material to 40 ml containers Secure the containers in a plastic bag Do not use a custody seal on the container place the custody seal on the plastic bag 12 4 3 Sampling Methodology High Concentrations Based upon the data quality objectives and the detection level requirements this high level method may also be used Specifically the sample may be packed into a single 2 oz glass container with a screw cap and septum seal The sample container must be filled qui
129. using safety shower eye wash or sink as required Seek medical attention as soon as possible Notify the designated Safety Officer or management in the event of any injury EISOPQAM G 3 November 2001 Procedure 1 T Turn charger s control knob to 0 Place charger s power switch in the OFF position Place the 240 volt power supply box switch in the OFF position and lock out the switch Replace all battery cell filler caps Disconnect all terminal clips Check all batteries with the load tester Any batteries not indicating in the green arc or slightly above will be red tagged and stored in the Discharged Battery Area Those batteries indicating a sufficient charge on the load tester are to be placed in a battery box and stored in the Charged Battery Area Record the status of all batteries removed from the bench in the Battery Log Book G 4 Maintenance During the first week of each month the following maintenance procedures will be performed at the battery building The individual performing the maintenance will complete a maintenance report and submit it to the designated Safety Officer Procedure 1 EISOPQAM Sweep floor Empty trash can Check battery acid carboy If more than half full note on the maintenance report Check contents of the acid spill kit If contents have been depleted note on the maintenance report Check contents of the first aid kit If contents have been depleted note on the
130. water depth due to flow variations e In sampling from wide conduits cross sectional sampling should be considered Rhodamine WT dye See Section 15 7 for references may be used as an aid in determining the most repre sentative sampling locations f manual compositing is employed the individual sample portions must be thoroughly mixed before pouring the individual aliquots into the composite container For manual composite sampling the individual sample aliquots should be preserved at the time of sample collection 2 When collecting samples or installing sampling equipment field investigators should always wear a new pair of the appropriate protective gloves disposable latex gloves rubber gloves etc to prevent contamination of the sample and reduce exposure to hazardous substances 9 2 Site Selection Where applicable wastewater samples should be collected at the location specified in the NPDES permit 1f the source has a permit In some instances the sampling location specified in the permit or the location chosen by the permittee may not be acceptable for the collection of a representative wastewater sample In such instances the investigator is not limited by permit specifications and may collect a sample at a more representative location When a conflict exists between the permittee and the regulatory agency regarding the most representative sampling location both sites should be sampled and the reason for the conflic
131. well construction may cause cross contamination and or when flowing sands make it impossible to install a monitoring well using conventional methods A pilot borehole should be bored through the overburden and or the contaminated zone into the clay confining layer or bedrock An outer casing sometimes called surface or pilot casings should then be placed into the borehole and sealed with grout The borehole and outer casing should extend into tight clay a minimum of two feet and into competent bedrock a minimum of 1 foot The total depths into the clay or bedrock will vary depending on the plasticity of the clay and the extent of weathering and or fracturing of the bedrock The final depths should be approved by a senior field geologist The size of the outer casing should be of sufficient inside diameter ID to contain the inner casing and the 2 inch minimum annular space In addition the borehole should be of sufficient size to contain the outer casing and the 2 inch minimum outer annular space if applicable The outer casing should be grouted by the tremie method from the bottom to within 2 feet of the ground surface The grout should be pumped into the annular space between the outer casing and the borehole wall This can be accomplished by either placing the tremie tube in the annular space and pumping the grout from the bottom of the borehole to the surface or placing a grout shoe or plug inside the casing at the bottom of the borehole and pump
132. with waste matrices when the constituent of interest is associated with one component of the matrix An example would be slag contaminated with lead that is mixed with otherwise uncontaminated fire brick Thus the lead is stratified by component that being the slag Stratified sampling designs are discussed later which incorporate independent sampling of each strata thereby reducing the number of samples required Some environmental and waste matrices may be for purposes of the field investigation homogeneous for instance the surface water in a limited segment of a small stream If the composition of the matrix and the distribution of contaminants are known or can be estimated less sampling may be necessary to define the properties of interest An estimate of the variability in contaminant distribution may be based on knowledge or determined by preliminary sampling The more heterogeneous the matrix the greater the planning and sampling requirements EISOPQAM 5 5 November 2001 A population could also have very localized strata or areas of contamination that are referred to as hot spots Specific procedures for hot spot identification and characterization are available in Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring 5 5 3 4 Specific Sampling Designs Sampling strategies used by the Branch typically fall into two general groups authoritative or probabilistic Authoritative also known as directed subjective and or bia
133. without leaving obvious indications of the attempt Labels should never be placed over previously recorded information Corrections to information recorded on stick on labels should be made as stated above Following are definitions of terms used in this section Project Leader The individual with overall responsibility for conducting a specific field investigation in accordance with this SOP Field Sample Custodian Individual responsible for maintaining custody of the samples and completing the sample tags and Chain of Custody Record Sample Team Leader An individual designated by the project leader to be present during and responsible for all activities related to the collection of samples by a specific sampling team Sampler The individual responsible for the actual collection of a sample Transferee Any individual who receives custody of samples subsequent to release by the field sample custodian Laboratory Sample Custodian Individual responsible for accepting custody of samples from the field sample custodian or a transferee One individual may fulfill more than one of the roles described above EISOPQAM 3 1 November 2001 3 2 Sample and Evidence Identification PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To accurately identify samples and evidence collected 3 2 1 Sample Identification The method of sample identification used depends on the type of sample collected In situ field samples are those collected for specific field anal
134. 0 degrees at a time and the horizontal level bubble is checked and brought level using the three screw leveling heads The instrument is ready for use when after repeated rotations the bubble in the horizontal level remains exactly in the center or middle of its housing The rodman has either a range pole equipped with a reflector prism single or triple or a tripod with the reflector prism The prism is used to reflect the signal from the electronic distance meter in the total station theodolite While located over the point s whose location is desired the rodman holds the range pole vertically by means of centering the bulls eye bubble or sets up the tripod and reflector prism similarly as stated above The instrument man sights through the telescope on the theodolite lines up the horizontal and vertical cross hairs on the center of the prism and records the horizontal angle H lt vertical angle V lt or zenith angle Z lt and the slope distance Ds to the prism The difference in location between the point where the theodolite is set up and the point where the prism is held is determined trigonometrically A compass and measuring tape could also be used to reference field measurements to a map or vice versa The following examples depict some of the field measurements that must be considered and accounted for the calculations that must be performed and the conversions that must be made when traverse methods are used to horizontally loc
135. 0 mm Hg Digital manometers used to determine flow rates will be checked against a U Tube water manometer prior to use in each study e Air Monitoring Staff personnel will remove a 2 inch strip of the exposed filter from one end and discard it Two 1 inch strips will be cut from the same end and transported to the laboratory for analysis Integrated Sample Collection The following procedures should be followed to collect time integrated samples Initial and final flow rates will be determined with a calibrated orifice and a digital manometer e After the sample has been collected the filter will be folded lengthwise and placed in a filter holder The filter holder is then placed in an envelope and the envelope sealed A Chain Of Custody Record should be completed which contains the time of sampling the sampling interval and the signature of the person taking the sample After sample collection all sample envelopes will be placed in an appropriate container An EPA custody seal will be placed on the container Filters will be cut by the Air Monitoring Staff and transported to the laboratory for analysis EISOPQAM 14 12 November 2001 14 3 5 Standard Operating Procedure for Mercury Analysis of Air Using the Tekran Mercury Vapour Analyzer model 2537A The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for continuous monitoring of gaseous mercury in ambient air Instrument operation The Tekran
136. 00 0 eee C 14 C 6 1 Introduction E Em C 14 C 6 2 Plastic Containers used for Classical Parameters 0 0 00 c eee eee ee C 14 C 6 3 Glass Bottles for Semi Volatile GC MS Analytes 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee C 15 C 6 4 Glass Bottles for Volatile GC MS and TOX Analyses 0 0 00 2 0 eee eee C 15 C 6 5 Plastic Bottles for ICP Analytes eeeeeeeeee III C 16 APPENDIX D Sample Shipping Procedures D 1 IntFOOUCUOH uua osacev esc PECORI aS ee ER aei a aiD S Ga ELO D 1 D 2 Shipment of Dangerous Goods luulillleel ilie else D 1 D 3 Shipment of Environmental Laboratory Samples D 1 D 4 Dogg A p D 4 EISOPQAM ToC xii November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS APPENDIX E Pump Operating Procedures 0 0 eee eee eee eese E 1 E 1 Peristal c Pump se Agee Re HER bec aco OR ed ee cts E 1 E 1 1 Introduction siei cas bak etd bide eed A iso RP oes bb er bee E dns E 1 E 1 2 Purging with a Peristaltic Pump 0 0 cece eee tence eee E 1 E 1 3 Sampling with a Peristaltic Pump seeeeeeeeee eee eee E 2 E 2 Large Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps 02 00 005 E 3 E 2 1 Introduction uem ee Ree eR SER REIHE ER ede erre wee E 3 E 2 2 SAlelyscsd cuu tat alae Prts aig bp gan A E E al hte dee aed gah gana d dc mene E 3 E 2 3 Pre loadout Checkout Procedure 0 0 0 0c cc cent
137. 1 LEVEL A LEVEL D with chemical resistant rubber boots with steel toe and shank REQUIRED f i Totally encapsulating chemical protective suit Positive pressure full face piece self contained breathing apparatus SCBA airline system Boot covers disposable OPTIONAL Cool vests and heat stress monitors if ambient temperature is 80 F or less The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the highest level of LEVEL A protection for skin eyes and the respiratory system is used when l f Measurements by direct reading detecting equipment show concentrations high enough to pose a hazard through skin contact Operations are being conducted in confined poorly ventilated areas not normally intended for human occupation and conditions requiring a lower level of protection have not been determined 1 e Levels B C or D NOTE 1 Level A operations require decontamination of personnel and equipment Also zones of protection are required Confined space operations require special training and compliance with OSHA permit required confined space entry procedures Level A operations are hazardous duty due to the nature of the equipment worn and the inability to mitigate the risk of fire explosion NOTE2 When wearing a totally encapsulated chemical protective suit Level A e Cool vests are required when wearing a totally encapsulated chemical protective suit for more than 30 minutes and the tempera
138. 150ml ml P PGW W lie sf 6 Hours Hours ae ete RN ee Water and Waste Water Organic Compounds Analysis Amt Container Preservative Holding Type Time Dioxin Dibenzofurans ac fun E ice 0 4 C Dioxin Dibenzofurans residual chlorine 2T ice 0 4 C 80 mg FRE thiosulfate eos Methane Ethane Ethene 120ml ml los Ra HClpHe2 ie ice Extractable Organic Compounds pesticides 1 gal PCBs Extractable Organic Compounds 1 gal 3 ml of 10 sodium pesticides PCBs residual chlorine present thiosulfate per gallon Volatile J Compounds 120 ml las HCI pH lt 2 ice Volatile Volatile Organic Compounds Compounds 120 ml a NaHSO pH 2 ice Volatile Organic Compounds residual 120 ml HCI pH 2 ice chlorine m m ET Volatile Volatile Organic compounds TCLP compounds TCLP 120 ml ml EISOPQAM A 3 November 2001 Water and Waste Water Inorganic Compounds ee E N ET Ammonia 0 IP aso HO pH lt 2 ice ice O dM sos pe je e b mw ue je e i Lowe eu enr p ns e me ue je w m De Te e e oaa f mws oon gt e n ama ie one ome moie ue e sete n ec 0 ue je ooe m meu a e js memes ue e mom m eee eje dw 0 je Mew te mew s ewe e je m s Meus ue jr mos m
139. 2 All measurements for pH specific conductance temperature and turbidity should be recorded at the time of measurement EISOPQAM 7 7 November 2001 7 3 3 Sampling Techniques Wells without Plumbing Following purging samples should be collected using a peristaltic pump vacuum jug assembly a TeflonG stainless steel bladder pump or a closed top Teflon bailer These techniques are described below Peristaltic pump vacuum jug The peristaltic pump vacuum jug can be used for sample collection because it allows for sample collection without the sample coming in contact with the pump tubing This is accomplished by placing a Teflon transfer cap assembly onto the neck of a standard cleaned 4 liter 1 gallon glass container Teflon tubing l4 inch O D connects the container to both the pump and the sample source The pump creates a vacuum in the container thereby drawing the sample into the container without it coming into contact with the pump tubing Samples for volatile organic compound analysis should be collected using a bailer or by filling the Teflon tube by one of two methods and allowing it to drain into the sample vials The tubing can be momentarily attached to the pump to fill the tube with water After the initial water is discharged through the pump head the tubing is quickly removed from the pump and a gloved thumb placed on the tubing to stop the water from draining out The tubing is then removed from the well and the
140. 2 2 Scoops Stainless steel scoops are useful for reaching out into a body of water to collect a surface water sample The scoop may be used directly to collect and transfer a surface water sample to the sample container or it may be attached to an extension in order to access the selected sampling location The scoop is one of the most versatile sampling tools available to the field investigator 10 2 3 Peristaltic Pumps Another device that can be effectively used to sample a water column such as a shallow pond is the peristaltic pump vacuum jug system The use of a metal conduit to which the tubing is attached allows for the collection of a vertical sample to about a 25 foot depth which is representative of the water column Commercially available pumps vary in size and capability with some being designed specifically for the simultaneous collection of multiple water samples EISOPQAM 10 1 November 2001 10 2 4 Discrete Depth Samplers When discrete samples are desired from a specific depth and the parameters to be measured do not require a Teflon coated sampler a standard Kemmerer or Van Dorn sampler may be used The Kemmerer sampler is a brass cylinder with rubber stoppers that leave the ends of the sampler open while being lowered in a vertical position thus allowing free passage of water through the cylinder The Van Dorn sampler is plastic and is lowered in a horizontal position In each case a messenger is sent down a rope when t
141. 2001 6 4 7 Concrete Surface Pad A concrete surface pad should be installed around each well at the same time as the outer protective casing is being installed The surface pad should be formed around the well casing Concrete should be placed into the pad forms and into the borehole on top of the grout in one operation making a contiguous unit The size of the concrete surface pad is dependent on the well casing size If the well casing 1s 2 inches in diameter the pad should be 3 feet x 3 feet x 4 inches If the well casing is 4 inches in diameter the pad should be 4 feet x 4 feet x 6 inches Round concrete surface pads are also acceptable The finished pad should be slightly sloped so that drainage will flow away from the protective casing and off of the pad A minimum of one inch of the finished pad should be below grade to prevent washing and undermining by soil erosion 6 4 8 Surface Protection Bumper Guards If the monitoring wells are located in a high traffic area a minimum of three bumper guards consisting of steel pipes 3 to 4 inches in diameter and a minimum 5 foot length should be installed These bumper guards should be installed to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the ground surface in a concrete footing and extend a minimum of 3 feet above ground surface Concrete should also be placed into the steel pipe to provide additional strength Substantial steel rails and or other steel materials can be used in place of steel pipe Welding ba
142. 4 using a drill rig Alternatively boreholes may be constructed using hand augers or portable powered augers generally limited to depths of ten feet or less If a drill rig is used to advance the borehole the augers must be pulled back the length of the well screen or removed completely prior to sampling When hand augers are used the borehole is advanced to the desired depth or to the point where borehole collapse occurs In situations where borehole collapse occurs the auger bucket is typically left in the hole at the point of collapse while the temporary well is assembled When the well is completely assembled a final auger bucket of material is quickly removed and the well is immediately inserted into the borehole pushing as needed to achieve maximum penetration into the saturated materials EISOPQAM 6 16 November 2001 6 10 5 Temporary Monitoring Well Types Five types of monitoring wells which have been shown to be acceptable are presented in the order of increasing difficulty to install and increasing cost No Filter Pack This is the most common temporary well and is very effective in many situations After the borehole is completed the casing and screen are simply inserted This is the most inexpensive and fastest well to install This type well is extremely sensitive to turbidity fluctuations because there is no filter pack Care should be taken to not disturb the casing during purging and sampling Inner Filter Pack
143. 4 654 265 E 6588 30 E MCT2 MW4 249 56 39 88 32 48 VE es E STD Set H lt MCT2 A seceam o vv a em N 7935 04 MCT2 A TP1 305 268 ween 602 635 E 617878 E 12750 N 7724 21 MCT2 A MW5 3091333 91 10 36 12747 E 648955 Example 5 continued Figure 15 2 6 Second page of traverse field notation EISOPQAM 15 9 November 2001 15 2 5 Procedures for Differential GPS Differential GPS involves the use of two or more multichannel receivers One or more are used as the rover receiver s and usually only one is used as the base station The base station and the rover s should be within 200 to 300 miles of each other in order to increase the accuracy of the measurements accuracy increases as separation between base and rover decreases and have a clear view of the sky The base is set up on a control point of known horizontal location usually expressed in terms of latitude longitude and elevation Trilaterated coordinate positions from the satellites are recorded at the base which will be compared to the actual horizontal control point coordinates for the development of a correction factor to be applied to other roving GPS units Since the base station receiver and the rover receiver s synchronize with the satellite s clocks data must be recorded or logged by both receivers at the exact same time in order for the correction factor to be applicable Often times base station data will be obtained via modem disk or internet a
144. 4 7 14 3 1 Formaldehyde Sampling with Dinitrophenylhydrazine Cartridges using Method TOA osecao be ect escena eb por aed Rae 14 7 14 3 2 Volatile Organic Compounds VOC Sampling with SUMMA Electro polished Stainless Steel or Silcosteel Canisters Using Method TO 15A 14 9 14 3 3 Sampling for Semi Volatile Organic Compounds SVOC Analysis with High Volume PUF Samplers Using Methods TO 4A amp TO 13A 14 10 14 3 4 Collecting Samples for Metals Analysis Using the High Volume Sampler 14 12 14 3 5 Standard Operating Procedure for Mercury Analysis of Air Using the Tekran Mercury Vapour Analyzer model 2537A 0 0 cece eee eee 14 13 14 3 6 Sampling for Dioxin and Dibenzofuran Analyses with High Volume PUF Samplers Using Method TO 9A 0 0 cee eee eee 14 16 14 3 7 Mercury Sampling Using Gold Coated Glass Bead Tubes 14 17 14 3 8 Standard Operating Procedure for Chlorofluorocarbon CFC 14 19 EISOPQAM ToC viii November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS SECTION 15 Field Physical Measurements lelsls esee 15 1 15 1 Introduction 2 2 osscsusierEA duh RE EE erE RR S PERIESE RAPERE da RPE 15 1 15 2 Horizontal Location Surveys 00 cece eects 15 1 15 2 1 Introduction 44 54 63 6 oe anauen nan 15 1 15 2 2 Equipment Available icc cde casensndcvidevasdtecdeesneeasdenneesoen ss 15 3 15 2 3 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedur
145. 40 samples would be required at the same CV of 0 65 If the investigators change the confidence level then the numbers in the table provided would change accordingly If the confidence level is decreased to 80 then the required number of samples reflected in this table would be lower for each margin of error and CV combination EISOPQAM 5 12 November 2001 Establishment of the Grid Having determined the number of samples to collect the project leader should then determine how to disperse the samples within the site Commonly a grid system is used The number of grids is equal to the number of samples required for a systematic grid design Grids may also be used to determine sampling locations when using a random design however with this type of design every grid is not sampled The size of the grids is calculated by dividing the area of the site by the number of samples required The product of this calculation is the area of each grid By taking the square root of the grid area the length of a grid side is determined G a n Where G length per side of each individual grid a area n number of samples required The length of a grid size should be rounded down to some number convenient for the method used in laying out the grid e g plane survey geographical positioning system GPS etc Rounding down the grid size will increase the number of samples slightly It is important to remember that the number of samples c
146. 49 N06 53 11 W 06 35 N06 35 E EXAMPLE 4 Coordinates When the local State rectangular grid coordinate points near a particular site are obtained personnel should be able to convert rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates This is important since through this conversion the azimuths and distances between each point can be obtained and then used as the starting control points for the site control traverse Computers or simple programmable or non programmable calculators are extremely useful in providing precise results from the field surveying measurements The following is an example of manual conversion from rectangular to polar coordinates The instrument is set up at JORDANSS and given the rectangular coordinates Control Point North y JORDAN88 9302 24 SONIA93 8811 19 East x 5605 23 5706 13 The relative change in location between the north and east coordinates from JORDANSS to SONIA93 respectively are AN 491 05 AE 100 90 EISOPQAM 15 7 November 2001 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 Example 4 Figure 15 2 4 Map view showing change in direction from JORDAN88 to SONIA93 The negative symbol for AN indicates the relative movement from JORDAN88 to SONIA93 downward along the y axis Figure 15 2 4 The positive symbol for AE indicates relative movement from JORDANSS to SONIA93 to the right along the x axis Solving for the formula Pyth
147. 5 0 osos xc de e REPRE ESSE RR IU Z2 SODOD uoe fere RE irr ter nie ede eG EREMO RE Geese we ERE IEEE 10 53 Perstaltic PullipS osea eosec PAPE ExEr Rex T E E RENT USUS PET WERE 10 2 4 Discreet Depth Samplers 4 44 dest I enRP RR PUE RR SUEDE TRIER 1053 Ballers zesrann meate ek dad iR ERE PR dad ix a Rees du edis v2 EMPIRE SECTION 11 Sediment Sampling eeeeeeeeeee nen 11 1 Introduction 41 o9 RR eRIE RA DeREER I DMRDRIECE PER Besser AREE EE 11 2 Sediment Sampling Equipment Luuuses sese lees 11 2 1 Scoops and Spoons iis a a UR ak E E ERA HERE dee A da swa d dep 1122 JDT HSER Secreto aresep ee sede eee adsense NEL EX E L E Ps I 11 23 COMDE ssevane sega I We RREEAEExEIDADO RES RESO E REX EH E CREEN ee 11 3 Special Consideration for Collection of Samples for Volatile Organic CompouUds 12 ebazuekeceka a ERE ReRE UM e v pad RE RR Wd rep ad RE E SECTION 12 Soil Sampling iiicuuaesuessuserezeXzXxtA RARE RE AER 12 1 Introduction i ocd deze doekeGeeseeseen becker READ hee ha qu ad 122 Equipment me 12 2 1 Precautions for trace Contaminant Soil Sampling sess 12 3 Sampling Methodology 0 0 cece cee nes 12 3 1 Manual Collection Techniques and Equipment 0000 12 3 2 Powered Equipment lt gisctacous cibi E TIERE EXER AE ER USER EAE E 12 4 Soil Sediment Sampling Method 5035 LLsuss 12 4 1 PQUIPMCIG 2o ror iia e ET IDAT REFER RUE b
148. 56 American Society of Testing Materials 1985 Annual Book of ASTM Standards Volume 11 Water American Society of Testing Materials Philadelphia Pennsylvania 1985 EISOPQAM 18 8 November 2001 SECTION 19 SOIL GAS SAMPLING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To present the standard operating procedures and sample collection methodologies for conducting soil gas sampling 19 1 Introduction This section discusses the sample collection procedures used for conducting soil gas sampling in Region 4 These procedures include both manual implantation of passive devices GORE SORBER Modules as well as direct push Geoprobe installations for both grab sampling and long term permanent installations 19 1 4 GORE SORBER Implants Soil gas screening surveys may be conducted with GORE SORBER Modules patented passive soil vapor sampling devices Organic compounds commonly detected using GORE SORBER Modules include fluorinated and chlorinated solvents straight and branched chain aliphatics aromatics and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons PAHs Many of these compounds are associated with a wide range of petroleum products including gasoline mineral spirits heating oils creosotes and coal tars GORE SORBER Screening Surveys have also been used successfully to screen for nitroaromatic explosives Description Of GORE SORBER Screening Modules A typical GORE SORBER Screening Module consists of several separate GORE SORBER pass
149. 9 of this SOP The main considerations in developing a wastewater sampling strategy are e Type of study Compliance Sampling Inspection Diagnostic Evaluation etc e Regulated or target pollutants in the wastewater stream to be sampled e Selection of the projected sampling locations to satisfy the study objectives Quality control criteria of the parameters to be sampled oil and grease samples need to be collected as grab samples trip blanks are taken into the field for the collection of samples for volatile organic compound analyses etc Complexity of the sampling program will vary with a number of factors Some primary factors are The number of sampling stations to be monitored This will be dependent on NPDES permit requirements and the type of study typically Toxic CSIs and DEs require a greater amount of sampling stations than a routine CSI e Special handling requirements of the target pollutants sampling equipment for trace organic compounds require special cleaning procedures etc e Laboratory conducting the analyses use of a contract laboratory may require shipping from the field etc e Accessibility to sampling stations e Process and operation criteria of the source generator e g batch operation versus continuous discharge e Coordination of participating organizations in the study e g state assistance with the sample collection e The length of time for sampling activities will dictate logi
150. A PL 92 500 The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA PL 94 580 The Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendments HSWA of 1984 The Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act Superfund The Superfund Amendments and Re authorization Act SARA of 1986 The Clean Air Act CAA 42 U S C 1857 1857L as amended e The Toxic Substances Control Act TSCA PL 94 469 2 3 2 Facility Entry Authority Various federal environmental statutes grant EPA enforcement personnel authority to enter and inspect facilities The authority granted in each statute is similar to that stated below in Section 308 of the Clean Water Act a B the Administrator or his authorized representative upon presentation of his credentials 1 shall have a right of entry to upon or through any premises in which an effluent source is located or in which any records required to be maintained are located and ii may at reasonable times have access to and copy any records inspect any monitoring equipment or method required and sample any effluents which the owner or operator of such source is required to sample For the specific requirements for conducting inspections and collecting data pursuant to a particular Act see Section 308 of the Clean Water Act Section 9 of the Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act Section 3007 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act Section 8 of the Toxi
151. A Officer will conduct the following checks and issue a written report on the results 1 Collect and submit for analyses samples of each lot of containers received during that quarter Bottles from each lot will be tagged and sealed then submitted for the following analyses One Gallon Amber metals cyanide extractable organics and pesticides 8 oz Glass metals cyanide extractable organics and pesticides 1 Liter Polyethylene metals and cyanide Latex glove samples will be collected as rinse blanks using organic analyte free water The rinsate will be submitted for analyses of VOCs metals cyanide extractable organics and pesticides A new glove will be rinsed for each parameter e g one glove for VOC sample another glove for metals etc to avoid dilution of potential contaminants on the gloves EISOPQAM 5 37 November 2001 5 15 5 15 1 practices Collect and submit for analyses a sample of water from the FEC organic analyte free water system The sample will be submitted for analyses of VOCs metals cyanide extractable organics and pesticides Collect and submit for analyses a rinsate blank of at least one piece of sampling or sample related equipment stored at the FEC The sample will submitted for analyses of VOCs metals cyanide extractable organics and pesticides Collect the results of field quality control samples from the project leaders for the quarter Normally field quality control samples
152. A tube about two inches in diameter is usually the best size The wall thickness of the tube should be about 1 3 inch for TeflonG plastic or glass The inside wall may be filed down at the bottom of the tube to provide a cutting edge and facilitate entry of the liner into the substrate Caution should be exercised not to disturb the bottom sediments when the sample is obtained by wading in shallow water The core tube is pushed into the substrate until four inches or less of the tube is above the sediment water interface When sampling hard or coarse substrates a gentle rotation of the tube while it is being pushed will facilitate greater penetration and decrease core compaction The top of the tube is then capped to provide a suction and reduce the chance of losing the sample A Teflon plug or a sheet of Teflon held in place by a rubber stopper or cork may be used After capping the tube is slowly extracted with the suction and adherence of the sediment keeping the sample in the tube Before pulling the bottom part of the core above the water surface it too should be capped In deeper non wadeable water bodies sediment cores may be collected from a bridge or a boat using different coring devices such as Ogeechee Sand Pounders gravity cores and vibrating coring devices All three devices utilize a core barrel with a core liner tube system The core liners can be removed from the core barrel and replaced with a clean core liners as needed after
153. Authoritative Sampling Authoritative sampling is based on the judgement of the investigator and does not necessarily result inasample that reflects the average characteristics of the entire matrix There are two types of authoritative designs judgmental sampling and biased sampling Judgmental sampling uses the knowledge and experience of the investigator to attempt to derive average conditions at a site In contrast biased sampling attempts to determine the maximum or minimum value for contaminant of concern Biased sampling often focuses on worst case conditions in a matrix for example the most visually contaminated area or the most recently generated waste The primary advantages of authoritative sampling are the designs tend to be quick and simple to implement and the designs have relatively low costs Authoritative sampling is ideally suited for sites where contaminants of concern greatly exceed or are significantly below predetermined action levels Because the experience of the investigator is often the basis for sample collection personal bias depending on the study objectives may be introduced and should be recognized as a potential problem However preliminary or screening investigations and certain regulatory investigations will correctly employ authoritative sampling 5 3 7 Simple Random Sampling Simple random sampling insures that each element in the population has an equal chance of being included in the sample Thi
154. Cleaning Procedure for Drilling Equipment The following is the standard procedure for field cleaning augers drill stems rods tools and associated equipment This procedure does not apply to well casings well screens or split spoon samplers used to obtain samples for chemical analyses which should be cleaned as outlined in Section B 2 3 1 Clean with tap water and soap using a brush if necessary to remove particulate matter and surface films Steam cleaning high pressure hot water with soap may be necessary to remove matter that is difficult to remove with the brush Drilling equipment that is steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above the floor of the decontamination pad Hollow stem augers drill rods etc that are hollow or have holes that transmit water or drilling fluids should be cleaned on the inside with vigorous brushing 2 Rinse thoroughly with tap water 3 Remove from the decontamination pad and cover with clean unused plastic If stored overnight the plastic should be secured to ensure that it stays in place When there is concern for low level contaminants it may be necessary to clean this equipment between borehole drilling and or monitoring well installation using the procedure outlined in Section B 2 3 B 4 Emergency Disposable Sample Container Cleaning New one pint or one quart mason jars may be used to collect samples for analyses of organic compounds and metals in waste and
155. E R RELER C 8 C 4 3 Stainless Steel T bifig a erroris ame e suse pex ERR bee NES pee edo oe C 8 C 4 4 Glass Tubing sssi Lbs eei epi vg ors e WADE Rog eed ond eA n C 8 C 5 Cleaning Procedures for Miscellaneous Equipment esse C 9 C 5 1 Well Sounders and Tapes ssseeeeeeeee III C 9 C52 Goulds Pili uesiisa te eec Sx eid da n P EE E a pA a C 9 C53 Redi Fo MONET aetna keene cain ch e a e a a e beso de oleae os C 9 C 5 4 Title Beaver M C 10 C55 Drill Rig Grout Mixer and Associated Equipment 0 00000 e eee ee C 10 C 5 6 Miscellaneous Sampling and Flow Measuring Equipment 04 C 11 5 7 Field Analytical Equipment 0 0 0 eee III C 11 C 5 8 Ice Chests and Shipping Containers leeeeeeee e C 11 C 5 9 Pressure Field Filtration Apparatus lsseseeeeee I C 11 C 5 10 Organic Analyte Free Water Storage Containers 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee C 12 C 5 11 Portable Solvent Rinse System llleseeeeeeeeee ee C 13 C 5 12 splash Suits 2 ioilkonlicieded ded 4v dies e dert ee bie ebd derer need eds C 13 C 5 13 SCBA Pacemasks 2 uu va e ue da es ENG ek Gu e wa eue a ek rdc de C 13 C 5 14 Garden Hose 4i oeste cebeobv Eb ewes UPC DE p wet eris ados adus ke Ron C 13 C 5 15 Portable Tanks for Tap Water ssseeeeeeeeee III C 14 C 5 16 bns P eI C 14 C 6 Preparation of Disposable Sample Containers 000
156. EE IHRER Re Lee EVE APER and 4 5 4 3 2 Safety EIUDHIGD 223 cokes dude dase de cone Risk Geese tah donee d e ER 4 6 4 3 3 OSHA Confined Space Entry 215222 ese E RERRE eadeeeyestetes sex ade 4 6 4 3 4 Entry into Enclosed Areas csse RR Ea REEL qwe RR Xa RIXA up 4 6 4 3 5 Training Status Tracking System v2 sosso red kie cre RR REI EG RR ad 4 7 4 3 6 Site Operations aste ax b ERE RR ERE X ERR ERR ru Rd der E ex 4 7 Figure 4 1 Decontamination Zone for Levels AandB 4 19 Figure 4 2 Decontamination Zone for Level C 0 eee eee eee 4 20 Exhibit 4 1 Site Safety Plan socie reed Ru RERUEDC RAE I ad RE 4 22 4 3 7 Boating Operations o cond ends iessnbRbEAT4e red c Pqe REEERE PPP 4 27 Exhibit 42 Float Pl n 22 0s dcckse oe Pogues edeeh seen tere Seen teehee 4 29 4 3 8 Field Procedures for Handling Pathogenic Samples luus 4 30 SECTION 5 Sampling Design and Quality Assurance Procedures 5 1 5 1 Introduction oen 5 1 5 2 Definitions 5 4 4 5 5 9 93 4 4954 49 eaa a a aa ia ai aoa Aa E i a E Aa aaa 5 1 5 3 Sampling Design ssssesseeeee e n 5 5 5 3 1 TntroducHoNn MED ns ea eE EERE E A a aE EN 5 5 5 3 2 Representative Sampling LusseddreRre Ea eek edd een Xa RIXA Y NER 5 5 5 3 3 Stratification and Heterogeneous Wastes llleseeeeeeee 5 5 5 3 4 Specific Sampling Designs 1 2 ilo odes 9 E Re RR Ed xA ERREUR E 5 6 5 3 5 Determining the Number of Samples to Coll
157. EISOPQAM 2 6 November 2001 2 5 Clean Water Act Compliance Monitoring Inspections 2 5 1 Introduction The term compliance monitoring covers all activities undertaken to ascertain a permitee s or discharger s compliance status This includes but is not limited to Clean Water Act CWA compliance monitoring inspections and compliance review e g the review of Discharge Monitoring Reports DMR or compliance schedule reports The main functions of CWA compliance monitoring inspections are to verify the integrity of the self monitoring information and to develop the basis for possible follow up compliance orenforcement actions All compliance monitoring inspections shall be conducted as though an enforcement action would result General guidance for conducting compliance monitoring inspections is found in the US EPA NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 1 Compliance monitoring inspections are usually requested by the Clean Water Act Enforcement Section Water Programs Enforcement Branch Water Management Division A number of different types of compliance monitoring inspections have been defined including compliance evaluation inspections CEI compliance sampling inspections CSI toxic compliance sampling inspections XSI compliance biomonitoring inspections CBI performance audit inspections PAD diagnostic evaluations DE reconnaissance inspections RI pretreatment compliance inspections PCI sludge inspections SI legal support in
158. EISOPQAM 4 8 November 2001 The relationship between air monitoring results and levels of protection LOP is shown in the following table PID FID Background PID FID Less than 5 PPM above background PID FID 5 PPM to 200 PPM Greater than 200 PPM Less than 19 5 Greater than 0 PPM and less than 10 PPM 10 PPM or greater NOTE Measurements from direct reading air monitors are only one consideration for LOP decisions If contaminants are known protection can be achieved at a lesser LOP The four levels of protection ranked from least protective Level D to most protective Level A and a description of the situations for which each is appropriate is as follows LEVEL D Shirt long pants or coveralls REQUIRED Boots with steel toes and shank OPTIONAL Rubber boots with steel toe and shank Boot covers disposable Safety glasses goggles or face shield not for chemical splash protection Emergency Life Support Apparatus ELSA Thermal weather protection coat overalls sweater hat rain gear cool vests and heat stress monitors The atmosphere contains no known or anticipated hazard LEVEL D is used when Work conditions preclude splashes immersion or the potential for unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any chemicals EISOPQAM 4 9 November 2001 LEVEL C LEVEL D modified to require chemical resistant boots with steel toe amp REQUIRED shank Emergency Life Support Apparatu
159. EISOPQAM H 18 November 2001 E QUALITY ASSURANCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 Status of Quality Assurance Program Mis oeoo a 1 Does the agency have an EPA approved quality assurance program plan Please provide Date of Original Approval Date of Last Revision Date of Latest Approval Do you have any revisions to your QA Program Plan still DuC CREE Is the QA Plan 1s the QA Plan fully implemented implemented Are copies of QA Plan or pertinent sections available to agency If no why not personnel Which individuals routinely receive updates to QA Plan 2 Audits and Audit System Traceability Question Question sss Ys No Commet Comment Does the agency maintain a separate audit calibration support facility laboratory Has the agency documented and implemented specific audit procedures Have audit procedures been prepared in keeping with the requirements of Appendix A to 40 CFR 58 Do the procedures meet the specific requirements for independent standards and the suggestions regarding personnel and equipment Are SRM or CRM materials used to routinely certify audit materials Does the agency routinely use NBS SRM or CPM materials For audits only For calibrations only ___ For both _ _ For neither secondary standards are employed __ Does the agency audit the Meteorological sites CA A Please list below areas routinely covered by this review the date of the last review and changes m
160. EPA Office of Research and Development Robert S Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory EPA 600 R 94 205 January 1995 Sampling for Organic Chemicals and Microorganisms in the Subsurface US EPA EPA 600 2 77 176 1977 Handbook for Evaluating Water Bacteriological Laboratories US EPA ORD Municipal Environmental Research Laboratory Cincinnati Ohio 1975 Microbiological Methods for Monitoring the Environment Water and Wastes US EPA ORD Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory Cincinnati Ohio 1978 Groundwater Section 18 USDA SCS National Engineering Handbook United States Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service 1978 EISOPQAM 7 12 November 2001 SECTION 8 SAMPLING OF POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES To collect a sample representative of the drinking water supply To reduce the bias of system related variables pumps piping holding tanks etc 8 1 Introduction The same sampling techniques used for wastewater ground water surface water etc including thorough documentation of location date time etc are to be used during potable water supply sampling There are certain additional procedures which apply 8 2 Sampling Site Selection The following should be considered when choosing the location to collect a potable water sample Taps selected for sample collection should be supplied with water from a service pipe connected directly to a water main in the se
161. ETAL PLASTIC OTHER SIZE 85 55 2 DRUM METAL PLASTIC OTHER SIZE 85 55 CONDITION GOOD FAIR POOR MARKINGS LABELS 3 DRUM OPENING TEAM 4 ESTIMATED VOLUME FULL 34 EMPTY 5 PHYSICAL APPEARANCE OF DRUM CONTENTS COLOR VISCOSITY LOW MED HIGH PHASED Y N DESCRIPTION OTHER 6 AIR MONITORING RESULTS PID ppm EXPLOS 900 96LEL FID ppm HALOGEN Yes No CN ppm pH RAD Mrem T FLASH POINT SAMPLE COLLECTED YES NO FLASH RESULTS AT 140 F YES NO HOT WIRE TEST FOR HALOGEN POS NEG 8 SAMPLE COLLECTED YES NO TIME COLLECTOR S EISOPQAM 13 8 November 2001 13 4 4 Tanks Sampling tanks is considered hazardous due to the potential for them to contain large volumes of hazardous materials and therefore appropriate safety protocols must be followed Unlike drums tanks may be compartmentalized or have complex designs Preliminary information about the tank s contents and configuration should be reviewed prior to the sampling operation to ensure the safety of sampling personnel and that the study s objectives can be achieved In addition to having discharge valves near the bottom of tanks and bulk storage units most tanks have hatches at the top It is desirable to collect samples from the top hatch because of the potential for the tank s contents to be stratified Additionally when sampling from the discharge valve there is a possibility of a stuck or broken valve which could cause an
162. Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual DS SM ED SA Bo Agency 9 c V a AL prove x youl NJ e NOVEMBER 2001 U S Environmental Protection Agency Region 4 980 College Station Road Athens Georgia 30605 2720 www epa gov region4 sesd eisopqam eisopgam html 706 355 8603 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS SEUCIIDN TS PEEBWE ee DEFERUNE E eee er ere eee ee cee tee AES RES 1 1 Introduction 0 2249 e see eee rs tocn enua ter KEENER EO Coes Hee Kd 1 2 Performance Objectives 26 645 04045054s 4050065 eb 04s bees eee eee 1 3 Section Objectives 0 ccc eee cence cent eee eees SECTION 2 Investigations Inspections and Overview Activities 2 1 Introduttlon s cs coo 25 5 5 DIOE CES bet er c aca i web p RR 2 2 Potable Water Supply Investigations 0 0 cc cee eee ene 2 3 Civil Enforcement Investigations and Studies 05 2 3 1 INNGCUCHOMN cesa exe s Ia ERG RAW oe TEA ET EN EE VEA AS a EE EE ES 2 3 2 Facility ENY PR r m 2 3 3 Unreasonable Search and Seizure 2 5 leds eee e ure a e e a me 2 3 4 Requesting Information 5a 22 2rd ded kPa I ard ARE ELSE RR dra da 2 3 5 Photographs 22s querer RER eRSREE aa EER Ea R RE 2 3 6 SD SSIDIOS ossa duy E RO ueD d Sip anu les beue dp estes x ibees aq x S 2 4 Criminal Investigations and Studies uuulululusluuu 2 5 Clean Water Act Com
163. Figure 15 3 2 is 100 00 ft The instrument is set up 5 92 ft above point A which makes the height of the instrument H I 105 92 ft Given a slope distance Ds shot to the prism distance AB of 323 88 ft and a positive vertical angle V CAB of 5 30 the difference in elevation between point C and point B is computed using the trigonometric formula elevation difference distance AB x sin V lt 02 01 96 Project 26E OOO1 Landis Surveyor Region 4 Site Name Ben Chmark City State Weather Clear O 5 mph N Station Foint or BS AG orFS Elevation A 5 92 100 00 Distance A B 323 88 Vertical lt CAB B CB AB x sini 225 88 31 04 B 105 92 31 04 5 23 2121 75 Example 2 Figure 15 3 2 Trigonometric level notation showing side view when elevation of point desired is above instrument The method described in Figure 15 3 2 only accounts for the relative difference in elevation between the theodolite H I and the center of the prism The distance that the prism is held above the point in question must be subtracted from the resulting elevation of the prism to obtain the elevation of the point Substituting in the trigonometric formula elevation difference 323 88 ft x sin 5 30 31 04 ft The elevation of point B is 105
164. G Implants sleeeeeee e 19 1 19 1 2 Geoprobe Grab Sampling using the PRT System 4 19 3 19 1 3 Geoprobe Permanent Soil Gas Implants 0 0 00 ee eee eee 19 4 19 2 References g55 25fy CT 19 6 APPENDIX A Recommended Containers Holding Times amp Preservation A 1 Soil and Sediment ser 6 sik oe vw vee ee Oe Mead eee we dde ee yee A 1 Water and Waste Water cut erre ohh eo ENTER EXVREEEORENER A 3 Waste 4 54 ohare dee a p E A En a a E R a E E E E EE A 6 Footnotes 255445048 GN econ bebe mee ERE a RE node ooh TE RENE RA A 7 APPENDIX B Standard Field Cleaning Procedures Lsuuu B 1 B 1 Introduction onaecene sock REREYRAMPCHRRQCERG trinet Edr r a UE RUE B 1 B 1 1 Specifications for Cleaning Materials 2 0 2 e ee eee ee eee B 1 B 1 2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions 0000 B 2 B 1 3 Disposal of Solvent Cleaning Solutions 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee B 2 B 1 4 Equipment Contaminated with Concentrated Wastes 0000 B 2 B 1 5 Safety Procedures for Field Cleaning Operations 0 000 B 3 B 1 6 Handling of Cleaned Equipment 2 12 2252 2240 RRRERR ERE RR B 3 B 2 Field Equipment Cleaning Procedures 00000 eee B 3 B 2 1 Specifications for Decontamination Pads 0 0 0 eee eee eee B 3 B 2 2 Classic Parameter Sampling Equipment
165. IL footnote 3 Four tablets are added to the sample after collection HNO Nitric Acid used as a preservative must be present at concentrations of 0 15 or less by weight pH about 1 62 or greater as specified in 40 CFR 136 3 Table II footnote 3 Approximately 5 ml of the laboratory prepared preservative is added to the sample Not Applicable No sample preservation is required Holding time is stated in days unless marked otherwise A holding time of ASAP indicates the sample is to be analyzed within 15 minutes A holding time of NS indicates that no holding time is specified in the analytical method A 7 November 2001 5 Collect sample in 8 oz glass container containing ascorbic acid solution prepared by the laboratory Gently mix sample and transfer to sample containers prepared by the laboratory with the proper amount of HCl 6 Use ascorbic acid only if the sample contains residual chlorine To test for residual chlorine place a drop of sample on potassium iodide starch test paper If the test paper turns blue residual chlorine is present Add a few crystals of ascorbic acid and re test until the test paper no longer turns blue Add an additional 0 6 gram of ascorbic acid for each liter of sample EISOPQAM A 8 November 2001 APPENDIX B STANDARD FIELD CLEANING PROCEDURES PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE Toremove contaminants of concern from sampling drilling and other field equipment to concentrations that do not impact study o
166. ME s and RFA s including field sampling investigations closure post closure investigations environmental investigations trial burns delisting investigations etc The type of investigation dictates the specific field methodology The CDIE is conducted to gather information on the composition characteristics of wastes and or an area impacted by the operation of a RCRA facility The CDIE may also include verification of a sampling and analysis plan collection of information on facility design and operation verification of manifest descriptions or other unanticipated needs or requests necessary for case development Overviews OV Overviews of state RCRA compliance inspections or RCRA contractor inspections are conducted to evaluate their capability to conduct RCRA field investigations The Region 4 Hazardous Waste Field Overview Checklist Exhibit 2 1 is completed during the overview and a written report presenting the overview findings is completed and transmitted to the appropriate EPA regional RCRA official EISOPQAM 2 14 November 2001 2 7 3 Planning for Field Investigative Support Periodic meetings are typically held between representative s of SESD andthe RCRA Branch staff to discuss proposed initiatives and specific investigation needs These meetings are usually conducted in October for yearly planning and more frequently for quarterly planning Based on the priorities agreed upon a tentative field investigation schedule is prepar
167. Manual 2 Connect the correct hose R12 or R134a to the RI 2002PA Sample Inlet DO NOT connect the service end of the hose to the cylinder at this time 3 Plug the power cord into a three prong standard wall outlet 110 220 vac 60 50 Hz 4 After warm and auto cal connect the supplied calibrated sample hose to the vapor port of the cylinder 5 9 15 psig will register on the system pressure gauge The unit is ready to take a sample as indicated by the flashing green LED Push the ENTER button Wait for the identification mode EISOPQAM 14 19 November 2001 6 The RI 2002PA will indicate a PASS status with an R12 or R134a LED or FAIL status with a fail LED and the detected refrigerant concentrations The display will scroll through and indicate the percent by weight concentrations for R12 R134a R22 and HC if their concentrations are not zero If the gas is determined to be potentially flammable the hydrocarbon LED will illuminate and the horn will sound Press the Horn Mute button to silence the horn and follow the safety messages After Identification a flashing yellow LED will indicate that the unit is ready to purge DISCONNECT THE SAMPLE HOSE FROM THE CYLINDER Be sure the system pressure gauge registers 0 psig and press the ENTER button Allow the unit to purge then connect the hose to the next cylinder Go to Quick Instructions Step2 Safety The instrument itself presents few health amp safety concerns However t
168. NAD27 system of horizontal control points have established geographic latitude and longitude positions and provided the basis for the State Plane coordinate grid systems used by many States If the original geographic positions or coordinates are from the old NAD27 datum then the resulting positions or coordinates should be converted to the new NAD83 datum The official computer program developed by the NGS to convert latitude longitude from the old NAD27 to the new NAD83 is called NADCON Another program that is useful is CORPSCON which converts between coordinates and latitude longitude from both NAD27 and NAD83 it has NADCON built in as a subroutine When measuring horizontal angles compensation should be made for the angle between true north and magnetic north This angle is called the magnetic declination Field surveying methods should be referenced to true north The first step in this procedure is to determine from an isogonic map the declination for the area of work Isogonic maps may be found in basic surveying and field geology textbooks referenced above Sources of existing information on horizontal control stations or coordinate grid data and their exact locations may be obtained from local state or federal departments or agencies However the best place to obtain a horizontal control point data is from the website www ngs noaa gov Typically the engineering or public works departments of counties cities or towns may have data
169. NHANCED BARCODE READER SELECT READER NONE HP SMART WAND PSC LASER INITIALIZE READER OTHER USER ID DATE TIME USER OPTIONS KEY CLICK DISPLAY DELAY 17 11 PCLINK MEMORY PC LINK i CHANGE TYPE ESTABLISH LINK CLEAR ROUTE amp LOGGING MEMORY November 2001 17 5 Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000A Introduction The Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000A is a portable inorganic organic vapor monitor This analyzer uses both a flame ionization detector FID and a photoionization detector PID to sample and measure concentrations of gases Hydrogen Tank for the FID When the TVA 1000A leaves the Field Equipment Center FEC the hydrogen tank will be full and the battery will be charged Ensure that any extra hydrogen tanks taken to the field are filled also Note that you must always screw the hydrogen tank into the unit when taking the TVA out of the carrying box The TVA will not fit back in the box without taking the hydrogen tank out of the unit Extra hydrogen tanks are available Operating Procedures The TVA 1000A is user friendly menu driven Pressing the EXIT key will take you to the previous menu To operate the TVA 1000A follow the procedures listed The instrument must be on and warmed up for approximately 30 minutes prior to calibration The pump must be ON the PID lamp must be ON and the FID must be ignited throughout the warm up period NOTE If only one of the 2 detectors is desi
170. OPQAM 2 48 November 2001 PART2 Was a field overview checklist completed Comments Was the State Contractor familiar with the facility and its operations Comments Was the State Contractor trained in equipment handling and proper sampling techniques Comments Did the State Contractor observe calibration of safety monitoring and or field measurement equipment Comments Did the State Contractor observe all phases of the field investigation such as sampling field measurements record keeping packing and shipping samples etc Comments Did the State Contractor advise sampling personnel regarding improper procedures or practices whenever they were observed Comments Did the State Contractor assist with the sampling equipment decontamination or any other phase of the investigation Comments Were there improper procedures or practices used which the State Contractor failed to recognize Comments Was sampling conducted in accordance with the SOP or other EPA standard operating procedures Comments Was equipment decontamination conducted in accordance with standard operating procedures specified by EPA Comments List any problem areas observed relative to questions 8 9 or 10 Comments What are the qualifications of the investigative sampling personnel training and experience by name Comments Had those personnel received training in sampling techniques and equipment handling Comments 14 When was
171. P Any Check Realtime Differential and Differential Output Output Files Combine all input files and output to the project export folder and System File Format DOS Files Coordinate System Use export Coordinate System Latitude Longitude Datum NAD 1927 Conus Attributes Export Menu Attributes As Attribute Value Generated Attributes check Feature Name Arcview Shapefile Theme Options Skip this screen Units Use Export Units Change then select the approprioate units metric or english Select Ok when finished with Change Setup Options then Ok to export EISOPQAM 15 15 November 2001 _1 Three types of files are generated Each named feature where feature is one of the features listed in the Data Dictionary that was created in Template 2 will have the extensions dbf shp and shx L Transfer all of the dbf shp and shx files to the appropriate directory on the RAESD LAN G user shared drive so they may be transfered by FTP or other means to the appropriate directory and work space in the GIS UNIX boxes The GIS group on their UNIX Boxes or Project Leader on the PC will use these files in Arcview Any conversions between coordinate systems and datums that may be necessary should be done by the GIS group Li Open Arcview and add the coverages as themes Template 10 GIS to Realtime Differential GPS Waypoint Navigation 1 After the collection of site features 1 e wells site structures roads etc with G
172. PS techniques and or after the site areal photographs or maps are georeferenced and rectified specific samples locations can be picked out of the GIS coverages and generated into waypoints These waypoints can then be transferred back into the realtime GPS Data logger and used to layout a soil sampling grid or other locations of interest at the site Li Waypoint files created in ARC INFO must be in the following ASCII format for importing into Pathfinder Office software on the PC xcoordinate ycoordinate zcoordinate waypointnameornumber Note the zcoordinate is optional and may be left blank with a space i e x y waypoint L Once waypoint files are generated and in the proper format in Pathfinder Office software on the PC select File Waypoints then ASCII Import Select the waypoint file to be imported and click Ok L Next connect the GPS unit to the COMI port of the PC using the appropriate cable that is attached to the COMI port of the data logger Select File Transfer in the data logger Asset Surveyor software main menu In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select Utilities then Data Transfer Note Device should be set to GIS Data logger and Data Type should be set to Waypoints Under Available Files highlight the waypoint file name and under Selected Files choose Add Under Direction choose Send Then click Transfer L Once the waypoint file has been transferred Close the Data Transfer window and exit the data l
173. Part 58 for materials and sample residence time All flow calibrations will be traceable to a primary authoritative standard Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 760 mm Hg Chain of custody must be maintained at all times 14 2 November 2001 Monitoring Procedure Monitoring will be conducted using the procedure as described and in accordance with 40 CFR Part 50 APPENDIX C e Procedures detailed in the approved instrument manual will be used for installation calibration quality assurance QA checks maintenance and repairs e Monitors will be calibrated at the beginning and end of each study and at least quarterly during the study e Monitors will be calibrated after major maintenance or when a QA check shows an out of control condition exists e Azero span check will be conducted daily on all monitors e Precision checks of all monitors will be conducted at least weekly e Quality assurance audits as specified in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A will be conducted quarterly or at least once for short duration studies Data telemetry systems not equipped with electronic strip chart capability will be run in parallel with strip chart recorders Strip charts electronic or paper will serve as a permanent record and diagnostic tool After completion of the study all monitoring equipment will be returned for inspection maintenance and repair prior to storage All field documentation wil
174. Pb values subtracted from Pb samples assayed EISOPQAM Fus e n em Is all glassware scrupulously cleaned with detergent soaked If not briefly describe or attach procedure and rinsed three times with distilled deionized water If extracted samples are stored are linear polyethylene bottles used Are all batches of glass fiber filters tested for background lead content At a rate of 20 to 30 random filters per batch of 500 or Indicate rate greater Are ACS reagent grade HNO and HCI used in the analysis arnotindicate gradewsed 00000000000 If not indicate grade used If not indicate frequency If not indicate conditions routinely employed for both internal and external reporting Comment on lead QC program or attach applicable SOP If not explain why November 2001 D DATA AND DATA MANAGEMENT 1 Data Handling ile a Is there a procedure description or a chart which shows a complete data sequence from point of acquisition to point of submission of data to EPA Are data handling and data reduction procedures documented Is there documentation accompanying the data regarding any media changes transcriptions and or flags which have been placed into the data before data are released to agency internal data processing Describe Have special data handling procedures been adopted for air If yes provide brief description pollution episodes 2 Software Documentation Does the Dat
175. QAM 14 20 November 2001 Records Management amp Documentation The instrument will only store data from the last analysis performed Therefore to maintain a hard copy record of sampling runs the data will be sent to the printer and will immediately be printed out Liquid CFC Sampling The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the cleanup and use of canisters for sampling refrigerants for analysis This summary is adapted from Method TO 15A of the COMPENDIUM OF METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR All new canisters must be individually checked for contamination by the laboratory before use One of each batch of 10 canisters that are subsequently cleaned must be analyzed to check for contamination All sampler fittings must be solvent washed in hexane and heated to gt 100 C These parts should then be assembled and flushed with nitrogen for at least 8 hours prior to use in the sample train or in the canister cleanup apparatus Each canister s inlet port fitting will be inspected for damage before cleaning Any damaged fitting will be replaced with a previously cleaned see procedure above fitting After replacing any fitting the canister will be cleaned and analyzed to verify that it is free of contamination Chain of custody must be maintained for all samples 1 The nitrogen should be certified 99 999 pure by the manufacturer A molecular sieve scrubbe
176. QAM 3 13 November 2001 BL Blender Blank FIGURE 3 3 SAMPLE TAG Samplem Sipmmsss O Sr a Station LD Station Location i a m E egHe amp E Preservative Mel Yes ANALYSES COD TOC Nutrients BOD Solids Extractable Organics PesticidesPCB s Volatite Organics Remarks UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY VabSscpeRe 04092 REGION 4 Science and Ecosystem Support Division ge oc EN E us 9 xm Coo PE wa o Fd af LE amp EISOPQAM November 2001 FIGURE 3 4 RECEIPT FOR SAMPLES FORM 6097 v ON 68 ZL LL9 LES 0664 30134O ONILNIYd LN3ANMH3AO9 Sf aa LNIYd SWL ALva LJ Ag aaurioaa yo C 48 a3At3933 s314vs Lnds 31IS ALFIIOV 40 NOILVOOT 9 3INVN anjejuasaiday ejlS Allioe 0j Ado sally pet 10jeulp1o02 0 Jeul amp io NOLIOSIHISIO NIS A8 GAYYNSISNVYL S3 14A VvS LETS AWIL 31vQ ON NOILYLS 6l 34n 1VN9IS SuadlWvs AWVN LO3f Od ON LO3f Odd 02 2 S090 VIDHO39 SN3H 1V S3 IdAVS O4 Ldl323 SOMO NOISE Wes QU November 2001 3 15 EISOPQAM FIGURE 3 5 EPA CUSTODY SEAL Qn STA S United States F Date OFFICIAL Environmental Protection Agency z Athens Georgia SAMPLE REGION 4 Initial JO SEAL EISOPQAM 3 16 November 2001 SECTION 4 BRANCH SAFETY PROTOCOLS SECTION OBJECTIVE
177. QAM E 1 November 2001 For wells which are not evacuated to dryness particularly those with recovery rates equal to or very nearly equal to the purge rate there may not be a complete exchange and removal of stagnant water in that portion of the water column above the tubing intake For this reason it is important that the tubing intake be placed in the very uppermost portion of the water column while purging Standard field measurements should frequently be taken during this process to verify adequacy of the purge See Section 7 2 for specific details regarding purge adequacy measurements E 1 3 Sampling with a Peristaltic Pump Flexible tubing used in peristaltic pump heads is not acceptable for collecting samples for organic compounds analyses and cannot easily be field cleaned between sampling locations prior to collecting samples for other parameters For these reasons it is necessary to use a vacuum container placed between the pump and the well for sample collection with a peristaltic pump However if the flexible pump tubing is decontaminated according to Appendix C of this SOP samples for analyses of some inorganic constituents may be collected through the tubing if blanks are collected This method is detailed in the following steps NOTE Samples for volatile organic compound analyses cannot be collected using this method If samples for VOC analyses are required they must be collected with a Teflon or stainless steel bailer or b
178. RC Generally providing the facility with a duplicate copy of uncut prints for their review is acceptable to both parties If this is unacceptable to the facility the investigator may allow the facility to take the photographs review them and provide copies to EPA EISOPQAM 2 5 November 2001 2 3 6 Split Samples The inspection provisions of RCRA Section 3007 and CERCLA Section 104 require that If the officer or employee obtains any samples prior to leaving the premises he shall give to the owner operator or agent in charge a receipt describing the samples obtained and if requested a portion of each such sample equal in volume or weight to the portion retained As a matter of policy an offer will be made to the owner operator or agent in charge to split all samples collected on facility property 2 4 Criminal Investigations and Studies At the request of the Criminal Investigations Division CID and with the concurrence of the Regional Administrator Deputy Regional Administrator technical support for criminal investigations is provided Only experienced personnel with adequate training such as on site supervision by senior investigators orthe Criminal Investigations Course offered by the Federal Law Enforcement Training Center should be project leaders during such investigations Technical support shall be provided at the request of the CID Special Agent in Charge of the investigation in accordance with Appendix F of this SOP
179. Region 4 field investigators The manual originated in 1980 with the title Engineering Support Branch Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual was revised in 1986 with the same title It was revised again in 1991 with the title Environmental Compliance Branch Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual In 1996 it was revised with the present title The specific procedures outlined in the manual are based on the experiences of Region 4 field investigators or documents referenced at the end of each section This manual will be provided to each Region 4 employee responsible for conducting field investigations for activities contained in these Standard Operating Procedures SOP Each employee is expected to read and be familiar with each section of the SOP This is intended to be a dynamic document and will be revised periodically as needed Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use 1 2 Performance Objectives Performance objectives have been included at the beginning of sections and sub sections where applicable The performance objective lists the minimum requirements necessary for meeting the intent of the procedures that follow in the section The purpose of the performance objective is to allow flexibility within field procedures where appropriate however any deviations from the procedures in the SOP should be approved by the appropriate authority an
180. SR RE EET AR RE ERERRR 13 6 TLT EMEM Oo NEFERTTT rrET 13 6 Figure 13 1 Drum Data Forty oo424 665 ge4 cede e RR SEEN E REESE RE 13 8 Ert MERO ee a ee ee eee eS eee ee er ee ree re 13 9 13 5 Miscellaneous Contaminated Materials 000 13 10 13 6 Waste Sample Handling Procedures 0 00 cece ees 13 11 13 7 Particle Size Reduction 4 2 05 404 3402id rr Rr ERE E REUCREQEA d AR dbeens 13 11 13 8 References 4issurenokse px eR SCA A a Up depo c RR HR C dc bas 13 13 SECTION 14 Ambient Air Monitoring 00 00 lesse 14 1 14 1 Introduction less o REA ES PEAR GAR ERSTE EE OLR eg OR ag 14 1 14 2 Criteria Pollutant Monitoring Reference Equivalent Monitors for Air Pollutants which National Ambient Air quality Standards have been established 14 1 14 2 1 Monitoring Ozone in Ambient Air 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 14 1 14 2 2 Monitoring Carbon Monoxide in Ambient Air 0 0 00 else 14 2 14 2 3 Monitoring Nitrogen Dioxide in Ambient Air 0 0 0 0 0000005 14 3 14 2 4 Monitoring Sulfur Dioxide in Ambient Air 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 14 4 14 2 5 Sampling of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air as PM 5 0 14 5 14 2 6 Sampling of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air as PM 2 00 14 6 14 3 Non Criteria Pollutant Monitoring for Air Pollutants for which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have not been established 1
181. TR TUE LAC F 2 F 5 Field Investigation 5 656 oud ogee ened oeed ew REX RE EARS EXCESEAEREA S E F 3 F 6 Laboratory Support ssssseeseeee eh F 4 F 7 Final Report Lm F 4 F 8 Document Control ooann F 4 F 9 Sample Disposal 4 aces ko p RAE COR KE RUN ERR HORE Eos F 5 APPENDIX G Battery Charging and Storage Operations G 1 G 1 Receiving Batteries from the Field Luusususs G 1 G 2 Charging Batteries 244 4204 400hacedee Ex REALE CRY Rx UA Pa KS Cd G 2 G 3 i Br AM ErEr G 3 G 4 Maintenance RPM G 4 Figure G l Battery LOB osadeceses Rechacer ber Ren heres rider dera G 5 Figure G 2 Battery Building Maintenance Report 0040 G 6 APPENDIX H TECHNICAL SYSTEMS AUDIT FORM QUESTIONNAIRE H 1 A NETWORK MANAGEMENT sseee eee e nee eee H 2 EISOPQAM ToC xiii November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS B FIELD OPERATIONS osoni eret ee ee be RH REP ES EE H 6 C LABORATORY OPERATIONS WHERE APPLICABLE H 10 D DATA and DATA MANAGEMENT esee e H 16 E QUALITY ASSURANCE QUALITY CONTROL eese H 20 EISOPQAM ToC xiv November 2001 SECTION 1 PREFACE 1 1 Introduction This document the Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual contains the standard operating and field quality assurance procedures used by
182. The proton magnetometer operates by applying a voltage to a coil around a vessel containing a hydrocarbon fluid such as decane The resultant magnetic field orients the protons in the fluid The protons reorient or precess and line up with the earth s magnetic field when the voltage is removed Through nuclear precession a signal is generated and the precession frequency of this signal is proportional to the strength of the total magnetic field The magnetometer amplifies this precession frequency signal and electronically translates the signal into nanoTeslas or Gammas The presence of ferrous metals creates variations in the local strength of the magnetic field permitting their detection with a magnetometer 15 6 3 Instrument Operations All personnel trained in the use of any of the above described surface geophysical instrumentation will retain in their possession copies of operations manuals for each of the instruments In addition a copy of each of the manuals will be maintained by a designated person within the Hazardous Waste Section AII instruments will be used consistent with the instructions contained within these manuals with respect to preliminary instrument operational and sensitivity checks as well as actual operation during data collection EISOPQAM 15 33 November 2001 15 6 4 Specific Instrument Quality Control Procedures All geophysical instruments used by Branch personnel or EPA contractors shall be calibrated in accordance
183. This type differs from the No Pack only in that a filter pack is placed inside the screen to a level approximately 6 inches above the well screen This ensures that all water within the casing has passed through the filter pack For this type well to function properly the static water level must be 6 12 inches above the filter pack Traditional Filter Pack For this type the screen and casing are inserted into the borehole and the sand is poured into the annular space surrounding the screen and casing Occasionally it may be difficult to effectively place a filter pack around shallow open boreholes due to collapse This method requires more sand than the inner filter pack well increasing material costs As the filter pack is placed it mixes with the muddy water in the borehole which may increase the amount of time needed to purge the well to an acceptable level of turbidity Double Filter Pack The borehole is advanced to the desired depth As with the inner filter pack the well screen is filled with filter pack material and the well screen and casing inserted until the top of the filter pack is at least 6 inches below the water table Filter pack material is poured into the annular space around the well screen This type temporary well construction can be very effective in aquifers where fine silts or clays predominate This construction technique takes longer to implement and uses more filter pack material than others previously discussed
184. Vapour Analyzer 2537A is designed to continuously analyze air for total gaseous mercury The Tekran 2537A uses Cold Vapour Atomic Fluorescence Spectrophotometry CV AFS for the detection of mercury In addition to being much more sensitive than atomic absorption CVAFS is linear over a much wider range and not as subject to positive interferences The design of the 2537A minimizes the likelihood of negative interference The adsorption step uses a patented pure gold matrix as the adsorbent This material is highly specific to mercury eliminating interferences The instrument has been shown to be linear from 0 1 ng M to 1500 ng M Although the instrument can handle samples with high concentrations the user must avoid exposing the instrument case and parts to high levels of mercury Mercury contamination residing on the instrument s components could skew both analyses and calibrations References 1 The Tekran Vapour Analyzer 2537A User Manual 2 The Tekran Model 2505 Mercury Vapour Calibration Unit User Manual Procedure The Tekran Vapour Analyzer 2537A continuously samples ambient air for gaseous mercury It performs the analysis periodically as determined by the method entered by the operator into the on board computer The frequency of analysis and thus the duration of the sample collection can be varied from about every 4 minutes to 15 minutes The analysis begins when air is drawn into the instrument through the Sample Air Inlet Th
185. Y N Does the number of collocated monitoring sites meet the requirements of 40 CFR 58 Appendix A 3 Organization Staffing and Training Number of individuals available to each of the following program areas Comment on need for additional personnel Network Design and Siting Data and Data Management ewe o S O Does it make use of seminars courses EPA sponsored college level courses EISOPQAM H 4 November 2001 4 Facilities Identify the principal facilities where the work is performed which is related to the SLAMS NAMS network Do not include monitoring sites but do include any work which is performed by contract or other arrangements Indicate any areas of facilities that should be upgraded Identify by location Are there any significant changes which are likely to be implemented to agency facilities before the next systems audit Comment on your agency s needs for additional physical space laboratory office storage etc EISOPQAM H 5 November 2001 B FIELD OPERATIONS 1 Routine Operations On average how many sites does a single site operator have responsibility for How many of the sites of your SLAMS NAMS network are equipped with manifolds s IV Are manifold s equipped with a blower MEN ne V Is there sufficient air flow through the manifold at all Approximate air flow times VI Is there a conditioning period for the manifold after Length of time cleaning DWhat material is used for
186. a Management Section have complete software If yes indicate the implementation date and latest revision documentation dates for such documentation Are the computer system contents including ambient air Briefly describe indicating at least the media frequency monitoring data backed up regularly and backup media storage location What is the recovery capability how much time and data would be lost in the event of a significant computer problem 3 Data Validation and Correction Have validation criteria applicable to all pollutant data processed by the reporting organization been established and documented Does documentation exist on the identification and applicability of flags i e identification of suspect values within the data as recorded with the data in the computer files EISOPQAM H 15 November 2001 Do documented data validation criteria address limits on and for the following I Operational parameters such as flow rate measurements or flow rate changes II Calibration raw data calibration validation and calibration equipment tests IV Tests for outliers in routine data as part of screening process V Manual checks such as hand calculation of concentrations and their comparison with computer calculated data Are changes to data submitted to NADB documented in a If no why not permanent file Are changes performed according to a documented Standard If not according to the QA Project Plan please a
187. a precautions to keep boxes dry Return the samples with insertion rod and paperwork preferrably by overnight courier to Screening Modules Laboratory W L Gore amp Associates Inc 100 Chesapeake Blvd Elkton MD 21921 Phone 410 392 7600 Attn NOTIFY LAB IMMEDIATELY UPON DELIVERY IMPORTANT Samples should not be shipped for weekend or holiday delivery at GORE EISOPQAM 19 2 November 2001 19 1 2 Geoprobe Grab Sampling using the PRT System Single event or grab sampling may be conducted using the Post Run Tubing System PRT This system allows EIB personnel to collect soil gas samples quickly and with a high degree of assurance that the samples are representative of the targeted depth i e using this method there is no leakage at probe rod joints that will compromise the integrity of the sample The downhole components of the PRT system include Sample delivery tubing Probe rods PRT Adapter Expendable point holder Expendable point O ring seals are used on the PRT Adapter and the expendable point holder to provide a leak proof system that assures sample integrity PRT System Installation Procedures The following procedures are used to collect soil gas samples using the Geoprobe PRT system The PRT system can be used with either the 1 0 inch or 1 25 inch diameter probe rod All parts or accessories used in the PRT system must be selected with the appropriate diameter probe rod in mind
188. acceptable in the Superfund and RCRA programs because of the uncontrolled monitoring intervals However some site conditions might exist especially in cavernous limestone areas Karst topography or in areas of highly fractured bedrock where the installation of the filter pack and its structural integrity are questionable Under these conditions the design of an open bedrock well may be warranted EISOPQAM 6 9 November 2001 2 The second method of installing a monitoring well into bedrock is to install the outer surface casing and drill the borehole by an approved method into bedrock and then install an inner casing and well screen with the filter pack bentonite seal and annular grout The well is completed with a surface protective casing and concrete pad This well installation method gives the flexibility of isolating the monitoring zone s and minimizing inter aquifer flow In addition it gives structural integrity to the well especially in unstable areas steeply dipping shales etc where the bedrock has a tendency to shift or move when disturbed Omitting the filter pack around the well screen is a general practice in some open rock borehole installations especially in drinking water and irrigation wells However without the filter pack to protect the screened interval sediment particles from the well installation and or from the monitoring zone could clog the well screen and or fill the screened portion of the well rendering it inope
189. ace it into the cell holder Press the ON button down and hold it until the meter stabilizes Read and record the mg l of total chlorine from the upper 1 cm scale e Duplicate chlorine residual analyses should agree within 0 05 mg l for the lower range x0 5 mg l and agree within 0 2 mg l for the mid range 0 5 2 0 mg l and agree within 0 4 mg l for the high range 2 0 3 5 mg l Units e mg l total chlorine Limitations e Do not use with or in the presence of any oxidizing agents e g oxidized manganese interferes with the DPD reagent 1 ug l MnO ug l CL Colored matrices may also interfere EISOPQAM 16 12 November 2001 16 9 Flash Point The following test method is to determine if a volatile material s flash point is within established limits Apparatus Calibration ERDCO Rapid Tester Model RT 1 Flash Point Analyzer The repeatability and reproducibility for this instrument are in accordance with the respective standards e p xylene 78 0 1 0 F e n butanol 97 9 1 7 F e n undecane 145 4 2 0 F n hexadecane 270 5 2 0 F Operational Procedures 1 2 Plug in the ERDCO and turn it on Switch the rocker switch adjacent to the display to Fahrenheit or Celsius display Press the red temperature preset rocker switch and rotate the red temperature preset knob until the desired temperature appears in the display window 140 F for determining ignitability characteristics R
190. ace to ensure the integrity of the sample collected in this manner Bladder Pumps After purging has been accomplished with a bladder pump the sample is obtained directly from the pump discharge If the discharge rate of the pump during purging is too great so as to make sample collection difficult care should be taken to reduce the discharge rate at the onset of actual sample collection This is necessary to minimize sample disturbance particularly with respect to samples collected for volatile organic compounds analysis Bailers When bailing new plastic sheeting should be placed on the ground around each well to provide a clean working area New nylon rope should be attached to the bailer via a Teflon coated stainless steel wire This coated wire is semi permanently attached to the bailer and is decontaminated for reuse as the bailer is cleaned The bailer should be gently immersed in the top of the water column until just filled At this point the bailer should be carefully removed and the contents emptied into the appropriate sample containers EISOPQAM 7 8 November 2001 7 3 4 Sample Preservation Immediately after collection all samples requiring preservation must be preserved with the appropriate preservative Consult Appendix A for the correct preservative for the particular analytes of interest All samples preserved using a pH adjustment except VOCs must be checked using pH strips to ensure that they were adequately preser
191. address and resident s and or owner s home and work telephone numbers Immediately upon receipt of analytical data the project leader should carefully examine the data Web sites listed at the bottom of this section may be useful in an evaluation If any of the primary or secondary drinking water standards are exceeded or any priority pollutants RCRA 40 CFR 261 Appendix VIII compounds or the CERCLA 40 CFR 302 list of hazardous substances are detected the project leader will immediately provide the information listed below to the appropriate individuals in the Water Management Division or Waste Management Division The Water Management Division primary contact is Lee Thomas in the Water Programs Enforcement Branch the secondary contact is Carol Tarras The Waste Management Division primary contact is Glenn Adams in the Office of Technical Services the secondary contact is Kevin Koporec e the analytical data e the name address including zip code and telephone numbers of the residents and or owners e the site name and location and e the EPA site identification number if applicable Investigators should not release potable water supply data to anyone before providing it to the Water Management Division Web sites that may be useful For the current MCLs and SMCLS with potential health effects and sources http www epa gov OGWDW wot appa html For a summary of drinking water health advisories http www epa gov ost drinking s
192. ade as a direct result of the review e I oO o C e S O o ll jg EISOPQAM H 19 November 2001 mm emm Are SRM or CRM materials used to establish traceability of calibration and zero span check materials provided to field operations personnel Specifically for gaseous standards how is the traceability of audit system standard materials established Certified by the QA support laboratory which is part of this agency Are all agency traceability and standardization methods used documented Do the traceability and standardization methods conform with the guidance of VOL Il of the Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems eea E For cylinder gases ee a ee Does the agency have identifiable auditing equipment If yes how is the equipment identified specifically intended for sole use for audits How often is auditing equipment certified for accuracy against standards and equipment of higher authority 3 National Performance Audit Program NPAP And Additional Audits Identify the individual with primary responsibility for the required participation in the National Performance Audit Program For gaseous materials name title For laboratory materials name title Does the agency currently have in place any contracts or similar agreements either with another agency or outside contractor to perform any of the audits required by 40 CFR 58 If yes has the agency included QA requirements with this D
193. aged for shipment with other samples and sent for analysis At no time after their preparation are the sample containers to be opened before they reach the laboratory Spiked samples are normally sent with each shipment to contract laboratories only Spiked samples are used to measure bias due to sample handling or analytical procedures Equipment Field Blanks a sample collected using organic free water which has been run over through sample collection equipment These samples are used to determine if contaminants have been introduced by contact of the sample medium with sampling equipment Equipment field blanks are often associated with collecting rinse blanks of equipment that has been field cleaned Temperature Blanks a container of water shipped with each cooler of samples requiring preservation by cooling to 4 C ice The temperature of the blanks are measured at the time of sample receipt by the laboratory No temperature blank is necessary for samples designated as waste EISOPQAM 5 3 November 2001 Preservative Blanks a sample that is prepared in the field and used to determine if the preservative used during field operations was contaminated thereby causing a positive bias in the contaminant concentration On studies of short duration usually only a post preservative blank is prepared at the end of all sampling activities On studies extending beyond one week a pre preservative blank should also be prepared prior to beginning
194. agorean theorem earth The resulting distance between JORDAN88 and SONIAQ3 is c 501 31 The azimuth is obtained by first computing the inverse tangent of the change in north divided by the change in east tan AN AE 78 3886 This is the negative angle expressed in decimal degrees and is measured from the x axis into the southeast quadrant The azimuth from JORDANSS to SONIA93 is obtained in this case by changing the sign to and adding 90 which would give 168 3886 degrees Converting to degrees minutes and seconds is the next task and the degrees are already done Since there are 60 minutes in one degree take the 3886 degrees and multiply by 60 and obtain 23 3160 minutes Likewise there are 60 seconds in one minute take the 3160 minutes and multiply by 60 and obtain 18 96 seconds The resulting azimuth from JORDANSS to SONIA93 is 168 23 19 Note The trigonometric formula above always gives the angle measured from the east west x axis When using this procedure it is wise to make a sketch as shown above Figure 15 2 4 that indicates the change in direction between the points relative to north This will aid in visually and mentally seeing which geometric quadrant that the foresight angle falls in relation to the instrument If the inverse tangent result was positive and pointed in the northeast quadrant direction the azimuth would be subtracted from 90 and converted to degrees minutes and seconds Likewise
195. aircraft Dangerous goods must not be offered for air transport without contacting the Division dangerous goods shipment designee D 3 Shipment of Environmental Laboratory Samples Guidance for the shipment of environmental laboratory samples by personnel is provided in a memorandum dated March 6 1981 subject Final National Guidance Package for Compliance with Department of Transportation Regulations in the Shipment of Laboratory Samples 3 By this memorandum the shipment of the following unpreserved samples is not regulated Drinking water Treated effluent Biological specimens e Sediment e Water treatment plant sludge e POTW sludge EISOPQAM D 1 November 2001 In addition the shipment of the following preserved samples is not regulated provided the amount of preservative used does not exceed the amounts found in 40 CFR 136 3 4 see Appendix A It is the shippers individual signing the airway bill responsibility to ensure that proper amounts of preservative are used Drinking water Ambient water Treated effluent Biological specimens Sediment Wastewater treatment plant sludge Water treatment plant sludge Samples determined by the project leader to be in these categories are to be shipped using the following protocol developed jointly between US EPA OSHA and DOT This procedure is documented in the Final National Guidance Package for Compliance with Department of Transportation Regulations in the Shipme
196. al and Vertical Distance From Height Above Distance From Distance From Roadways to Pollutant Scale Ground m Supporting Trees to Probe Probe Structure CO 6 Micro gt 10 2 10 All Others gt 10 See Table 2 10 5 Q42 All gt 10 See Table 2 10 5 All See Table 2 10 5 Micro gt 10 See Table All Scales All Scales 2 10 5 All Others Horizontal Distance 5 15 PM 234578 Micro gt 2 gt 10 All Scales All Scales All Others Horizontal See 58CFR Distance App E PM 234578 gt 2 gt 10 2 10 All Scales All Scales Horizontal See 58CFR Distance App E 1 When probe is located on a rooftop this separation distance is in reference to walls parapets or penthouses 2 Should be greater than 20 meters from tree driplines and must be 10 meters from the dripline when trees act as an obstruction 3 Distance from inlet probe to obstacle such as buildings must be at least twice the height the obstacle protrudes above the inlet pole Sites not meeting this criterion would be classified as middle scale 4 Must have unrestricted airflow 270 degrees around the inlet probe or 180 degrees if the probe is on the side of a building 5 No furnace or incinerator flues should be nearby Distance is dependent on height of furnace or incineration flues type of fuel or waste burned and quality of fuel sulfur ash or lead content This is to avoid undue influences from minor pollutant sources 6 The horizontal and vertical d
197. al support to the Atlanta Area and Jacksonville Area Offices Office of Criminal Enforcement Forensic and Training Criminal Investigation Division CID for those investigations requiring the collection of samples laboratory analyses or other technical support These procedures address the means by which technical support is requested by the CID Offices and provided by SESD Detailed technical procedures will be referenced to the various Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals utilized by SESD The primary objectives of SESD support for the CID criminal investigations are to provide accurate complete admissible and defensible reports and data for case development and subsequent legal proceedings To accomplish these objectives SESD and the CID Offices have jointly agreed to follow these procedures F 1 Technical Assistance Required by the Atlanta Area Office The CID Offices under the Direction of a Special Agent in Charge SAC conducts criminal investigations in Region 4 and 14 pursuant to federal environmental laws and regulations The technical assistance requirements for criminal cases vary from investigation to investigation To assist the SAC in identifying the type and scope of technical assistance required a Technical Coordinator position has been established in the Atlanta Area Office The Technical Coordinator s primary function is to provide technical advice to the SAC and Case Agents It is the responsibility of
198. alculated is the minimum and that site conditions may not allow for collection of all samples Therefore additional samples would be appropriate Grab vs Composite Samples When designing a systematic grid sampling investigation a determination of whether to collect grab or composite samples must be made Grab samples may not adequately describe variability even within individual grid cells and therefore limit the representativeness of the data set If the study involves a small area with grid cells of 25 feet or less in length then grab samples could be collected in each grid cell without significantly affecting the representativeness of the data However most studies have much larger grids 100 to 500 feet per side In these cases composite samples collected within each grid cell result in more representative data It should be remembered that a composite sample under the best of conditions will yield an average value of contaminants within the grid Composite samples are most appropriate where a reasonable degree of variability is anticipated and where soil types are amenable to adequate mixing This is normally the case when contaminants have been distributed by airborne deposition relatively homogeneous distribution across the site Where localized hot spots are present due to releases from process units indiscriminate dumping or the burying of wastes a more specialized approach that takes these types of distribution into account is re
199. alibrated orifice and a digital manometer Integrated Sample Collection The following procedures should be followed to collect time integrated samples Initial and final flow rates will be determined with a digital manometer and a calibrated orifice After the sample is collected the filter will be folded lengthwise and placed in a filter holder The filter holder is then placed in an envelope and the envelope sealed e A Chain Of Custody Record should be completed detailing the time of sampling and the sampling interval and should be signed by the person collecting the sample After sample collection all sample envelopes will be placed in an appropriate container An EPA custody seal will be placed on the container prior to transport to the Region 4 laboratory for final weighing of filters 14 3 Non Criteria Pollutant Monitoring for Air pollutants for which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have not been established 14 3 1 Formaldehyde Sampling With Dinitrophenylhydrazine Cartridges Using Method TO 11A The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the handling and field use of dinitrophenylhydrazine DNPH cartridges for formaldehyde sampling This summary is adapted from METHOD TO 11A ofthe COMPENDIUM OF METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR The following generic procedures should be adhered to at all times e Polyethylene latex or Nylon gloves must be w
200. alist and the appropriate SESD Branch or Section Chief For criminal investigations when SESD s priorities prohibit and immediate response the DRA will determine an appropriate course of action If the DRA determines that providing the requested technical support will be in the best interest of the Region the support will be provided and adjustments will be made to other SESD commitments SESD s technical support may begin immediately after receiving concurrence from the DRA The SAC has the responsibility of notifying appropriate regional organizational units e g Office Directors Division Directors etc of potential or on going investigations receiving assistance from SESD or the technical divisions at NEIC All emergency requests shall be handled expeditiously In such instances SESD may provide the requested assistance immediately upon obtaining verbal approval from the DRA Either the SAC or the SESD Director may initiate contact with the DRA for emergency requests However all such requests shall be followed by a written request from the SAC through the DRA to the SESD Director F 3 Project Coordination Once the decision has been made to provide technical support the SESD Director or their designee shall assign the project to the appropriate Branch Section for assignment of a Project Leader The Project Leader will be responsible for coordinating with the Case Agent to obtain necessary background information to determine logistical re
201. all For example a 2 nominal diameter nom casing would require a 6 inside diameter ID borehole EISOPQAM 6 4 November 2001 In hollow stem augers and sonic method drill casing the ID should be of sufficient size to allow the passage of the tremie pipe to be used for well grout placement as well as free passage of filter sands or bentonite pellets dropped through the auger or casing In general 4 1 4 ID should be the minimum size used for placement of 2 nom casing and 8 1 4 ID for 4 nom casing Larger augers should be used where installation difficulties due to geologic conditions or greater depths are anticipated e g larger augers might be required to place a bentonite pellet seal through a long water column 6 4 2 Overdrilling the Borehole Sometimes it is necessary to overdrill the borehole so that any soils that have not been removed or that have fallen into the borehole during augering or drill stem retrieval will fall to the bottom of the borehole below the depth where the filter pack and well screen are to be placed Normally 3 to 5 feet is sufficient for overdrilling The borehole can also be overdrilled to allow for an extra space or a sump area below the well screen This sump area provides a space to attach a 5 or 10 foot section of well casing to the bottom of the well screen The extra space or sump below the well screen serves as a catch basin or storage area for sediment that flows into the well and drops out of su
202. als will have to be accurately measured EISOPQAM 12 7 November 2001 Sample Size While this method is an improvement over earlier ones field investigators must be aware of an inherent limitation Because of the extremely small sample size sample representativeness for VOC s may be reduced compared to samples with larger volumes collected for other constituents The sampling design and objectives of the investigation should take this into consideration Holding Times Sample holding times are specified in Appendix A Field investigators should note that the holding time for an un preserved VOC soil sediment sample is 48 hours Arrangements should be made to ship the soil sediment VOC samples to the laboratory by overnight delivery the day they are collected so the laboratory may preserve and or analyze the sample within 48 hours of collection Percent Moisture Samplers must ensure that the laboratory has sufficient material to determine percent moisture in the VOC soil sediment sample to correct the analytical results to dry weight If other analyses requiring percent moisture determination are being performed upon the sample these results may be used If not a separate sample minimum of 2 oz for percent moisture determination will be required Safety Methanol is a toxic and flammable liquid Therefore methanol must be handled with all required safety precautions related to toxic and flammable liquids Inhalation of methanol vapors
203. ample to three pre preserved 40 ml vials see Appendix A The ascorbic acid and preservative must be added in this order and in two separate steps The 40 ml vials should be completely filled to prevent volatilization and extreme caution should be exercised when filling each vial to prevent any turbulence which could also produce volatilization The sample should be carefully poured down the side of the vial to minimize turbulence As a rule it is best to gently pour the last few drops into the vial so that surface tension holds the water in a convex meniscus The cap is then applied and some overflow is lost but air space in the bottle is eliminated After capping turn the bottle over and tap it to check for bubbles if any are present repeat the procedure using a new 40 ml vial 9 7 Special Process Control Samples and Tests During diagnostic evaluations process control tests may be conducted to evaluate and troubleshoot the performance of the biological treatment processes of a municipal or industrial wastewater treatment facility The EPA Activated Sludge Process Control Testing handbook is the standard reference for activated sludge process control testing 3 The manual includes a complete description of the step by step procedures for each test and the interpretation of the results The six basic activated sludge process control tests are e Sludge settleability settlometer e Centrifuge spins e Aeration basin DO profiles Ox
204. ampling traps in the laboratory during preparation for shipment during field set up in field during preparation for return shipment and in the laboratory during preparation for analysis and during analysis EISOPQAM 14 17 November 2001 Pre cleaned mercury sampling traps which have been prepared for longer than 60 days shall not be used Chain of custody shall be maintained for all samples A minimum of one trip blank shall be transported one per ten samples collected Laboratory Upon completion of preparation of the mercury sampling traps both ends shall be plugged with Teflon male plugs the plug connection wrapped in Teflon tape and each trap placed in a plastic shipping tube A serial number expiration date and a lot number label will be placed on each shipping tube The batches of shipping tubes shall be placed in sealed lock top plastic containers Air Monitoring Staff The Air Monitoring Staff will notify and keep the laboratory informed as to the anticipated number of prepared mercury sampling traps needed for field use On routine studies the Air Monitoring Staff will notify the laboratory of needs at least two weeks in advance of needed pick up date Only the number of mercury sampling traps needed for a maximum of 60 days including trip blanks and extra sampling traps for breakage will be requested On the date of shipment or when loading out for a study the Air Monitoring Staff will remove the sealed plasti
205. and Oxygen Alarm Introduction The MSA Model 260 Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm is a hand carried battery operated instrument It is used to sample atmospheres for combustible gases or vapors and oxygen content and warn the user when pre determined concentrations of either are reached The monitor will only detect combustible gases and vapors in air It will not indicate the presence of combustible airborne mists or dusts such as lubricating oils coal dust or grain dust THE LACK OF A RESPONSE ON THIS METER DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE ENVIRONMENT IS SAFE Operational Checks 1 Connect the probe line to the monitor s water drop out bottle Check the probe fitting and the water drop out bottle fitting for tightness Place the monitor s ON OFF switch in the HORN OFF position e Note that the monitor s 76 OXYGEN and LEL meters respond upscale and then stabilize Note that the oxygen alarm and LEL alarm lights are illuminated the green flow indicator is flashing and the FLOW indicator float is vibrating audibly Press the RESET button and observe that both ALARM lights go out Press the CHECK button and record the battery reading from the LEL meter Set the OXYGEN meter to read 20 8 using the CALIBRATE O knob Set the 46 LEL meter to read zero using the ZERO LEL knob Place the monitor s function switch to the ON position Leak check the monitor by placing your thumb tightly ove
206. and press ENTER For example you want to make up a HazComm label for a container of Nitric Acid In the Jump To menu scroll down to HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION and press enter After a few seconds that portion of the MSDS will be displayed showing the NFPA numbers to enter on the label Now suppose you want to know how to store your newly labeled container of nitric acid Press F7 again to activate the pull down Jump To menu Scroll to HANDLING AND STORAGE and press enter The screen will display the portion of the MSDS dealing with handling and storage If you would like to know what the incompatibles are that the MSDS keeps referring to Press F7 and on the Jump To menu scroll to STABILITY AND REACTIVITY then press ENTER The screen will display the types of things and a list of specific things that nitric acid should be kept separate from and why EISOPQAM 4 3 November 2001 4 2 5 5 Ifyou would like to print the MSDS press F2 for the Menu Scroll down to PRINT DATA and press the ENTER key The MSDS will print out on the network printer you have selected for your PC 6 To exit the program press F2 for the Menu Scroll down to EXIT and press the ENTER key Finally here are a few suggestions to help you when doing a search Take the example of methylene chloride If you try this one by following the instructions given above you will find that the search will find 0 documents This does not mean there is no MSDS for methylene chloride it mea
207. anning phase may be unsuccessful for collecting a particular waste sample and another piece of equipment will be required as a substitute Any sampling bias or deficiencies resulting from the use of substituted equipment should be documented and reviewed with the data 5 8 5 Field Screening Field screening can be very effective in waste characterization and extremely valuable in selecting appropriate sampling locations and chemical analyses when little preliminary data exists Field investigators routinely use observations container labels markings physical characteristics air monitoring equipment pH meters paper and field flash point analyzers to confirm preliminary data or to decide on sampling locations during waste investigations Figure 5 1 RCRA Waste Characterization is a flow diagram that depicts the process that field investigators may use to decide which waste containers to sample and what analyses to perform on particular samples when attempting to make RCRA Characteristic Waste determinations EISOPQAM 5 23 November 2001 FIGURE 5 1 RCRA WASTE CHARACTERIZATIO N FLOW CHART zc 9c ALIAISOHHOO 3 Iduvs 07314 3ldWvs SISATWNY 07314 7T3A3193H SISATYNY 8V1 NOISIO3Q 8v1 NOISI23Q 07314 SLNANLLLSNOD 3118 OL T3A3193M dOl 4 NVOS X0c fe SLNANLILSNOO an OL A 1S3d 31X3 SOINVOHONI vC 9c
208. anuals during field use and before being returned to storage See References 4 and 5 Steel and Cloth Measuring Tapes The following procedures shall be used for all measuring tapes All measuring tapes will be calibrated against an Invar steel surveyors chain or the theodolite EDM both of which are traceable to the National Bureau of Standards NBS Those steel tapes that are not within 0 01 foot per 100 feet or cloth tapes not within 0 02 foot per 100 feet shall be discarded Tapes shall be checked to see that they are not damaged and are clean before and after use Compass All compasses shall be checked for proper movement of the compass needle If the compass needle movement is sluggish the glass cover can be removed by prying a knife point under the spring washer The copper wire on the needle is then moved until the needle lies level Reference 3 be checked for proper alignment of clinometer level The clinometer is checked by setting the clinometer to 0 and placing the compass on a surface that has been leveled exactly with either a carpenters level or a water tube level If the horizontal level bubble on the clinometer does not rest at the center the compass is opened as described above and the clinometer level vial is moved and rechecked as appropriate If the level vial becomes broken the compass must be sent to the manufacturer to be repaired Reference 3 and be cleaned after use and before storage If the
209. ap water 2 Rinse the soap from the outside of the pump and hose with tap water 3 Rinse the tap water residue from the outside of pump and hose with analyte free water 4 Place the pump and hose in a clean plastic bag B 2 6 Redi Flo2 Pump The Redi Flo2 pump should be cleaned prior to use and between each monitoring well The following procedure is required CAUTION Make sure the pump is not plugged in 1 Using a brush scrub the exterior of the pump electrical cord and garden hose with soap and tap water Do not wet the electrical plug 2 Rinse with tap water 3 Rinse with analyte free water 4 Place the equipment in a clean plastic bag To clean the Redi Flo2 ball check valve 1 Completely dismantle ball check valve Check for wear and or corrosion and replace as needed 2 Using a brush scrub all components with soap and tap water 3 Rinse with analyte free water 4 Reassemble and re attach the ball check valve to the Redi Flo2 pump head EISOPQAM B 5 November 2001 B 2 7 Automatic Sampler Tubing The Silastic and Tygon tubing previously used in the automatic samplers may be field cleaned as follows 1 Flush tubing with tap water and soap 2 Rinse tubing thoroughly with tap water 3 Rinse tubing with analyte free water B 3 Downhole Drilling Equipment These procedures are to be used for drilling activities involving the collection of soil samples for trace organic and inorganic constituent analys
210. apter for such a discussion Weirs A weir is basically defined as an overflow structure built according to specific design standards across an open channel to measure the flow of water Equations can be derived for weirs of specific geometry which relate static head to water flow discharge Weirs are generally classified into two general categories broad crested and sharp crested Broad crested weirs take the following form Q CLH Values for the coefficient C are given in hydraulic handbooks 4 5 Broad crested weirs can only be used to calculate instantaneous flows Sharp crested weirs are constructed in a wide variety of shapes and the most commonly encountered are V notch rectangular and Cipolletti weirs If such weirs are constructed as outlined in the USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 they are considered standard primary flow devices All weirs should be inspected to determine if the weir installation and construction conform to the conditions given in the USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 and provide a uniform influent flow distribution and that the weir is placed squarely across the channel perpendicular to the direction of flow Useful tools for checking weir construction and installation include a carpenter s level a framing square a measuring tape a staff gage or surveyors level and rod Problems observed during the inspection or study should be noted in the field records or log book A set of weir tables is necessary for
211. ards semi annually and a record of the calibration is maintained on file at the FEC The Gelex secondary standards will be standardized against the Formazin Primary Standards by the FEC The turbidimeter should be verified with the Gelex secondary standards before each use These verifications should be documented in the inspector s logbook Standard Methods requires that the conductivity meter s electrode cell be verified by comparing against a laboratory meter with a platinum electrode type conductivity cell The FEC will perform and document this quality control check at least annually especially if the meter is used for NPDES monitoring activities A label will be placed on the field instruments to indicate when the next verification check is required EISOPQAM 16 1 November 2001 16 2 Temperature Normally temperature measurements may be made with any good alcohol filled thermometer or a NIST traceable digital thermometer As a minimum the thermometer should be capable of reading or have a scale marked in 0 1 C For field operations with glass thermometers a thermometer having a metal case to prevent breakage should be used Calibration Calibrate any temperature measurement device by checking annually against a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST certified thermometer Clearly indicate whatever correction must be applied to the thermometer Note Thermistors should be checked against a NIST traceable thermometer prio
212. are required for an individual designated to be a Site safety officer SSO Branch safety protocols are to be administrated by the Division s Occupational Health and Safety Designee OHSD and the appointed Division Safety Health and Environmental Manager SHEM Safety protocols are to be followed by the SSO as well as each individual that is a part of the investigation Safety during hazardous waste site investigations begins with the individual However itis the responsibility of the SSO to plan and coordinate the following during an investigation 1 Ensure that each member of the investigative team is up to date on their site safety training i e Annual Safety Refresher CPR and First Aid or has received an over ride by the OHSD Meet with the project leader to gain knowledge of site operations and sampling strategies Prepare and enforce the site safety plan Make sure that necessary project specific safety equipment is available and operational This includes checking out air monitoring instruments to ensure that they are fully operational charged and calibrated for Level B operations checking cool vest batteries and pumps filling and checking self contained breathing apparatus SCBA air tanks and or the airline system The SSO is also responsible for oversight of safety during the investigation This oversight can include the following duties safety sweep with air monitoring instruments at the commencement of the site investi
213. ared to the head at the proper location Ha in the converging section A staff gage is useful for making head measurements Any problems observed during the inspection or study should be noted in the field log book A set of flume tables is necessary for calculating flows The USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 the Stevens Water Resources Data Book 6 and the ISCO Open Channel Flow Measurement Handbook 7 contain a complete set of tables The explanatory material accompanying these tables should be read and understood before they are used In many cases tabulated flow values are given for measured heads that are not within the usable measurement range Open Flow Nozzles Open flow nozzles such as parabolic or Kennison nozzles are factory calibrated and are ordinarily supplied as part of a flow measurement system Calibration and installation information for each nozzle should be supplied by or obtained from the manufacturer The accuracy of these devices is reported to be often better than 5 percent of the indicated flow 9 A volumetric flow measurement may be used to check accuracy of this device if flow volumes are not excessive Velocity Area Method The basic principal of this method is that the flow in a channel cubic feet second is equal to the average velocity feet second times the cross sectional area square feet of the channel The velocity ofthe water or wastewater is determined with a current meter The area of the channel is
214. arm up period NOTE If only one of the 2 detectors is desired calibrate only that detector INSTRUMENT STARTUP PROCEDURES 1 Ensure that internal battery is charge 2 Connect sample probe 3 Fill install the hydrogen tank left handed thread turn counter clockwise until resistance is felt 4 Turn red H Supply valve to ON position if using FID 5 Press ON 6 Press CONTROL 7 Press 1 Pump on 8 Press CONTROL 9 Press 2 FID on 10 Press CONTROL 11 Press 3 Ignt 12 Press CONTROL 13 Press 4 PID on Allow instrument to warm up for approximately 30 minutes INSTRUMENT SETUP While instrument is warming up check the following ALARMS 1 From Main Menu press 2 Setup 2 Press 2 Alarm 3 Press 1 STEL if needed EISOPQAM 17 7 November 2001 OTHER 4 Press 1 Both Enter STEL value press Enter Accept Press 2 Low Ceiling Press 1 Both Set level at 5 0 ppm press Enter Accept Press 3 High Ceiling Press 1 Both Set level at 200 ppm press Enter Accept Press EXIT Press 6 Other Press 2 Date to verify date change if needed Press 3 Time to verify time change if needed Other settings should not need to be changed Press EXIT CALIBRATION CONFIGURATION 1 2 Press 1 Calib Press 1 Cfg Press 1 Number span pt Verify that value is 1 for both detectors Press EXIT Press 2 Background correct Select background correction option 1 Both 2 None 3 PID or 4 FID Press EXIT Press DOWN arrow Press 1 Accept Mode
215. arrangements for proper containerization labeling transportation and disposal treatment in accordance with US EPA regulations The generation of hazardous IDW should be minimized to conserve Branch resources Most routine studies should not produce any hazardous IDW with the exception of spent solvents and possibly purged ground water Care should be taken to keep non hazardous materials segregated from hazardous waste contaminated materials The volume of spent solvents produced during equipment decontamination should be controlled by applying only the minimum amount of solvent necessary and capturing it separately from the washwater At a minimum the requirements of the management of hazardous IDW are as follows e Spent solvents must be returned to the FEC for proper disposal or recycling All hazardous IDW must be containerized Proper handling and disposal should be arranged prior to commencement of field activities EISOPQAM 5 39 November 2001 TABLE 5 15 1 DISPOSAL of IDW TYPE HAZARDOUS NON HAZARDOUS PPE Disposable PPE Reusable Spent Solvents Soil Cuttings Decontamination Water Disposable Equipment EISOPQAM Containerize in plastic 5 gallon bucket with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise return to FEC for proper disposal Decontaminate as per Appendix B if possible If the equipment cannot be decontaminated containerize in plastic 5 gallon bucket
216. asone Salinometer have an accuracy of 0 7 ppt at 1 full scale conductance at 0 1 C e These meters are suited for use in brackish to saline waters having a salinity range of 0 to 40 ppt Units Units are reported as salinity in the nearest tenth of a ppt 0 1 ppt 16 7 Dissolved Oxygen DO Meter available e YSI Models 55 57 or 58 membrane covered electrode ME DO meter Membrane covered electrode systems utilize a sensing element that is protected by an oxygen permeable membrane that serves as a diffusion barrier against impurities The meters for determining the DO in water are dependent upon electrochemical reactions Under steady state conditions the current is directly proportional to the DO concentration Interfacial dynamics at the ME sample interface are a factor in probe response and a significant degree or interfacial turbulence is necessary For precision performance turbulence should be constant Inspection e Prior to field use the membrane of the DO probe should be inspected for air bubbles and or holes If air bubbles or holes exist replace the membrane The membrane should be checked for dryness If the membrane is dry replace and soak it in analyte free water prior to calibration of the meter EISOPQAM 16 8 November 2001 Calibration e Air calibrate according to the manufacturer s instructions either in air saturated water or in a water saturated air environment The ME meter can be calibrated
217. ate pumping and high air pressures can damage or destroy the well screen and filter pack The onsite geologist should make the decision as to the development completion of each well All field decisions should be documented in the field log book The following development procedures listed in increasing order of the energy applied to the formation materials are generally used to develop monitoring wells 1 Bailing 2 Pumping overpumping 3 Surging 4 Backwashing rawhiding 5 Jetting 6 Compressed air with appropriate filtering airlift pumping and air surging These developmental procedures can be used individually or in combination in order to achieve the most effective well development In most cases overpumping and surging will adequately develop the well without imparting undue forces on the formation or well materials Except when compressed air 1s being used for well development sampling can be initiated as soon as the ground water has re equilibrated is free of visible sediment and the water quality parameters have stabilized Since site conditions vary even between wells a general rule of thumb is to wait 24 hours after development to sample a new monitoring well Wells developed with stressful measures may require as long as a 7 day interval before sampling In particular air surge developed wells require 48 hours or longer after development so that the formation can EISOPQAM 6 14 November 2001 dispel the compressed
218. ate sampling points or other site features EXAMPLE 1 Horizontal Angles Figure 15 2 1 illustrates that while the instrument is at point A a control point one reads the back sight angle azimuth or bearing to point C then turns and measures H horizontal angle the foresight angle azimuth or bearing to A point B The difference between the two disini angles is the interior angle included at the intersection of line AC and line AB or the horizontal angle H lt The field notation B foresight for the measurement of the angle above would be represented as angle C A B Example 1 Figure 15 2 1 Map view Typically the first column to the left in the showing horizontal angle C A B field book is labeled BS FS which stands for Backsight Instrument Foresight or the column will simply be labeled Station and the second column is labeled H lt see Example 5 Field Notation C backsight EISOPQAM 15 5 November 2001 EXAMPLE 2 Vertical or Zenith dish Angles After the horizontal angle is Z determined the vertical angle V lt is measured in Figure 15 2 2 from point B to point X to determine the angle between the line of sight AX and the horizontal line AB The vertical angle is the included angle between a line connecting two points of different elevations and a line horizontal to the earths gravity The vertical angle in Figure 15 2 2 is above the horizontal line AB V lt vertical angle and is also call
219. ate the charger with the timer in Hold position 13 Recheck the charger s control knob to insure it is on 0 and then place the charger s power switch to ON 14 SLOWLY increase the charger s control knob until a reading of between 7 and 8 amps is obtained on the amp meter WARNING Never exceed a reading of more than 8 amps output from the charger Always advance the control knob slowly In the event of a bad contact arching of the charge current will occur and can result in an excessive flow of current to the batteries 15 Observe the batteries for a few minutes to insure that none are boiling over G 3 Post Charging After batteries have charged for the amount of time set on the charger the following procedure will be used to shut down the charger and to remove and store charged batteries CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLODING BATTERIES Batteries generate explosive gasses Keep sparks flames burning cigarettes cigars or other ignition sources away at all times Always shield eyes when working near batteries Charge batteries only in well ventilated areas Wear protective covering when working around batteries DANGER OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK Never touch output leads while charger switch is on Charger s maximum output is 280 volts at 9 5 amps DANGER OF ACID BURNS Always wear face shield protective coat and rubber gloves when handling batteries In case of skin contact with acid immediately wash affected area for 15 minutes
220. ate time of water travel This is somewhat more refined than the floating objects estimates but can still be far from accurate There rarely are more than one or two gaging stations in most stream reaches being studied Stream channels generally are restricted at gaging stations and velocities there are generally higher than average velocities throughout the reach Cross sectional velocities can also be determined at locations designated for a particular study Tracer dyes provide a direct and highly accurate method of determining time of travel This is the preferred method if resources are available Floats Surface floats may be followed downstream and timed for known distances to determine time of water travel This requires the use of considerable judgment for floats tend to travel into quiet or eddy areas orto become stuck on tree limbs the stream bank or other obstacles The floats must frequently be retrieved and returned to the stream current The principal judgment factors are how long the floats should be left in quiet areas before retrieval and where they should be placed in the current Surface water velocity is greater than the average for the entire stream and a correction factor must be applied to the surface velocity An average velocity of about 85 percent of that of the surface velocity is a reasonable rule of thumb value EISOPQAM 15 23 November 2001 Cross Section Measurements The measurement of cross sectional vel
221. ated as per the Tekran manual Records Management amp Documentation The data sent to the attached computer will stored for on the computer but backup copies of the data should be placed onto removable discs and stored for record keeping 14 3 6 Sampling for Dioxin And Dibenzofuran Analyses with High Volume PUF Samplers Using Method TO 9A The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for use of the High Volume Polyurethane Foam PUF sampling method for collecting samples for polychlorinated dibenzo p dioxins and dibenzofurans analyses This summary is adapted from Method TO 9A of the COMPENDIUM OF METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR Since this method requires High Resolution Mass Spectrometry which the Region 4 laboratory does not have all sample media preparation and analysis will have to be contracted At least one month s notice prior to sampling should be given to obtain a contract laboratory program CLP contract for any dioxin and dibenzofuran analysis It is important that the contract specify a number of details to assure accurate results EISOPQAM 14 16 November 2001 All of the PUF media and a representative number of each batch of quartz pre filters should be checked by the contract laboratory to assure that there is no contamination Each PUF plug should be pre spiked by the contract laboratory with dioxin and dibenzofuran surrogates as a check of the ac
222. ater levels When necessary these instruments should be referenced to National Geodetic Vertical Datum NGVD All water level tracings should be noted with beginning and ending date and time site location stage scale and time scale and initialed by the field investigators Standard USGS staff gages should be employed at each water level recorder site to provide a reference and check on the recorder trace Water stage should be recorded to the nearest 0 01 foot where possible EISOPQAM 15 22 November 2001 Tape downs provide instantaneous water stage as referenced to a known elevation An engineering tape is fashioned with a plumb bob to measure from a bridge deck or other reference point to the water surface The plumb bob provides weight for the tape as well as providing a discernible contact with the water surface All measurements should be to the nearest 0 01 foot accompanied by a date time and station location The exact reference or point from which a tape down is measured should be permanently marked on the reference wing wall or bridge rail by etching a reference with a chisel etc and a complete description of the reference should be made in the field records Both of these procedures water stage and tape downs are predicated upon accurate references to established measuring points As mentioned above the NGVD is an established datum that provides correlation of water surface recordings to engineering structures bridge wing walls
223. ation can substantially alter dissolved trace element concentrations these include filter pore size filter type filter diameter filtration method volume of sample processed suspended sediment concentration suspended sediment grain size distribution concentration of colloids and colloidally associated trace elements and concentration of organic matter Therefore consistency is critical in the comparison of short term and long term results Further guidance on filtration may be obtained from the following 1 Metals in Ground Water Sampling Artifacts and Reproducibility 3 2 Filtration of Ground Water Samples for Metals Analysis 4 and 3 Ground Water Sampling A Workshop Summary 5 Bacterial Sampling Whenever wells normally potable wells are sampled for bacteriological parameters care must be taken to ensure the sterility of all sampling equipment and all other equipment entering the well Further information regarding bacteriological sampling is available in the following 1 Sampling for Organic Chemicals and Microorganisms in the Subsurface 6 2 Handbook for Evaluating Water Bacteriological Laboratories 7 and 3 Microbiological Methods for Monitoring the Environment Water and Wastes 8 7 3 6 Specific Sampling Equipment Quality Assurance Techniques All equipment used to collect ground water samples shall be cleaned as outlined in Appendix B and repaired if necessary before being stored at the conclusion of field stu
224. ation and will contain the following as appropriate Introduction When the investigation was conducted EPA state or other regulatory agency participation facility representatives and what their participation included who requested the investigation and the objectives Background Study area descriptions manufacturing process and waste handling priorities results of previous investigations etc A site map depicting major structures and facilities as well as sampling locations will be included Summary A brief summary of the key results and conclusions of the study Discussion All aspects pertinent to the investigation such as analytical results deficiencies site hydrology an evaluation of the monitoring well system a site map showing monitoring well locations topography and ground water flow direction well depths and ground water elevations Methodology A statement indicating that this SOP was followed and or reasons why not and whether or not samples were split and with whom Conclusions At the discretion of the author a conclusions section for complex investigations e Reference and Appendices Laboratory data sheets checklists etc If the study is an RI the following additional information should also be included where appropriate Site information including site description site history previous investigation results regulatory actions demography and surrounding land use
225. ation for the COC relative to those anticipated during the planning process may require a re evaluation of the assumed margin of error A coefficient of variation CV which is defined as the standard deviation of a COC divided by the mean of the COC is either obtained using previous sampling data or estimated based on anticipated variability If a CV above 0 65 is obtained a large number of samples will usually result The number of samples required may be minimized by using a stratified design if areas with known high variability can be identified and addressed separately from areas of lower variability Areas of high variability will require more samples while areas of low variability will require fewer using the approach outlined in this section The overall effect will normally be a substantially lower number of samples for the entire site A confidence level t needs to be established For work involving hazardous wastes a confidence level of 95 should be used For a 95 confidence level a factor of 1 96 from standard statistical tables is used to calculate the number of samples required The required number of samples is calculated using the following formula n tXCVy 2 p Where n number of samples to collect ta statistical factor for a 95 confidence level CV coefficient of variation p margin or error In a case where no previous sampling data is available the default values given in the previous discussion ca
226. ation of these samples The following precautions shall be taken when trace contaminants are of concern Aclean pair of new non powdered disposable latex gloves will be worn each time a different location is sampled and the gloves should be donned immediately prior to sampling The gloves should not come into contact with the media being sampled e Sample containers for source samples or samples suspected of containing high concentrations of contaminants shall be placed in separate plastic bags immediately after collecting tagging etc e If possible ambient samples and source samples should be collected by different field teams If different field teams cannot be used all ambient samples shall be collected first and placed in separate ice chests or shipping containers Samples of waste or highly contaminated samples shall never be placed in the same ice chest as environmental samples Ice chests or shipping containers for source samples or samples suspected to contain high concentrations of contaminants shall be lined with new clean plastic bags f possible one member of the field sampling team should take all the notes fill out tags etc while the other members collect the samples When sampling surface waters the water sample should always be collected before the sediment sample is collected e Sample collection activities should proceed progressively from the least suspected contaminated area to the most suspected contami
227. ation will be no more than 90 days after the actual renewal date Scheduling training will be the responsibility of each individual unless otherwise stipulated in the notification Upon scheduling of the training the individual will notify the Branch safety officer of the date Upon successful completion of training a copy of the certificate received will be sent by the individual to the Branch safety officer for inclusion in the safety training file In the event that a field investigator s OSHA required training has lapsed by more than 90 days the individual will not be allowed to enter onto a hazardous waste site When lapses in training required by EPA policy occur the individual will be allowed to enter hazardous waste sites at the discretion of the Occupational Health and Safety Designee OHSD The individual and their supervisor will be notified of the change in status Upon successful completion of the required training the individual and their supervisor will be notified of their return to prior status 4 3 6 Site Operations Upon initial entry at a hazardous waste site a site survey will be conducted In a facility that has active working employees the site survey may be conducted in Level D accompanied by air monitoring At sites that do not have active working employees the SSO must use discretion when choosing the level of protection that will be used while conducting an initial site survey All initial site surveys should be conduct
228. aution Once the buried waste is uncovered the appropriate safety and sampling procedures utilized will depend on the type of waste unit 13 2 1 Open Units While open units may contain many types of wastes and come in a variety of shapes and sizes they can be generally regarded as either waste piles or surface impoundments Definitions of these two types of open units from 40 CFR Part 260 10 are e Waste pile any non containerized accumulation of solid non flowing hazardous waste that is used for treatment or storage and that is not a containment building e Surface impoundment a facility or part of a facility which is a natural topographic depression man made excavation or diked area formed primarily of earthen materials although it may be lined with man made materials which is designed to hold the accumulation of liquid wastes or wastes containing free liquids and which is notan injection well Examples of surface impoundments are holding storage settling and aeration pits ponds and lagoons One of the distinguishing features between waste piles and surface impoundments is the state of the waste Waste piles typically contain solid or non flowing materials whereas liquid wastes are usually contained in surface impoundments The nature of the waste will also determine the mode of delivering the waste to the unit Wastes are commonly pumped or gravity fed into impoundments while heavy equipment or trucks may be used to dump
229. bag The T fitting and tubing will be purged with calibration gas prior to connection of the Teflon bag The bottom or side port of the T will be connected with Teflon tubing to a stainless steel quick disconnect Once the Teflon bag has been filled with gas the gas flow will be turned off The monitor s probe will be connected to the manifold via the quick disconnect and allowed to sample the contents of the Teflon bag Calibration Frequency Itis required that the monitors be calibrated each time they are turned on More frequent calibrations are encouraged if the field investigators determine that field conditions and hazards are warranted Frequent checking of monitor response or proper setting and operation of alarms is encouraged Prior to turning off the monitor a post calibration check shall be performed This check will follow the same procedures as the initial calibration except that no adjustments will be made to the monitor Instead the response will simply be logged in the field book Documentation Calibrations should be documented in the field log book The entry needs to include the following information CALIBRATION DOCUMENTATION Monitor s Identification Number Date of Calibration Time of Calibration E rs CS Battery Check Response AamRespone EesmmenRegone Calibration Gas Concentration Pearsa o G ee Operator s Initials EISOPQAM 17 2 November 2001 17 2 MSA Model 260 Combustible Gas
230. bble is checked and brought level using the three screw leveling heads The instrument is ready for use when after repeated rotations the bubble in the horizontal level remains exactly in the center or middle of its housing The rodman has either a range pole equipped with a reflector prism single or triple or a tripod with the reflector prism The prism is used to reflect the signal from the electronic distance meter in the total station theodolite While located over the point s whose elevation is desired the rodman holds the range pole level by means of centering the bullseye bubble or sets up the tripod by means of centering the bullseye bubble with the three screw leveling heads The instrument man sights through the telescope on the theodolite lines up the horizontal and vertical cross hairs on the center of the prism and takes a reading of both the vertical angle V lt and the distance to the prism The difference in elevation between the theodolite and the prism is determined trigonometrically A compass with a clinometer and a measuring tape could also be used for field measurements or as a map reference EISOPQAM 15 19 November 2001 The following three examples graphically depict the distances that must be considered and accounted for when using the trigonometric leveling method to compute the vertical changes in elevation The field notation for trigonometric leveling follows each example Example 2 The elevation at point A in
231. be important when the study s objective is to fully characterize a waste stream using a probabilistic or statistical design EISOPQAM 5 22 November 2001 Probabilistic sampling designs similar to the ones used to characterize a site with soil contamination can be used to characterize large units such as waste piles or surface impoundments with random contaminant distributions Note that an authoritative design is often appropriate to demonstrate the maximum degree of contamination in certain waste management units Examples include the collection of a sludge sample for inorganic analyses at the inlet to a surface impoundment or a sample for volatile organic compound analysis collected from the most recently generated material placed in a waste pile A comprehensive probabilistic design may be required to fully characterize unusually complex wastestreams that have a high degree of heterogeneity For some highly complex heterogeneous wastes where an average concentration would not be reflected by a design of reasonable scope an authoritative sampling design based on the sampler s experience may be the only feasible approach For a heterogeneous waste population it may be necessary to segregate and sample components suspected of containing constituents of concern Background samples are not required when collecting highly concentrated waste samples 5 8 4 Waste Sampling Equipment An extremely important factor in the sampling strategy will be deter
232. be left overnight for sampling the following day but the well must be secured If the well is not sampled immediately after construction the well should be purged prior to sampling as specified in Section 7 2 4 6 10 2 Data Limitation Temporary wells described in this section are best used for delineation of contaminant plumes at a point in time and for some site screening purposes They are not intended to replace permanent monitoring wells Perhaps the best use for temporary wells is in conjunction with a mobile laboratory where quick analytical results can be used to delininate contaminant plumes 6 10 3 Temporary Well Materials Materials used in construction of temporary monitoring wells are the same standard materials used in the construction of permanent monitoring wells Sand used for the filter pack if any should be as specified in Section 6 6 3 The well screen and casing should be stainless steel for ruggedness and suitability for steam cleaning and solvent rinsing Other materials may be acceptable on a case by case basis Some commercially available temporary well materials pre packed riser screen and filter pack assemblies are available commercially however these pre assembled materials cannot be cleaned Appropriate QA QC must be performed to assure there will be no introduction of contamination 6 10 4 Temporary Monitoring Well Borehole Construction Borehole construction for temporary wells is as specified in Section 6
233. before selection Any method not capable of providing measurements to within 0 1 foot should not be used 15 5 3 Total Well Depth Measurement Techniques The bell sounder weighted tape or electronic water level indicators can be used to determine the total well depth This is accomplished by lowering the tape or cable until the weighted end is felt resting on the bottom of the well Because of tape buoyancy and weight effects encountered in deep wells with long water columns it may be difficult to determine when the tape end is touching the bottom of the well Care must be taken in these situations to ensure accurate measurements All total well depth measurements must be made and recorded to the nearest 0 1 foot 15 5 4 Equipment Available The following equipment is available for ground water level and total well depth measurements weighted steel measuring tapes electronic water level indicators EISOPQAM 15 29 November 2001 15 5 5 Specific Quality Control Procedures Devices used to measure ground water levels should be calibrated against the Invar steel surveyor s chain These devices should be calibrated to 0 01 foot per 10 feet length Before each use these devices should be prepared according to the manufacturer s instructions if appropriate and checked for obvious damage These devices should be decontaminated according to the procedures specified in Appendix B prior to use at the next well All calibration and maintenance da
234. ber 2001 All documents records evidence etc retained by the SESD will be maintained in a locked filing cabinet or a secure area under the direct control of the appropriate Branch Chief Section Chief or the custodian of SESD s central records center F 9 Sample Disposal All excess samples and or sample containers shall be maintained in the sample custody room until written authorization for sample disposal is received from the Case Agent Because of insufficient space in the sample custody room the Case Agent shall expeditiously inform the laboratory when samples can be disposed Sample disposal procedures shall be as described in the Analytical Support Branch Laboratory Operations and Quality Assurance Manual EISOPQAM F 5 November 2001 APPENDIX G BATTERY CHARGING AND STORAGE OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES To insure that field batteries are properly charged and maintained To insure that field battery charging is conducted in a safe and efficient manner To provide a means for keeping an inventory of the status and number of field batteries on hand G 1 Receiving Batteries from the Field Upon return from the field batteries may or may not require maintenance and charging The following procedure will be used to process incoming batteries CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLODING BATTERIES Batteries generate explosive gasses Keep sparks flames burning cigarettes cigars or otherignition sources away at all times Always sh
235. bination controller which can consist of either a small battery powered unit capable of providing pressure to operate the bladder pump at a depth of approximately 75 feet or a larger gasoline powered unit that will allow operation at depths of over 150 feet E 3 2 Operation Bladder Pump 1 Connect air supply hose to pump supply connection on controller and to brass air connection on hose reel cart 2 Lower pump into well and place top of pump several feet below the top of the water column 3 Turnonthe compressor If the gasoline powered compressor is used place as far from the well as possible in the down wind direction EISOPQAM E 5 November 2001 4 Adjust the timing of the discharge and refill cycles until maximum flow is achieved 5 Lower pump as necessary if water level is reduced in well E 3 3 Operation Purge Pump 1 Connect air supply hose to pump supply connection on controller and connection on top of pump Observe flow direction arrow on purge pump exhaust adapter The arrow must point in the direction of air flow from the controller to the pump 2 Attach adequate length of standard garden hose to hose fitting at top of pump 3 Lower pump air hose and garden hose into water column until top of pump is several feet below top of water column 4 Follow Steps 3 through 5 above E 3 4 Trouble Shooting l Air supply fittings l Check all fittings and Compressor running loose tighten no pressure on di
236. bjectives using a standard cleaning procedure B 1 Introduction Cleaning procedures in this appendix are intended for use by field personnel for cleaning sampling and other equipment in the field Emergency field sample container cleaning procedures are also included however they should not be used unless absolutely necessary Cleaning procedures for use at the Field Equipment Center FEC are in Appendix C Sampling and field equipment cleaned in accordance with these procedures must meet the minimum requirements for Data Quality Objectives DQO definitive data collection Deviations from these procedures should be documented in the approved study plan field records and investigative reports These are the materials methods and procedures to be used when cleaning sampling and other equipment in the field B 1 1 Specifications for Cleaning Materials Specifications for standard cleaning materials referred to in this appendix are as follows e Soap shall be a standard brand of phosphate free laboratory detergent such as Liquinox Use of other detergent must be justified and documented in the field logbooks and inspection or investigative reports e Solvent shall be pesticide grade isopropanol Use of a solvent other than pesticide grade isopropanol for equipment cleaning purposes must be justified in the study plan Otherwise its use must be documented in field logbooks and inspection or investigation reports Tap water may be us
237. ble as long as it meets the above analytical criteria EISOPQAM C 1 November 2001 Other solvents may be substituted for a particular investigation if needed Pesticide grade acetone or methanol are acceptable However it should be noted that if pesticide grade acetone is used the detection of acetone in samples collected with acetone rinsed equipment is considered suspect Pesticide grade methanol is much more hazardous to use than either pesticide grade acetone or isopropanol therefore its use is discouraged Solvents nitric acid solution laboratory detergent and rinse waters used to clean equipment cannot be reused C 1 2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions Improperly handled cleaning solutions may easily become contaminated Containers should be constructed of the proper materials to ensure their integrity Following are the materials to be used for storing the specified cleaning materials Soap should be kept in clean containers until use It should be poured directly from the container Disinfectant soap should be kept in clean containers until use It should be poured directly from the container e Solvents should be stored in the unopened original containers until used Solvents may be applied using the low pressure nitrogen system fitted with a Teflon nozzle or by using Teflon squeeze bottles Tap water may be kept in clean tanks hand pressure sprayers squeeze bottles or applied directly from a h
238. boratory for wipe preparations and wipe analyses should be made well in advance of the scheduled sampling event Note if gloves are used to collect the wipe samples control samples should be collected to determine if the gloves could potentially contribute constituents to the parameters of interest For items with porous surfaces such as documents usually business records insulation wood etc actual samples of the materials are required It is therefore important that during the collection and or analyses of the sample that evidentiary material is not destroyed Use scissors or other particle reduction device that have been cleaned as specified in Appendix B to cut shred the sample Mix in a glass pan as specified in Section 5 13 8 The shredded homogenized material is then placed in sample containers EISOPQAM 13 10 November 2001 13 6 Waste Sample Handling Procedures When collecting samples of concentrated wastes for laboratory analyses field personnel are required to screen the waste materials to ensure safe handling and transportation of the samples Safety procedures sampling and screening methods used to collect the samples must comply with those procedures methods described in this manual It should be noted that waste samples should not be preserved because of the potential for an inadvertent chemical reaction with the preservative Additionally concentrated waste samples are not required to be cooled to 4 C After samples
239. brief visual inspection of the permittee s treatment facility effluent and receiving waters The RI is intended to obtain a broad coverage of permittees of unknown status with a minimum amount of resources Pretreatment Compliance Inspection PCI The PCI evaluates the POTWs implementation of its approved pretreatment program It includes areview ofthe POTWs records on monitoring inspections and enforcement activities for its industrial users The PCI is usually conducted concurrently with another NPDES inspection of the POTW Sludge Inspection SI The SI is primarily conducted at POTWs Waste sludge generation and disposal practices are evaluated under the 40 CFR 503 regulations The SI includes a review of the sludge monitoring records sludge handling facilities and sludge disposal practices Legal Support Inspection LSI The LSI is an inspection conducted to satisfy a specific enforcement related problem An example of this type of inspection may be an enforcement request to inspect a permittee to see if it is appropriate to terminate a specific enforcement order or a request to gather data to support a planned action 2 5 3 Study Plans Routine NPDES inspections e g PAIs CSIs etc do not require a written study plan Detailed investigations such as diagnostic evaluations water quality studies and other large scale technical evaluations require a written study plan which should include the following minimal information
240. by angle azimuth or bearing and distance measurements from a control point by angular intersection from two control points by perpendicular offset from a line between two control points by angle from one control point and distance from another control point etc GPS methods utilize radio frequency measurements with multichannel receivers of the signals from the global network of satellites that the US Department of Defense has established Measurements of the horizontal sample locations or site features by GPS technology is actually based on the same principles used in traditional surveying methods However with space based GPS hand held receivers and data loggers measure the distances to three or more noncoincident points or satellites of known positions and triangulate the position of the sample location site feature or point on earth More fundamental information on GPS technology may be found in Reference 4 Regardless of the method s used horizontal location surveys should be based on established control points A network of horizontally and vertically located control points has been established and is continually maintained by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA through its National Geodetic Survey NGS formerly U S Coast and Geodetic Survey and National Ocean Survey The old horizontal datum called the North American Datum of 1927 NAD27 is currently being replaced with the newer datum of 1983 NAD83 The
241. by trained personnel who are familiar with these procedures If atany time personnel are not absolutely sure of what to do work should stop immediately and assistance should be sought NOTE Charger will not operate on less than four batteries CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLODING BATTERIES Batteries generate explosive gasses Keep sparks flames burning cigarettes cigars or other ignition sources away at all times Always shield eyes when working near batteries Charge batteries only in well ventilated areas Wear protective covering when working around batteries DANGER OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK Never touch output leads while charger switch is on Charger s maximum output is 280 volts at 9 5 amps DANGER OF ACID BURNS Always wear face shield protective coat and rubber gloves when handling batteries In case of skin contact with acid immediately wash affected area for 15 minutes using safety shower eye wash or sink as required Seek medical attention as soon as possible Notify the designated Safety Officer or management in the event of any injury Procedure l Insure that the 240 volt power supply box is locked in the OFF position 2 Insure that the Charger Power Switch is in the OFF position 3 Insure that the Charger Control Knob is set at 0 4 Inspect all terminal clips for broken insulation and proper connection 5 Clean all terminal clips with a wire brush 6 Place the batteries in the charger bench so that the battery numb
242. c Substances Control Act Section 1445 of the Safe Drinking Water Act Section 104 of the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act Superfund and Titles I IHI and IV of the Clean Air Act EISOPQAM 2 3 November 2001 2 3 8 Unreasonable Search and Seizure EPA authority under the various Acts is subject to the unreasonable search and seizure provisions of the Fourth Amendment to the Constitution The prohibition is not against all searches and seizures but only those which are unreasonable or which valid consent if required has not been given Consent in this context means the intentional foregoing of right to privacy which is not the result of either fear ignorance or trickery To comply with the Acts and avoid any unreasonable search or procedural problems a facility should be entered in the following manner 1 The facility premises should be entered through the main gate or through the entrance designated by the source if in response to an inspection notification letter a 308 letter for example The employee shall introduce herself himself in a dignified courteous manner to a responsible plant official A responsible plant official may be the owner operator officer or agent in charge of the facility including the plant environmental engineer Identification credentials shall always be presented If only a guard is present at the entrance employees shall present their credentials and
243. c containers which contain the mercury sampling traps sealed in plastic shipping tubes from the Air Laboratory An appropriate amount of packing material shall be placed in the shipping container to prevent breakage of the mercury sampling tubes On each sampling date the plastic container s will be removed from the refrigerator or cooler for transport to the field At each sampling location the plastic container will be opened and one mercury sampling tube will be removed wearing clean polyethylene or nylon gloves The end plugs will then be removed from each end of the mercury sampling trap which will be immediately placed on the sampling train The end plugs will be placed back into the shipping tube and the cap placed on the tube wrapped in Teflon tape The shipping tubes will be left in the sealed plastic container The same procedure will be adhered to at each sampling location A trip blank will be opened handled and resealed at one site to evaluate potential passive contamination The sampler will be manually turned on and allowed to run for two minutes An initial flowrate should be recorded on the sample data sheet The timer should be set to turn the sampler on and off at the desired times Air monitoring personnel should retrieve and secure the sample as soon as possible after the sampling period ends The sample pump should be manually turned on and allowed to run for two minutes and a final flowrate and the elapsed tim
244. cal self monitoring and forms the basis for all other inspection types except the Reconnaissance Inspection Guidance for conducting CEIs is given in the NPDES Compliance Evaluation Inspection Manual 2 EISOPQAM 2 7 November 2001 Compliance Sampling Inspections CSI CSI s are conducted where representative sample s of a permittee s influent and or effluent are collected and analyzed 1 to verify the accuracy of the permittee s discharge monitoring reports 2 to determine the quantity and quality of the effluent 3 to develop permits and or 4 where appropriate as evidence for enforcement proceedings This activity also includes the same objectives listed for CEI s and where appropriate may serve to gather detailed information for the possible institution of legal action against the permittee Guidance for conducting CSI s is given in the NPDES Compliance Sampling Inspection Manual 3 Toxic Sampling Inspections XSI The XSI has the same objectives as a conventional CSI However it places increased emphasis on toxic substances regulated by the NPDES permit The XSI covers priority pollutants other than heavy metals phenols and cyanide which are typically included in a CSI if regulated by the NPDES permit An XSI uses more resources than a CSI because highly sophisticated techniques are required to sample and analyze toxic pollutants An XSI may also evaluate raw materials process operations and treatment facilities to identify
245. calculating flows The USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 the Stevens Water Resource Data Book 6 and the ISCO Open Channel Flow Measurement Handbook 7 contain a complete set of tables Flumes Conditions that must be met in a flume are similar to those that occur at a weir or spillway crest since water passing through the throat should not be impeded by downstream conditions e g constrictions bends in channel obstructions There are several types of flumes e g Palmer Bowlus Cutthroat H and Trapezoidal but the most widely used is the Parshall flume The Parshall flume is considered a standard pri EISOPQAM 18 4 November 2001 mary flow device when constructed and installed as outlined in the USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 A complete discussion of other types of flumes is given in references 8 9 10 and 11 All flumes should be inspected to determine if entrance conditions provide a uniform influent flow distribution the flume dimensions conform to those given in the USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 the floor of the flume at the throat section is level and the throat section walls are vertical Useful tools for checking the construction and installation of Parshall and other flumes include a carpenter s level a framing square and a measuring tape The flume should be closely examined to determine if it is discharging freely If there is any question about free discharge the downstream head Hb should be measured and comp
246. ckly and completely to eliminate head space Soils sediments containing high total VOC concentrations may also be collected as described in Section 12 4 2 and preserved using 10 ml methanol 12 4 4 Waste Samples Collect an un preserved sample into a single 2 oz glass container Handle waste samples in accordance with Section 14 of this SOP 12 4 5 Special Techniques and Considerations Effervescence If low concentration samples effervesce from contact with the acid preservative see Sec 12 4 2 then either a test for effervescence must be performed prior to sampling or the investigators must be prepared to collect each sample both preserved or un preserved as needed or all samples must be collected un preserved To check for effervescence collect a test sample and add to a pre preserved vial If preservation acidification of the sample results in effervescence rapid formation of bubbles then preservation by acidification is not acceptable and the sample must be collected un preserved If effervescence occurs and only pre preserved sample vials are available the preservative solution may placed into an appropriate hazardous waste container and the vials triple rinsed with organic free water An appropriate amount of organic free water equal to the amount of preservative solution should be placed into the vial The sample may then be collected as an un preserved sample Note that the amount of organic free water placed into the vi
247. compass should become wet the compass is opened as previously described and the interior is dried using a toothpick and a piece of soft cloth or soft paper They should not be used exposed to or stored in strong electrical fields Reference 3 Prism Poles and Reflector Prisms All of this equipment shall be checked for warpage and or damage before use by sighting through the theodolite EDM while the poles prisms are rotated in two planes at 90 intervals The bulls eye bubble will be reset as appropriate and be cleaned daily after use and before being returned to storage EISOPQAM 15 4 November 2001 15 2 4 Procedures for Traversing When traverse methods are used at least two stations or control points of known horizontal location expressed in terms of an arbitrary local State Plane or Universal Transverse Mercator coordinate system must be in the site vicinity These horizontal control points can usually be set for the specific site by a governmental agency or registered land surveyor The total station theodolite often called the instrument measures horizontal angles vertical and or zenith angles and slope distances is set up over an existing control point The theodolite is attached to the plate of the tripod by a fastening screw and the bubble in the bullseye level is centered or brought level by adjusting the three screw leveling heads appropriately Once the bulls eye bubble is centered the theodolite is rotated 9
248. cord to a screw eye in the cork used for sealing the hole Place insertion rod into the pre cut pocket at the base of the module and lower it into the hole If you encounter resistance remove the module and enlarge the hole and re insert the module Once deployed to the desired depth press the insertion rod against the side of the hole and twist slightly to release the module Remove the rod and push any excess cord into the pilot hole and plug it with the cork Indicate the module number date and time of installation and any pertinent comments on the installation retrieval log and in the investigation field book Write the module serial number on the site map adjacent to the appropriate map location Module Retrieval 1 Following the module exposure period usually 10 14 days identify and check each module location in the field using the site map Remove the cork with a penknife or cork screw Grasp the cord and pull the module from the ground verify the module ID number Cut off and discard the cork and cord Place the entire module in its labeled container and tightly secure the lid Replace the sample container in the box Where possible please attempt to keep modules in numbered sequence to expedite sample check in and processing Complete the module retrieval date time on the installation retrieval log Do not use Styrofoam peanuts as packing material Bubble packing is acceptable When packing for shipment take extr
249. crometers PM in ambient air over a 24 hour period for purposes of determining whether the primary and secondary national standards for fine particulate matter specified in 50 6 of this part are met Quality assessment procedures are provided in Part 58 Appendix A and quality assurance guidance are provided in the 1 Quality Assurance handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume I Principles EPA 600 R 94 038a April 1994 2 Section 2 12 of the Quality Assurance handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume IL Ambient Air Specific Methods EPA 600 R 94 038b November 1998 3 Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume IV Meteorological Measurements revised edition EPA 600 R 94 038d March 1995 To achieve the designated Data Quality Objectives DQO s Measurement Quality Objectives MQO s were designed to evaluate and control measurement uncertainty to tolerable levels Hence the Federal Reference Method Performance Evaluation Program FRM PEP was implemented to provide a mechanism to understand total measurement bias and compare all environmental data operations against one data operation Air Monitoring Staff The Air Monitoring Staff s role is to l Manage the national work assignment for two ESAT field scientists and one laboratory scientist 2 Plan and cluster sites on the annual FRM PEP schedules 3 Provide oversight and communication with the Region 4 State and Local amb
250. ctice as opposed to permanent outer casing placed into the confining unit Note that when using the temporary casing practice it is critical that grout be mixed and placed properly as specified elsewhere in this section Because the total borehole diameter in sonic drilling is only incrementally larger than the inner casing diameter particular care should be taken that the well casing is placed in the center of the drill stem while placing the filter pack Centralizers may be required to facilitate this in the case of deep wells with PVC casing 6 3 4 Rotary Methods These methods consists of a drill pipe or drill stem coupled to a drilling bit that rotates and cuts through the soils The cuttings produced from the rotation of the drilling bit are transported to the surface by drilling fluids which generally consist of water drilling mud or air The water drilling mud or air are forced down through the drill pipe and out through the bottom of the drilling bit The cuttings are then lifted to the surface between the borehole wall and the drill pipe or within a concentric drill stem in reverse rotary The drilling fluids not only force the cuttings to the surface but also keeps the drilling bit cool When considering this method it is important to evaluate the potential for contamination when fluids and or air are introduced into the borehole If the rotary method is selected as one of the drilling methods water rotary is the preferred method f
251. cu ft and hydrate to a 3096 min solids material Where neat cement grouts are to be used the placement of a bentonite pellet seal above the filter pack is mandatory to prevent the possibility of grout infiltration into the screened interval prior to setting Bentonite chips or other sealing products should not be substituted in this application Where bentonite grouts are to be used the placement of a bentonite pellet seal is optional but desirable Since the pellets begin hydrating rapidly they are very difficult to place by the tremie method They may be placed by pouring slowly into either open boreholes or hollow stem augers A tamper should be used to ensure that the material is being placed properly and to rapidly break up any pellet bridging that occurs Pellet seals should be designed for a two foot thickness of dry pellets above the filter pack Hydration may extend the height of the seal Where neat cement grouts are to be used the pellets should be hydrated for eight hours or the manufacturer s recommended hydration time whichever is greater Where the water table is temporarily below the pellet seal potable or higher quality water should be added repeatedly to hydrate the pellets prior to grouting EISOPQAM 6 5 November 2001 6 4 5 Grouting the Annular Space The annular space between the casing and the borehole wall should be filled with either a 30 solids bentonite grout a neat cement grout or a cement bentonite grout
252. curacy of the method Each set of PUF plugs and quartz filters should be securely packed in sealed containers and in coolers to prevent damage during shipment The sampling media should be shipped air freight to minimize the time between cleanup and sampling Chain of custody shall be maintained for all samples Sample Collection The following procedure will be followed for the collection of all High Volume PUF samples for dioxins and dibenzofurans analyses Nylon or latex gloves will be used when handling all PUF cartridges and quartz particulate pre filters Assure that the red silicon upper and lower gaskets are in place in the PUF cartridge housing Remove the PUF cartridge from the shipping can Unwrap and insert the PUF cartridge into the High Volume Hi Vol PUF sampler s chamber Install the pre filter in the filter holder using caution not to over tighten the fittings The removed aluminum foil should be placed in the shipping container which then should be resealed The container should be labeled with the site ID the operators name and the sample date and placed in the Hi Vol PUF sampler enclosure until the sample is collected The Hi Vol PUF sampler should be turned on and allowed to run for two minutes An initial flowrate should be recorded on the sample data sheet The timer should be set to turn the sampler on and off at the desired times The operator should retrieve and secure the sample as soon as possible after the sa
253. d be discarded C 4 Cleaning Procedures for Tubing C 4 Silastic Pump Tubing The Silastic pump tubing in the automatic samplers and peristaltic pumps should be replaced after each study After installation the exposed ends should be capped with clean unused aluminum foil EISOPQAM C 7 November 2001 C 4 2 Teflon Sample Tubing Use only new Teflon tubing which has been pre cleaned as follows for the collection of samples for trace organic compound or ICP analyses 1 Teflon tubing shall be precut in 10 15 or 25 foot lengths before cleaning 2 Rinse outside of tubing with solvent 3 Flush interior of tubing with solvent 4 After flushing with solvent pressurize the tubing to a safe level one end only to flush out solvent 5 Dry overnight in the drying oven 6 Coil Cap ends with aluminum foil Wrap tubing in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped tubing in plastic and label C 4 3 Stainless Steel Tubing 1 Wash with soap and hot tap water using a long narrow bottle brush 2 Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water 3 Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water 4 Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 5 Cap ends with aluminum foil Wrap tubing in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped tubing in plastic and date
254. d levels of hazardous constituents personnel should never attempt to sample surface impoundments used to manage potentially hazardous wastes from a boat All sampling should be conducted from the banks or piers of surface impoundments Any exception must be approved by the appropriate site safety officer and or the Occupational Health and Safety Designee OHSD 13 4 3 Drums Drums are the most frequent type of containers sampled by field investigators for chemical analyses and or physical testing Caution should be exercised by the field investigators when sampling drums because of the potential presence of explosive flammable gases and or toxic vapors Therefore the following procedures should be used when collecting samples from drums of unknown material 1 Visually inspect all drums that are being considered for sampling for the following pressurization bulging dimples crystals formed around the drum opening e leaks holes stains labels markings composition and type steel poly and open bung condition age rust and e sampling accessibility Drums showing evidence of pressurization and crystals should be furthered assessed to determine if remote drum opening is needed If drums cannot be accessed for sampling heavy equipment is usually necessary to stage drums for the sampling activities Adequate time should be allowed for the drum contents to stabilize after a drum is handled 2 Identify each drum that will be
255. d should be cleaned as described in Appendix B 9 6 2 Bacteriological Samples for bacteriological analyses must always be collected directly into the prepared glass or plastic sample container The sample container should be kept unopened until it is to be filled When the cap is removed care should be taken not to contaminate the cap or the inside of the bottle The bottle should be held near the base and filled to within about one inch of the top without rinsing and recapped immediately During sample collection the sample container should be plunged with the neck partially below the surface and slightly upward The mouth should be directed against the current Appendix A lists preservation procedures and holding times When the sample container must be lowered into the waste stream either because of safety or impracticality manhole slippery effluent area etc care must be taken to avoid contamination 9 6 3 Immiscible Liquids Oil and Grease Oil and grease may be present in wastewater as a surface film an emulsion a solution or as a combination of these forms Since it is very difficult to collect a representative sample for oil and grease analysis the inspector must carefully evaluate the location of the sampling location The most desirable sampling location is the area of greatest mixing Quiescent areas should be avoided The sample container should be plunged into the wastewater using a swooping motion with the mouth facing upstr
256. d surface or items of moderate or large mass that are located relatively close to the ground surface Pipe and Cable Locator These instruments are much more sensitive than the treasure seeker type instruments They generally are capable of detecting decreasing smaller mass objects at increasingly greater depths as compared to the treasure seekers Three instruments are available under this broad category the TRACER Pipe Seeker 5 Metallic Pipe and Line Locator the Fisher M SCOPE TW 6 Pipe and Cable Locator and the Schonstedt MAC 51B Heliflux Magnetic and Cable Locator Each of the three can be used in simple survey mode or can be used in the conductive mode where low current electrical signals are induced into cables and traced from the surface EISOPQAM 15 31 November 2001 The basic operating principle of the typical pipe or cable locator is as follows A small AC voltage at an audio frequency is sent through the transmitter coil causing a current to flow The transmitter on the metal detector generates an alternating magnetic field around the transmitter coil The primary magnetic field is canceled or nulled at the receiver coil by orienting the planes of the transmitter and receiver coil perpendicular to one another Eddy currents induced from the primary field in a metallic object within the range of the instrument produces a secondary field This secondary field interacts with the primary field causing the canceled or nulled condition to
257. d thoroughly documented 1 3 Section Objectives Section objectives are included at the beginning of sections where performance objectives are not applicable Section objectives provide a brief summary of the intention and content of the section EISOPQAM 1 1 November 2001 SECTION 2 INVESTIGATIONS INSPECTIONS AND OVERVIEW ACTIVITIES SECTION OBJECTIVES Define the standard types of investigations inspections and field studies conducted Outline the general requirements for study plans and reports for standard types of investigations inspections and field studies List available agency guidance and special requirements for the standard types of investigations inspections and field studies 2 1 Introduction The investigations inspections and overview activities conducted can be broadly categorized as either enforcement or non enforcement related Enforcement related activities include criminal investigations Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA case development inspections RCRA comprehensive ground water monitoring evaluations water enforcement case preparation studies National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NPDES compliance monitoring diagnostic evaluations of municipal wastewater treatment plants investigations of Superfund hazardous waste sites contractor overviews investigations and monitoring of oil spills and Superfund spills and investigations of toxic episodes and spills Non enforcement
258. d to determine the fraction of major ions and trace metals passing the filter and used for flow system analysis and for the purpose of geochemical speciation modeling Filtration is not allowed to correct for improperly designed or constructed monitoring wells inappropriate sampling methods or poor sampling technique When samples are collected for routine analyses and are filtered such as under conditions of excessive turbidity both filtered and non filtered samples will be submitted for analyses Samples for organic compounds analysis should not be filtered Prior to filtration of the ground water sample for any reason other than geochemical speciation modeling the following criteria must be demonstrated to justify the use of filtered samples for inorganic analysis l The monitoring wells whether temporary or permanent have been constructed and developed in accordance with Section 6 2 The ground water samples were collected using sampling techniques in accordance with this section and the ground water samples were analyzed in accordance with US EPA approved methods 3 Efforts have been undertaken to minimize any persistent sample turbidity problems These efforts may consist of the following Redevelopment or re installation of permanent ground water monitoring wells Implementation of low flow low stress purging and sampling techniques EISOPQAM 7 9 November 2001 4 Turbidity measurements should be taken during purging and
259. d with a frequency which meets or exceeds the requirements of 40 CFR 58 Appendix A 3 Preventive Maintenance Has the field operator been given any special training in performing preventive maintenance Briefly comment on background and or courses Is this training routinely reinforced Yes No If no why not Comment briefly on the adequacy and availability of the supply of spare parts tools and manuals available to the field operator to perform any necessary maintenance activities Do you feel that this is adequate to prevent any significant data loss Is the agency currently experiencing any recurring problem with equipment or manufacturer s If so please identify the equipment and or manufacturer and comment on steps taken to remedy the problem EISOPQAM H 7 November 2001 4 Record Keeping Is a record maintained at each site to document site visits Other uses preventive maintenance and resolution of site operational problems and corrective actions taken Is the record maintained currently and reviewed periodically i3 1 Frequency of Review Once entries are made and all the record completed is it sent If no is it stored at other location s specify to the laboratory for archiving What other records are used e O e O LT m O O ba JL o eme O o eee M3 Are calibration records or at least calibration constants available to field operators 5 Data Acquisitio
260. de instrument will accept value automatically Press 2 Background Press 1 Both Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically Press 3 Span Press 2 PID Connect Toluene bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically Press 3 Span Press 3 FID Connect Methane bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically Calibration Complete 1 2 Press EXIT Press EXIT again EISOPQAM 17 15 November 2001 From MAIN MENU press 1 Run 4 Checkresponse of each detector by applying the appropriate calibration gases to the instrument Methane for the FID and Toluene for the PID Record responses 5 Instrument is ready to use To power down the instrument press and hold the OFF key Also turn the red H supply handle to the OFF position 6 For more information on multi point calibration logging and data transfer consult manual 17 6 Century Model OVA 128 Organic Vapor Analyzer Introduction The Century Model OVA 128 Organic Vapor Analyzer OVA is designed to detect organic compounds in air It uses a hydrogen flame ionization detector FID as its detection principle This detector allows the monitor to respond to a wide variety of
261. de hexane or petroleum ether After the waste material is removed the equipment must be subjected to the standard cleaning procedure Because these solvents are not miscible with water the equipment must be completely dry prior to use Solvents laboratory detergent and rinse waters used to clean equipment shall not be reused during field decontamination B 1 2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions Improperly handled cleaning solutions may easily become contaminated Storage and application containers must be constructed of the proper materials to ensure their integrity Following are acceptable materials used for containing the specified cleaning solutions e Soap must be kept in clean plastic metal or glass containers until used It should be poured directly from the container during use e Solvent must be stored in the unopened original containers until used They may be applied using the low pressure nitrogen system fitted with a Teflon nozzle or using Teflon squeeze bottles Tap water may be kept in clean tanks hand pressure sprayers squeeze bottles or applied directly from a hose e Analyte free water must be stored in clean glass stainless steel or plastic containers that can be closed prior to use It can be applied from plastic squeeze bottles e Organic analyte free water must be stored in clean glass Teflon or stainless steel containers prior to use It may be applied using Teflon squeeze bottles or wi
262. decisions and actions e Calibration gases shall be certified by their supplier to be of a specified and known concentration e Concentrations of calibration gases shall be within a relevant range of response for the air monitors but will not exceed any flamability or toxic exposure limits e Gas cylinders will not be sent to the field if they contain less than one fifth of their full capacity Cylinders below the required volume will be utilized in the warehouse for equipment check out and maintenance Calibration mixtures and approximate concentrations for specific air monitors will be as follows CALIBRATION GASES MONITOR GAS MIXTURE CONCENTRATION Combustible Gas 075 15 ppm Photo Ionization Detector 100 ppm Calibration Equipment All calibrations will consist of introducing a gas of known concentration into the monitor at atmospheric pressure Under no circumstances will it be acceptable to attempt calibration when the monitor is measuring gas concentrations below or above atmospheric pressure EISOPQAM 17 1 November 2001 To insure a stable pressure of the calibration gas a calibration manifold system will be used The manifold will consist of a T fitting a Teflon bag Teflon tubing and fittings The Teflon bag is omitted for calibration of the OVA The calibration gas cylinder will be connected to the T fitting with Teflon tubing so that the gas will flow directly through the top of the T into a Teflon
263. del 140 conductivity meter Calibration The meter is calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions by the FEC before it is taken into the field A two point calibration verification should be used to ensure the accuracy of the meter The cell constant of the 014000 series cell is automatically set 0 0609 cm by the meter All field conductivity meters are verified against a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST traceable thermometer the Hanna Instruments CheckTemp 1 or equivalent at least semi annually These verification checks are documented in a logbook and maintained at the Federal Equipment Center FEC Labels are placed on the conductivity meters to indicate when the next temperature verification check is required Conductivity is affected by temperature therefore temperature should be read first so that appropriate adjustments can be made in accordance with the manufacture s instructions and the method Fresh standards should be obtained and used for each field trip Discard standard solutions after each calibration verification 1 Make sure the meter is warmed up as per manufacturer s directions Verify the meter s internal temperature sensor against a NIST traceable Fisher brand stem type digital thermometer or equivalent and note any differences in your logbook If the temperature readings agree within 4 C apply any necessary correction factor and proceed with measuring the temperature of the
264. dency to twist and or break off in the borehole When this occurs the well will have to be grouted with the remaining casing left in the borehole The preferred method in this case should be to pressure grout the borehole by placing the tremie tube to the bottom of the well casing which will be the well screen or the bottom sump area below the well screen The pressurized grout will be forced out through the well screen into the filter material and up the inside of the well casing sealing holes and breaks that are present The tremie tube should be retracted slowly as the grout fills the casing The well casing should be cut off even with the ground surface and filled with concrete to a depth of 2 feet below the surface If the casing has been broken off below the surface the grout should be tremied to within 2 feet of the surface and then finished to the ground surface with concrete The surface pad or specified surface protection shall then be installed A PVC well casing may be more difficult to remove from the borehole than a metal casing because of its brittleness If the PVC well casing breaks during removal the borehole should be cleaned out by using a drag bit or roller cone bit with the wet rotary method to grind the casing into small cuttings that will be flushed out of the borehole by water or drilling mud Another method is to use a solid stem auger with a carbide tooth bit to grind the PVC casing into small cuttings that will be brought to th
265. designed to minimize effects on the chemical and physical integrity of the sample If the guidance provided in this section is followed a representative sample of the surface water should be obtained The physical location of the investigator when collecting a sample may dictate the equipment to be used If surface water samples are required direct dipping of the sample container into the stream is desirable This is possible however only from a small boat a pier etc or by wading in the stream Wading however may cause the re suspension of bottom deposits and bias the sample Wading is acceptable if the stream has a noticeable current is not impounded and the samples are collected while facing upstream If the stream is too deep to wade or if the sample must be collected from more than one water depth or the sample must be collected from a bridge etc supplemental sampling equipment must be used 10 2 Surface Water Sampling Equipment 10 2 1 Dipping Using Sample Container A sample may be collected directly into the sample container when the surface water source is accessible by wading or other means The sampler should face upstream and collect the sample without disturbing the sediment The surface water sample should always be collected prior to the collection of a sediment sample at the same location The sampler should be careful not to displace the preservative from a pre preserved sample container such as the 40 ml VOC vial 10
266. dies Cleaning procedures utilized in the field Appendix B or field repairs shall be thoroughly documented in field records 7 3 7 Auxiliary Data Collection During ground water sample collection it is important to record a variety of ground water related data Included in the category of auxiliary data are water level measurements well volume determinations pumping rates during purging and occasionally drillers or boring logs This information should be documented in the field records Well volume determinations are described in Section 7 2 1 EISOPQAM 7 10 November 2001 Water Level Measurements Water table measurements from the top of the well casings referenced to National Geodetic Vertical Datum in permanent wells and ground surface elevations in temporary wells should be made to assist in determining the general direction of ground water flow and gradient The methodology to be used to determine well water levels are given in Section 15 5 Tracer dyes and radioactive and thermal detection methods can be used to determine direction and velocities of flow 9 Also a study of the general topography and drainage patterns will generally indicate direction of ground water flow The ground surface elevation and top of casing elevation atthe wells should be determined by stand ard engineering survey practices as outlined in Section 15 Well Pumping Rate Bucket Stop Watch Method The pumping rate for a pump can be determined by coll
267. dium PM Mass Weighing Laboratory Standard Operating Procedures for the Performance Evaluation Program These documents are available in hardcopy format and as a PDF file on the Ambient Monitoring Technology Information Center AMTIC Internet Bulletin Board under the PM QA area http www epa gov ttn amtic pmqa html EPA OAQPS National Filter Distribution Program will send filters to the Regions 4 East Coast PM Filter Weighing Laboratory e Prior to use the filters will be checked for deformities equilibrated at 20 23 C 2 C and 30 40 5 relative humidity for a minimum of 24 hours labeled pre weighed auto entry into PEP database loaded into cassettes and prepared for packaging and shipping Region 4 Filter Weighing Laboratory will ship the pre weighed filters and chain of custody COC forms to the field scientists in Regions 1 2 3 6 and 10 EISOPQAM 14 5 November 2001 Filters and COC forms for Region 4 are passed directly to the field scientists After sampling filters will be transported to the Filter weighing Laboratory logged into the database refrigerated until a batch is completed moved to the laboratory unloaded from the cassettes equilibrated for at least 24 hours and post weighed Region 4 East Coast Filter Weighing Laboratory will equilibrate and weigh the exposed filters validate data and upload information to AIRS Chain of custody must be maintained for all samples Sample Coll
268. dwater Sampler is now assembled and ready to push for sample collection 6 11 3 Installation of Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler 1 Attach drive cap to top of sampler and slowly drive it into the ground Raise the hammer assembly remove the drive cap and place an O ring in the top groove of the drive head Adda probe rod and continue push 2 Continue to add probe rods until the desired sampling depth is reached 3 When the desired sampling depth is reached re position the probe derrick and position either the casing puller assembly or the rod grip puller over the top of the top probe rod EISOPQAM 6 18 November 2001 4 Thread a screen push adapter on an extension rod and attach sufficient additional extension rods to reach the top of the Screen Point 15 sampler Add an extension handle to the top of the string of extension rods and run this into the probe rod resting the screen push adapter on top of the sampler 5 To expose the screened portion of the sampler exert downward pressure on the sampler using the extension rod and push adapter while pulling the probe rod upward To expose the entire open portion of the screen pull the probe rod upward approximately 41 inches 6 At this point the Screen Point 15 Groundwater Sampler has been installed as a temporary well and may be sampled using appropriate ground water sampling methodology EIB personnel typically use a peristaltic pump utilizing low flow methods to collect ground wa
269. e concentration exceeds any of the preset limits 5 ppm the alarm buzzer and red flashing LED will be activated immediately to warn the user of the alarm condition Whenever the battery voltage falls below 5 5 volt 6 3v or higher is normal or the UV lamp or sensor module fails the unit will also activate the buzzer and red LED alarm signal In the Survey Mode the alarm signal is proportional to the level of the gas concentration Therefore when the gas concentration exceeds preset limits 5 ppm the alarm signal may very from a single beep and a single flash per second to a rapid 7 beeps and 7 flashes per second when the high threshold level has been exceeded The higher frequency of alarm signal indicates higher gas concentrations Back Light The LCD display is equipped with a red LED back light to assist the readings under poor lighting conditions This back light can be turned on by pressing the up key When the back light is already on pressing the up key will turn it off Charging the RAE On the back side of the RAE is a battery charging jack which is normally covered by a protective rubber cover Open the rubber cover and connect the AC adapter or the automotive DC charging adapter depending on the power source to the charging jack There is a bi colored LED inside the LED window which will provide an indication of the charging status Red battery is being charged Green charging is completed No light bad connection
270. e Design and Installation of Ground Water Monitoring Wells EPA 600 4 89 March 1991 3 ASTM Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Ground water Monitoring Wells in Aquifers D5092 90 4 Driscoll Fletcher Ph D Groundwater and Wells Johnson Division St Paul MN 1986 5 US EPA Nonaqueous Phase Liquids Compatibility with Materials Used in Well Construction Sampling and Remediation EPA 540 8 95 503 July 1995 http www epa gov ada download issue napl pdf EISOPQAM 6 20 November 2001 SECTION 7 GROUND WATER SAMPLING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES To collect a sample representative of ground water residing in the formation of interest To reduce the potential bias caused by the sampling equipment used to obtain the sample 7 1 Introduction Ground water sampling may be required for a variety of reasons such as examining potable or industrial water supplies checking for and or tracking contaminant plume movement in the vicinity of a land disposal or spill site Resource Conservation Recovery Act RCRA compliance monitoring or examining a site where historical information is minimal or non existent but where it is thought that ground water contamination may have occurred Ground water samples are usually obtained from either temporarily or permanently installed ground water monitoring wells They can also be obtained however anywhere ground water is present such as in a pit or a dug or drilled hole
271. e QA Plan must be approved by the Regional Administrator or his designee In Region 4 the Region s QA Officer has been delegated the authority to approve QA Plans The SESD Air Monitoring Staff AMS has been assigned the responsibility of reviewing QA Plans for SLAMS in Region 4 EISOPQAM 2 25 November 2001 Review Approval Process The Air Monitoring Staff reviews state and local QA Plans submitted to the Regional Administrator for approval At a minimum each QA Plan must include operational procedures for the elements listed in Section 2 0 of 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A Based on the review results and comments received from the reviewers the AMS recommends approval disapproval action to the Region 4 QA Officer If the AMS reviewer recommends disapproval of a state or local QA Plan he she will hold the review process in abeyance until he she has requested and received additional information necessary to approve the QA Plan from the state or local agency which submitted the QA Plan 2 10 4 Performance Audits Introduction Performance audits are conducted by the appropriate AMS to assess local and state agencies quality assurance program The audits allow for an overall estimate of a given agencies data quality However the result of an audit is not a definitive indicator of the overall quality of an agency s data base When scheduling audits with a state or local agency the state Quality Assurance Coordinator must be notified in advance t
272. e augers have to be extracted without being rotated If caving sands exist during monitoring well installations a drilling rig must be used that has enough power to extract the augers from the borehole without having to rotate them A bottom plug trap door or pilot bit assembly can be fastened onto the bottom of the augers to keep out most of the soils and or water that have a tendency to clog the bottom of the augers during drilling Potable water analyzed for contaminants of concern may be poured into the augers where applicable to equalize pressure so that the inflow of formation materials and water will be held to a minimum when the bottom plug is released Water tight center plugs are not acceptable because they create suction when extracted from the augers This suction forces or pulls cuttings and formation materials into the augers defeating the purpose of the center plug Augering without a center plug or pilot bit assembly is permitted provided that the soil plug formed in the bottom of the augers is removed before sampling or installing well casings Removing the soil plug from the augers can be accomplished by washing out the plug using a side discharge rotary bit or augering out the plug with a solid stem auger bit sized to fit inside the hollow stem auger The type of bottom plug trap door or pilot bit assembly proposed for the drilling activity should be approved by a senior field geologist prior to drilling operations Boreholes can
273. e borehole Cuttings purge water or development water may also be placed in a pit in or near the source area Monitoring well purge or development water may also be poured onto the ground downgradient of the monitoring well Purge water from private potable wells which are in service may be discharged directly onto the ground surface The minimum requirements of this subsection are e Liquid and soil sediment IDW must be containerized and analyzed before disposal Thecollection handling and proposed disposal method must be specified in the approved study plan 5 15 3 Management of Hazardous IDW Disposal of hazardous or suspected hazardous IDW must be specified in the approved study plan Hazardous IDW must be disposed as specified in US EPA regulations If appropriate these wastes may be placed back in an active facility waste treatment system These wastes may also be disposed of in the source area from which they originated if doing so does not endanger human health and the environment If on site disposal is not feasible and if the wastes are suspected to be hazardous appropriate tests must be conducted to make that determination If they are determined to be hazardous wastes they must be properly contained and labeled They may be stored on the site for a maximum of 90 days before they must be manifested and shipped to a permitted treatment or disposal facility Generation of hazardous IDW must be anticipated if possible to permit
274. e bottom of EISOPQAM 6 7 November 2001 the augers causing potential bridging problems Afterthe string of well screen and casing is plumb the filter material should then be placed around the well screen by the tremie method in open boreholes up to the designated depth After the filter pack has been installed the bentonite pellet seal 1f used should be placed directly on top of the filter pack to an unhydrated thickness of two feet When installing the seal for use with neat cement grouts the bentonite pellet seal should be allowed to hydrate a minimum of eight hours or the manufacturer s recommended hydration time whichever is longer After the pellet seal has hydrated for the specified time the grout should then be pumped by the tremie method into the annular space around the casings up to within 2 feet of the ground surface or below the frostline whichever is the greater depth The grout should be allowed to set for a minimum of 24 hours before the surface pad and protective casing are installed After the surface pad and protective casing are installed bumper guards should be installed if needed The bumper guards should be placed around the concrete surface pad in a configuration that provides maximum protection to the well Each piece of steel pipe or approved material should be installed into an 8 to 10 inch diameter hole to a minimum depth of 2 feet below ground surface and filled with concrete As previously stated the bumper guard
275. e collected using a properly decontaminated bucket Before the soil is placed in a pan itis necessary to remove the top several inches of soil to minimize the possibility of cross contamination of the sample from fall in of material from the upper portions of the hole Once the soil is placed in a pan it is thoroughly mixed Section 5 13 8 and placed in the appropriate sample container s Section 12 4 contains specific procedures for collecting and handling soil samples for volatile organic compounds analysis 12 3 2 Powered Equipment Powered equipment may be used to acquire soil samples from any depth surface shallow subsurface and deep subsurface When power equipment is used to advance the borehole and collect the sample care must be taken that exhaust fumes gasoline and or oil do not contaminate the borehole and the sample Among the common types of powered equipment used to collect subsurface soil samples are split spoon samplers driven with a drill rig drive weight assembly or pushed using drill rig hydraulics continuous split spoon samplers direct push rigs and back hoes The use of each of these is described below Drill Rigs Drill rigs offer the capability of collecting soil samples from greater depths For all practical purposes the depth of investigation achievable by this method is controlled only by the depth of soil overlying bedrock which may be in excess of 100 feet Split spoon samplers are usually driven eithe
276. e during subsequent investigations with permanent monitoring wells Single source light non aqueous phase liquids LNAPL problems are generally no more complicated than the non aqueous phase delineation problems If there are no serious vertical profiling problems however the sampling device should be capable of identifying the presence of and determining the thicknesses of the floating LNAPL layers A more complex situation would be a single source area in which there is a dense non aqueous phase liquid DNAPL product layer with associated aqueous phase contamination The initial part of the investigation would be conducted in a manner similar to the simplest case After delineation of the aqueous phase plume additional characterization would be required for the DNAPL component If a confining layer is present and the depth to the surface of this layer is known samples should be collected from the boundary between the water bearing formation and the confining unit to determine if DNAPL products are present Wherever DNAPLs are found additional samples must be collected The rationale for sample location selection depends on both sub surface structure and ground water flow direction DNAPL constituents may flow down dip on the surface of confining units in directions that are totally contrary to ground water flow directions No attempt at DNAPL characterization should be made until the site geology stratigraphy structure and ground water flow pat
277. e from the elapsed time meter should be recorded on the sample data sheet The exposed mercury sampling trap should then be removed from the sampling train wearing clean polyethylene or nylon gloves The two end caps shall then be removed from the shipping tube and placed on the ends of the sampling trap The sampling trap will be placed back into the shipping tube the lid tightened and placed back into the plastic container The same procedure must be followed at each sampling site At the end of each study the samples will be transported to the laboratory EISOPQAM 14 18 November 2001 14 3 8 Standard Operating Procedure for Chlorofluorocarbon CFC Refrigerant Field Screening using the Neutronics Model RI 2002PA Portable Automotive Refrigerant Identifier and liquid CFC sample collection The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA is designed to identify vapor gas samples taken directly from CFC refrigerant storage cylinders The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA 25374 uses Multiple Sensor Non Dispersive Infrared NDIR technology to perform the analysis The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA 25374 identifies the percentage by weight of R12 R134a R22 and hydrocarbons HC in a sample of refrigerant The unit will flash the measured percentages of R12 R134a R22 and HC on the display if their concentrations are greater than zero Samples will be identified with air concentrations up to 9096 by weight The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA 2537A eliminates the effect
278. e instrument s on board computer switches a set of valves that introduces sample into one of two gold matrix cartridges at a time As the sample passes through the cartridge the mercury in the air amalgamates onto the encased gold mesh screen While one cartridge samples the air the onboard computer analyzes the other cartridge At the start of the analysis cycle the instrument sweeps the cartridge with argon gas then heats the cartridge Mercury that was adsorbed onto the gold matrix is released during heating in argon The mercury is then swept into the detector by the flow of the argon carrier gas U V light at 253 7 nm excites any mercury atoms present which fluoresce and re radiate at the same wavelength A UV detector views the cell at right angles to the incident light Direct light from the source is not seen however the fluorescence produced by the mercury in the cell is observed by the UV detector The intensity of the fluorescence is directly proportional to the amount of mercury in the cell Once the mass of mercury present is known the on board computer calculates the concentration of mercury as the mass of mercury divided by the volume of air sampled The on board computer sends the analysis results to a display screen and to a data collecting computer Although the instrument switches between chambers instantaneously the analysis of the mercury within the chamber and calculations involved require an unavoidable lag time before the result
279. e is discouraged Bailers tend to disturb any sediment that may be present in the well creating or increasing sample turbidity If a bailer is used it should be a closed top Teflon bailer 7 2 2 Purging Techniques Wells Without Plumbing or In Place Pumps For permanently installed wells the depth of water and depth of the well should be determined if possible before purging Electrical water level indicators well sounders can be used for this purpose It is standard practice to mark the top of casing providing a point of reference from which these measurements will be consistently made Field investigators should look for these markings when taking these measurements Extreme caution should be exercised during this procedure to prevent cross contamination of the wells This is a critical concern when samples for trace organic compounds or metals analyses are collected At a minimum the well sounding device should be cleaned by washing in a laboratory detergent solution followed by rinses with tap water and analyte free water After cleaning it should be placed in a clean plastic bag or wrapped in foil Purging with Pumps When peristaltic pumps or centrifugal pumps are used only the intake line is placed into the water column The line placed into the water should be either standard cleaned see Appendix B Teflon tubing for peristaltic pumps or standard cleaned stainless steel pipe attached to a hose for centrifugal pumps When subm
280. e long retention times composite sampling is necessary because of the tendency of ponds and lagoons to have flow paths that short circuit which changes the design detention time 9 3 Sample Types For NPDES sampling two types of sampling techniques are used grab and composite For these procedures the NPDES permit specifies the appropriate sample type A complete description of all NPDES sampling procedures and techniques is presented in the NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 1 9 3 1 Grab Samples Grab samples consist of either a single discreet sample or individual samples collected over a period of time not to exceed 15 minutes The grab sample should be representative of the wastewater conditions at the time of sample collection The sample volume depends on the type and number of analyses to be performed 9 3 2 Composite Samples Composite samples are collected over time either by continuous sampling or by mixing discrete samples A composite sample represents the average wastewater characteristics during the compositing period Various methods for compositing are available and are based on either time or flow proportioning The choice of a flow proportional or time composite sampling scheme depends on the permit requirements variability of the wastewater flow or concentration of pollutants equipment availability and sampling location The investigator must know each of these criteria before a sampling program can be initiated Genera
281. e must be able to be completely removed so weight is not added to the sample container as specified in Method 5035 4 Sample containers must be packed in a sorbent material capable of absorbing spills from leaks or breakage of the sample containers EISOPQAM 12 8 November 2001 5 The maximum sample shuttle weight must not exceed 64 pounds 6 The maximum volume of methanol or sodium bisulfate per shipping container is 500 mls 7 The shipper must mark the sample shuttle in accordance with shipping dangerous goods in acceptable quantities 8 The package must not be opened or altered until no longer in commerce 12 4 6 Summary The following summary table lists the options available for compliance with SW846 Method 5035 The advantages and disadvantages are noted for each option SESD s goal is to minimize the use of hazardous material methanol and sodium bisulfate and minimize the generation of hazardous waste during sample collection PROCEDURE ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES Collect 2 40 mL vials with 5 Screening conducted by Presently a 48 hour grams of sample and 1 2 oz lab holding time for glass w septum lid for screening unpreserved samples and moisture Collect 3 Encore and 1 2 oz Lab conducts all Presently a 48 hour glass w septum lid for screening preservation preparation holding time for and moisture procedures preparation of samples Collect 2 40 ml vials with 5 High level VOC samples Hazardous material
282. e permittee s procedures for sample collection flow measurement chain of custody laboratory analyses data compilation reporting and other areas related to the self monitoring program During a CEI the inspector makes a cursory visual observation ofthe treatment facility laboratory effluents and receiving waters During a PAI the inspector actually observes the permittee performing the self monitoring process from sample collection and flow measurement through laboratory analyses data workup and reporting The PAI does not include the collection of samples by the inspector However the inspector may require the permittee to analyze performance samples for laboratory evaluation purposes EISOPQAM 2 8 November 2001 Diagnostic Evaluations DE The DE is a detailed performance evaluation that focuses primarily on municipal Publicly Owned Treatment Works POTWSs which are not in compliance with permit requirements The DE is designed to evaluate the POTW s design operations and influent effluent wastewater characteristics and to provide a comprehensive evaluation of the reasons why the facility is not meeting permit limits The final product consists of a formal report with data data interpretation and recommendations suitable for use in technical assistance negotiations and enforcement actions Reconnaissance Inspection RI The RI is used to obtain a preliminary overview of a permittee s compliance program The inspector performs a
283. e pushed A limited volume of about 700 ml is collected and is generally turbid This technique is mainly applicable for the screening for volatile organic compounds A temporary well point can be driven by the same drill rig to collect samples with greater volume requirements Samples from depths exceeding 100 feet have been obtained with this device Routine depths obtained without special anchoring are generally within the 50 foot range but are dependent on the geological materials being encountered 5 7 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling Designs 5 7 1 Sampling Site Selection The following factors should be considered in the selection of surface water and sediment sampling locations e Study objectives e Water use e Point source discharges e Nonpoint source discharges Tributary locations e Changes in stream characteristics e Type of stream bed Depth of stream e Turbulence e Presence of structures weirs dams etc e Accessibility and Tidal effect estuarine If the study objective is to investigate a specific water use such as a source of water supply recreation or other discrete use then considerations such as accessibility flow velocity physical characteristics etc are not critical from a water quality investigation standpoint If the objective of a water quality study is to determine patterns of pollution provide data for mathematical modeling purposes conduct assimilative capacity studies e
284. e sampler will then be cleaned as outlined in Appendix B The automatic sampler should be checked against the manufacturer s specifications and documented whenever one or more of the sampler functions appears to be operating improperly 9 5 Manual Sampling Manual sampling is normally used for collecting grab samples and or for immediate in situ field analyses However it can also be used in lieu of automatic equipment over extended periods of time for composite sampling especially when it is necessary to evaluate unusual waste stream conditions The best method to manually collect a sample is to use the actual sample container which will be used to transport the sample to the laboratory This eliminates the possibility of contaminating the sample with intermediate collection containers If the water or wastewater stream cannot be physically reached by the sampling personnel or it is not safe to reach for the sample an intermediate collection container may be used from which the sample can be redistributed to other containers If this is done however the container used to collect the sample must be properly cleaned Appendix B and must be made of a material that meets the requirements of the parameter s being investigated Samples for oil and grease bacteria phenols volatile organic compounds and sulfides analyses must always be collected directly into the sample container In some cases it may be best to use a pump either power or hand
285. e samples Analysis amp Operation Once the instrument is calibrated the operation is straightforward From the main menu screen highlight RUN and press Enter The instrument will start sampling and analyzing the air following the method stored in memory The results are displayed on screen but can also be sent to an attached computer Calculations The instrument s on board processor calculates the concentrations automatically The user need not perform any calculations during routine sampling and analysis Flowrate checks The sample flowrate of the Tekran is controlled by an electronic mass flow controller which in turn is controlled by the on board computer Since the mercury permeation tube used to calibrate the instrument emits a constant mass of mercury per unit time changes in sample flowrate won t always be apparent during calibrations However changes in flowrate would result in direct errors in the quanitation of the ambient air samples So it is important to periodically check the flowrate to verify that the electronic flow controller is working properly Sample flowrate is best checked against a primary flow calibrator such as a soap film bubble meter or a positive displacment calibrator such as a Dry Cal The calibration is conducted by attaching the calibrator to the inlet and measuring the flowrate If the flowrated doesn t match the flowrate stated on the instrument display the mass flow controller should be recalibr
286. e surface on the rotating flights After the casing materials have been removed from the borehole the borehole should be cleaned out and pressure grouted with the approved grouting materials As previously stated the borehole should be finished with a concrete surface plug and adequate surface protection unless directed otherwise EISOPQAM 6 15 November 2001 6 10 Temporary Monitoring Well Installation 6 10 1 Introduction Five types of temporary monitoring well installation techniques have been demonstrated as acceptable The type selected for a particular site is dependent upon site conditions The project leader and site geologist should be prepared to test temporary well installations on site and select the best solution Temporary wells are cost effective may be installed quickly and provide a synoptic picture of ground water quality Temporary monitoring well locations are not permanently marked nor are their elevations normally determined Sand pack materials may or may not be used but typically there is no bentonite seal grout surface completion or extensive development as it normally applies to permanent monitoring wells Temporary wells are generally installed purged sampled removed and backfilled in a matter of hours Due to the nature of construction turbidity levels may initially be high However these levels may be reduced by low flow purging and sampling techniques as described in Section 7 2 4 Temporary wells may
287. e to the south pole outside of a magnet This explains why the charged pole of a compass needle is attracted to the north geographic or magnetic south pole The units of the earth s magnetic field intensity are nanoTesla nT which is numerically equal to gamma the common unit seen in publications and maps Branch personnel have two different magnetometers available for conducting magnetic surveys These are the EG amp G Geometrics Unimag II Portable Proton Magnetometer Model G 846 and the EG amp G Geometrics Model G 856 Proton Precession Magnetometer The G 856 is the newer unit and compared to the G 846 is capable of providing greater resolution of magnetic field data 0 1 nT vs 1 0 nT for the G 846 and is capable of logging 1 000 stations of data for subsequent retrieval and post processing A magnetometer s primary design function is detection of magnetic objects such as buried ferrous materials or large bodies of ore which alter the earth s magnetic field Individual drums can be detected at depths up to 6 meters whereas large masses of drums may be detected at depths of 6 to 20 meters Magnetometers are susceptible to noise from many different sources and therefore should not be calibrated or used in or around buildings near powerlines or directly on the ground The total magnetic field measurements from a proton precession magnetometer are based upon an atomic constant and do not depend on temperature humidity and sensor orientation
288. eam Care should be taken to ensure that the bottle does not over fill during sample collection Because losses of oil and grease will occur on sampling equipment an automatic sampler should not be used to collect samples for oil and grease analysis Individual portions collected at prescribed time intervals must be analyzed separately to obtain the average concentrations over an extended period 9 6 4 Volatile Organic Compounds Samples to be analyzed for volatile organic compounds VOCs should be collected in 40 ml septum vials with screw caps with a Teflon lined silicone disk in the cap to prevent contamination of the sample by the cap The disks should be placed in the caps Teflon side to be in contact with the sample in the laboratory prior to the beginning of the sampling program When sampling for VOCs triplicate samples should always be collected from each location The investigator should determine if the water to be sampled contains chlorine If the water contains no chlorine three pre preserved 40 ml vials should be filled with the sample The samples may be held for up to 14 days before analysis When preservation is not feasible samples can be held up to 7 days before analysis EISOPQAM 9 6 November 2001 Ifthe water contains chlorine fill an 8 ounce sampling container with 2 drops of a 2596 ascorbic acid solution and the water sample Cap and mix thoroughly but gently by swirling to eliminate residual chlorine Transfer the s
289. eam tracer concentration is no more than 2 to 5 of the peak concentration Prior to conducting tracer studies in freshwater systems water supplies should be inventoried to insure that the dye tracer concentrations will not impart color to downstream public or private water supplies Rhodamine WT concentrations in the dye cloud should be maintained below 10 ppb at water supply intakes Commercially available Rhodamin WT is a 20 solution 15 4 2 3 Dilution A great deal of the previous section time of travel studies applies to this section and USGS publications provide references to appropriate techniques in particular Measurement of Discharge by Using Tracers 11 Dilution studies using tracer dyes evolved from mass conservation principles i e a known mass of tracer is introduced at an upstream point and after mixing with the water to be traced this mass should be accountable at downstream locations Rhodamine WT provides an adequate tracer for most investigations This dye is slightly photoreactive Decay rates e where k 0 034 day for exposure to full sunlight are reported in the literature Due to limited light penetration actual rates are normally insignificant or can be established through on site bottle tests Other tracers either introduced into an upstream point or in some instances occurring at the upstream point are often used The high degree of accuracy and detection ability of fluorometers plus the solubility properties
290. ears These audits are designed to assess the entire measurement system and data management activities with regards to the PM monitoring networks These activities will include the following Initial equilibration weighing and transportation of the filters to the sampler Site selection criteria assessment Equipment installation Site security Equipment maintenance Calibration procedures Handling and placement of filters Operation of the sampler and sample collection Removal handling and transportation of the filters from the sampler to the laboratory Post sampling equilibration weighing storage and archival of the sampled filters Data analysis and reporting Anexample checklist for the PM TSA is shown in the EPA Quality Assurance Guidance Document 2 12 Section 10 3 pages 10 14 The FRM PEP audits are conducted on 25 percent of the SLAMS monitoring network per reporting organization and 25 percent of the designated methods used per reporting organization four times per year Each primary and collocated sampler should receive at least one FRM PEP audit every four years EISOPQAM 2 31 November 2001 2 41 References S EPA NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual United States Environmental Protection Agency eptember 1994 Nn 2 US EPA NPDES Compliance Evaluation Inspection Manual MCD 75 United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington D C 1981 3 US EPA NPDES Compliance Sampling Inspectio
291. easurable Physical Chemical Characteristics 16 1 16 1 Introduction oeae 16 1 16 2 Temperature ioco e Deb OE XR OC X ba btc Eee aces 16 2 16 3 Specific Conductance Conductivity 0 00 ccc cee nee 16 3 16 4 Hydrogen Ion Concentration pH s esses 16 4 16 5 Tory 122229242422 PECRPREOERT CA IEEE ARCHIE Ie ah e i is ds 16 6 16 6 Salinity serere erao osser E EEEIEE KOS A DOE EP ER ROSE Re E E 16 8 16 7 Dissolved Oxygen DO d 1 bene dex ER oo Dee we CREW E RUE RE EORR 16 8 16 8 Total Residual Chlorine eeeeeeee eee 16 10 16 9 Fl sh Point 2 5 64000449 scing Soa dep d ctae ROOMS Urn ed ROCA ego n ay 16 13 16 10 Halogen Test ix oa6xd aee REA OE e ROPA Eae e de eS ese 4 16 14 16 11 Referenc s A Q 16 16 SECTION 17 Air Monitoring Safety Equipment Calibration Procedures 17 1 17 1 Introduction euenire s Re e ee acm ER A ERU eae ts 17 1 17 2 MSA Model 260 Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm 4 17 3 17 3 Photovac Microtip Photoionization Detector 00 0200 eee ee eee 17 5 17 4 Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000B 0 17 7 17 5 Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000A 2 2 BRI 17 13 17 6 Century Model OVA 128 Organic Vapor Analyzer 0 00005 17 17 17 7 Ludlum Model 3 Radiation Survey Meter 2 0 0 0 e eee nee 17 18 17 8 IIIA hon 3 teehee henge eet Dice bias Tcov
292. ebe GUERRE qu ER PX qa 12 4 2 Sampling Methodology Low Concentrations 0 0 0 2 e eee 12 4 3 Sampling Methodology High Concentrations 00000 1244 Waste Samples t22cveretccadees ho tees he rhes u ere ree DERE EE 12 4 5 Special Techniques and Considerations 2260 OUNUUIIV sarcodes sinri en gud ERE aud educa qd dd e wees SECTION 13 Waste Sampling eeeeeeeeeee ee EISOPQAM ToC vii November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 13 1 Introduci n Mm 13 1 IE XREMEE pPECPPTPICTrC oo 4 Shwe Rede sag E E ated nese 13 1 13 1 2 Quality Control Procedures 22 xax RERRERERRP ERR RRR REPReCRIA RS 13 1 13 1 3 Collection of Auxiliary Information and Data 00000 13 1 13 2 Waste Unit Types uus cron PES E A RICE AGRO RR ER RARI CR aeuageans 13 2 13 21 Open sS 12e2ime cerea POURPRE E RE RrSer EROS PG d Re canes shersdedas 13 2 13 2 2 Closed Wats ij2 n2sc ees ka ka ado a EAE ERA dURE RR EX A E do EA 13 2 13 3 loni c aC 13 3 13 3 1 Waste Sampling Equipment 22a cer eR RE REUS RE E ERCRECE ES 13 4 13 3 2 Ancillary Equipment for Waste Sampling seeeeeleeeeess 13 4 Table 13 3 1 Sampling Equipment for Various Waste Units 13 5 13 4 Waste Sampling Procedures 000 cece nee eee 13 6 13 4 1 Waste Pues duosceiisadkiwkaewaderCebk seca tp eec Ad RE RAE Kd bated 13 6 13 4 2 Surface Impoundments 22o coue ii ERR RESERRAR
293. ect 0 0 0 0 00 000 5 6 5 3 6 Authoritative or Directed Sampling 0 ce eee ee ee eee 5 6 5 3 7 Simple Random Sampling 0 2 eee eee nee e eee 5 6 5 3 8 Systematic Sampling over Time or Space 0 0 ee eee eee eee 5 7 5 3 9 Stratified Random Sampling isses so exexsuRas4 mr ston e xA RARE E RR YS 5 7 5 3 10 Systematic Grid Sampling iesaxtbauk ERR RR RaRRERTEGCREXE da 5 7 5 3 11 Adaptive Cluster Sampling 0 0 e eee eee eee eee teens 5 7 5 4 General Considerations for Sampling Designs 05 5 8 5 5 Soil Sampling Designs onnan bes e ew Sv ee isan es ea Saws Ras 5 9 5 5 1 Historical Sampling Data Site Survey and Site History 5 9 5 5 2 Data Quality Objectives DQOs lsseeeeeeeeee eh 5 9 5 5 3 Authoritative Designs for Soil Investigations 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 5 9 5 5 4 Systematic Grid Sampling Designs for Soil Investigations 5 10 5 6 Ground Water Sampling Designs uuslsls eese eee 5 14 5 6 1 Single Source Iterative Programs 0 0 eee eee eee eee 5 14 EISOPQAM ToC iii November 2001 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 7 4 5 7 5 5 8 5 8 1 5 8 2 5 8 3 5 8 4 5 8 5 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 13 1 5 13 2 5 13 3 5 13 4 5 13 5 5 13 6 5 13 7 5 13 8 5 13 9 5 13 10 5 13 11 5 13 12 5 13 13 5 14 5 14 1 5 14 2 5 14 3 5 15 5 15 1 5 15 2 5 15
294. ecting the discharge from the pump in a bucket of known volume and timing how long it takes to fill the bucket The pumping rate should be in gallons per minute This method shall be used primarily with pumps with a constant pump rate such as gasoline powered or electric submersible pumps Care should be taken when using this method with some battery powered pumps As the batteries charge decreases the pump rate also decreases so that pumping rate calculations using initial high pump rates may be erroneously high If this method is used with battery powered pumps the rate should be re checked frequently to ensure accuracy of the pumping rate calculations EISOPQAM 7 11 November 2001 7 4 References US EPA RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Draft Technical Guidance November 1992 Office of Solid Waste EPA 530 R 93 001 US EPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Volume II Field Manual Physical Chemical Methods November 1986 Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response SW 846 Puls Robert W Don A Clark and Bert Bledsoe Metals in Ground Water Sampling Artifacts and Reproducibility Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Materials 9 2 149 162 1992 Puls Robert W and Michael J Barcelona Filtration of Ground Water Samples for Metals Analysis Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Materials 6 4 385 393 1989 Ground Water Sampling A Workshop Summary Proceedings from the Dallas Texas November 30 December 2 1993 Workshop US
295. ection Samples will be collected using the following Field scientists will take the filters field data sheets and COC to the State local agency monitoring site and setup the portable samplers Air flow barometric pressure and two temperature measuring devices will be verified prior to each sampling event All flow barometric pressure and temperature standard devices are annually calibrated and traceable to a primary standard Internal and external leak checks will be performed Within 8 to 16 hours following the sampling event the exposed filters will be collected and prepared for transport to the Filter Weighing Laboratory Field scientists will return the exposed filter data diskettes field data sheets and COC to the appropriate laboratory as well as keep a set of the data records After sample collection all filters will be stored in petri slides boxed and archived for one 1 year at lt 4 C and two 2 years at ambient room temperature lt 25 C 14 2 6 Sampling of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air as PM The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the sampling of particulate matter as PM in air This summary is adapted from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix J Reference Method for The Determination of Particulate Matter as PM In the Atmosphere and The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program ua
296. ection of a river or stream in order to adequately characterize the bed material A common procedure is to sample at quarter points along the cross section When the sampling technique or equipment requires that the samples be extruded or transferred on site they may be combined into a single composite sample However samples of dissimilar composition should notbe combined but should be stored for separate analysis in the laboratory Often sediment must be collected in back shoots or areas on the inside of bends in the stream due to scouring in the main channel To insure representative samples the preferred method is diver deployed coring tubes 5 7 3 Lakes Ponds and Impoundments Lakes ponds and impoundments have a much greater tendency to stratify than rivers and streams The relative lack of mixing generally requires that more samples be obtained Occasionally an extreme turbidity difference may occur where a highly turbid river enters a lake For these situations each layer of the vertically stratified water column needs to be considered Since the stratification is caused by water temperature differences the cooler more dense river water is beneath the warmer lake water temperature profile of the water column as well as visual observation of lake samples can often detect the different layers which can be sampled separately The number of water sampling stations on a lake pond or impoundment will vary with the objective of the inves
297. ed to secure casing joints Teflon O rings can also be used to insure a tight fit and minimize leakage however O rings made of other materials are not acceptable if the well is going to be sampled for organic compound analyses Before the well screen and casings are placed on the bottom of the borehole at least 6 inches of filter material should be placed at the bottom of the borehole to serve as a firm footing The string of well screen and casings should then be placed into the borehole and plumbed Centralizers can be used to plumb a well but centralizers should be placed so that the placement of the filter pack bentonite pellet seal and annular grout will not be hindered Centralizers placed in the wrong locations can cause bridging during material placement Monitoring wells less than 50 feet deep generally do not need centralizers If centralizers are used they should be placed below the well screen and above the bentonite pellet seal The specific placement intervals should be decided based on site conditions When installing the well screen and casings through hollow stem augers the augers should be slowly extracted as the filter pack bentonite seal and grout are tremied and or poured into place The gradual extraction of the augers will allow the materials being placed in the augers to flow out of the bottom of the augers into the borehole If the augers are not gradually extracted the materials sand pellets etc will accumulate at th
298. ed aliquots The FPC is typically used when sampling wastewater 3 Areal Composite sample composited from individual equal aliquots collected on an areal or horizontal cross sectional basis Each aliquot is collected in an identical manner Examples include sediment composites from quarter point sampling of streams and soil samples from within grids 4 Vertical Composite a sample composited from individual equal aliquots collected from a vertical cross section Each aliquot is collected in an identical manner Examples include vertical profiles of soil sediment columns lakes and estuaries EISOPQAM 5 2 November 2001 Quality Control Samples Quality control samples are collected during field studies for various purposes which include the isolation of site effects control samples define background conditions background sample evaluate field laboratory variability spikes and blanks trip blanks duplicate split samples The definitions for specific quality control samples are listed below Control Sample typically a discrete grab sample collected to isolate a source of contamination Isolation of a source could require the collection of both an upstream sample at a location where the medium being studied is unaffected by the site being studied as well as a downstream control which could be affected by contaminants contributed from the site under study Background Sample a sample usually a grab sample collected from a
299. ed an angle of elevation or positive angle and the field notation should be Dh horizontal angle preceded by a sign If the vertical angle is below the horizontal line AB it is called an Example 2 Figure 15 2 2 Side view angle of depression or negative angle and the ure m eadein Aa Shs field notation should be preceded by a sign Note that most theodolites measure the adjacent zenith angle instead of the vertical angle A zenith angle is simply the included angle between a line connecting the point exactly overhead and the point in question For example a zenith angle of 90 is a horizontal line or right angle and the complimentary vertical angle would be 0 The vertical angle can be obtained by subtracting the zenith angle from 90 Z lt zenith angle Q hy R3 i a S ES ee To determine the height of the point X measure the slope distance Ds with the electronic distance meter from A to X Using the theodolite or transit measure the vertical angle between line AX and AB or the zenith angle The height of point X would be obtained by the appropriate trigonometric formula Dv sin V lt Ds or Dv cos Z lt Ds The horizontal distance Dh which is the distance used when drawing the map would be obtained by the appropriate formula Dh cos V lt Ds or Dh sin Z lt Ds If the vertical distance to be measured was to the top of a building tank or other point where the measure
300. ed and updated as needed 2 7 4 Requests for RCRA Studies RCRA investigations are prioritized by the Region 4 RCRA programs based on their need for field investigative support Requests for field investigative support are coordinated with the RCRA team Supervisor or their designee s A memorandum with a request form is recommended prior to commencement of the investigation 2 7 5 Investigation Study Plans Study plans are prepared for all RCRA investigations and issued at least one week prior to the investigation A copy of the draft study plan should be provided to the RCRA program requestor to insure that the investigation will meet the enforcement or permitting objectives As a general rule the Data Quality Objective DQO process should be consulted during the study plan preparation phase The study plan should include as appropriate e Introduction The project leader and support staff requestor from the RCRA program and the objective s of the investigation e Background Facility compliance history manufacturing processes types of wastes produced waste treatment methods etc e Scope A discussion of the study design including the number and locations of the samples to be collected Information which will be obtained and records to be reviewed e Logistics The travel study dates and personnel e Methodology Analyses to be conducted and who will conduct analyses field and laboratory SOP references and when sampl
301. ed from any municipal water treatment system Use of an untreated potable water supply is not an acceptable substitute for tap water e Analyte free water deionized water is tap water that has been treated by passing through a standard deionizing resin column Ata minimum the finished water should contain no detectable heavy metals or other inorganic compounds i e at or above analytical detection limits as defined by a standard inductively coupled Argon Plasma Spectrophotometer ICP or equivalent scan Analyte free water obtained by other methods is acceptable as long as it meets the above analytical criteria EISOPQAM B 1 November 2001 e Organic analyte free water is defined as tap water that has been treated with activated carbon and deionizing units A portable system to produce organic analyte free water under field conditions is available At a minimum the finished water must meet the analytical criteria of analyte free water and should contain no detectable pesticides herbicides or extractable organic compounds and no volatile organic compounds above minimum detectable levels as determined by the Region 4 laboratory for a given set of analyses Organic analyte free water obtained by other methods is acceptable as long as it meets the above analytical criteria Other solvents may be substituted for a particular purpose if required For example removal of concentrated waste materials may require the use of either pesticide gra
302. ed using appropriate air monitoring instruments that detect explosive vapors CGI oxygen content and organic vapors OVA The purpose of an initial site survey is to accomplish one or both of the following objectives e Determine the hazards that may exist which could affect site personnel e Verify existing information or obtain new information about the site EISOPQAM 4 7 November 2001 To accomplish the first objective an assessment of real or potential dangers from fire explosion airborne contaminants radiation and oxygen deficient atmospheres must be made This assessment will be made as follows e Combustible Gases The atmosphere in any location capable of containing or generating a combustible concentration of gases will be monitored with a combustible gas meter Response of the meter in excess of 25 of the lower explosive limit LEL will cause an immediate evacuation of the site e Oxygen Deficiency A location capable of containing or generating an oxygen deficiency either by depletion or displacement will be monitored with an oxygen meter Any reading less than 19 596 oxygen will result in the use of self contained breathing apparatus SCBA e Organic Vapors and Gases The atmosphere will be monitored with both a photoionization detector PID and a flame ionization detector FID When appropriate cyanide gas and halogenated vapors will also be monitored Any response above background concentrations will cause an
303. eee E 3 E 2 4 Operation spie ai ere d ce us a ee uU E eS on De v eb ae arose e inca E 4 E 2 5 Maintenance and Precautions 0 0 eee eee eee ence eee E 4 E 2 6 Trouble Shooting oc eccesso ket ee eo dy ERE GU e Ea bee oe E 5 E 3 QEDO Bladder and Purge Pumps 00 02 eee eee eee eene E 5 E 3 1 Iconos EET We ark Ne as heed eth dong Wea de Od eee de ee eae hee ard E 5 E 3 2 Operation Bladder Pump ss csoro renies eee eect eh E 5 E 3 3 Operation Purge Pump seeeeeeeeee eh E 6 E 3 4 Trotble Shootimg 2a e aeree R d ex E E a acres ia m eed tte a E 6 E 4 Small Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps 00 0000 e eee E 6 E 4 1 Introduction ues Jessen eth weeded ec ae eye ape dedo o B rA To tetas E 6 E 4 2 Safety sa cigs tes ee Vb A he Eee a eae Re Pe eae ee E 7 E 4 3 Pre loadout Checkout Procedures 0 0 c cece eee eens E 7 E 4 4 COpeTdtlOn viae ee do o Mea eee EXER Peale Gea AUR Vect ee p den ee E 7 E 4 6 Maintenance and Precautions 0 0 eect hn E 8 E 4 7 Trouble Shooting 2t rex mcm et dada abla xod A ee weed E 8 APPENDIX F Regional Technical Support for Criminal Investigations F 1 F 1 Technical Assistance 45 4 2 55 4 44 64454400544 Pag hp he da he RERO RR cams F 1 F 2 Project Requests 204 0o80c 90446500054 eno oud EEEAVAR cohen EX REESE F 2 F 3 Project Coordination 6c 65665 64 6 kG y 9 REX EYE Se RES es be EOS F 2 F 4 Project Planning roles pP ERRARE UAE ELA OH SERO U
304. efine the conceptual site model gt Define any exposure scenarios gt Specify the available resources and constraints gt Write a brief summary of the contamination problem Step 2 Identify the Decision Step 3 Step 4 Purpose To identify the decision that requires new environmental data to address the contamination problem Activities gt Identify the principal study question s gt Define alternative actions that could result from the resolution of the principal study question s gt Combine the principal study question and the alternative actions into a decision statement gt Organize multiple decisions Identify Inputs to the Decision Purpose To identify information that will be required to support the decision and specify which inputs require new environmental measurements Activities gt Identify the information that will be required to resolve the decision statement gt Determine the sources for each item of information identified Identify the information needed to establish the action level s gt Confirm the appropriate analytical methods exist to provide the necessary data Define the Study Boundaries Purpose To define the spatial and temporal boundaries that data must represent to support the decision Activities gt Specify the characteristics that define the population of interest Define the geographical area which the decision statement applies gt When appropria
305. eflon film 8 Store in plastic bags When transporting organic analyte free water to the field use only containers cleaned as specified above Thoroughly rinse the interior of the container with organic analyte free water prior to filling Cap with one layer of Teflon film one layer of aluminum foil and label the container as organic analyte free water and include the date it was prepared Do not store the organic analyte free water at the FEC for more than three days EISOPQAM C 12 November 2001 C 5 11 Portable Solvent Rinse System 1 Replace Teflon tubing if necessary Wash nozzle and tubing fittings with hot soapy water 2 Rinse with analyte free water 3 Wrap nozzle and tubing ends with aluminum foil C 5 12 Splash Suits CAUTION Splash suits should be inspected for wear or damage If after consultation with the Branch Safety Officer the suit cannot be repaired it should be discarded 1 Wash and brush suit thoroughly inside and out with a brush in hot tap water and soap 2 Rinse suit thoroughly inside and out with tap water 3 Hang suit up until completely dry 4 Fold suit and place in clean clear plastic bag and tap shut Mark the suit s size on the bag C 5 13 SCBA Face masks CAUTION Face masks should be inspected for wear or damage If after consultation with the Safety Officer the face mask cannot be repaired it should be discarded 1 Wash face mask thoroughly inside and out with hot tap water and dis
306. eir duties in Level B protection Following are the Level A decontamination procedures l Immediately upon leaving the exclusion zone site workers will place all sampling equipment at a designated area provided at the first station The area will be covered with disposable plastic Site workers will then proceed to the first decontamination wash tub where their suit boots and outer gloves will be thoroughly scrubbed with the appropriate cleaning solution usually alkaline soap and water Long handle brushes will be provided for use by the decontamination workers Decontamination workers should avoid touching the site workers until after they have cleared the rinse station Site workers boots and outer gloves will usually be the most contaminated items Therefore this step of the decontamination procedure will be accomplished by using soap and water from the washtub bucket and a brush which is stored in the tub bucket In this step only the boots and gloves of the site worker will be scrubbed The site workers suits will be scrubbed using a cleaning solution from a pump sprayer and a brush which is not allowed to contact the more contaminated contents of the washtub bucket After clearance from the decontamination personnel the site worker will proceed to the rinse water washtub bucket At this location the decontamination personnel will scrub the site workers boots and outer gloves with water from the washtub bucket using a long handle br
307. eld 1 Inorganic Sample Preservative Blanks Metals and general inorganic sample containers filled with analyte free water will be transported to the field and preserved and submitted for the same analyses as the other inorganic samples collected These samples will be clearly identified as preservatives blanks on sample tags and the Chain Of Custody Record s At least one preservative blank for each type of preserved sample should be collected at the end of routine field investigations A minimum of one preservative blank should be prepared in the field at the beginning and end of all major field investigations that last more than one week 2 Equipment Field Blanks When field cleaning equipment is required during a sampling investigation a piece of the field cleaned equipment will be selected for collection of a rinse blank At least one rinse blank will be collected during each week of sampling operations After the piece of equipment has been field cleaned and prior to its being used for sample operations it will be rinsed with organic analyte free water The rinse water will be collected and submitted for analyses of all constituents for which normal samples collected with that piece of equipment are being analyzed 3 Organic Analyte Free Water System Blanks When using a portable organic free water generating system in the field a sample of the raw source water and water generated will be collected at least once during each week of op
308. eld is produced by a set of electromagnetic coils The accuracy of the device is within 1 percent of full scale 9 Other Closed Conduct Devices References for other closed conduit flow measurement methods such as acoustic flow meters trajectory methods pump curves and water meters can be found in the NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 2 18 3 Surface Water Flow Measurements 18 3 1 Introduction Surface waters are considered to be open channels for flow measurement purposes Where installation of a primary flow device is practical open channel flow measurement shall adhere to Section 18 2 6 Where installation of a primary flow device is not practical flow measurements shall be made using stream gaging techniques Where practical flow data and or rating curves shall be obtained from existing permanent stream gaging stations maintained by the USGS Army Corps of Engineers or other federal or state agency Where permanent stations do not exist flow may be measured using stream gaging techniques In making stream gaging measurements Branch personnel shall utilize the procedures outlined in the USGS publication Discharge Measurements at Gaging Stations 8 1 select the flow measurement site 2 perform stream gaging and 3 calculate flow The EABSOP Section 14 2 6 3 also describes current measurement techniques If a station is to be used more than one time during a water quality survey a rating curve may be developed for that stat
309. elease the rocker switch and the actual instrument temperature will appear in the display window The RED light next to the knob should come on indicating the heater is ON Note The preset knob for test temperature may have to be reset as the test temperature is approached If a glass bulb thermometer is used coat the bulb with a heat transfer compound and insert it into the well in the left side of the test oven Carefully secure the top of the thermometer in the channel Open the control valve on the butane cylinder approximately 5 turns and install Close the control valve and place the cylinder into the instrument s receptacle Hook the hose to the valve Open the control valve approximately one turn and light the pilot light located over the square hole in shutter lid Adjust the pilot light for the minimum flame that will light test the jet Adjust the test jet for the flame to 4 mm width using the pinch valve knob Note Immediately above the shutter is a 4 mm referenced milled lid Make sure that the shutter lid is latched Closed Inject 2 cc of the sample into the port between the shutter and the latch handle Press the 1 minute timer rocker switch until the light goes on then return the switch to center EISOPQAM 16 13 November 2001 8 When the timer sounds slide the shutter back slowly taking about 2 seconds to do this The material under test will either flash or not flash Note If a halo develops around the flame
310. em Instructions July 1988 Hydrogen Ion Concentration pH 9 Standard Methods for the Examination of Wastewater 18th Edition p 4 65 Method 4500 H 1992 10 Instruction Manual for Models 399 A F 399 A L Analog pH Meter and SA 250 and 230A Orion Research Incorporated 11 Instruction Manual for Surveyor II Hydrolab Corporation 12 Instruction Manual for YSI Water Quality Monitoring System for the Model 3530 pH Electrode Assembly 13 Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 31 Water Standard D1293 78 B 14 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 150 1 1983 15 Procedure No 501 pH Measurement in Low Ionic Strength Solutions Orion Application Information Orion Research Incorporated 16 Federal Register Vol 60 No 64 Tuesday April 4 1995 Rules and Regulations 17001 17003 Turbidity 17 Operating procedures for the Hach 2100P Turbidimeter Dissolved Oxygen EISOPQAM 16 16 November 2001 18 19 20 21 22 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 18th Edition p 4 100 Method 4500 0C 1992 Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 31 Water Standard D888 92 A Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 360 1 1983 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes US EPA 360 2 1983 Instruction Manual YSI Model 57 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Science Division Yellow Springs Instrument Company Chlorine DPT Colorimetric
311. emporary Well Installation Equipment Specific Sampling and Investigation Equipment Needs Comments 3 Safety Equipment Available Monitoring Equipment Protective Clothing Respiratory Protection 4 Are Safety Procedures available in written form or in a manual Comments Specific Safety Equipment Needs Comments 6 Does a specific field or safety equipment needs list exist Comments 7 Is there an allowance for an equipment budget Comments EISOPQAM 2 54 November 2001 SECTION 3 SAMPLE CONTROL FIELD RECORDS AND DOCUMENT CONTROL SECTION OBJECTIVES Present standard procedures for sample identification Present standard procedures for sample control Present standard procedures for chain of custody Present standard procedures for maintenance of field records and document control 3 1 Introduction Sample identification chain of custody records receipt for sample forms and field records with the exception of surveying notes should be recorded with waterproof non erasable ink If errors are made in any of these documents corrections should be made by crossing a single line through the error and entering the correct information All corrections should be initialed and dated If possible all corrections should be made by the individual making the error If information is entered onto sample tags logbooks or sample containers using stick on labels the labels should not be capable of being removed
312. ent laboratory analysis The basic objectives of this section are to outline standard practices with respect to wastewater flow measurements during water enforcement and NPDES compliance monitoring activities and other studies where wastewater flow measurements are required e outline standard practices for obtaining surface water flow measurements during water quality surveys present acceptable commonly used flow measurement techniques and present general and specific quality assurance procedures for flow measurement equipment and techniques A complete discussion of all available flow measurement techniques and the theory behind them is beyond the scope of this section However most of the commonly used techniques are covered in general terms A comprehensive list of references is included at the end of this section and a detailed discussion of flow measurement techniques may be found in the references 18 2 Wastewater Flow Measurement 18 2 1 Introduction The USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 is a standard reference for details on checking the installation of primary open channel flow devices Basic guidance for making wastewater flow measurements and a basic description of all acceptable wastewater flow measurement systems are given in the NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual September 1984 2 This manual shall be used as Branch guidance for such measurements 18 2 2 Site Selection It is the field investigator s respo
313. ent readings after the 15 minute purge 3 After three consistent readings have been obtained samples may be collected EISOPQAM 8 2 November 2001 8 3 Reference 1 Sampling for Organic Chemicals and Microorganisms in the Subsurface United States Environmental Protection Agency EPA 600 2 77 176 1977 EISOPQAM 8 3 November 2001 SECTION 9 WASTEWATER SAMPLING SECTION OBJECTIVE To provide guidance for the proper collection of wastewater samples 9 1 Introduction The variety of conditions at different sampling locations require that considerable judgment be exercised regarding the methodologies and procedures for the collection of representative samples of wastewater Each sampling location warrants attention commensurate with its complexity There are however basic rules and precautions generally applicable to sample collection Acceptable procedures are generally those outlined in the NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 1 Some important considerations for obtaining a representative wastewater sample include The sample should be collected where the wastewater is well mixed Therefore the sample should be collected near the center of the flow channel at approximately 40 to 60 percent of the water depth where the turbulence is at a maximum and the possibility of solids settling is minimized Skimming the water surface or dragging the channel bottom should be avoided However allowances should be made for fluctuations in
314. ental Data Related to Waste Management Activities Quality Assurance and Quality Control Planning and Implementation 4 5 3 2 Representative Sampling A representative sample is often defined as a sample that reflects one or more characteristics of the population being sampled For example the characteristic which is desired to be reflected by the sample may be the average minimum or maximum concentration of a constituent of concern Ultimately a representative sample is defined by the study objectives For instance the objective of the study may be to determine the maximum concentration of lead in the sludge from a surface impoundment One sample collected near the inlet to the impoundment may provide that information The collection of a representative sample may be influenced by factors such as equipment design sampling techniques and sample handling 5 3 3 Stratification and Heterogeneous Wastes Environmental media as well as waste matrices may be stratified i e different portions of the population which may be separated temporally or spatially may have similar characteristics or properties which are different from adjacent portions of the population An example would be a landfill that contains a trench which received an industrial waste contaminated with chromium The trench would be considered a strata within the landfill if chromium was the contaminant of concern A special case stratification by component is often observed
315. entered at the appropriate location on the chart along with the date and time of the measurement e A description of the location being monitored and other information required to interpret the data such as type of flow device chart units factors etc After the chart has been removed the field investigator shall indicate on the chart who the chart or copy of the chart was received from and enter the date and time as well as the investigator s initials Documents such as technical reports laboratory reports etc should be marked with the field investigator s signature the date the number of pages and from whom they were received Confidential documents should not be accepted except in special circumstances such as process audits hazardous waste site investigations etc 3 3 Chain of Custody Procedures PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To maintain and document the possession of samples or other evidence from the time of collection until they or the data derived from the samples are introduced as evidence 3 3 1 Introduction Chain of custody procedures are comprised of the following elements 1 maintaining custody of samples or other evidence and 2 documentation of the chain of custody for evidence To document chain of custody an accurate record must be maintained to trace the possession of each sample or other evidence from the moment of collection to its introduction into evidence EISOPQAM 3 4 November 2001 3 3 2 Sa
316. ents Units Units of pH are Standard Units SU and should be read in one hundredths 0 01 and recorded in tenths 0 1 Note If the pH measurements are to be used for RCRA regulatory purposes and when the pH approaches the alkaline end pH 11 0 of the scale the pH measurements should be made by a qualified analyst using laboratory quality equipment to control the sample at 23 C IC 16 5 Turbidity A nephelometer turbidimeter is used in comparing the turbidity of liquids by viewing light through them and determining how much light is eliminated Meter s available e Hach 2100P Portable Turbidimeter Calibration 1 Theturbidimeter is calibrated with Formazin Primary Standards semi annually by the FEC and a record of the calibration is maintained on file at the FEC Labels are placed on the turbidimeters to indicate when the next calibration is required The turbidimeter should be verified with the Gelex secondary standards in the field before each use The Gelex Secondary Standards are supplied with the instrument but must be assigned values before use after the formazin calibration If the instrument readings do not agree within 10 of the Gelex standards the unit must be recalibrated repaired or replaced These verifications should be documented in the inspector s logbook 2 Turn the meter ON 3 Rinse the sample cell 3 times with organic free or de ionized water 4 Fillthe cell to the fill line with organic free or de
317. er of samples to be collected is usually determined by the objective of the study Factors to consider when determining the appropriate number of samples are preliminary information on the waste the size of the sample population field screening results the variability of the waste and the budget for the investigation Composite samples are used to obtain average concentrations of waste units while grab samples are utilized to delineate hot spots or to acquire data for sample variability or to determine compliance with Land Disposal Restrictions LDR treatment standards A small wastestream that has a hazardous constituent or characteristic randomly distributed in a relatively homogeneous matrix requires fewer samples than a large wastestream that has a constituent or characteristic of concern which is non randomly distributed in a heterogeneous matrix For a waste with constituent of concern that is randomly distributed an authoritative or systematic grid sampling design would be appropriate depending on the objectives On the other hand a stratified sampling or very specialized design should be employed for wastes that are non randomly distributed Reviewing the available preliminary information should improve the effectiveness of any sampling investigation If waste variability cannot be estimated after review of available information then a preliminary sampling and analytical effort may be necessary A preliminary sampling investigation would
318. er Standard Calibration Gas Value 1 2 Enter standard gas value option is the 6th menu option If the concentration of the standard calibration gas to be used is the same as the displayed value press enter key 4 times to accept the displayed calibration value one digit at a time and move to the next step If the concentration of the standard calibration gas to be used is different from the displayed value the user needs to enter the new value Starting from the left most digit of the displayed value use the up or down arrow key to change the digit value and enter to confirm the digit Now the standard calibration gas value is entered Display shows a flashing message of GAS ON to remind the user to turn on the standard calibration gas bottle now After the gas bottle is turned on press enter key to continue the standard calibration procedure Standard Gas Calibration Procedure 1 3 4 Insert the instrument probe into the calibration gas bag bag should be at least 1 liter that is filled with toluene Display shows a flashing message of GAS ON Press the enter key the display should show CAL for about 30 seconds while the instrument performs calibration Afterwards the display shows C1 xxx x where C1 indicates that this is the standard calibration gas and xxx x is the actual gas reading in ppm based on the new calibration data Note The reading should be very close to the value of the calibra
319. erations The collected water sample will be submitted for analyses of all constituents for which normal samples are being analyzed 4 Material Blanks When construction materials are being used on a site in such a way as to have a potential impact on constituent concentrations in the sample a sample of the materials will be submitted for analyses An example of a situation where construction blanks are required is monitoring well construction In this situation all materials used in well construction should be submitted for analyses e g grout sand tap water etc EISOPQAM 5 35 November 2001 5 Automatic Sampler Blanks In general cleaning procedures outlined in Appendix B of this SOP should be adequate to insure sample integrity However it is the standard practice of the Branch to submit automatic sampler blanks for analyses when automatic samplers are used to collect samples for organic compounds and metals analyses Automatic sampler blanks for other standard analyses may be submitted in the event of a special investigation 1e criminal or civil The Quality Assurance Officer will inform the project leaders and management when blank samples are found to be unacceptably contaminated The Quality Assurance Officer will immediately initiate an investigation to determine the cause of the problem The results of this investigation will be promptly reported to appropriate personnel so that corrective action and or qualifications to the
320. erformance Audit Program 0000 eee ues 2 29 2 10 7 PM Federal Reference Method FRM Performance Audit Program PEP 2 30 2 11 References siso ienie edo e aeng an eek aE eee setae a E ome ete eg 2 32 Exhibit 2 1 Hazardous Waste Field Overview Checklist 2 33 Exhibit 2 2 State Contractor Overview Checklist 0000 5 2 48 Exhibit 2 3 State Program Evaluation Hazardous Waste Field Activities 2 51 SECTION 3 Sample Control Field Records and Document Control 3 1 3 1 Introduction re E REESE RIAOGHLE HOPES Ra REC R E 3 1 3 2 Sample and Evidence Identification 20 0 0 cece eee 3 2 3 2 1 Sample Identification 4 9 ous vac eI RS PPS EIE ue PRETEREA 3 2 3 2 2 Photograph Digital Image and Video Identification lusus 3 3 3 2 3 Identification of Physical Evidence 00 cece eee eee 3 3 3 3 Chain of Custody Procedures 0 00sec cece esee 3 4 3 3 1 Intr Gdutiolt 3 205 06sdenuheritessdndesseeeeeciSerahesandeaseeiSerans 3 4 3 3 2 Sample Custody 2 gies eee ek ee ee eee RR RS Ke ERA ES EE E ERU PP RE 3 4 3 3 3 Documentation of Chain of Custody 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 5 3 3 4 Transfer of Custody with Shipment 0 0 eee eee eee 3 6 3 4 Receipt for Samples Form CERCLA RCRA TSCA 3 7 3 4 1 Tntrod c n PET PPrr E En 3 7 3 4 2 Receipt For Samples FOM
321. ers are required CAB liners may be used if metals or other inorganic constituents are the object of the investigation Sample Orientation When the liners and associated sample are removed from the sample tubes it is important to maintain the proper orientation of the sample This is particularly important when multiple sample depths are collected from the same push It is also important to maintain proper orientation to define precisely what depth an aliquot was collected from Maintaining proper orientation is typically accomplished using vinyl end caps Convention is to place red caps on the top of liner and black caps on the bottom to maintain the proper sample orientation Orientation can also be indicated by marking on the exterior of the liner with a permanent marker Back Hoes Back hoes may be utilized in the collection of shallow subsurface soil samples Samples may be collected directly from the bucket or the trench wall subject to applicable safety procedures The bucket must be free of rust grease and paint Only soil which has not been in contact with the bucket may be sampled unless the bucket is cleaned according to the procedures described in Appendix B of this SOP EISOPQAM 12 5 November 2001 Trenches offer the capability of collecting samples from very specific intervals and allow visual correlation with vertically and horizontally adjacent material The sample should be collected without entering the trench itself
322. ers are visible from the front and that the battery terminals are to the right when facing the bench In this configuration the positive terminals of all batteries will be to the front of the charging bench 7 Connect the terminal clips securely to the battery terminals Dirty terminal clips dirty battery terminals or loose connections will result in dangerous arcing when the charger is turned on 8 Insure that the charger s positive lead is attached to the positive terminal of the battery on the right hand facing end of the bench and that the charger s negative lead is attached to the negative terminal of the battery on the left hand facing end of the bench 9 Remove all battery cell filler caps and store them in the box on the battery bench Insure that the battery electrolyte level is between filllines If low add tap water with the battery filler If high use battery filler to remove the excess electrolyte and dispose of it in the carboy labeled Battery Acid EISOPQAM G 2 November 2001 10 Unlock the 240 volt power supply box and place lock on top of the box Do not place lock back in the lock out holes for storage as this will prevent a rapid turn off of the system in an emergency 11 Place the 240 volt power supply box switch in the ON position 12 Set the charger s timer as follows For 4 7 batteries set timer to 6 hours For 8 11 batteries set timer to 9 hours For 12 18 batteries set timer to 12 hours Never oper
323. ersible pumps bladder turbine displacement etc are used the pump itself is lowered into the water column The pump must be cleaned as specified in Appendix B Purging with Bailers Standard cleaned Appendix B closed top Teflon bailers with Teflon leaders and new nylon rope are lowered into top of the water column allowed to fill and removed It is critical that bailers be slowly and gently immersed into the top of the water column particularly during final stages of purging to minimize turbidity and disturbance of volatile organic constituents The use of bailers for purging and sampling is discouraged because the correct technique is highly operator dependent Field Care of Purging Equipment Regardless of which method is used for purging new plastic sheeting should be placed on the ground surface around the well casing to prevent contamination of the pumps hoses ropes etc in the event they need to be placed on the ground during the purging or they accidentally come into contact with the ground surface It is preferable that hoses used in purging that come into contact with the ground water be kept on a spool or contained in a plastic lined tub both during transporting and during field use to further minimize contamination from the transporting vehicle or ground surface Purging Entire Water Column The pump hose assembly or bailer used in purging should be lowered into the top of the standing water column and not deep into
324. es 0 0 0 0 00 000 15 3 15 244 Procedures for Traversing 4 ose esaRP V dr REXT EX REX EXE Rex CER 15 5 Figure 15 4 1 Loose sae eas aceieiaeane RE ERED RR ERE RES a 15 5 Figure 5 22 perc ede Eeee n Ea eter E See Hose eo tee he es eee wheres 15 6 laici dis Lc TT 15 7 Heure 1924 oh oso us esu eek ees ke ENS esse ese dad eee ees alioa 15 8 Figure 13 5 9 crrrreriener oecite RERRES AT ENE ARE OE EEA bed Ra RE 15 9 Figure 15 28 TEC 15 9 15 2 5 Procedures for Differential GPS 12i cides sveetaws ar eoe eS es 15 10 15 3 Vertical Location Elevation Surveys 0000 cece eens 15 16 15 3 1 IIROUNICUON esses Ae ed dabit eee sehen Jud RENG AE ERR ows REG 15 16 15 3 2 Equipment Available 0 0 0 eee eee eens 15 17 15 3 3 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures 00 000005 15 18 15 3 4 Procedures Tor Differential Leveling lt lt 2 202 zoesusvek y RR REDE ERE 15 18 Heure T5 3l Pp 15 19 15 3 5 Procedures for Trigonometric Leveling snsnunuuaurnra eee eee 15 19 Figure 15 3 2 cereri WR ie E e EREE E ER EEES 15 20 Figure 193 T 15 21 Piette IF MM TT 15 21 15 4 Hydrological Studies 0 0 0 00 ccc eects 15 22 15 4 1 Scope and Applicability 0 0 cee ce eee eee nee 15 22 13912 Methods so ebkes ken hex RES koe seve eGo teased dgesesedederetedes 15 22 1542 1 Surface Water Stage Tape Downs 2 244 454 Rr RR rh RR RE RR 15 22 15 4 2 2
325. es and for the construction of monitoring wells to be used for the collection of groundwater samples for trace organic and inorganic constituent analyses B 3 1 Introduction Cleaning and decontamination of all equipment should occur at a designated area decontamination pad on the site The decontamination pad should meet the specifications of Section B 2 1 Tap water potable brought on the site for drilling and cleaning purposes should be contained in a pre cleaned tank A steam cleaner and or high pressure hot water washer capable of generating a pressure of at least 2500 PSI and producing hot water and or steam 200 F plus with a soap compartment should be obtained B 3 2 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection The drill rig should be clean of any contaminants that may have been transported from another hazardous waste site to minimize the potential for cross contamination Further the drill rig itself should not serve as a source of contaminants In addition associated drilling and decontamination equipment well construction materials and equipment handling procedures should meet these minimum specified criteria All downhole augering drilling and sampling equipment should be sandblasted before use if painted and or there is a buildup of rust hard or caked matter etc that cannot be removed by steam cleaning soap and high pressure hot water or wire brushing Sandblasting should be performed prior to arrival on site or wel
326. es Department of Interior Bureau of Reclamation 1981 Available from the United States Government Printing Office D C 20402 NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual United States Environmental Protection Agency September 1984 US EPA Region 4 Ecological Assessment Branch Standard Operating Procedures EABSOP 2001 King H W and E F Brater Handbook of Hydraulics Sixth Edition McGraw Hill New York 1976 Davis C V and K E Sorenson Handbook of Applied Hydraulics Third Edition McGraw Hill New York 1969 Stevens Water Resource Data Book Third Edition Leopold Stevens Inc Beaverton Oregon 1978 ISCO Open Channel Flow Measurement Handbook Second Edition Second Printing Instrumentation Specialists Company Lincoln Nebraska 1985 Discharge Measurements at Gaging Stations Hydraulic Measurement and Computation Book I Chapter 11 United States Department of Interior Geological Survey 1965 Sewer Flow Measurement A State of the Art Assessment Municipal Environmental Research Laboratory Office of Research and Development U S Environmental Protection Agency Cincinnati Ohio 600 275027 A Guide to Methods and Standards for the Measurement of Water Flow United States Department of Commerce National Bureau of Standards NBS Special Publication 421 1975 Wells E A and H B Gotaas Design of Venturi Flumes in Circular Conduits American Society of Civil Engineers 82 Proc Paper 928 April 19
327. es Form CERCLA RCRA TSCA PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To assure that staff comply with environmental laws which require providing a Receipt for Samples Form 3 4 1 Introduction Section 3007 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA of 1976 and Section 104 of the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act CERCLA or Superfund of 1980 require that a receipt for all facility samples collected during inspections and investigations be given to the owner operator of each facility before the field investigator departs the premises The Toxic Substances Control Act TSCA contains similar provisions The laws do not require that homeowners or other off site property owners be given this form 3 4 2 Receipt for Samples Form The Receipt for Samples form Figure 3 4 is to be used to satisfy the receipt for samples provisions of RCRA CERCLA and TSCA The form also documents that split samples were offered and either Received or Declined by the owner operator of the facility or site being investigated All information must be supplied in the indicated spaces to complete the Receipt for Samples form The sampler s must sign the form in the indicated location If multiple sample teams are collecting samples the sample team leader s name should be indicated in the EPA Sample Tag No Remarks column e Each sample collected from the facility or site must be documented in the sample record portion of the
328. es are accepted a standard sample tag containing all relevant information and the Chain Of Custody Record shall be completed for each set of samples 3 3 4 Transfer of Custody with Shipment EISOPQAM 3 6 November 2001 e Samples shall be properly packaged for shipment in accordance with the procedures outlined in Appendix D e All samples shall be accompanied by the Chain Of Custody Record The original and one copy of the Record will be placed in a plastic bag inside the secured shipping container if samples are shipped When shipping samples via common carrier the Relinquished By box should be filled in however the Received By box should be left blank The laboratory sample custodian is responsible for receiving custody of the samples and will fill in the Received By section of the Chain of Custody Record One copy of the Record will be retained by the project leader The original Chain of Custody Record will be transmitted to the project leader after the samples are accepted by the laboratory This copy will become a part of the project file fsentby mail the package shall be registered with return receipt requested If sent by common carrier an Air Bill should be used Receipts from post offices and Air Bills shall be retained as part of the documentation of the chain of custody The Air Bill number or registered mail serial number shall be recorded in the remarks section of the Chain Of Custody Record 3 4 Receipt for Sampl
329. es will be received by the laboratory 2 7 6 Investigation Reports Reports will be completed after each investigation and will contain the following as appropriate Introduction When the investigation was conducted EPA state or other regulatory agency participation facility representatives and what their participation included who requested the investigation and the objectives e Background Study area descriptions manufacturing process and waste handling priorities results of previous investigations etc e Summary A brief summary of the key results and conclusions of the study e Discussion All aspects pertinent to the investigation e g sampling figures photographs analytical results RCRA deficiencies etc EISOPQAM 2 15 November 2001 e Methodology What information was obtained and from whom what sampling procedures were used what analytical methods were used etc A statement indicating that this SOP was followed and or reasons for deviations and whether or not samples were split and with whom e Conclusions At the discretion of the investigator a conclusions section for complex investigations e Reference and Appendices Raw data checklists etc If the study was a CME the following information should be included where appropriate A discussion of site hydrology e An evaluation of the monitoring well system e An evaluation of the assessment plan A site map showing monitoring well l
330. ess refer to the referenced guidance documents Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process 1 Data Quality Objectives Process for Hazardous Waste Sites 2 and Standard Practice for Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities Development of Data Quality Objectives 3 The DQO process contains seven steps that will assist in preparing plans for environmental data collection activities Figure 5 2 The steps are iterative and should be revisited as new information about a problem is learned It provides a systematic approach for defining the requirements that a field investigation will attempt to fulfill Such requirements may include when where and how to collect samples the number of samples and the limits on tolerable error rates Figure 5 2 Steps of the DQO Process 1 State the Problem 2 Identify the Decision 3 Identify Inputs to the Decision 4 Define the Study Boundaries 5 Develop a Decision Rule 6 Specify Limits on Decision 7 Optimize the Design EISOPQAM 5 28 November 2001 Below are the steps the purpose and recommended activities of DQO Process from the the US EPA Data Quality Objectives Process for Hazardous Waste Sites 2 Step 1 State the Problem Purpose Summarize the contamination problem that will require new environmental data and identify resources available to resolve the problem Activities gt Identify members of the planning team gt Develop or r
331. etal glass plastic etc The wipe materials must be compatible with the solvent used and the analyses to be performed and should not come apart during use The wipes are saturated with a solvent methylene chloride hexane isopropanol or analyte free water depending on the parameters to be analyzed The laboratory performing the analyses can provide the appropriate solvent Wipe samples should not be collected for volatile organic compounds analysis Sampling personnel should be aware of hazards associated with the selected solvent and should take appropriate precautions to prevent any skin contact or inhalation of these solvents AII surfaces and areas selected for sampling should be based on the study s objectives Typically 10 cm by 10 cm templates are prepared from aluminum foil which are secured to the surface of interest The prepared saturated with solvent wipe s is removed from its container with tongs or gloves and used to wipe the entire area with firm strokes using only one side of the wipe The goal is to systematically wipe the whole area The wipe is then folded with the sample side inward and placed into the sample container This procedure is repeated until the area is free of visible contamination or no more wipes remain Care should be taken to keep the sample container tightly sealed to prevent evaporation of the solvent Samplers must also take care to not touch the used side of the wipe All requests for support from the Region 4 la
332. etween a representative s of the Superfund Staff and the Waste Management Division staff to discuss proposed initiatives and specific investigation needs These meetings are usually conducted in October for yearly planning and more frequently for quarterly planning Based on the priorities agreed upon by the Superfund Staff and the Waste Management Division field investigation schedules are prepared by the Superfund Staff and updated as needed EISOPQAM 2 11 November 2001 2 6 4 Requests for Superfund Studies Superfund investigations are prioritized by the Waste Management Division based on the need for field investigative support Specific investigations are usually requested by project managers of the various Superfund programs however they may be requested by state agencies congressional officials etc Routine requests for field investigative support are coordinated with the Superfund Staff leader Requests are then brought to the Superfund Staff for scheduling and project leader staff assignment Although the initial contact may be by telephone or electronic mail a formal request memorandum with a request form is required prior to commencement of the investigation 2 6 5 Investigation Study Plans Study plans are prepared for all Superfund investigations except overviews and some emergency investigations Study plans for typical Superfund field investigations must be issued at least one week prior to the investigation The timing and
333. eu Is the agency ds the agency adequately familiar with their QA program familiar with their QA program Date last systems audit was conducted Date By Whom Does the agency participate in the National Performance Audit If no why not Summarize below Program NPAP as required under 40 CFR 58 Appendix A EISOPQAM H 20 November 2001 Please complete the table below Parameter Audited Date of Last NPAP SO 4 Documentation and Data Processing Review Does the agency periodically review its record keeping activities Are data audits specific re reductions of strip charts or similar If no please explain activities routinely performed for criteria pollutants data reported by the agency Are they consistent with the recommendations of Sections If no why not 16 4 2 3 of Vol IL of the QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems What is the frequency and level as a percentage of data processed of these audits Pollutant Audit Frequency Period of Data Audited of Data Rechecked Identify the criteria for acceptable non acceptable result from a data processing audit for each pollutant as appropriate Pollutant Acceptance Criteria Data Concentration Level EISOPQAM H 21 November 2001 Are procedures documented and implemented for corrective If yes where are such corrective action procedures actions based on results of data audits which fall outside the documented established limits 5 Correct
334. evel intersects the graduations on the rod The rodman rocks the rod in two planes when instructed by the instrument man to obtain a level reading The rod is white with large red numbers which indicate the foot marks and smaller black numbers which indicate the tenths of feet and has black graduations the entire length which indicate hundredths of feet The instrument man sights through the telescope and takes the first rod reading which is called a backsight denoted BS or in the field log book The backsight reading added to the elevation of the benchmark gives the height of the level or instrument denoted H I in the field log book Next the rodman holds the rod on a point called a turning point and denoted TP of fixed but unknown elevation such as a nail in the ground spike in a tree or telephone pole or the top of a fire hydrant The instrument man then takes his second rod reading which is called a foresight denoted FS or in the field log book If the foresight reading is subtracted from the H I the result is the elevation of the point That is the difference between the first reading obtained from the benchmark and the second reading obtained from the point is the difference in elevation between the point and the benchmark Note that the distance between each sighted reading should not ordinarily exceed 250 feet with turning point backsight and foresight distances deviating no more than 50 feet from one another The instr
335. f lower variability stratified design A recalculation of the number of samples required to characterize each strata should then be completed and resampling may proceed The following table illustrates the number of samples required at a 95 confidence level with varying margins of error p and coefficients of variation CV EN Coefficient of Variation CV Margin of Error Margin of Error p _ Number of Samples n Note that as the CV increases at a set margin of error the number of samples required increases When the variability is low as measured by the standard deviation or the square root of the variance relative to the mean of the data then the CV is low However as the variability in the population begins to increase relative to the mean of the data then the CV increases and the number of samples required increases if characterization of the site at a 95 confidence level and a set margin of error is desired A similar relationship is observed for the margin of error When the precision required say 10 ppm lead is high relative to the mean of the data say 100 ppm lead then the margin of error is low in this case 0 1 In this case 162 samples would be required with a CV of 0 65 If the investigators could accept a higher margin of error e g 20 and the mean concentration of the data is still 100 ppm lead then the resulting margin of error 0 2 would result in a lower number of required samples Note that
336. f it has more than one range At least one of these ranges must be designated a reference or equivalent method and it must be the one in which the pollutant concentration is likely to occur Further the EPA Administrator must determine that the resolution of the range is adequate See Section 2 6 Appendix C for further details Requests for approval of a sampling method must be submitted to the United States Environmental Protection Agency National Exposure Research Laboratory NERL Human Exposure and Atmospheric Sciences Division MD 46 Research Triangle Park North Carolina 27711 Probe Siting Probe siting criteria for State and Local Air Monitoring Stations SLAMS National Air Monitoring Stations NAMS and Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations PAMS is detailed in Appendix E of 40 CFR 58 Tables 2 10 4 and 2 10 5 display the requirements for probe siting For further details clarification or justification refer to Appendix E of 40 CFR 58 Borosilicate glass and FEP Teflon or their equivalent are acceptable materials for SLAMS NAMS intake sampling lines FEP Teflon is not acceptable for VOC and carbonyl sampling at PAMS sites Borosilicate glass stainless steel or its equivalent are the acceptable probe materials for VOC and carbonyl sampling The residence time in sampling probes for reactive gases must be less than 20 seconds EISOPQAM 2 23 November 2001 TABLE 2 10 4 SUMMARY of PROBE SITING CRITERIA Horizont
337. f outer casings which are sometimes called temporary surface casings after the well screens and casings have been installed and grouted is not acceptable Trying to remove outer surface casings after the inner casings have been grouted could jeopardize the structural integrity of the well Bedrock Wells The installation of monitoring wells into bedrock can be accomplished in two ways l The first method is to drill or bore a pilot borehole through the soil overburden into the bedrock An outer casing is then installed into the borehole by setting it into the bedrock and grouting it into place as described in the previous section After the grout has set the borehole can then be advanced through the grout seal into the bedrock The preferred method of advancing the borehole into the bedrock is rock coring Rock coring makes a smooth round hole through the seal and into the bedrock without cracking and or shattering the seal Roller cone bits are used in soft bedrock but extreme caution should be taken when using a roller cone bit to advance through the grout seal in the bottom of the borehole because excessive water and down pressure can cause cracking eroding washing and or shattering of the seal Low volume air hammers may be used to advance the borehole but they have a tendency to shatter the seal because of the hammering action If the structural integrity of the grout seal is in question a pressure test can be utilized to check for leaks
338. from 40 CFR PART 50 APPENDIX B Reference Method For The Determination Of Suspended Particulate Matter In The Atmosphere High Volume Method and 40 CFR PART 50 APPENDIX G Reference Method For The Determination Of Lead In Suspended Particulate Matter Collected From Ambient Air The following procedures must be followed in preparation for collecting samples for metals analyses with the High Volume sampler e All quartz filters used will be supplied by the EPA National Filter Distribution Program and of the same quality as supplied to the State and Local Agency Air Monitoring Stations Prior to use all filters will be checked for pinholes and desiccated at 15 C 30 C 3 C and less than 50 percent relative humidity 5 percent for at least 24 hours e A filter field blank will be taken to the field but not exposed Filter field blanks will be analyzed by the laboratory to determine the concentration of metals contained in the filter matrix The number of filter blanks will be determined based on a minimum of one blank for each ten samples collected e Chain of custody must be maintained for all samples Sample Collection Procedures Samples will be collected using the High Volume sampler as described and operated in accordance with 40 CFR PART 50 APPENDIX B e All flow calibration orifices will be traceable to a Primary Standard Rootsmeter Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 76
339. from David Weitzman Work Group Chairman Office of Occupational Health and Safety PM 273 US EPA April 13 1981 4 40 CFR 136 3 July 1 2001 See Table 11 Footnote 3 EISOPQAM D 4 November 2001 APPENDIX E PUMP OPERATING PROCEDURES E 1 Peristaltic Pump E 1 1 Introduction When relatively small volumes of water are required for purging and sampling and the water level is within the limit of suction generally around 25 feet vertical separation between the pump and water surface peristaltic pumps can be used These pumps are generally small light weight and portable and are powered by 12 volt batteries The application of these pumps differs with respect to purging and sampling The following sections detail the use of peristaltic pumps for both purposes E 1 2 Purging with a Peristaltic Pump l Place a coil of standard cleaned Appendix B Teflon tubing equal to the well depth plus an additional five to ten feet in a standard cleaned bucket or box which has been lined with clean plastic sheeting or a garbage bag Enough tubing is needed to run from the ground surface up to the top of the well casing and back down to the bottom of the well This will allow for operation of the pump at all possible water level conditions in the well Place one end of the tubing into the vacuum side of the peristaltic pump head Proper sizing of the Teflon and Silastic or Tygon tubing should allow for a snug fit of the Teflon tub
340. fter the field data collection by the rovers It is therefore extremely important to coordinate the logistics and planning for using GPS techniques before leaving for the field See Reference 4 The procedures to follow when using GPS to locate horizontal positions of site features are quite simple and relatively easy to conduct The GPS receiver data logger is turned on and a predefined point line or area feature to be mapped is selected from a data dictionary within the data logger Once the feature is logged the receiver data logger user closes the feature moves to the next feature for logging and so forth until all site features are logged The data files are then downloaded differentially corrected if necessary and exported to GIS applications for mapping and display of the features logged Navigation to predefined points called waypoints is accomplished by selecting the waypoint from within the data logger and proceeding in the direction displayed in the data logger until you arrive at the waypoint desired However depending on which GPS receiver data logger is used Pathfinder Pro XR or Geoxplorer ID different types of GPS processing measurements can be made Code Pseudorange or Carrier Phase With these different processing measurements comes different accuracy When code pseudorange is employed the autonomous position measurements without differential correction will be within about 10 meters using either receiver data logger listed ab
341. g Jane Doe Sample Custodian should be recorded in the Remarks Air bill block at the top of the Chain of Custody Record The Remarks Air bill block may also be used to record Air bill numbers or registered or certified mail serial numbers The total number of sample containers for each sample must be listed in the Total Containers column The number of individual containers for each analysis must also be listed in the respective column Required analyses should be circled or entered in the appropriate location as indicated on the Chain of Custody Record The tag numbers for each sample and any needed remarks should be in the Tag Numbers column e The sample custodian and subsequent transferee s should document the transfer of the samples listed on the Chain of Custody Record The person who originally relinquishes custody should be the sample custodian Both the person relinquishing the samples and the person receiving them must sign the form The date and time that this occurs should be documented in the proper space on the Chain of Custody Record e Usually the last person receiving the samples or evidence should be the laboratory sample custodian or their designee s The Chain of Custody Record is a serialized document Once the Record is completed it becomes an accountable document and must be maintained in the project file The suitability of any other form for chain of custody should be evaluated based upon its inclusio
342. g Design 5 3 1 Introduction Development of a sampling design may follow the seven steps outlined in the EPA publications Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process 1 and Data Quality Objectives Process for Hazardous Waste Sites 2 The Data Quality Objectives DQOs process is a logical step by step method of identifying the study objective defining the appropriate type of data to collect clarifying the decisions that will be based on the data collected and considering the potential limitations with alternate sampling designs Investigations may be executed without completing the DQO process step by step however the basic elements of the DQO process should be considered by the project leader for each investigation Sampling designs are typically either non probabilistic authoritative sampling designs or probabilistic random sampling designs in nature The sampling design ultimately must meet specific study objectives The location and frequency of sampling number of samples should be clearly outlined in the sampling design as well as provisions for access to all areas of the site the use of special sampling equipment etc Development of the sampling design in the context of DQOs and sampling optimization are discussed in the ASTM documents Standard Practice for Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities Development of Data Quality Objectives 3 and Standard Guide for the Generation of Environm
343. gation directing the set up of the command post and work zones decontamination exclusion and contaminant reduction zones and calibrating or verifying such and operating air monitoring instruments during the investigation and conduct medical monitoring for heat stress throughout the operation EISOPQAM 4 5 November 2001 4 3 2 Safety Equipment Investigators will be provided with the following safety equipment as appropriate e rain suit e snow suit and ski mask work gloves e safety glasses prescription if necessary hearing protection hard hat e steel toe shank safety boots leather and rubber e first aid supplies Field investigators will be responsible for properly operating and maintaining the safety equipment in the field Should the safety equipment malfunction or be broken field investigators are responsible for reporting the condition to appropriate personnel at the Field Equipment Center FEC upon its return The report will include as accurate a description or account of the problem as possible Field investigators will not operate any equipment for which they have not received training or have insufficient familiarity to conduct safe operations Activities which will require a familiarization exercise for personnel prior to the actual execution of the work include Enclosed area entry Level A B or C operations Drilling or power augering Drum openings Brush cutting with power equipmen
344. gations the negatives must be maintained with the bound field logbook in the project file and stored in a secured file cabinet When digital images are used in technical reports or placed in the official files the disk with the original unaltered file of the images or a printed copy of the unaltered images shall be placed in the official files as well If printed copies of the images are used each image shall be identified using the information that was recorded in the field logbook For enforcement cases it is imperative that the individual who took the image be identified in the field logbook in the event their testimony is required Video When a video tape is made for use as evidence in an enforcement case the following information should be recorded in a bound field logbook e the date and time that the video was recorded a brief description of the subject of the video tape the person recording the video Video records shall include a visual notation placard at the beginning of the of the video with the appropriate information i e location date time An audio record may also be included in the video tape with the above logistical information as well as a narrated description of the video record A label shall be placed on the video tape with the appropriate identifying information 1 e project name project number date location etc In the event testimony regarding a video tape recording is required for an enforceme
345. gator can use the installed system The accuracy of flow sensors and recorders for open channel flow devices can be checked by making an instantaneous measurement utilizing the primary flow device and comparing this against the recorder reading In addition EPA flow equipment can be installed to check facility totalizer readings The chart recorder should be checked to verify that the time and scale are correct If non standard primary flow devices are being used data supporting the accuracy and precision of the methods being employed should be provided by the discharger Deficiencies should be recorded by the investigator and the discharger should be informed that the equipment should be calibrated as soon as possible 18 2 5 Specific Techniques This section outlines and familiarizes the field investigator with the most commonly used methods for wastewater flow measurements and the primary devices that will be encountered during field studies Volumetric and dilution techniques are presented at the beginning of this section since they are applicable to both open channel and closed conduit flow situations The remaining methods are grouped under categories dealing with open channels and closed conduits The general method of checking individual primary flow devices is given where applicable Several estimation techniques are presented However it should be recognized that flow estimates do not satisfy NPDES permit monitoring requirements unless the
346. gment of interest Whenever possible choose the tap closest to the water source and prior to the water lines entering the residence office building etc and also prior to any holding or pressurization tanks The sampling tap must be protected from exterior contamination associated with being too close to a sink bottom or to the ground Contaminated water or soil from the faucet exterior may enter the bottle during the collection procedure since it is difficult to place a bottle under a low tap without grazing the neck interior against the outside faucet surface If the tap is too close to the ground for direct collection into the appropriate container it is acceptable to use a smaller clean container to transfer sample to a larger container The smaller container should be made of glass or stainless steel Leaking taps that allow water to discharge from around the valve stem handle and down the outside of the faucet or taps in which water tends to run up on the outside of the lip are to be avoided as sampling locations Disconnect any hoses filters or aerators attached to the tap before sampling These devices can harbor a bacterial population if they are not routinely cleaned or replaced when worn or cracked e Taps where the water flow is not constant should be avoided because temporary fluctuation in line pressure may cause clumps of microbial growth that are lodged in a pipe section or faucet connection to break loose A sm
347. gn Information which should be obtained during a site survey includes e General site layout e Site access e Soil types and depths e Surface water drainage pathways Existing site conditions e Visible staining of surface soil e Vegetation stress and Possible offsite or non site related sources The site history should include factors such as previous land use both on and nearby the site types of industrial operations conducted both on the site and on adjoining property types of contaminants to which the site has been exposed and locations of possible dumping burial areas The site history can be derived from property plats tax records aerial photos and interviews with people familiar with the site 5 5 2 Data Quality Objectives DQOs Consideration of the purpose which the data generated from the soil sampling effort is to serve drives the selection of DQOs DQO selection will then be the main factor which determines the types of samples to be collected the types of equipment to be used and the analytical requirements for the samples See Section 5 12 for a discussion of DQOs 5 5 3 Authoritative Designs for Soil Investigations When the purpose of the investigation is to determine the presence of contaminants a simple strategy can be used Such a purpose is normally encountered during screening inspections criminal investigations and any other project where the scope is limited to gathering evidence of contaminati
348. h time they are recorded calculated or transcribed to ensure that incorrect values are not submitted to EPA Is a final data processing check performed prior to submission If no explain of any data 5 Internal Reporting Does the agency prepare Precision and Accuracy summaries other than Form 1 Do either the audit or precision reports indicated include a discussion of corrective actions initiated based on audit or precision results EISOPQAM H 17 November 2001 Who has the responsibility for the calculation and preparation of data summaries To whom are such P and A summaries delivered Type of Report Identify the individual within the agency who receives the results of the agency s participation in the NPAP and the internal distribution of the results once received Principal Contact for NPAP is name title 6 External Reporting What number of the SLAMS sites by pollutant reported less than 75 of the data adjusted for seasonal monitoring and site start ups and terminations Ce OOO O dE ms ECCL E EO O O OOOO OoOo Does the agency s annual report as required in 40 CFR 58 26 include the following Annual precision and accuracy information described in Section 5 2 of Appendix A Location date pollution source and duration of all episodes reaching the significant harm levels Please provide the dates at which the annual reports have been submitted for the last 2 years
349. haracteristics of the material particle size viscosity etc the distribution of hazardous constituents within the matrix or the manner in which the material has been managed or disposed When waste is comprised of strata that can be separated by the sampling equipment e g liquid liquid or liquid solid phases it is not necessary to collect a sample that is representative of the entire unit to make a waste determination An acceptable objective would be to make a waste determination on a specific strata For example in drums containing a liquid phase on top of solids a glass thief or a COmposite LIquid W Aste SAmpler COLIW ASA could be used to sample only the liquid to determine if the phase of interest exhibits the characteristic of ignitability as described in 40 CFR Part 261 21 5 8 3 Considerations for Waste Sampling Designs Waste sampling designs should consider the variability of the sample population in terms of the characteristic of concern the physical size and state of items present in the population and the ability to access all portions of the population for purposes of sampling Elements of the sampling design should include the determination of the sample locations and the number of samples to be collected decisions on the type of samples grab or composite to collect and selection of the appropriate sampling equipment While sample locations are usually restricted to accessible portions of a waste unit s population the numb
350. he sampler is at the designated depth to cause the stoppers to close the cylinder which is then raised Water is removed through a valve to fill respective sample containers With a rubber tube attached to the valve dissolved oxygen sample bottles can be properly filled by allowing an overflow of the water being collected With multiple depth samples care should be taken not to stir up the bottom sediment and thus bias the sample When metals and organic compounds parameters are of concern then a double check valve stainless steel bailer or Kemmerer sampler should be used to collect the sample 10 2 5 Bailers Teflon bailers may also be used for surface water sampling if the study objectives do not necessitate a sample from a discrete interval of the water column A closed top bailer with a bottom check valve is sufficient for many studies As the bailer is lowered through the water column water is continually displaced through the bailer until the desired depth is reached at which point the bailer is retrieved This technique may not be successful where strong currents are found 10 2 6 Buckets A plastic bucket can be used to collect samples for in situ analyses e g pH temperature and conductivity However the bucket should be rinsed twice with the sample water prior to collection of the sample EISOPQAM 10 2 November 2001 SECTION 11 SEDIMENT SAMPLING PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To collect a representative sample of sediment
351. he section Numerous meters instruments are commercially available Some meters are capable of multiple measurements which may include pH temperature conductivity DO salinity and turbidity therefore individual meters discussed here are not necessarily the only ones available However the setup and use of all instruments should follow a basic format to ensure consistency Quality Control All equipment should be maintained and operated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Regardless of the meter used it should be properly calibrated or verified prior to use AII field meters with thermistors are verified against a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST traceable thermometer the Hanna Instruments CheckTemp 1 or equivalent at least semi annually This includes but is not limited to the pH conductivity and DO meters These verification checks are documented in a logbook and maintained at the Federal Equipment Center FEC Labels are placed on the field instruments to indicate when the next verification check is required Additionally the CheckTemp 1 is NIST Certified at least annually and documented The thermistors for all pH conductivity and DO meters should be verified in the field with one of the NIST traceable Fisher brand stem type digital thermometers All data for the field verifications should be documented in the inspector s logbooks The turbidimeter is calibrated with Formazin Primary Stand
352. he cuttings can be removed nearly intact from the inner casing for examination of stratigraphy prior to disposal Because there are no auger flights to increase the drill stem diameter the quantity of cuttings removed from the hole is minimized as compared to hollow stem augering Smearing of the formation materials on the borehole walls is reduced as well This drilling method is useful in a variety of materials from flowing sands to heavily consolidated or indurated formations In flowing sands the drill casings can be filled and or pressurized with potable water to prevent excess entry of formation materials into the drill string The same QA QC requirements for sampling of material introduced to the borehole apply as in other drilling methods Because the amount of water introduced into the borehole can be significant an approximation of the water used in the drilling process should be logged for use in estimating appropriate well development withdrawal Sonic drilling allows a larger diameter temporary casing to be setinto a confining layer while drilling proceeds into deeper aquifers This temporary casing is then removed during the grouting operation In many cases this will be acceptable technique However the level of contamination in the upper aquifer the importance of the lower aquifers for drinking water uses the permeability and continuity of the confining layer and state regulations should be taken into account when specifying this pra
353. he instrument is used to sample refrigerant containers that have internal pressures exceeding 150 psi The refrigerants may cause skin or eye injury from low temperature if allowed to vent The individual responsible for sampling should use personal protective equipment PPE stipulated by the site safety officer Interferences Due to the unique design of the Neutronics Model RI 2002PA there are no known chemical interferences The only materials that enter the instrument are gases and vapors The instrument will analyze and report the presence of hydrocarbons and water Required Equipment The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA 2537A Calibration Standards Spare Disposable Filter Assembly Neutronics part RI 2002PA1 Parallel Port Printer to record the data Appropriate fittings Calibration The RI 2002 PA is factory tuned and does not require any further adjustments in the field The instrument also features automatic self calibration However the instrument s calibration is verified by analyzing R 12 R 22 and R 134a standards Standards are run in the same fashion as a sample The standard is followed by a room air purge to verify the system is cleaning itself after a high concentration of analyte Standards for air and hydrocarbons are not analyzed Calculations The instrument s on board processor calculates the concentrations automatically The user need not perform any calculations during routine sampling and analysis EISOP
354. he need to alter work schedules so as to meet changing grand jury or federal court dates will be transmitted immediately from the Technical Coordinator to SESD When work schedules must be delayed the technical reasons for the delay will be communicated from the Technical Coordinator to the Case Agent Upon completion of analyses and report preparation by SESD and priorto presentation of the results to a grand jury or federal court the Technical Coordinator will arrange for an audit and inventory of evidence and files in SESD s possession EISOPQAM F 1 November 2001 F 2 Project Requests All requests for SESD support for criminal investigations shall originate with the Atlanta Area or Jacksonville Area Offices Any information obtained by SESD staff regarding potential criminal activities shall immediately be referred to the appropriate CID Office Direct requests to SESD from any other federal state or local agency shall be referred to the corresponding CID SAC for appropriate action Prior to an official request from the CID Office to SESD an informal contact shall be made with the SESD Senior Enforcement Specialist for the appropriate SESD Branch or Section Chief concerning the availability of resources and expertise necessary for providing the requested technical support If SESD is able to provide the support the SAC shall prepare an official request to the SESD Director through the DRA with copies to the SESD Senior Enforcement Speci
355. he photographs taken should be maintained as outlined in Section 3 2 2 EISOPQAM 13 1 November 2001 13 2 Waste Unit Types Waste management units can be generally categorized into two types open and closed In practice open units are larger than closed units Open units include waste piles and surface impoundments whereas closed units include containers and tanks as well as ancillary tank equipment Besides containers and tanks sumps may also be considered closed units because they are designed to collect the spillage of liquid wastes and are sometimes configured as a confined space Although both may pose hazards units that are open to the environment are generally less hazardous than closed units Sampling of closed units is considered a higher hazard risk because of the potential of exposure to toxic gases and flammable explosive atmospheres Because closed units prevent the dilution of the wastes by environmental influences they are more likely to contain materials that have concentrated levels of hazardous constituents While opening closed units for sampling purposes investigators shall use Level B personnel protective equipment PPE air monitoring instruments to ensure that the working environment does not contain hazardous levels of flammable explosive gasses or toxic vapors and follow the appropriate safety requirements stipulated in the site specific safety plan Buried waste materials should be located and excavated with extreme c
356. he stations should be sufficient to permit accurate measurement of the change in the constituent under consideration 5 8 Waste Sampling Designs 5 8 1 Introduction Waste sampling involves the collection of materials that are typically generated from industrial processes and therefore may contain elevated concentrations of hazardous constituents Waste sampling in its broadest term is conventionally considered to be sampling of processed wastes or man made waste materials Because of the regulatory safety and analytical considerations wastewater sampling should be separate from waste sampling Environmental sampling is also different from waste sampling as it involves the collection of samples from natural matrices such as soil sediment groundwater surface water and air It is convenient to distinguish waste management units into two types due to Branch safety protocols The first open units are units where wastes are generated stored or disposed and would be open to the environment and environmental influences Examples of open waste units are surface impoundments and waste piles Closed units are waste containers drums tanks or sumps where the potential for the accumulation of toxic vapors or explosive ignitable gases exists While both open and closed waste units are considered dangerous because of the potential exposure to concentrated hazardous constituents closed units are regarded as high hazards due to their potential to accumu
357. he zero point is set The instrument then asks for the Span Gas concentration Enter the known concentration from the toluene gas cylinder e g 97 3 ppm and press ENTER Connect the span gas bag to the sample inlet Press ENTER and wait until the display reverts to normal The instrument is calibrated and ready for use 17 4 Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000B Introduction The Toxic Vapor Analyzer TVA 1000B is a portable inorganic organic vapor monitor This analyzer uses both a flame ionization detector FID and a photoionization detector PID to sample and measure concentrations of gases Hydrogen Tank for the FID When the TVA 1000B leaves the Field Equipment Center FEC the hydrogen tank will be full and the battery will be charged Ensure that any extra hydrogen tanks taken to the field are filled also Note that you must always screw the hydrogen tank into the unit when taking the TVA out of the carrying box The TVA will not fit back in the box without taking the hydrogen tank out of the unit Extra hydrogen tanks are available EISOPQAM 17 6 November 2001 Operating Procedures The TVA 1000B is user friendly menu driven Pressing the EXIT key will take you to the previous menu To operate the TVA 1000B follow the procedures listed The instrument must be on and warmed up for approximately 30 minutes prior to calibration The pump must be ON the PID lamp must be ON and the FID must be ignited throughout the w
358. ials should not be acceptable unless proper documentation can be furnished as to the composition grain size distribution cleaning procedure and chemical analysis If a data search reveals that there is enough existing data to adequately design the well screen and filter pack then it may not be necessary to conduct a sieve analysis on the formation materials to be monitored However all data and design proposals will be evaluated and approved by a senior staff geologist before field activities begin 6 6 4 Filter Pack and Well Screen Design The majority of monitoring wells are installed in shallow ground water aquifers that consist of silts clays and sands in various combinations These shallow aquifers are not generally characteristic of sand aquifers used for drinking water Therefore modifications to the procedures used for the design of water well filter packs may be required In cases where insufficient experience exists with local or similar materials the filter pack and well screen design should be based on the results of a sieve analysis conducted on soil samples collected from the aquifer or the formation s that will be monitored In formations consisting primarily of fines silts and clays the procedures for water well screen design may result in requirements for filter packs and screen slot sizes that are not available In those cases the selection of 0 010 screen slots with a 20 40 sand filter pack or 0 005 screen slots with 100
359. ible flow measuring device with a flow chart and an automatic sampler capable of collecting discrete samples or manually by compositing individual grab samples by volume versus flow chart readings 9 4 Use of Automatic Samplers 9 4 1 Introduction Automatic samplers may be used to collect composite or grab samples when several aliquots are to be collected at frequent intervals or when a continuous sample is required For composite sampling applications the automatic samplers may be used to collect time composite or flow proportional samples In the flow proportional mode the samplers are activated and paced by a compatible flow meter Flow proportional samples can also be collected using an automatic sampler equipped with multiple containers and manually compositing the individual sample portions proportional to the flow 1 Automatic samplers must meet the following requirements e Sampling equipment must be properly cleaned to avoid cross contamination which could result from prior use see Appendix B for cleaning procedures e No plastic or metal parts of the sampler shall come in contact with the water or wastewater stream when parameters to be analyzed could be impacted by these materials e The automatic sampler must be capable of providing adequate refrigeration during the sampling period This can be accomplished in the field by using ice e The automatic sampler must be able to collect a large enough sample for all parameter analyse
360. ictionaries can be uploaded to a data logger but only one can be uploaded to a Geoexplorer II Subsequent uploaded data dictionaries to the Geoexplorer II will delete previous ones November 2001 TEMPLATE 4 Default Configuration Of The Data Logger And Geoexplorer II For Data Capture m Template 5 Template 6 d L In Asset Surveyor software on the data logger choose Config or Configuration in the Geoexplorer II and set the following Logging Intervals Point Feature 1 second Line and Area Feature 5 seconds Not in Feature All Velocity All Minimum Positions point feature 20 data logger 120 Geoexplorer II Position Mode Overdet 3D data logger ODS 3D Geoexplorer II Note Manual 3D is the minimum for both Elevation Mask 15 data logger and Geoexplorer II 10 base Signal to noise ratio mask 6 data logger 5 Geoexplorer II PDOP mask and switch 6 Dynamics Code Land for terrestrial work Sea or Air for obvious reasons Data Capture File Name Convention Default file name convention is recommended Assists with identifying files by time and date for matching up base station file if differential correction is needed The following describes the parts of a file with the name A021514A GPS UNIT MONTH DATE HOUR UTC FILE LETTER A 02 15 14 A When multiple GPS units are at the same site data logging each unit will be given a different letter identification UTC stands for Uni
361. ield eyes when working near batteries Charge batteries only in well ventilated areas Wear protective covering when working around batteries DANGER OF ACID BURNS Always wear a face shield protective coat and rubber gloves when handling batteries In case of skin contact with acid immediately wash affected area for 15 minutes using safety shower eye wash or sink as required Seek medical attention as soon as possible Notify the designated Safety Officer or management in the event of injury Procedure Only designated persons are allowed entry into the battery charging building 1 Check batteries for proper electrolyte level if necessary use battery filler to add tap water until levels in each cell are mid way between the two level marks on the case Insure that cell filler cap vents are clear Replace filler caps immediately after filling 2 Check battery terminals for cleanliness and clean with wire brush if necessary 3 Check batteries with load tester Batteries which register in the green arc can be placed back in a battery box and stored in the Charged Battery Area Batteries which register below the green arc are to be removed from the battery box and stored in the Discharged Battery Area Empty battery boxes are to be stored beside the sink in the battery building using care not to block access to the safety shower EISOPQAM G 1 November 2001 G 2 Charging Batteries Battery charging equipment is to be operated only
362. ient air monitoring agencies 4 Conduct Technical Systems Audits TSA of each reporting organization once every 3 years 5 Assure that every federal reference method designation within a reporting organization have 25 percent of sites audited including collocated sites 6 Assure that at least one monitor in each reporting organization is audited annually 7 Audit each scheduled SLAM PM monitoring sites at a frequency of 4 times per year 8 Assure that all FRM and Federal Equivalent Methods FEM sampling sites are audited once every four years 9 Ensure that each site platform can accommodate the portable sampler within 1 to 4 meters of the routine sampler 10 Review and recommend approval disapproval of all Quality Assurance Project Plans QAPP and Standard Operating Procedures SOP for Region 4 State and Local ambient air monitoring agencies EISOPQAM 2 30 November 2001 11 12 Audits Design install and manage the operation of the East Coast PM Filter Weighing Laboratory for the client Regions 1 2 3 4 6 and FRM PEP filters for the State of Washington Region 10 Act as liaison between and provide technical assistance to the twenty four Region 4 State and Local agencies OAQPS and the EPA client Regions In accordance with 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A and EPA Quality Assurance Guidance Document 2 12 Section 10 3 the Air Team will conduct TSA on each Region 4 reporting organization once every 3 y
363. if possible To collect the sample without entering the trench use a stainless steel scoop attached to rigid electrical conduit with a scoop bracket to dress remove surface layer of soil smeared on the trench wall as the bucket passed the wall of the trench Replace the scoop with a decontaminated scoop Collect the soil The collected soil is placed in a pan thoroughly mixed Section 5 13 8 and placed in the appropriate sample container s Section 12 4 contains specific procedures for collecting and handling soil samples for volatile organic compounds analysis 12 4 Soil Sediment Sampling Method 5035 The following sampling protocol is recommended for site investigators assessing the extent of volatile organic compounds VOCs in soils and sediments at a project site Because of the large number of options available careful coordination between field and laboratory personnel is needed The specific sampling containers and sampling tools required will depend upon the detection levels and intended data use Once this information has been established selection of the appropriate sampling procedure and preservation method best applicable to the investigation can be made 12 4 1 Equipment Soil sediment for VOC analyses may be retrieved using the equipment specified in Sections 11 and 12 of this SOP Once the soil sediment has been obtained the EnCore VOC sampler syringes stainless steel spatula standard 2 oz soil VOC container o
364. igh contaminant concentration near the downwind fencelines and or at the fencelines near any residences Whenever possible the sampling sites should be located in an open space and well away from any tall buildings Attention should be given to avoiding potential local interference such as earth moving equipment haul roads etc Sampling methods for various ambient air pollutants are given in Section 14 of this SOP EISOPQAM 5 27 November 2001 5 12 Data Quality Objectives PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To provide guidance on systematic planning and the use of DQO Process e To describe the steps the purpose and activities of DQO Process The US EPA s Quality Assurance Division has developed guidance as part of its Quality System One component of this Quality System is the requirement that field investigators use a systematic planning process as mandated in EPA Order 5360 1 Policy and Program Requirements for Mandatory Agency wide Quality System 10 The US EPA has developed a nonmandatory systematic planning process the Data Quality Objectives DQO Process The DQO process is an important tool for project managers planners and field investigators to define the type quality and quantity of data needed to make defensible decisions The DQO process offers a way to plan field investigations so that the quality of data collected can be evaluated with respect to the data s intended use For a detailed discussion of the complete DQO proc
365. in their integrity Preservatives required for routine analyses of samples collected are given in Appendix A of this SOP All chemical preservatives used will be supplied by the Region 4 laboratory All samples requiring preservation should be preserved immediately upon collection in the field Samples that should not be preserved in the field are e Those collected within a hazardous waste site that are known or thought to be highly contaminated with toxic materials which may be highly reactive Barrel drum closed container spillage or other source samples from hazardous waste sites are not to be preserved with any chemical These samples may be preserved by placing the sample container on ice if necessary Those that have extremely low or high pH or samples that may generate potentially dangerous gases if they were preserved using the procedures given in Appendix A e Those for metals analyses which are shipped by air shall not be preserved with nitric acid in excess of the amount specified in Appendix A All samples preserved with chemicals shall be clearly identified by indication on the sample tag that the sample is preserved If samples normally requiring preservation were not preserved field records should clearly specify the reason 5 13 7 Special Precautions for Trace Contaminant Sampling Some contaminants can be detected in the parts per billion and or parts per trillion range Extreme care must be taken to prevent cross contamin
366. inch long by 1 15 inch OD 610 mm x 29 mm removable replaceable thin walled tube that fits inside the Large Bore sample tube Liners facilitate retrieval of the sample and may be used for storage when applicable The Large Bore soil sampler is pushed with 1 25 inch diameter probe rod The following is a step by step description of the components and procedures used to collect a soil sample with the Large Bore sampler Assembly of Large Bore Sampler 1 Select a liner tube and push on to cutting shoe one end of liner should be slightly flared push this end on to shoe 2 Insert end of tube opposite cutting shoe into sample tube and screw cutting shoe firmly into sample tube 3 Thread piston tip onto piston rod then run piston assembly through the end of the sample tube opposite the cutting shoe seating the piston tip in the cutting shoe There should be a short section of exposed piston rod sticking out of sample tube 4 Place drive head over exposed end of piston rod and thread into end of sample tube 5 Install piston stop pin in top of drive head This retains the piston rod assembly during the push 6 The Large Bore sampler is now fully assembled and ready for sample collection Sample Collection Using Large Bore Sampler 1 Attach assembled Large Bore sampler to end of probe rod 2 Attach drive cap to probe rod and push rod into ground 3 Add additional rods to push Large Bore sampler to target sampling depth EISOPQAM 12
367. infectant soap Use only soft brushes Do not use scouring pads of any type 2 Rinse face mask thoroughly inside and out with tap water 3 Hang face mask up until completely dry 4 Place face mask in plastic bag and return to SCBA case APRs are completely dismantled prior to cleaning Then Steps 1 3 for SCBA face masks are used When Completely dry the APR is reassembled and placed in a plastic bag C 5 14 Garden Hose 1 Brush exterior with soap and tap water 2 Rinse with tap water 3 Flush interior with tap water until clear minimum of one gallon 4 Let completely air dry 5 Coil and place in clean plastic bag EISOPQAM C 13 November 2001 C 5 15 Portable Tanks for Tap Water 1 Scrub interior and exterior with soap and tap water 2 Rinse with tap water 3 Let completely air dry 4 Close C 5 16 Vehicles Vehicles utilized by field investigators should be washed if possible at the conclusion of each field trip This should minimize contamination of equipment or samples due to contamination of vehicles When vehicles are used in conjunction with hazardous waste site inspections or on studies where pesticides herbicides organic compounds or other toxic materials are known or suspected to be present a thorough interior and exterior cleaning using soapy tap water is mandatory at the conclusion of such investigations It shall be the responsibility of the field investigators to see that this procedure is followed Pe
368. ing inside the flexible tubing mounted in the pump head Run a short section of tubing does not have to be Teflon from the discharge side of the pump head to a graduated bucket Place the free end of the coil of Teflon tubing into the well until the end of the tubing is just below the top of the water column Secure the Teflon tubing to the well casing or other secure object using electrician s tape or other suitable means This will prevent the tubing from being lost in the well should all of the tubing be deployed and come loose from the pump head Turn on the pump to produce a vacuum on the well side of the pump head and begin the purge Observe pump direction to ensure that a vacuum is being applied to the purge line If the purge line is being pressurized either switch the tubing at the pump head or reverse the polarity of the cables on the pump or on the battery Purge the well according to the criteria described in Section 7 2 of this manual If the pumping rate exceeds the recovery rate of the well continue to lower the tubing into the well several feet at a time as needed until the drawdown stabilizes or the well is evacuated to dryness If the pump is a variable speed peristaltic pump and the water level in the well is being drawn down reduce the speed of the pump in an attempt to stabilize the drawdown If the well can be purged without evacuating the well to dryness a sample with greater integrity can be obtained EISOP
369. ing radar GPR resistivity seismic refraction and reflection gravity temperature and radioactive methods are available from EPA contractors Depending on site conditions and study objectives one or more of these methods might be used in a hazardous waste site investigation Several practical tips listed below should be considered prior to using geophysical equipment during an investigation Becoming familiar with the instrument and it s principle of operation before attempting a geophysical survey is extremely important EISOPQAM 15 30 November 2001 Normally at least a two person team is adequate for a small scale geophysical study However some surveys may require more personnel due to the size of the site Prior their use during a study all geophysical equipment shall be inspected to ensure it is in good working condition and or calibrated according to the manufacturer s procedures included with each instrument Battery voltage should be monitored closely especially in cold weather Ancillary information shall be recorded in a field book as to the date and times calibrated team members and a complete chronological description of what transpired during the study As a general rule the locations of any geophysical anomalies detected during a surface geophysical study shall be documented using standard surveying techniques At a minimum a key coordinate or coordinates in the grid should be spatially identified azimuth and dis
370. ing the grout through the bottom grout plug and up the annular space on the outside of the casing If the outer casing is set into very tight clay both of the above methods might have to be used because the clay usually forms a tight seal in the bottom and around the outside of the casing preventing grout from flowing freely during grout injection On the other hand outer casing set into bedrock normally will have space enough to allow grout to flow freely during injection A minimum of 24 hours EISOPQAM 6 8 November 2001 should be allowed for the grout plug seal to cure before attempting to drill through it The grout mixture used to seal the outer annular space should be either a neat cement cement bentonite cement sand or a 30 solids bentonite grout However the seal or plug at the bottom of the borehole and outer casing should consist of a Type I portland cement bentonite or cement sand mixture The use of a pure bentonite grout for a bottom plug or seal is not acceptable because the bentonite grout cures to a gel like material and is not rigid enough to withstand the stresses of drilling When drilling through the seal care should be taken to avoid cracking shattering and or washing outthe seal which will be discussed in the next section If caving conditions exist so that the outer casing cannot be sufficiently sealed by grouting the outer casing should be driven into place and a grout seal placed in the bottom of the casing Removal o
371. ing the outer gloves and discarding them If boot covers are worn by decontamination personnel the boot rinse can be eliminated and the covers can simply be removed and discarded Decontamination workers can then enter the support zone where new EISOPQAM 4 17 November 2001 respirator cartridges outer gloves and boot covers can be obtained for return to the contamination reduction corridor If no immediate return to the corridor is anticipated decontamination workers can remove their respirators and clean them in a soap wash and water rinse followed by cleaning the inside of the mask with an alcohol wipe Their inner gloves will then be removed and discarded Level C Decontamination Procedures Level C operations do not pose a significant risk of exposure to decontamination workers Therefore Level D protection is all that is required to be worn when performing decontamination functions 1 Upon exiting the exclusion zone site workers will place their equipment in a designated area provided at the first decontamination station The area will be covered with disposable plastic Following this they will proceed to a decontamination cleaning solution washtub bucket area where decontamination personnel will scrub their boots with a long handle brush Once cleared from the cleaning solution washtub bucket area the site worker will step into a water rinse washtub bucket Upon leaving the water rinse tub bucket site workers will remove their outer g
372. installed according to the manufacturer s specifications Wastewater flow measurement systems are generally very accurate Any system that cannot measure the wastewater flow within 10 percent of the actual flow is considered unacceptable for use in measuring wastewater flow 18 2 4 Use of Existing Flow Measurement Systems The installation of systems to measure wastewater flows can be time consuming particularly if a primary device is not available Therefore field personnel can use existing facility primary flow devices and flow measurement systems when the accuracy of these devices and the system can be verified The objective of this section is to outline the responsibilities of field personnel in verifying the accuracy of existing primary flow devices and systems The field investigator must verify that an existing facility flow measurement system including primary flow device utilized to measure wastewater flows conforms with recognized design and installation standards and any deviation from standard conditions shall be documented The accuracy of the primary flow device should be checked by making an independent flow measurement If there is no usable or existing primary flow measuring device or if the device has been mislocated the investigator shall attempt to install a portable primary flow device EISOPQAM 18 2 November 2001 If the discharger s flow measurement system is accurate within 10 percent of the actual flow the investi
373. ion A rating curve is constructed by making a series of independent flow measurements and simultaneous tape down or staff gage measurements for the same section of a particular station at different water levels and plotting the resulting data pairs on a semi log graph At least two preferably three flow measurement tape downs shall be made to develop a rating curve Available current meters for conducting stream gaging include vertical axis mounted Price AA and Price pygmy meters For wadeable streams these meters may be deployed using a top setting wading rod For non wadeable streams a Price AA meter may be deployed on a weighted line using a bridge rig system Depth may be determined using Raytheon or Lowrance fathometers taken froma standard top setting wading rod or by taking the difference of tape down measurements of the river bottom and surface Width measurements may be made using a Lee Au galvanized steel tag line segmented into equal lengths steel tapes or cloth tapes EISOPQAM 18 6 November 2001 18 4 Quality Assurance Procedures Techniques and procedures for making wastewater and surface water flow measurements are outlined in this section The USDI Water Measurement Manual 1 the USGS publication Discharge Measurements at Gaging Stations 8 the EPA NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 2 and a set of weir and flume tables shall be supplied to all field investigators However the measurements of wastewater and water flows requ
374. ion methodologies for conducting air monitoring in ambient air To collect an air sample that is representative of conditions as they existed at the site To Take measures to avoid introducing contamination as a result of poor sampling and or handling technique 14 1 Introduction This section discusses the sample collection and analytical procedures used for air monitoring in Region 4 Air toxics as used in this SOP means air pollutants for which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have not been established Criteria pollutants mean air pollutants which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been established 14 2 Criteria Pollutant Monitoring Reference Equivalent Monitors for Air Pollutants for which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been Established 14 2 1 Monitoring Ozone in Ambient Air The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the monitoring of ozone in air This summary is adapted from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix D Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for The Measurement of Ozone in The Atmosphere and The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book e Calibration systems will meet 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix D specifications for a Primary
375. ion of the sediment When extensive core sampling is required such as a cross sectional examination of a streambed with an objective of profiling both the physical and chemical contents of the sediment a whole core must be collected A strong coring tube such as one made from aluminum steel or stainless steel is needed to penetrate the sediment and underlying clay or sands A coring device can be used to collect an intact sediment core from water bodies that have soft bottoms which allows several inches of penetration It is recommended that the corer have a check valve built into the driving head which allows water and air to escape from the cutting core thus creating a partial vacuum which helps to hold the sediment core in the tube The corer is attached to a standard auger extension and handle allowing it to be corkscrewed into the sediment from a boat or while wading The coring tube is easily detached and the intact sediment core is removed with an extraction device Before extracting the sediment fromthe coring tubes the clear supernatant above the sediment water interface in the core should be decanted from the tube This is accomplished by simply turning the core tube to its side and gently pouring the liquid out until fine sediment particles appear in the waste liquid The loss of some of the fine sediments usually occurs with this technique 11 3 Special Considerations for Collection of Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds Samples
376. ions for completing EPA Form 3560 3 are printed on the back of the form The forms shall be signed by the investigator and dated on the day that the form is completed not the inspection date The name of the state inspector should be included for joint inspections All routine compliance inspections forms shall be reviewed by the supervisor who will sign and date the 3560 3 form in the Reviewed By section EISOPQAM 2 10 November 2001 2 6 Superfund Investigations Technical Assistance and Overview Activities 2 6 1 Introduction Superfund field activities include remedial investigations and feasibility studies RI FS field investigations of potentially or known contaminated areas FI technical assistance TA and on site overviews OV of Superfund contractor potentially responsible party PRP contractor and state personnel 2 6 2 Superfund Investigation Types Remedial Investigations Feasibility Studies RI FS Remedial investigations are conducted to determine the nature and extent of contamination at specific Superfund sites Investigations may include installation of temporary or permanent monitoring wells geophysical exploration surface and subsurface soil sampling off site environmental sampling etc Feasibility studies may be conducted concurrently with an RI to develop and evaluate potential remedial action alternatives The Guidance for Conducting Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies under CERCLA 5 is usefu
377. ire considerable experience Therefore no field investigator shall make flow measurements until they have had at least six months of actual field experience and has performed these measurements under the supervision of a senior field investigator Wastewater flow shall be expressed in million gallons per day mgd or the metric equivalent m day Stream flow shall be expressed in cubic feet per second second feet or the metric equivalent m sec Time records associated with flow measurements shall be kept in local time shall be made in the 2400 hour military time format and shall be recorded to the nearest five minutes All flow measurements conducted shall be documented in field records All measurements shall be traceable both to the individual making the measurements and the equipment utilized All field equipment shall be operated calibrated and maintained according to manufacturer s specifications All equipment shall be visually inspected prior to deployment to ensure proper operation 18 5 Equipment Equipment available for the measurement of surface water or wastewater flows is categorized as follows water level stage hardware and recorders velocity measuring equipment and assemblies and direct flow measurement equipment and instrumentation The hardware available to determine the rise and fall of a water surface with time the water stage includes the following recording devices Stevens Model F horizontal drum recorders Steve
378. issance investigation should be conducted for each estuarine study unless prior knowledge of the estuarine type is available The reconnaissance should focus upon the freshwater and oceanic water dynamics with respect to the study objective National Oceanic Atmospheric Administration NOAA tide tables and United States Geological Survey USGS freshwater surface water flow records provide valuable insights into the estuary hydrodynamics The basic in situ measurement tools for reconnaissance are Boat Recording fathometer e Salinometer Dissolved oxygen meter and Global Positioning System GPS equipment and charts These instruments coupled with the study objective or pollution source location whether itis a point or non point source problem provide the focus for selecting sampling locations More often than not preplanned sampling locations in estuarine areas are changed during the actual study period Because of the dynamics of estuaries the initial sampling results often reveal that the study objective could be better served by relocating adding or deleting sampling locations EISOPQAM 5 20 November 2001 Water sampling in estuarine areas is normally based upon the tidal phases with samples collected on successive slack tides All estuarine sampling should include vertical salinity measurements at one to five foot increments coupled with vertical dissolved oxygen and temperature profiles A variety of water sampling devices
379. istance from supporting structures must be greater than 1 meter When the probe is located on a rooftop this distance is in reference to walls parapets or penthouses located on the roof R Must be greater than 10 meters from a street intersection and should be located mid block 8 For collocated Pb and PM10 samplers a 2 4 meter separation distance must be met 9 Must have unrestricted airflow 270 degrees around the sampler except for street canyon sites EISOPQAM 2 24 November 2001 TABLE 2 10 5 MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN SAMPLING PROBE and ROADWAYS EDGE of NEAREST TRAFFIC LANE Roadway Average Minimum Distance Daily Traffic ADT Between Roadways and vehicles per day Stations meters Neighborhood Scale CO Stations 10 000 15 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 260 000 Neighborhood and Urban Scale Ozone and NO Stations 10 000 15 000 20 000 40 000 70 000 gt 110 000 Lead Stations Middle Micro Scale Neighborhood Regional Urban Scale Scale 10 000 215 50 20 000 215 75 40 000 gt 15 100 Distances should be interpolated based on traffic flow 2 10 3 State and Local QA Plan Reviews Introduction 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A specifies the minimum quality assurance QA requirements applicable to SLAMS air monitoring data submitted to EPA The QA Plan for an air monitoring network contains two distinct functions control of the measurement process and assessment of the quality of monitoring data Th
380. ith OSHA 29 CFR 1910 120 requirements and US EPA Region IV Field Health and Safety Manual 1990 edition PLAN PREPARATION Prepared by fate Reviewed Approved by Date O Section Chief O De SITE STATUS EISOPQAM 4 22 November 2001 EMERGENCY INFORMATION Local Resources Ambulance Name Police Local or State Office Resources EPA Emergency Response Atlanta 400562870 pum uum EMERGENCY CONTACTS Phone R00 282 5846 National Response Ctr ENVIRONMENTAL EMERGENCY ONLY Phone 800 424 8802 Directions to Hospital Attach Map 1f Available SAFETY AND HEALTH RISK ANALYSIS Waste Types Chemicals Attach MSDS for each EISOPQAM 4 23 November 2001 HAZARD EVALUATION Known or Suspected Hazardous Toxic Materials If applicable include PEL IDLH and or TLV TWA TLV STEL LEL flammability odor reactivity stability corrosivity OVERALL HAZARD SERIOUS MODERATE LOW UNKNOWN SITE PERIMETER ESTABLISHMENT Map Sketch attached Perimeter identified Zone s of contamination identified RECOMMENDED LEVEL S OF PROTECTION Level of Protection LEVEL A LEVEL B LEVEL C LEVEL D check those that apply Modifications Field Dress Monitoring Procedures Equipment _ vse 1000 PDE lomom 0000 Rae PID MicroTip PID CN Monitor _ Halogen nat Radiation Survey Meter HE LEL Oxygen Other Specify All instruments are ca
381. ity Control Procedures All field surveying methods using the above equipment shall be made only by those personnel who have been trained to use them All professional staff and field technicians must be trained and checked out in surveying procedures by qualified staff before using this equipment Each piece of field equipment as appropriate shall be numbered and a log book shall be kept containing all maintenance and calibrations made on the equipment The following specific maintenance and calibration procedures shall be used for all surveying equipment Theodolite This equipment shall be serviced and calibrated by a qualified private service shop annually or sooner if damaged or suspected to be in error EISOPQAM 15 3 November 2001 be checked out using procedures outlined in basic surveying textbooks and appropriate users manuals before use See References 1 2 and 3 and be cleaned and maintained using procedures outlined in basic surveying textbooks and appropriate users manuals during field use and before being returned to storage See References 1 2 and 3 GPS Receivers This equipment shall be serviced and calibrated by the manufacturer if damaged or suspected to be in error See References 4 and 5 be checked out using procedures outlined in the appropriate users manuals before use See References 4 and 5 and be cleaned and maintained using procedures outlined in the appropriate users m
382. ive Action System Question Question 0000 Ye FN Comment Comment He program in place and operational een Ne wamesesesmma LL dg cial How is responsibility for implementing corrective actions on the basis of audits calibration problems zero span checks etc assigned Briefly discuss How does the agency follow up on implemented corrective actions 6 Audit Result Acceptance Criteria Has the agency established and has it documented criteria to define agency acceptable audit results Were these audit criteria based on or derived from the If no please explain guidance found in Vol Il of the QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Section 2 0 12 If yes please explain any changes or assumptions made in the derivation What corrective action may be taken if criteria are exceeded As a goal the 95 percent probability limits for precision all pollutants should be less than 15 percent At 95 percent probability limits the accuracy for PM10 should be less than 15 and all other pollutants should be less than 20 percent Using a short narrative and a summary table compare the reporting organizations performance against these goals over the last year Explain any deviations EISOPQAM H 22 November 2001
383. ive sorbent collection devices sorbers A typical sorber is 15 to 25 millimeters mm long with a 3 mm inside diameter ID and contains 40 milligrams mg of a suitable granular adsorbent material depending on the specific compounds to be detected Typically polymeric and carbonaceous resins are used for their affinity for a broad range of VOCs and SVOCs The sorbers are sheathed in the bottom of a one 1 foot length of vapor permeable insertion and retrieval cord which is fashioned with a loop This construction is termed a GORE SORBER module Both the retrieval cord and sorbent container are constructed solely of inert hydrophobic microporous GORE TEX expanded polytetrafluoroethylene ePTFE similar to Teflon brand PTFE The loop is used as a means of tying the module to a string for installation and retrieval Module Installation l Drive drill narrow pilot hole at desired location Ideally this hole should be no more than 1 inch in diameter Typical depth is two to three feet below ground surface 2 Wearing clean latex gloves remove the module from it s numbered container and re seal the jar verifying that the number on the container corresponds to the number on the module tag EISOPQAM 19 1 November 2001 Measure and cut a section of cord of sufficient length to reach from the bottom of the sample hole to the cork to be used to seal the hole Tie one end of the cord to the loop in the module and tie the other end of the
384. king with respective instruments 3 Preventive Maintenance Is a maintenance record maintained for each major laboratory Comment instrument 4 Record Keeping Does a chain of custody procedure exist for laboratory If yes indicate date title and revision number where it can samples be found Do these records indicate ECC TT UNE NE 0 E Lame S Coo dq d o EISOPQAM H 11 November 2001 wawa E 3 rename aedes E E E meee O E E a E qc ee MEER ES field Are Are they curent current mm RETE 34 Are records kept which track filters returning from the field for analysis How are data records from the laboratory archived Where How long are records kept 5 Data Acquisition and Handling Are QC data readily available to the analyst during a given analytical run What is the laboratory s capability with regard to data recovery In case of problems can they recapture data or are they dependent on computer operations Discuss briefly Has a users manual been prepared for the automated data Comment eee instrumentation Is it in the Is it in the analyst s or user s possession S or user s possession Isi curn DA 3 EISOPQAM H 12 November 2001 6 Specific Pollutants PM 10 PM 2 5 and Lead PM10 and PM 2 5 Are filters visually inspected via strong light from a view box If no comment on way imperfections are
385. kran 2357A for routine calibration of the instrument This tube is maintained at 50 C The permeation tube constantly emits mercury at a low rate that does not vary as long as the temperature remains stable and as long as there is carrier flow over the permeation tube This mercury can be directed to the cartridges and sets the response factor of the instrument automatically The analyst can initiate an internal calibration in three different ways First the method for the on board computer can be programmed to start the calibration at a specific time Next the analyst may use the keyboard to start the calibration from two different operating modes Finally the instrument will start a calibration when an electric circuit switch on the back panel is closed from a remote device The permeation rate of the mercury permeation tube is only constant once the permeation tube has reached a constant temperature and has reached equilibrium Upon instrument startup the calibration source should be allowed to stabilize for 12 hours with power applied and carrier gas connected before a calibration is attempted Typically the method stored in the on board computer will be set to perform one calibration per 24 hour period following this warm up period Different study requirements may require different calibration intervals The User s Manual provides much more detail than this document The analyst should read and understand the manual for a complete descripti
386. l away from the decontamination pad and areas to be sampled Any portion of the drill rig backhoe etc that is over the borehole kelly bar or mast backhoe buckets drilling platform hoist or chain pulldowns spindles cathead etc should be steam cleaned soap and high pressure hot water and wire brushed as needed to remove all rust soil and other material which may have come from other hazardous waste sites before being brought On site Printing and or writing on well casing tremie tubing etc should be removed before use Emery cloth or sand paper can be used to remove the printing and or writing Most well material suppliers can supply materials without the printing and or writing if specified when ordered EISOPQAM B 6 November 2001 The drill rig and other equipment associated with the drilling and sampling activities should be inspected to insure that all oils greases hydraulic fluids etc have been removed and all seals and gaskets are intact with no fluid leaks e PVC or plastic materials such as tremie tubes should be inspected Items that cannot be cleaned are not acceptable and should be discarded B 3 3 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure Any portion of the drill rig backhoe etc that is over the borehole kelly bar or mast backhoe buckets drilling platform hoist or chain pulldowns spindles cathead etc should be steam cleaned soap and high pressure hot water between boreholes B 3 4 Field
387. l be retained by the Air Monitoring Staff 14 2 3 Monitoring Nitrogen Dioxide in Ambient Air The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the monitoring of carbon monoxide in air This summary is adapted from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix F Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for The Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide in The Atmosphere Gas Phase Chemiluminescence and The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book e Calibration systems will meet 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix F specifications e Calibration systems will be verified calibrated before use in accordance with procedures detailed in the calibration instrument manual e Monitor enclosures will meet the specifications of monitor reference equivalent designation for temperature control e Probes must meet the requirements stated in 40 CFR Part 58 for materials and sample residence time e All flow calibrations will be traceable to a primary authoritative standard Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 760 mm Hg e Chain of custody must be maintained at all times EISOPQAM 14 3 November 2001 Monitoring Procedure Monitoring will be conducted using the procedure as
388. l casing down to the bottom of the borehole thereby removing the grout and filter pack materials from the hole The well casing should then be removed from the hole with the drill rig The clean borehole can then be backfilled with the appropriate grout material The backfill material should be placed into the borehole from the bottom to the top by pressure grouting with the positive displacement method tremie method The top 2 feet of the borehole should be poured with concrete to insure a secure surface seal plug If the area has heavy traffic use and or the well locations need to be permanently marked then a protective surface pad s and or steel bumper guards should be installed The concrete surface plug can also be recessed below ground surface if the potential for construction activities exists This abandonment method can be accomplished on small diameter 1 inch to 4 inch wells without too much difficulty With wells having 6 inch or larger diameters the use of hollow stem augers for casing removal is very difficult or almost impossible Instead of trying to ream the borehole with a hollow stem auger it is more practical to force a drill stem with a tapered wedge assembly or a solid stem auger into the well casing and extract it out of the borehole Wells with little or no grouted annular space and or sound well casings can be removed in this manner However old wells with badly corroded casings and or thickly grouted annular space have a ten
389. l for planning RI FS investigations Field Investigations FI These include all field investigations other than RIs of potentially or known contaminated areas and they support all phases of the Superfund program These investigations may include sampling of ground water surface and subsurface soils rivers lakes etc and or may entail geophysical studies global positioning system GPS activities etc Overviews OV Activities include on site overview of the field work of EPA Superfund field contractors PRP contractors and State Superfund contractors Overviews are conducted to evaluate the contractors capabilities and to correct deficiencies in performing Superfund field investigations The Region 4 Hazardous Waste Field Overview Checklist Exhibit 2 1 is completed during the overview and a written report presenting the overview findings is completed and transmitted to the appropriate official in the Waste Management Division Technical Assistance TA Activities range from directing field investigations with non Agency field support to responding to telephone questions concerning all aspects of Superfund field investigations In addition field personnel provide a variety of training and technical assistance activities for Regional State and other Federal agency personnel in methods of conducting field operations at hazardous waste sites 2 6 3 Planning for Field Investigative Support Periodic meetings are typically held b
390. l investigations are to be identified by using the criminal sample tag This tag is similar to the standard sample tag shown in Figure 3 3 except that it has a red border around the front and a red background on the back of the tag If a criminal sample tag is not available the white sample tag may be used and should be marked Criminal in bold letters on the tag If asample is split with a facility state regulatory agency or other party representative the recipient should be provided if enough sample is available with an equal weight or volume of sample see Section 2 3 6 EISOPQAM 3 2 November 2001 3 2 2 Photograph Digital Still Image and Video Identification Photographs and Digital Still Images When photographs or digital images are taken a record of each exposure or image shall be kept in a bound field logbook The following information shall be recorded in the logbook e an accurate description of what the photograph or image shows including the name of the facility or site and the specific project name and project number e the date and time that the photograph or image was taken e the name of the individual who took the photograph or digital image When photographs are used in technical reports or placed in the official files the film shall be developed with the negatives supplied uncut The identifying information that was recorded in the field logbook shall be entered on the back of the prints For criminal investi
391. l is adequate to represent the entire cross section A sediment sample could also be collected in the same vicinity if available EISOPQAM 5 18 November 2001 For slightly larger streams at least one vertical composite should be collected from mid stream Samples should be collected just below the surface at mid depth and just above the bottom For larger streams and rivers at least quarter point 1 4 1 2 and 3 4 width composite samples should be collected Dissolved oxygen pH temperature and conductivity should be measured from each aliquot of the vertical composite For large rivers several locations across the channel width should be sampled Vertical composites across the channel width should be located in a manner that is roughly proportional to flow i e they should be closer together toward mid channel where most of the flow is than toward the banks where the proportion of total flow is less The number of vertical composites required and the number of depths sampled for each are usually determined in the field by the investigators This determination is based on a reasonable balance between the following two considerations The larger the number of subsamples the more closely the composite sample will represent the water body and e Subsample collection is time consuming and expensive and increases the chance of cross contamination In most circumstances a number of sediment samples should be collected along a cross s
392. l water treatment plants industrial water supplies private residences etc Many permanent monitoring wells at active facilities are also equipped with dedicated in place pumps The objective of purging wells with in place pumps is the same as with monitoring wells without in place pumps i e to ultimately collect a sample representative of the ground water Among the types of wells identified in this section two different approaches are necessary The permanent monitoring wells with in place pumps should in all respects be treated like the monitoring well without pumps They generally are sampled only occasionally and require purging as described for wells without in place pumps i e 3 to 5 well volumes and stable parameters In the case of the other types of wells however not enough is generally known about the construction aspects of the wells to apply the same criteria as used for monitoring wells i e 3 to 5 well volumes The volume to be purged in these situations therefore depends on several factors whether the pumps are running continuously or intermittently and whether or not any storage pressure tanks are located between the sampling point and the pump The following considerations and procedures should be followed when purging wells with in place plumbing under the conditions described EISOPQAM 7 5 November 2001 Continuously Running Pumps If the pump runs more or less continuously no purge other than opening a valve and a
393. late gases and vapors 5 8 2 Waste Investigation Objectives Systematic planning is critical for identifying a study s objectives and conducting a successful investigation Thorough understanding of the waste generation management practices is required for the samples and associated data to reflect the waste population characteristic s of interest Prior to sampling wastes it is extremely important to obtain and assess all of the available information e g waste generation process es waste handling and storage practices previous field screening results existing sampling and analytical data any pertinent regulations and permitting or compliance issues EISOPQAM 5 21 November 2001 Common objectives in waste sampling investigations include e to determine if a constituent is present in a waste e to determine if a waste exhibits a property or characteristic e to determine if a material is a hazardous waste e to characterize a wastestream and e to determine if a waste material has been released into the environment The most frequently used objective during RCRA Case Development Investigation Evaluations and Criminal Field Investigations involve hazardous waste determinations For studies that are designed to determine if a release has occurred it is recommended that samples be collected from the source as well as both the affected and the unaffected media Waste matrices are frequently heterogenous in nature due to the physical c
394. ley and Sons Inc New York New York 3 Compton R R Manual of Field Geology John Wiley and Sons Inc New York New York 1 4 United States Environmental Protection Agency 1992 GIS Technical Memorandum 3 Global Positioning Systems Technology And Its Application In Environmental Programs US EPA Document EPA 600 R 92 036 5 Trimble Navigation Limited Operations Manuals for the following Geoexplorer II 1996 P N 28801 00 Revision B Ver 2 11 Pathfinder Pro XR 1996 P N 31172 00 Revision A TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual and Software Users Guide 1998 P N 34182 00 ENG Revision A Ver 4 02 Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide 1999 P N 34231 25 ENG Revision A Ver 2 50 Mapping Systems General Reference 2000 P N 24177 01 Revision C 6 Water Measurement Manual Second Edition Revised United States Department of Interior Bureau of Reclamation 1981 7 NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual United States Environmental Protection Agency September 1984 8 Stevens Water Resources Data Book Third Edition Leopold Stevens Inc Beaverton Oregon 1978 9 Discharge Measurement at Gaging Stations Applications of Hydraulics Book 3 Chapter A8 United States Department of Interior Geological Survey 1969 10 Fluorometric Procedures for Dye Tracing Applications of Hydraulics Book 3 Chapter A12 United States Department of Interior Geologic Survey Revised 1986 11 Measurement of Discha
395. librated in accordance with the U S Environmental Protection Agency Region 4 Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual May 1996 or according to the manufacturer s specifications EISOPQAM 4 24 November 2001 Method of Air Surveillance Additional Site Specific Information Stipulations Site Decontamination Procedures Confined Space Entry check one If yes define procedures to be used EISOPQAM 4 25 November 2001 AUGERING and DRILLING OPERATIONS Underground Utilities All underground utilities must be located prior to commencement of drilling operations involving the drill rig and power augers Complete the underground utilities checklist below and prepare a site map showing the locations of all underground utilities identified UTILITY LOCATOR CONTACT PERSON PHONE DATE of LOCATION Telephone Include non AT amp T lines such as Sprint MCI etc Above Ground Utilities All above ground utilities must be located prior to commencing drilling augering activities A map will be prepared showing the locations of all power lines telephone lines video cables guy wires and other objects which could pose a hazard to personnel operating the drill rig power auger or hand auger with multiple extensions The SSO will insure that all operations are kept well clear of such hazards DAILY CHECKS Check all proposed drilling locations with a pipe seeker As a minimum
396. lity System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book EISOPQAM All filters used will be supplied by the EPA National Filter Distribution Program and of the same quality as supplied to the State and Local Agency Air Monitoring Stations Prior to use all filters will be checked for pinholes and desiccated at 15 C 30 C 3 C and less than 50 5 percent relative humidity for at least 24 hours Initial and final exposed filter weights will be determined by air monitoring personnel One of ten filters will be re weighed as a quality assurance check For batches less than ten one filter will be re weighed 14 6 November 2001 After sampling filters will be desiccated as previously described e Chain of custody must be maintained for all samples Sample Collection Samples will be collected using the High Volume sampler as described and operated in accordance with 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix J and Red Book Sections 2 10 and 2 11 All flow calibration orifices will be traceable to a primary standard Rootsmeter Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 760 mm Hg Digital manometers used for flow rate determinations will be checked against a U Tube water manometer prior to use in each study Volumetric flow controllers will be used on all PM samplers Flows will be determined using a c
397. lized within five volumes it is at the discretion of the project leader whether or not to collect a sample or to continue purging If after five well volumes pH and conductivity have been stabilized and the turbidity is still decreasing and approaching an acceptable level additional purging should be considered to obtain the best sample possible The conditions of sampling should be noted in the field log EISOPQAM 7 2 November 2001 TABLE 7 2 1 WELL CASING DIAMETER vs VOLUME WELL CASING DIAMETER 9 INCHES vs VOLUME GALS FEET of WATER 4 934 po 5 875 In some situations even with slow purge rates a well may be pumped or bailed dry evacuated In these situations this generally constitutes an adequate purge and the well can be sampled following sufficient recovery enough volume to allow filling of all sample containers It is not necessary that the well be evacuated three times before it is sampled The pH specific conductance temperature and turbidity should be measured during collection of the sample from the recovered volume as the measurements of record for the sampling event 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 Attempts should be made to avoid purging wells to dryness This can be accomplished for example by slowing the purge rate If a well is pumped dry it may result in the sample being comprised partially of water contained in the sand pack which may be reflective at least in part of initial stagnant conditions
398. ll be conducted quarterly or at least once for short duration studies Data telemetry systems will be run in parallel with strip chart recorders Strip charts will serve as a permanent record and diagnostic tool After completion ofthe study all monitoring equipment will be returned for inspection maintenance and repair prior to storage All field documentation will be retained by the Air Monitoring Staff 14 2 2 Monitoring Carbon Monoxide in Ambient Air The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the monitoring of carbon monoxide in air This summary is adapted from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix C Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for The Measurement of Carbon Monoxide in The Atmosphere Non Dispersive Infrared Photometry and The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System Volume Il Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book EISOPQAM Calibration systems will meet 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix C specifications Calibration systems will be verified calibrated before use in accordance with procedures detailed in the calibration instrument manual Monitor enclosures will meet the specifications of monitor reference equivalent designation for temperature control Probes must meet the requirements stated in 40 CFR
399. ll in the left set position of the sample well holder Press the cell down firmly to seat it in the holder 6 Hold the button down While doing this adjust the left set knob to align the meter needle with the arrow at the extreme left of the scale EISOPQAM 16 11 November 2001 10 11 12 Remove the cell from the holder Fill a clean 2 5 cm sample cell with the sample Cap the cell and place it into the cell holder Press it firmly to seat and close the light shield If measuring high levels use the cm cell Set the colorimeter by holding the ON button down while adjusting the right set knob to zero Open the light shield and remove the sample cell Fill a clean 1 cm sample cell with the solution from step 2 cap the cell and place into the cell holder Press the ON button down and hold it until the meter stabilizes Read and record the mg l of total chlorine from the upper 2 5 cm scale Procedures for total chlorine concentrations ranging between 0 3 5 mg l 1 6 Same steps as previously listed ip 8 9 10 11 12 Verification Rotate the cell to the right position Fill a clean 1 cm sample cell with the sample cap the cell and place it into the cell holder Set the colorimeter by holding the ON button down while adjusting the right set knob to zero Open the light shield and remove the sample cell Fill a clean 1 cm sample cell with the solution from step 2 cap the cell and pl
400. llapse and cannot be advanced Deeper sampling must be accomplished using power equipment Hand augering may also be of limited use in tight clays or cemented sands Regardless of the soil type at depths approaching 20 feet sidewall friction may become so severe that power equipment must be used Power augers such as the Little Beaver may be used to advance the borehole where hand augers are impractical Power augers are a sampling aid not a sampling device and can be used to advance a borehole to approximately 20 feet depending upon soil conditions If power augers are used to advance the borehole care must be taken that exhaust fumes gasoline and or oil do not contaminate the borehole The soil sample may then be collected using a hand auger After the sample has been collected the borehole may again be advanced if necessary and additional samples collected The auger bucket must be replaced between samples with a properly decontaminated auger bucket When a new borehole is advanced the entire hand auger assembly must be replaced with a properly decontaminated hand auger assembly EISOPQAM 12 2 November 2001 If the borehole is advanced using a hand auger upon reaching the desired sampling depth replace the bucket with a properly decontaminated bucket The sample may then be collected After the sample has been collected the borehole may be advanced if necessary with the bucket that was used to collect the sample Each sample must b
401. llection gloves will be contained and boots waders equipment etc used in the sample collection will be decontaminated with soap and water Hands will be thoroughly washed before proceeding to other tasks 3 Sample containers shall be cleaned on the outside to help eliminate contamination of handlers in the laboratory and placed in containment if necessary EISOPQAM 4 30 November 2001 SECTION 5 SAMPLING DESIGN AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES SECTION OBJECTIVES Define planning and quality assurance elements that must be incorporated in all sampling operations Define sampling site selections and collection procedures for individual media Define sampling quality assurance procedures 5 1 Introduction This section discusses the standard practices and procedures used by Branch personnel during field operations to ensure the collection of representative samples Sampling activities conducted by field investigators are conducted with the expectation that information obtained may be used for enforcement purposes unless specifically stated to the contrary in advance of the field investigation Therefore correct use of proper sampling procedures is essential Collection of representative samples depends upon Ensuring that the sample is representative of the material being sampled The use of proper sampling sample handling preservation and quality control techniques 52 Definitions Sample part of a larger lot usual
402. llection of information concerning historical data site survey and site history e Identification of the decision to be made with the data collected e Identification of data gaps e Identification of objectives and investigation boundaries e Sampling design selection and design optimization e Sample types and number e Analytical requirements and limitations and e Data interpretation and assessment EISOPQAM 5 8 November 2001 5 5 Soil Sampling Designs The objectives of a soil sampling investigation must be clearly defined in terms of the purpose of the data generated A discussion of study planning elements that include considerations specific to soil investigations follows 5 5 1 Historical Sampling Data Site Survey and Site History Investigations that are used for initial site screening purposes are one of the few cases where historical sampling data is usually not available In this case the purpose of the sampling effort is to determine the presence absence of contaminants and if present to determine their nature Such a purpose can be served with a minimum of samples whose locations can be determined from a site survey and a review of the site history When designing a soil sampling study for purposes other than site screening a record of previous sampling efforts is usually available from which a relatively sound foundation of historical sampling data can be derived The site survey is invaluable for soil sample desi
403. lling water will be recovered during well development Air Rotary Air rotary drilling uses air as a drilling fluid to entrain cuttings and carry them to the surface High air velocities and consequently large air volumes and compressor horsepower are required Down the hole DTH percussion hammers driven by the air stream can be used with this method to rapidly penetrate bedrock materials Where a casing through unconsolidated material is required to prevent borehole collapse it can be driven in conjunction with advancement of the drill stem When using air rotary drilling in any zone of potential contamination dual tube reverse circulation with a cyclone velocity dissipater for cuttings containment and separation is the preferred method Allowing cuttings to blow uncontrolled from the borehole as with the conventional air rotary method is not acceptable When using air rotary the issue of contaminants being introduced into the borehole by the air stream must be addressed Screw compressor systems should have a coalescing filter system in good working order to capture excess entrained compressor oils The lubricant to be used with down the hole hammers as well as thread lubricants to be used on drill stem should be evaluated for their potential impact on analytical samples Mud Rotary Mud rotary is the least preferred rotary method because contamination can be introduced into the borehole from the constituents in the drilling
404. llowing it to flush for a few minutes is necessary If a storage tank is present a spigot valve or other sampling point should be located between the pump and the storage tank If not locate the valve closest to the tank Measurements of pH specific conductance temperature and turbidity are recorded at the time of sampling Intermittently Running Pumps If the pump runs intermittently it is necessary to determine if possible the volume to be purged including storage pressure tanks that are located prior to the sampling location The pump should then be run continuously until the required volume has been purged If construction characteristics are not known best judgement should be used in establishing how long to run the pump prior to collecting the sample Generally under these conditions 30 minutes will be adequate Measurements of pH specific conductance temperature and turbidity should be made and recorded at intervals during the purge and the final measurements made at the time of sampling 7 2 4 Purging Techniques Temporary Monitoring Wells Temporary ground water monitoring wells differ from permanent wells because temporary wells are installed in the ground water for immediate sample acquisition Wells of this type may include standard well screen and riser placed in boreholes created by hand augering power augering or by drilling They may also consist of a rigid rod and screen that is pushed driven or hammered into place t
405. lly a time composite is acceptable However in enforcement cases where strict adherence to permit requirements are necessary or if an investigator knows or suspects that there is significant variability in the wastewater flow a flow proportional sample is preferable Atime composite sample consists of equal volume discrete sample aliquots collected at constant time intervals into one container A time composite sample can be collected either manually or with an automatic sampler EISOPQAM 9 2 November 2001 A flow proportional composite sample can be collected using one of two methods One method consists of collecting a constant sample volume at varying time intervals proportional to the wastewater flow For the other method the sample is collected by varying the volume of each individual aliquot proportional to the flow while maintaining a constant time interval between the aliquots Prior to collecting flow proportional samples the facility s flow measuring system should be examined for proper installation and accuracy see Section 18 If the facility s primary flow measuring device does not meet standard conditions see Section 18 or is in an unsafe or inaccessible location then the investigator should collect time composite samples If the flow measurement system is acceptable samples should be collected using the appropriate flow proportioning methods Flow proportional samples can be collected with an automatic sampler and a compat
406. loves and boot covers if used and discard them 2 Site workers are then clear to enter the support zone where they may obtain new respirator cartridges outer gloves and boot covers for return to the exclusion zone If an immediate return is not anticipated site workers may remove their respirators Respirators will be washed in soap solution and rinsed in water Following this the inside of the respirators will be cleaned with an alcohol wipe Finally site workers will remove and discard their inner gloves 3 Decontamination personnel may exit the contamination reduction corridor without having to conduct any decontamination upon themselves other than to remove and discard their gloves EISOPQAM 4 18 November 2001 FIGURE 4 1 DECONTAMINATION ZONE FOR LEVELS A AND B S3NIT WSMHOM NO934 JHL LINO SNOlLVS3dO 13437 NOS ALON SIN3AMVO 3100 ANV 3A019 SLOO8 3AOW3H 133HS OLLSW1d ANOZ LYOddNs Pee se og X ES MI ee WdlvM 1N3ATOS 3SNIH NO930 on O 34019 s31n0 ANY SYSA00 1008 SAOWSY SnlHSvM S8nlHSVM OOO SYSAVedS dnd 133aHS OLLSW1d YalvM 1N3ATOS JISNIY NO030 WOAWINIW 834019 Y31N0 O O ANY SYJA09 1008 3AOW3H SnlHSvM SnlHSvM OOO SH3AVHds dl ind 133HS OILS V ld doug AN3Wdlno3 133HS OlLSV d WOGldHHO9 NOILOnQ33 NOLIVNIINVLNOO g Y SI3 Saqunaaoosd NO934A 3NOZ NOISN19X4 JGSOP CDR 031296 November 2001 4 19 EISOPQAM
407. ls e photographs and negatives associated with the project one copy of the final report and transmittal memorandum s and e relevant documents related to the original investigation inspection or follow up activities related to the investigation inspection Inappropriate personal observations and irrelevant information should not be placed in the official project files At the conclusion of the project the project leader shall review the file to ensure that it is complete EISOPQAM 3 10 November 2001 3 7 Disposal of Samples or Other Physical Evidence PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To ensure that proper disposal procedures are used for samples or other evidence Disposal of samples or other physical evidence obtained during investigations is conducted on a case by case basis Before samples which have been analyzed are disposed of the ASB sample custodian shall contact the project leader via E mail indicating that the samples will be disposed of by a certain date unless the project leader dictates otherwise If the sample custodian does not receive a message from the project leader within the time specified in the E mail the samples will be disposed of Personnel should check with the EPA Program Office requesting the inspection or investigation before granting permission to dispose of samples or other physical evidence The following general guidance is offered for the disposal of samples or other physical evidence No samples
408. ly an area a volume or a period of time Representative Sample a sample that reflects one or more characteristics of a population Sample Representativeness the degree to which a set of samples defines the characteristics of a population where each sample has an equal probability of yielding the same result Variability the range or distribution of results around the mean value obtained from samples within a population There are three types of variability which must be measured or otherwise accounted for in field sampling 1 Temporal Variability Temporal variability is the range of results due to changes in contaminant concentrations over time An example would be the range of concentrations obtained for a given parameter in wastewater samples collected at different times from an outfall where contaminant concentrations vary over time EISOPQAM 5 1 November 2001 2 Spacial Variability Spacial variability is the range of results due to changes in contaminant concentrations as a function of their location An example would be the range of concentrations obtained for a given parameter in surface soil from a site where discreet hot spots are present due to localized releases of contaminants on otherwise uncontaminated soil 3 Sample Handling Variability Sample handling variability is the range of results due to the sample collection and handling by the sampler This variability manifests itself as a positive bias due to e
409. ly on monitors operated in the 0 to 100 ppm range EISOPQAM 2 26 November 2001 Ozone Ozone audit concentrations shall be introduced into the monitor at the same point where ambient air enters the sampling system The audit concentration should be introduced through the probe if possible Audit concentration points will be in the following ranges Concentration ppm Oy 0 03 0 08 0 35 0 45 0 80 0 90 Note Audit point 4 will be run on monitors operating in the 0 to 1 0 ppm range 0 15 0 20 Sulfur Dioxide Sulfur dioxide audit concentrations shall be introduced into the monitor through the particulate filter The audit concentration should be introduced through the probe if possible Audit concentration points will be in the following ranges Note Audit point 4 will only be run on monitors operating in the 0 to 1 0 ppm range Nitrogen Dioxide Nitrogen dioxide audit concentrations shall be introduced into the monitor through the particulate filter The audit concentration should be introduced through the probe if possible Audit concentration points will be in the following range Concentration ppm NO 0 03 0 08 0 15 0 20 0 35 0 45 0 80 0 90 Note Audit point 4 will only be run on monitors operating in the 0 to 1 0 ppm range If the audit is being conducted by gas phase titration gpt it will be necessary to run a zero and span point on the monitor s NO and NO channels If NO and or NO
410. me for the well materials to cure before development procedures are initiated The main purpose of developing new monitoring wells is to remove the residual materials remaining in the wells after installation has been completed and to try to re establish the natural hydraulic flow conditions of the formations which may have been disturbed by well construction around the immediate vicinity of each well A new monitoring well should be developed until the column of water in the well is free of visible sediment and the pH temperature turbidity and specific conductivity have stabilized In most cases the above requirements can be satisfied however in some cases the pH temperature and specific conductivity may stabilize but the water remains turbid In this case the well may still contain well construction materials such as drilling mud in the form of a mud cake and or formation soils that have not been washed out of the borehole Excessive or thick drilling muds can not be flushed out of a borehole with one or two well volumes of flushing Continuous flushing over a period of several days may be necessary to complete the well development If the well is pumped to dryness or near dryness the water table should be allowed to sufficiently recover to the static water level before the next development period is initiated Caution should be taken when using high rate pumps and or large volume air compressors during well development because excessive high r
411. ment tools rods augers etc should be cleaned as follows 1 Inspect thoroughly If severe rust corrosion paint or hardened grout is present the equipment may require sandblasting prior to cleaning 2 Clean with tap water and soap using a brush if necessary to remove particulate matter and surface films Steam cleaning high pressure hot water with soap may be necessary to remove matter that is difficult to remove with the brush Drilling equipment that has been steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above ground Hollow stem augers drill rods etc that are hollow or have holes that transmit water or drilling fluids should be cleaned on the inside and outside 3 Rinse thoroughly with tap water 4 Let completely air dry Remove and cover with clean unused plastic and label Atthe direction of the project leader Quality Assurance Officer or drill rig operator this equipment may be cleaned as specified in Section C 2 2 prior to use C 5 6 Miscellaneous Sampling and Flow Measuring Equipment Flow measuring equipment such as weirs staff gages velocity meters and other stream gaging equipment and other miscellaneous sampling equipment shall be washed with soap and hot tap water rinsed with hot tap water rinsed thoroughly with analyte free water and completely air dried before being stored This procedure is not to be used for equipment utilized for the collection of samples for trace organic o
412. ment of rivers or streams Generally the coarser grained sediments are deposited near the headwaters of the reservoir and the bed sediments near the center of the water mass will be composed of fine grained materials The shape inflow pattern bathymetry and circulation must be considered when selecting sediment sampling sites in lakes or reservoirs 5 7 4 Estuarine Waters Estuarine areas are zones where inland freshwaters both surface and ground mix with oceanic saline waters Estuaries are generally categorized into three types dependent upon freshwater inflow and mixing properties e Mixed estuary Characterized by an absence of vertical halocline gradual or no marked increase in salinity in the water column and a gradual increase in salinity seaward Typically this type of estuary is found in major freshwater sheetflow areas featuring shallow depths e Salt wedge estuary Characterized by a sharp vertical increase in salinity and channelized freshwater inflow into a deep estuary In these estuaries the vertical mixing forces cannot override the density differential between fresh and saline waters In effect a salt wedge tapering inland moves horizontally back and forth with the tidal phase e Oceanic estuary Characterized by salinities approaching full strength oceanic waters Seasonally freshwater inflow is small with the preponderance of the fresh and saline water mixing occurring near or at the shore line A reconna
413. ment of the slope distance is impractical simply measure the horizontal distance and determine the height by Dv tan V lt Dh The field notation for the third column from the left in the field book is labeled Z lt or V lt and the forth column is labeled Ds Dh see Example 5 Field Notation EISOPQAM 15 6 November 2001 EXAMPLB 3 Azimuths and Bearings When surveying personnel should be able to convert bearings to azimuths or azimuths to bearings as shown in Figure 15 2 3 An azimuth is an angular direction based on the compass rose which divides a circle into 360 The direction of northeast is expressed as an azimuth of 45 Its reciprocal azimuth or the southwest azimuth direction is 225 An azimuth is always turned clockwise from north or 0 A bearing is the direction turned either clockwise or counter clockwise with respect to north or south whichever is closer on a compass As a bearing the direction of northeast is expressed as North 45 East while its reciprocal or reverse bearing is expressed as South 45 West The following are examples of conversions BEARING TO AZIMUTH N25 E 25 S15 E 165 N89 53 57 W 270 06 03 S10 18 W 190 18 N A bearing of N 25 E equals an azimuth of 25 An azimuth of 135 equals a bearing of S 45 E Example 3 Figure 15 2 3 Compass rose showing conversion between azimuths and bearings AZIMUTH TO BEARING 135 S45 E 280 N80 W 353 06
414. ment to locate flag or mark all under ground utilities such as electrical lines natural gas lines fuel tanks and lines water lines etc Before operating the drill rig a pilot hole should be dug with hand equipment to a depth of two to three feet to check for undetected utilities or buried objects Proceed with caution until a safe depth is reached where utilities normally would not be buried The following safety requirements should be adhered to while performing drilling activities 1 All drilling personnel should wear safety hats safety glasses and steel toed boots Ear plugs are required and will be provided by the safety officer or driller 2 Work gloves cotton leather etc should be worn when working around or while handling drilling equipment 3 All personnel directly involved with the drilling rig s should know where the kill switch s is located in case of emergencies 4 All personnel should stay clear of the drill rods or augers while in motion and should not grab or attempt to attach a tool to the drill rods or augers until they have completely stopped rotating Rod wipers rather than gloves or bare hands should be used to remove mud or other material from drill stem as it is withdrawn from the borehole 5 Do not hold drill rods or anv part of the safety hammer assembly while taking standard penetration tests or while the hammer is being operated 6 Do not lean against the drill rig or place hands on or near mo
415. ments may be made by eitheran axial flow ducted impeller recording current meter Endeco 174 or an Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler ADCP Both meter types may be programmed via appropriate connection to a PC prior to deployment deployed in an unattended mode and interrogated for data download by PC following data collection Likewise the meters may be used for real time data collection in profiling applications For unattended applications deployment in and out times dates should be recorded in the field record The field record should also include the location and depth s of the deployment and serial number or other appropriate identifier of the meter s used in the deployment For unattended applications the impeller type meters are deployed on a weighted tether line with a subsurface float to keep the tether line taut and a surface float for locating the meter Multiple meters can be deployed at any depth s on the tether For a non stratified system one meter will generally be deployed at mid depth For a stratified system a meter will generally be deployed at the mid depth of each strata Anticipated deployment depths for a given application should be provided in the Quality Assurance Project Plan Care should be taken during deployment of the impeller type meters to prevent tangling of the tether line around the meter and or floats The meter should also be checked for level deployment in the water Lead weights attached at the nose a
416. mination is twofold First it minimizes the transportation of hazardous wastes from a site Second it protects workers from exposure which may occur while they are removing their protective equipment Decontamination must be conducted in an organized stepwise manner If certain pieces of the protective equipment are removed prior to the elimination of potential problems by decontamination the worker may suffer damage due to inhalation or skin contact with contaminants Itis therefore important that persons doing the decontamination work know the proper procedures and the order in which to perform them to insure that such potential personal injuries do not occur It is also important that site workers avoid contaminating themselves until after they have been cleared to exit the contamination reduction zone Decontamination procedures will generate a quantity of hazardous waste e g contaminated solvents disposable equipment etc called investigation derived waste IDW This material must be handled and disposed of in accordance with Section 5 15 EISOPQAM 4 15 November 2001 Level A Decontamination Procedures Level A operations pose a possibility of hazardous exposure to decontamination workers Due to the nature of Level A work personnel in the exclusion zone are likely to have contacted high concentrations of hazardous materials which remain on their protective equipment Therefore decontamination workers are required to perform th
417. mined by the physical characteristics of the waste material Selecting appropriate sampling equipment can be one of the most challenging tasks while planning a sampling investigation By selecting sampling equipment that will not discriminate against certain physical characteristics e g phase particle size etc sampling bias can be minimized during waste sampling Because wastes often stratify due to different densities of phases settling of solids or varying waste constituents generated at different times it also may be important to obtain a vertical cross section of the entire unit Other desired features of sampling equipment that should be considered the ability to access the desired sampling locations the ability to maintain sample integrity the reactivity of equipment with the waste and the ability to properly decontaminate the sampling apparatus In addition analytical requirements such as the sample handling and preparation to correctly analyze physical samples need to be considered For solidified wastes samples will often be required to undergo particle size reduction PSR prior to chemical analyses Sampling equipment should be selected to accommodate all of the known physical characteristics of concern or chosen such that the effect of any sampling bias is understood Often because of a lack of preliminary information varying field conditions or waste heterogeneity a piece of equipment selected during the investigations s pl
418. mmon to the neighborhood Urban areas where NAMS are required will usually have both types of stations It is possible that only one monitoring station will be needed for PM or SO in which case it must be a Category a station EISOPQAM 2 20 November 2001 Network Design Network design for State and Local Air Monitoring Stations SLAMS National Air Monitoring Stations NAMS and Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations PAMS is detailed in Appendix D of 40 CFR 58 Tables 2 10 1 and 2 10 2 show the population levels for which NAMS monitoring is required The required spatial scales for NAMS are shown in Table 2 10 3 Although SLAMS do not have specific scale requirements the scales that are appropriate to each pollutant are also shown in Table 2 10 3 Selection of urban areas and actual number of stations per area is jointly determined by EPA and the state agency TABLE 2 10 1 GUIDELINES for PM and SO NAMS NETWORK SIZE APPROXIMATE NUMBER of STATIONS PER AREA Population Concentration Population Area High Medium gt 1 000 000 500 000 1 000 000 250 000 500 000 100 000 250 000 a PM High concentration areas are those for which ambient PM data show ambient concentrations exceeding PM National Ambient Air Quality Standards NAAQS by 20 or more SO Defined as high when the ambient concentration exceeds the level of the primary NAAQS PM Ambient concentrations exceed 80 of the NAAQS SO Ambient c
419. mospheric contaminants have been identified is used when and require the maximum level of respiratory protection but only a high level of skin protection The atmosphere contains less than 19 5 percent oxygen The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is indicated by direct reading detecting equipment but the concentrations of contaminants are not suspected of posing a hazard through skin contact The work involves opening containers suspected of containing concentrated wastes where a likelihood of an air release is possible In this situation Level B is the initial protection and can be upgraded or downgraded as more information on the nature of the wastes is gathered NOTE 1 Level B operations require decontamination of personnel and equipment Also zones of protection are required Level B operations normally qualify as hazardous duty because the risk of fire explosion cannot be mitigated NOTE2 When wearing a chemically resistant suit Level B EISOPQAM Cool vests are required when wearing an chemically resistant suit for more than 30 minutes and the temperature is 80 F to 90 F Cool vests are required when wearing an chemically resistant suit for more than 15 minutes and the temperature is above 90 F At the discretion of the SSO a lack of shade may result in the need for cool vests regardless of the temperature Heat stress monitors are optional unless mandated by the SSO 4 12 November 200
420. mple Custody A sample or other physical evidence is in custody if e itis in the actual possession of an investigator e itis in the view of an investigator after being in their physical possession e it was in the physical possession of an investigator and then they secured it to prevent tampering and or e itis placed in a designated secure area 3 3 3 Documentation of Chain of Custody Sample Tag A sample tag Figure 3 3 should be completed for each sample using waterproof non erasable ink as specified in Section 3 2 Sample Seals Samples should be sealed as soon as possible following collection using the EPA custody seal shown in Figure 3 5 The sample custodian should write the date and their initials on the seal Except for criminal investigations the use of custody seals may be waived if field investigators keep the samples in their custody as defined in Section 3 3 2 from the time of collection until the samples are delivered to the laboratory analyzing the samples Custody seals will always be used for criminal investigations Chain of Custody Record The field Chain Of Custody Record Figure 3 1 is used to record the custody of all samples or other physical evidence collected and maintained by investigators All physical evidence or sample sets shall be accompanied by a Chain Of Custody Record This Chain Of Custody Record documents transfer of custody of samples from the sample custodian to another person to the laborato
421. mpler on and off at the desired times The operator should retrieve and secure the sample as soon as possible after the sampling period ends The sampler should then be manually turned on and allowed to run for two minutes A final flowrate should be recorded on the sample data sheet The final flowrate should be at least 150 liters per minute The PUF XAD cartridge should be removed and the quartz pre filter folded and placed in the top of the PUF XAD cartridge The PUF XAD cartridge and pre filter should be re wrapped in the original aluminum foil and placed back in the shipping can The can should then be tightly sealed Complete the sample data sheet and Chain Of Custody Record and seal the shipping can with a sample custody seal Finally the shipping can containing the sample should be placed in a cooler containing frozen eutectic salt packs at a nominal temperature of 15 C When all samples are collected from all sites the cooler should be sealed with sample custody tape for transport back to the laboratory Laboratory Upon arrival of the metal container at the laboratory the samples shall be stored in the metal container in a refrigerator until submitted for extraction EISOPQAM 14 11 November 2001 14 3 4 Collecting Samples for Metals Analysis Using the High Volume Sampler The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the collection of samples for metals analysis in air This summary is adapted
422. mpling location Difficult to decon Can lose volatiles piles solids Requires drill rig or direct push equipment roto hammer piles containers solids Physically breaks up sample May release volatiles Not for flammable atmospheres EISOPQAM 13 5 November 2001 13 4 Waste Sampling Procedures 13 4 1 Waste Piles Waste piles vary in size shape composition and compactness and may vary in distribution of hazardous constituents and characteristics strata These variables will affect safety and access considerations The number of samples the type of sample s and the sample location s should be based on the study s objectives Commonly used equipment to collect samples from waste piles are listed in Table 13 3 1 All equipment should be compatible with the waste and should have been cleaned to prevent any cross contamination of the sample 13 4 2 Surface Impoundments Surface impoundments vary in size shape and waste content and may vary in distribution of hazardous constituents and characteristics strata The number of samples the type of sample s and the sample location s should be based on the study s objectives Commonly used equipment to collect samples from surface impoundments are listed in Table 13 3 1 All equipment should be compatible with the waste and should have been cleaned to prevent any cross contamination of the sample Because of the potential danger of sampling waste units suspected of containing elevate
423. mpling period ends The sampler should then be manually turned on and allowed to run for two minutes and a final flowrate recorded on the sample data sheet The final flowrate should be at least 150 liters minute The PUF cartridge should be removed and the quartz pre filter folded and placed in the top of the PUF cartridge The PUF cartridge and pre filter should be re wrapped in the original aluminum foil and placed back in the shipping container and the container should be tightly sealed Complete the sample data and sample custody sheets Each shipping container should have a sample custody seal Finally the shipping container containing the sample should be placed in a cooler containing frozen eutectic salt packs at a nominal temperature of 4 C When all samples are collected from all sites the cooler should be sealed with sample custody tape for shipment to the contract laboratory Contract Laboratory Upon arrival of the metal container at the contract laboratory the samples shall be stored in the metal container in a refrigerator until submitted for extraction 14 3 7 Mercury Sampling Using Gold Coated Glass Bead Tubes The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the handling and field use of gold coated glass bead mercury sampling tubes The following generic procedures should be adhered to at all times Polyethylene latex or Nylon gloves must be worn whenever handling any of the mercury s
424. mud cross contamination can occur along the borehole column and it is very difficult to remove the drilling mud from the borehole after drilling and during well development The drilling mud can also carry contaminates from a contaminated zone to an uncontaminated zone thereby cross contaminating the borehole If mud rotary is selected only potable water and pure no additives bentonite drilling muds should be used All materials used should have adequate documentation as to manufacturer s recommendations and product constituents QA QC samples of drilling muds and potable water should be sampled at a point of discharge from the circulation system to assure that pumps and piping systems are not contributing cross contamination from previous use 6 3 5 Other Methods Other methods such as the cable tool method jetting method and boring bucket auger method are available If these and or other methods are selected for monitoring well installations they should be approved by a senior field geologist before field work is initiated 6 4 Borehole Construction 6 4 1 Annular Space The borehole or hollow stem auger should be of sufficient diameter so that well construction can proceed without major difficulties For open boreholes the annular space should be approximately 2 to allow the uniform deposition of well materials around the screen and riser and to allow the passage of tremie pipes and well materials without unduly disturbing the borehole w
425. must be avoided Vials should be opened and closed quickly during the sample preservation procedure Methanol must be handled in a ventilated area Use protective gloves when handling the methanol vials Store methanol away from sources of ignition such as extreme heat or open flames The vials of methanol should be stored in a cooler with ice at all times Shippin Methanol and sodium bisulfate are considered dangerous goods therefore shipment of samples preserved with these materials by common carrier is regulated by the U S Department of Transportation and the International Air Transport Association IATA The rules of shipment found in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR parts 171 to 179 and the current edition of the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations must be followed when shipping methanol and sodium bisulfate Consult the above documents or the carrier for additional information Shipment of the quantities of methanol and sodium bisulfate used for sample preservation falls under the exemption for small quantities A summary of the requirements for shipping samples follows Refer to the code for a complete review of the requirements 1 The maximum volume of methanol or sodium bisulfate in a sample container is limited to thirty30 mls 2 The sample container must not be full of methanol 3 The sample container must be stored upright and have the lid held securely in place Note that the mechanism used to hold the cap in plac
426. n Manual MCD 51 United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington D C 1979 4 Compliance Biomonitoring Inspections Manual MCD 62 United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington D C 1981 5 Guidance for Conducting Remedial Investigations and Feasibility Studies Under CERCLA Interim Final EPA 540 G 89 004 6 RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Guidance Document United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Solid Waste Washington D C EPA 530 R 001 November 1992 7 RCRA Facility Assessment Guidance United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Solid Waste Washington D C PB87 107769 October 1986 EISOPQAM 2 32 November 2001 EXHIBIT 2 1 REGION 4 HAZARDOUS WASTE FIELD OVERVIEW CHECKLIST Facility Site Name Project No EPA ID No Overview Personnel Date Facility Contact Phone No State Contractor Project Leader Affiliation Phone No Study plan reviewed by the Division Acceptable Comments Was study plan followed Comments Was a safety plan prepared for the study Comments Was the safety plan adequate Comments Was the safety plan followed Comments Additional comments or information Checklist sections completed for this overview 1 2 3 4 5 Key 1 General Procedures 4 Surface Water Sampling 2 Ground Water Sampling 5 Waste Sampling 3 Soil Sediment Sludge Sampling 6 Monitoring Well Installation EISOPQAM 2 33 November 2001
427. n and Handling With the exception of PM 10 are instrument outputs that is data recorded to a stripcharts D magnetic tape acquisition system c digitized and telemetered directly to agency headquarters Please complete the table below for each of the reporting organizations or agencies within the overall R O Data Acquisition Media Reporting Organization Pollutants a b c or combination On High volume samplers without flow controllers pad Log sheet Dixonchart Other specify What kind of recovery capabilities for data acquisition equipment are available to the field operator after power outages storms etc Briefly describe below EISOPQAM H 8 November 2001 C LABORATORY OPERATIONS WHERE APPLICABLE 1 Routine Operations What analytical methods are employed in support of your air monitoring network Analysis Methods PM 10 Pb PM 2 5 Others list by pollutant Do any laboratory procedures deviate from the If yes are the deviations for lead analysis reference equivalent or approved methods PM 10 filter conditioning or other specify below Have the procedures and or any changes been approved Date of Approval by EPA Is sufficient instrumentation available to conduct your laboratory analyses Yes No If no please indicate instrumentation needs Instrument Needed New or Replacement Year of Acquisition EISOPQAM H 9 November 2001 2 Quality Control Please complete the table for your
428. n area water body or site similar to the one being studied but located in an area known or thought to be free from pollutants of concern Split Sample a sample which has been portioned into two or more containers from a single sample container or sample mixing container The primary purpose of a split sample is to measure sample handling variability A split sample will also measure inter or intra laboratory precision Duplicate Sample two or more samples collected and representative of a given population The purpose of a duplicate sample is to estimate the variability of a given characteristic or contaminant associated with a population Trip Blanks a sample which is prepared prior to the sampling event in the actual container and is stored with the investigative samples throughout the sampling event They are then packaged for shipment with the other samples and submitted for analysis At no time after their preparation are trip blanks to be opened before they reach the laboratory Trip blanks are used to determine if samples were contaminated during storage and or transportation back to the laboratory a measure of sample handling variability resulting in positive bias in contaminant concentration If samples are to be shipped trip blanks are to be provided with each shipment but not for each cooler Spikes also known as proficiency test pt samples a sample with known concentrations of contaminants Spike samples are often pack
429. n be used n 1 96 0 65 0 20 n 40 samples Upon completion of the soil sampling effort the data obtained for the COCs is reviewed It can then be determined if an adequate number of samples were collected with respect to the margin of error and confidence selected during the planning process This determination is completed by calculating the CV using the data obtained during the study The standard deviation of the concentration for a COC is divided by the mean concentration and the CV is calculated This CV may be higher or lower than the CV selected during the planning process Using this CV value the same equation is used to determine the required Wow number of samples based on the actual CV for the study If this second value for n is less than or equal to the number of samples collected during the study then the site has been characterized for the extent of Wow COCs within the limits of confidence and error stated If the second value for n is significantly greater EISOPQAM 5 11 November 2001 then additional sampling is necessary or an adjustment to the margin of error or confidence level should be considered If the collection of additional samples is deemed necessary by the investigation team the data that has been generated may be used to plan for a more efficient and cost effective re sampling of the site Areas of the site where higher than anticipated variabilities were obtained may be segregated from areas o
430. n of all of the above information in a legible format If chain of custody is required for documents received during investigations the documents should be placed in large envelopes and the contents should be noted on the envelope The envelope shall be sealed and an EPA custody seal placed on the envelope such that it cannot be opened without breaking the seal A Chain Of Custody Record shall be maintained for the envelope Any time the EPA seal is broken that fact shall be noted on the Chain Of Custody Record and a new seal affixed The information on the seal should include the sample custodian s initials and the date Physical evidence such as video tapes or other small items shall be placed in Zip Loc type bags or envelopes and an EPA custody seal should be affixed so that they cannot be opened without breaking the seal A Chain Of Custody Record shall be maintained for these items Any time the EPA seal is broken that fact shall be noted on the Chain of Custody Record and a new seal affixed The information on the seal should include the sample field custodian s initials and the date EPA custody seals can be used to maintain custody of other items when necessary by using similar procedures as those previously outlined in this section Samples should not be accepted from other sources unless the sample collection procedures used are known to be acceptable can be documented and the sample chain of custody can be established If such sampl
431. nance will be performed at least once per calendar quarter Air Monitoring Instrumentation Checkouts Pre loadout checks on air monitoring instrumentation will be recorded each time they are performed Discrepancies will be immediately reported to the Branch Safety Officer Self Contained Breathing Apparatus SCBA Checkouts Pre loadout checks on SCBAs will be recorded when they are performed SCBA checkouts will be performed at least once per calendar quarter in the absence of loadout requests Any discrepancies will be reported immediately to the Branch Safety Officer Other Equipment Maintenance Maintenance performed on equipment other than that listed above will be recorded in a logbook for miscellaneous field equipment All required repairs will be reported to the FEC coordinator Sampling Containers and Latex Gloves A record will be kept of shipments received of sampling containers and latex gloves Containers and gloves will be recorded by lot numbers Upon receipt the Quality Assurance QA Officer will be notified Containers and gloves within a received lot will not be used until they have been checked by the QA Officer All equipment cleaned and wrapped for field use will be marked with the date on which preparation was completed Equipment will be stored in the FEC in specified areas to minimize the risk of contamination while awaiting use 5 14 3 Specific Quality Control Checks At least once per calendar quarter the Q
432. nated area EISOPQAM 5 32 November 2001 e Investigators should use equipment constructed of TeflonG stainless steel or glass that has been properly pre cleaned Appendix B for collection of samples for trace metals or organic compounds analyses Teflon or glass is preferred for collecting samples where trace metals are of concern Equipment constructed of plastic or PVC shall not be used to collect samples for trace organic compounds analyses 5 13 8 Sample Handling and Mixing After collection all sample handling should be minimized Investigators should use extreme care to ensure that samples are not contaminated If samples are placed in an ice chest investigators should ensure that melted ice cannot cause the sample containers to become submerged as this may result in sample cross contamination Plastic bags such as Zip Lock bags or similar plastic bags sealed with tape should be used when small sample containers e g VOC vials or bacterial samples are placed in ice chests to prevent cross contamination Once a sample has been collected it may have to be transferred into separate containers for different analyses The best way to transfer liquid samples is to continually stir the sample contents with a clean pipette or pre cleaned Teflon rod and allow the contents to be alternately siphoned into respective sample containers using Teflon or PVC Tygon type tubing and a siphon bulb to start the flow Teflon must be used
433. nature of some emergency requests may preclude the issuance of a study plan A copy of the study plan in draft form will be provided to the requestor to insure that the plan will meet their objectives As a general rule the Data Quality Objective DQO process should be consulted during the study plan preparation phase The study plan should include as appropriate Introduction The project leader and support staff requestor from the appropriate Superfund Branch and the objective s of the investigation Background Facility compliance history manufacturing processes types of wastes produced waste treatment methods etc Scope The study design should be discussed in this section including the number and location of the samples to be collected information which will be obtained and records to be reviewed Logistics The travel and study dates Methodology Analyses to be conducted and who will conduct analyses field and laboratory SOP references and when samples will be received by the laboratory If the study is an RI the following additional information where appropriate should be included Site background and physical setting Initial Evaluation Sampling DQO Site Management Plan Quality Assurance Project Plan Field Sampling and Analyses Plan Field Health amp Safety Plan EISOPQAM 2 12 November 2001 2 6 6 Investigation Reports Reports will be completed after each investig
434. nd must be issued at least one week prior to the investigation The timing and nature of some emergency requests may preclude the issuance of a study plan A copy of the study plan in draft form will be provided to the requestor to ensure that the plan will meet their objectives As a general rule the Data Quality Objectives DQO process will be consulted during the study plan preparation phase The study plan should include as appropriate Introduction The project leader and support staff requestor from the UST Section and the objective s of the investigation Background Facility compliance history manufacturing processes types of wastes produced waste treatment methods etc Scope The study design should be discussed in this section including the number and location of the samples to be collected information which will be obtained and records to be reviewed Logistics The travel and study dates Methodology Analyses to be conducted and who will conduct analyses field and laboratory SOP references and when samples will be received by the laboratory Investigation Reports An investigation report containing the following information will be completed Introduction When where and why the investigation was conducted and requesting office Staff who conducted the investigation Background Site history description and results of previous studies Summary Summary of the field investigation and re
435. nd tail ends of the meter should be added or removed as needed to ensure the meter is axially deployed horizontal in the water column Meters should be deployed in a way that minimizes potential equipment damage or interference from ship traffic or other obstructions ADCP meters may be mounted in a variety of ways however for unattended current measurements these meters will typically be deployed in upward facing configuration with the meter mounted to a weighted platform specifically designed to minimize potential impacts from drag lines or nets The meter may also be boat mounted in a downward facing configuration for real time data collection and profiling 15 4 4 Equipment The following equipment is available for surface water stage tape down measurements e Model F Stevens Stage Recorder s mechanical horizontal drum system e Model A 71 Stevens Stage Recorder s mechanical drum system e Stevens Model GS 93 Endcoders and Loggers e Stevens AxSys System pressure transducer e Model 1870 2870 3210 3230 and 4210 ISCO flow meter s and Recorder s pressure transducer bubbler and ultrasonic reflection systems e USGS staff gage s and e Weighted steel tape down systems EISOPQAM 15 27 November 2001 The following equipment is available for time of travel and dilution studies e Turner 10 AU and Turner 10 005 fluorometers e Rhodamine WT dye tracer and standards e ISCO automatic samplers e Peristaltic submer
436. ned Equipment 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee C 3 C 1 6 Initial Processing of Returned Equipment 2 0 0 cece eee ee C 4 C 2 Trace Organic and Inorganic Constituent Sampling Equipment C 4 EISOPQAM ToC xi November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS C 2 1 Teflon add Glass ossa boaters adra tna e ERR ERE REPE a Rea dA Rad d C 4 C 2 2 Stamless Steel or Steel eiss cake eR da EEG AR EE dee ee Wd ed C 5 C 2 3 Reusable Composite Sample and Organic Analyte Free Water Containers C 5 C 3 Automatic Wastewater Sampling Equipment useless C 5 C 3 1 ISCO and other Automatic Samplers C 5 C 3 2 ISCO 1680 2700 and 3700 Rotary Funnel Distributor and Metal Tube C 5 C 3 3 All Sampler Headers c oops ae WE a rb Ree e RR RAE RR ee C 6 C 3 4 Reusable Glass Composite Sample Containers 0 0 eee eee eee ee C 6 C 3 5 Plastic Reusable Composite Sample Containers 2700 5 gal 3700 4 gal C 6 C 3 6 ISCO 1680 2700 and 3700 Glass Sequential Bottles for GC MS Analyses C 7 C 3 7 Bottle Siphons for Composite Containers 0 eee eee ee C 7 C 3 8 Reusable Teflon Composite Mixer Rods 00 ccc cece cece eeeennees C 7 C 4 Cleaning Procedures for Tubing 0 0c cece eens C 7 C 4 1 Silastic Pump T Wine ccu wade oxi vid asado da ged ke Sat cudbonake ve C 7 C 4 2 Teflon Sample Tubig ias re b batun pes dine eae EE EA EED
437. ng conditions may dictate the wearing of PFD s All recreational boats 16 feet or more are required to be equipped with visual distress signaling devices VDS at all times when operating on coastal waters Also boats less than 16 feet long are required to carry visual distress signals when operating on coastal waters at night Coastal waters are defined as 1 The ocean territorial sea 2 The Great Lakes 3 Bays or sounds that empty into those waters and 4 Rivers over two miles across at the mouth upstream to a point where they narrow to two miles The simplest VDS is a bright orange flag bearing a black square and a black circle other forms can be found in the U S Coast Guard Auxiliary Boating Skills and Seamanship EISOPQAM 4 27 November 2001 Trailering Trailering of boats 1 Make sure to use the proper class of hitch for the weight of the trailer being towed 2 Check to have the proper size coupler for the ball being used 3 Trailer must have safety chains 4 A tire pressure gauge should be used to check tire pressure frequently 5 Running lights brake lights and turn signals should be functioning 6 Every unattached piece of gear in the trailered boat should be firmly secured and the boat itself should be firmly lashed in place A more detailed description of boating regulations and safety can be found in the United States Coast Guard Auxiliary Manual Boating Skills and Seamanship ISBN 0 930028 03 1 EISOPQAM 4
438. ng is not practical or possible therefore no purging is conducted The sampling device is simply pushed to the desired depth and opened and the sample is collected and retrieved 7 2 5 Investigation Derived Waste Purging generates quantities of purge water or investigation derived waste IDW the disposition of which must be considered What is appropriate for the disposition of the water is in part dependent on the nature of the investigation If the IDW is generated at a RCRA facility it will generally be contained and disposed on site in an on site treatment facility IDW generated during Superfund or other investigations may at the discretion of the field project leader or the program manager remedial project manager be discharged to the ground away from the well or be containerized for later disposal or other appropriate action 7 3 Sampling Sampling is the process of obtaining containerizing and preserving the ground water sample after the purging process is complete Non dedicated pumps for sample collection generally should not be used Many pumps are made of materials such as brass plastic rubber or other elastomer products which may cause chemical interferences with the sample Their principle of operation may also render them unacceptable as a sample collection device The pump may be turbine driven which may release volatile organic constituents It is recognized that there are situations such as industrial or municipal
439. nk cars vary in size and may range from simple to extremely complex designs Depending on the unit s design it may be convenient to consider some of these storage units as tanks for sampling purposes even though they meet the definition of a container e Ancillary equipment tank any device including but not limited to such devices as piping fittings flanges valves and pumps that is used to distribute meter or control the flow of hazardous waste from its point of generation to a storage or treatment tank s between hazardous waste storage and treatment tanks to a point of disposal on site or to a point of shipment for disposal off site e Sump any pit or reservoir that meets the definition of a tank and those troughs trenches connected to it that serve to collect hazardous wastes Note some outdoor sumps may be considered open units surface impoundments Although any of the closed units may not be completely sealed and may be partially open to the environment the unit needs to be treated as a closed unit for sampling purposes until a determination can be made Once a closed unit is opened a review of the proposed sampling procedures and level of protection can be performed to determined if the PPE is suitable for the site conditions Samples collected from different waste units should not be composited into one sample container without additional analytical and or field screening data to determine if the materials are compatible
440. nments are commonly separated into two types Flowing water including rivers creeks and small to intermittent streams and e Water that is contained with restricted flow including lakes ponds and manmade impoundments Since these waterways differ considerably in general characteristics site selection must be adapted to each Estuarine environments are a special case and are discussed separately 5 7 2 Rivers Streams and Creeks In the selection of a surface water sampling site in rivers streams or creeks areas that exhibit the greatest degree of cross sectional homogeneity should be located When available previously collected data may indicate if potential sampling locations are well mixed or vertically or horizontally stratified Since mixing is principally governed by turbulence and water velocity the selection of a site immediately downstream of a riffle area will insure good vertical mixing These locations are also likely areas for deposition of sediments since the greatest deposition occurs where stream velocities decrease provided that the distance is far enough downstream from the riffle area for the water to become quiescent Horizontal cross channel mixing occurs in constrictions in the channel but because of velocity increases the stream bottom may be scoured and therefore a constriction is a poor location to collect sediment Typical sediment depositional areas are located e Inside of river bends e Downstream f
441. ns Model A 71 continuous strip chart recorders Stevens Encoder Recorders and ISCO Model 2870 3210 and 3230 flow meters Non recording equipment available includes vertical staff gages and tape down systems see Section 15 Instruments and equipment available to make velocity cross sectional area measurements include current meters and sounding depth equipment The current meters available are the vertical axis mounted Price AA and Price pygmy meters including direct readout meters and ENDECO solid state memory current meters Sounding determination of depth is accomplished using recording fathometers or with a standard top setting wading rod Width measurements are made using a galvanized steel tag line which is segmented into equal divisions of length by metal beads or steel tapes The equipment available for direct flow measurement includes the following primary devices available for installation V notch weir plates and rectangular weir plates The corresponding conversion of water levelto flow rate can be accomplished instantaneously from stage staff gage readings corresponding to the primary flow device in use or by instantaneous readings of the available recording flow meter systems The continuous recording systems presently available are the ISCO Model 2870 3210 and 3230 recording flow meters EISOPQAM 18 7 November 2001 18 6 REFERENCES 1 10 11 12 Water Measurement Manual Second Edition Revised United Stat
442. ns that the program calls it something else When you encounter a situation like this delete the name you have typed into the CHEMICAL NAME space Scroll down to TRADE NAME SYNONYM and retype the name in this case methylene chloride You will find the search gives you 12 documents found Upon review of the documents you can see that the program calls methylene chloride dichloromethane By selecting that name from the 12 given you will get the correct MSDS When using TRADE NAME SYNONYM for a search you can get over a hundred documents to search By far the easiest and most direct way to search is by CAS Number If you need a CAS number call an ASB chemist or call the SHEM The Hazardous Chemical Inventory The Branch Safety Officer or a designee will compile a list of hazardous chemicals used or stored within the Branch The list will include the following e Name used in house for the chemical or mixture of chemicals e Correct chemical name for the chemical or each component of a mixture of chemicals e Location s of the chemical and e Location s of the posting of MSDSs related to the chemical or mixture of chemicals The Hazardous Chemical Inventory will be updated quarterly and reported to the Chemical Hygiene Officer CHO Employee Information and Training The Branch safety officer or a designee will insure that personnel are provided with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work area at the time of
443. nse thoroughly with tap water Auger flights and bits should be cleaned as follows 1 3 4 Inspect thoroughly If severe rust corrosion paint or hardened grout is present the equipment will require sandblasting prior to cleaning Clean with tap water and soap using a brush if necessary to remove particulate matter and surface films Steam cleaning high pressure hot water with soap may be necessary to remove matter that is difficult to remove with the brush Augers that are steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet aboveground Rinse thoroughly with tap water Completely air dry Remove and wrap with clean unused plastic Return to storage At the direction of the project leader or the Quality Assurance Officer this equipment may be cleaned as specified in Section C 2 2 prior to use C 5 5 Drill Rig Grout Mixer and Associated Equipment A thorough interior and exterior cleaning of the drill rig is required at the end of each study The exterior including undercarriage should be washed with soap and tap water and then rinsed with tap water The steam jenny may be used The pump and tank on the drill rig should be flushed with tap water until clear and then drained The pump on the grout mixer should be flushed with tap water until clear then drained EISOPQAM C 10 November 2001 The grout mixer should be washed with soap and tap water The steam jenny may be used Drilling equip
444. nsibility to ensure that the wastewater flow measurement system or technique used measures the total wastewater discharged described by the NPDES permit if applicable All recycled wastewaters must be accounted for so that reported flows accurately reflect the volume of wastewaters discharged The location of the wastewater flow measurement equipment should satisfy these criteria be consistent with NPDES permit requirements and measure the actual flow EISOPQAM 18 1 November 2001 18 2 3 Flow Measurement Systems Flow may be measured on an instantaneous or a continuous basis A typical continuous system consists of a primary flow device a flow sensor transmitting equipment a recorder and a totalizer Instantaneous flow measurements can be obtained without using such a system The heart of a typical continuous flow measurement system is the primary flow device This device is constructed to produce predictable hydraulic responses which are related to the flow rate of water or wastewater through it Examples of such devices include weirs and flumes which relate water depth head to flow Venturi and orifice type meters relate the differential pressure to flow and magnetic flow meters relate induced electric voltage to flow Standard primary flow devices have undergone detailed testing and experimentation and their accuracy has been verified A flow sensor is required to measure the particular hydraulic responses of the primary flow measureme
445. nt MSDSs are available on the Lan and the following locations The Field Equipment Center Battery Charging Shed and All field vehicles used to transport hazardous chemicals or used as mobile laboratories where such hazardous chemicals are utilized Access to MSDSs on the Lan is accomplished by the following procedure MSDS Access The following instructions cover basic use of the MSDS system If you encounter problems orif you have any questions please call Jim Gray at X8613 1 In LAN Windows double click on the SESD Applications Icon then double click on the OHS Database Icon Once the program is loaded use any key to go through the Title Warning and Disclaimer screens At the Main Screen press F2 to activate the Pull Down Menu The Select Data Base function will be highlighted Scroll right to the SEARCH Pull Down Menu The Enter Query function will be highlighted Press ENTER to activate the Query screen The first line of the Query screen asks for the Chemical Name For example type in Nitric Acid DO NOT PRESS THE ENTER KEY AFTER TYPING IN THE CHEMICAL NAME Press F3 for the search The search screen will eventually show 1 document found After 10 or so seconds the MSDS will appear You can navigate through the MSDS by using Page Up Down or by scrolling with the arrow keys but it is slow The recommended method is to press F7 which activates the Jump To pull down menu In this menu highlight the information you want
446. nt case one individual should be responsible for recording the video for each case The original unaltered tape shall be placed in the official files EISOPQAM 3 3 November 2001 3 2 3 Identification of Physical Evidence Physical evidence other than samples shall be identified by using a sample tag or recording the necessary information on the evidence When samples are collected from vessels or containers which can be moved drums for example the vessel or container should be marked with the field identification or sample station number for future identification when necessary The vessel or container may be labeled with an indelible marker e g paint stick or spray paint The vessel or container need not be marked if it already has a unique marking or serial number however these numbers shall be recorded in the bound field log books In addition it is suggested that photographs of any physical evidence markings etc be taken and the necessary information recorded in the field logbook Occasionally it is necessary to obtain recorder and or instrument charts from facility owned analytical equipment flow recorders etc during field investigations and inspections Mark the charts and write the following information on these charts while they are still in the instrument or recorder e Starting and ending time s and date s for the chart e An instantaneous measurement of the media being measured by the recorder shall be taken and
447. nt device and transmit them to the recording system Typically sensors include ultra sonic transmitters floats pressure transducers capacitance probes differential pressure cells electromagnetic cells etc The sensor signal is generally converted using mechanical electro mechanical or electronic systems into units of flow which are recorded directly on a chart or transmitted into a data system Systems which utilize a recorder are generally equipped with a flow totalizer which displays the total flow on a real time basis Studies that need continuous flow measurements require a complete system Instantaneous flow measurements do not necessarily dictate the use of any portion of such a system Techniques which are described later in this Section are available for measuring instantaneous flows with portable equipment An important consideration during wastewater studies is that the investigator may want to obtain continuous flow data at a facility where only instantaneous flow data are being measured If an open channel primary flow device is utilized for making instantaneous measurements only the installation of a portable field sensor and recorder is necessary If on the other hand the facility being investigated does not utilize a primary flow device and a continuous flow record is desired a portable primary flow device will have to be installed Field investigators have open channel equipment available for field use These devices should be
448. nt of Environmental Laboratory Samples 3 Untreated wastewater and sludge from POTW s are considered to be diagnostic specimens not environmental laboratory samples However because they are not considered to be etiologic agents infectious they are not restricted and may be shipped using the procedures outlined below Environmental samples should be packed prior to shipment by air using the following procedures 1 EISOPQAM Allow sufficient headspace ullage in all bottles except VOC containers with a septum seal to compensate for any pressure and temperature changes approximately 10 percent of the volume of the container Be sure the lids on all bottles are tight will not leak Place bottles in separate and appropriately sized polyethylene bags and seal the bags with tape preferably plastic electrical tape Up to three VOC bottles may be packed in one Whirl Pak container Optionally place three to six VOC vials in a quart metal can and then fill the can with vermiculite Select a sturdy cooler in good repair Secure and tape the drain plug with fiber or duct tape Line the cooler with a large heavy duty plastic bag Place two to four inches of vermiculite in the bottom of the cooler and then place the bottles and cans in the cooler with sufficient space to allow for the addition of vermiculite between the bottles and cans Put blue ice or ice that has been double bagged in heavy duty polyethylene bags and
449. nt of mercury present in the sample will be drastically underreported leading to an inflated response factor Teflon prefilter A 5 47mm Teflon prefilter should be used on the inlet end of the sample line to prevent contamination of the sample line from the inlet to the instrument The instrument has two additional 47mm Teflon filters on its ambient air inlet and the zero air inlet 14 O D Teflon tubing The tubing is used to collect the sample and should be long enough to reach the most distant sample location but not longer than 100 feet A computer to record the data Must be capable of running in DOS mode and running the Telix data capture program supplied by Tekran A scrubber tube filled with activated carbon to attach to the vents 10 25 or 50uL syringes The syringes should be gas tight with Teflon tipped barrels Tekran recommends using syringes with side venting needles because they are less likely to plug on extracted septum material Read the User s Manual to learn how to condition the syringes for use with the primary standard Reagents amp Standards High Purity Argon to act as the carrier gas Compressed zero air or high purity Nitrogen to act as the Zero Air Elemental Mercury 5ml for use in the Tekran 2505 Cold Vapor Calibrator as a primary standard EISOPQAM 14 14 November 2001 Calibration A mercury permeation tube is housed in a temperature control chamber within the Te
450. ntify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum or 5 gallon plastic bucket with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with site manager for testing and disposal Place waste in trash bag Place in dumpster with permission of site operator otherwise return to FEC for disposal in dumpster November 2001 5 16 References 1 US EPA Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA G 4 EPA 600 R 96 055 August 2000 2 US EPA Data Quality Objectives Process for Hazardous Waste Sites EPA QA G 4HW EPA 600 R 00 007 January 2000 3 ASTM Standard Practice for Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities Development of Data Quality Objectives D5792 95 4 ASTM Standard Guide for the Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities Quality Assurance and Quality Control Planning and Implementation D5283 92 1997 5 Gilbert Richard O Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring Van Nostrand Reinhold Co New York NY 1987 6 ASTM Standard Guide for General Planning of Waste Sampling 7 US EPA Charac
451. ntroduction Field measurements of topographic features water levels time of travel geophysical parameters physical dimensions etc are frequently required during field investigations conducted by the Branch The purpose of the investigation will determine the scope of these measurements All sampling locations used during field investigations should be depicted on an accurate drawing topographic or other standard map or be referenced in such a manner that the location s can be firmly established The Region 4 library has a complete collection of 7 5 minute USGS 1 24 000 scale topographic maps and a map copier is available Each field measurement made should be traceable to the person s making the measurement and to the field equipment used to make that measurement Equipment maintenance and calibration records shall be kept in log books and field records so that the procedures are traceable Time records shall be kept in local time using the hour format with the time recorded to the nearest five minutes or less New employees should perform each of the physical field measurements described in this section under the supervision of a senior technical staff member at least once before being permitted to make these measurements on their own 15 2 Horizontal Location Surveys 15 2 1 Introduction Surveying is described as the art and science of determining the area and configuration of portions of the earth s surface and representing them
452. o allow for state agency representation during the audit Upon arrival at the audit location all principles involved must be briefed to explain the audit its meaning and the use of its results Following the initial conference the audits will be performed The auditor will ask the station operator to verify that no unscheduled zero or span adjustments have been made prior to the audit During the audit the auditor will request the station operator to read the instrument responses from the agency monitor AII data will be recorded on the appropriate audit form Following the completion of the audit an exit conference will be conducted where results of the audit will be discussed The auditor should not give copies of the audit form to the agency personnel until after returning to the office and after the audit data have been verified Having verified an auditor s results copies of the audit form will be sent to the affected agency and state Quality Assurance Coordinator All audit gases shall be traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology Standard Reference Materials SRMs or the gases used in the audit may be SRMs or EPA Protocol Gases Carbon Monoxide Carbon monoxide audit concentrations shall be introduced into the monitor prior to any filters dryers or mixing chambers Audit concentration points will be in the following ranges Concentration ppm CO 35 45 80 90 15 20 Note Audit point 4 will be run on
453. o be free from contamination e Sample Collection Prior to sampling the flow controller will be calibrated a mass flow meter The flowrate should be adjusted so that at the end of the sampling interval the ending pressure of the canister is approximately 0 9 atm The final canister vacuum should be between 5 inches and 1 inch of Hg The final flowrate should be at least 1 scc min After sample collection all canisters should be tagged with an EPA pre numbered tag with all of the information filled out Place the canister in a shipping container and seal the container with EPA sample custody tape 14 3 3 Sampling for Semi Volatile Organic Compounds SVOC Analysis with High Volume PUF Samplers Using Methods TO 4A amp TO 13A The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for use of the High Volume Polyurethane Foam PUF sampling method for collecting samples for semi volatile organic compound S VOC analysis including pesticides and polychlorinated biphenyls This summary is adapted from Method TO 4A pesticides and PCBs and TO 13A polynuclear aromatic compounds of the COMPENDIUM OF METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR The following procedures must be followed during preparation of PUF sampling media when using the High Volume PUF method for collecting samples for SVOC analysis e All PUF sampling media should be pre cleaned loaded into High Volume PUF sample cartridges
454. o detect aromatic compounds such as benzene toluene and styrene aliphatic amines such as diethylamine and chlorinated unsaturated compounds such as vinyl chloride and trichloroethylene THE LACK OF A RESPONSE ON THIS METER DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE ENVIRONMENT IS SAFE THE MICROTIP MODEL MP100 IS NOT INTRINSICALLY SAFE DO NOT USE A NONINTRINSICALLY SAFE MICROTIP IN CONFINED SPACES UNLESS CLEARED WITH AN EXPLOSIMETER EISOPQAM 17 4 November 2001 Operational Information Turn the instrument on by pressing the back of the power switch The pump will start and the message Warming up now please wait will be displayed Within three minutes the following information will appear on the display Current Detected Instrument Status Concentration Ready 2000 ppm 008 10 15 Feb 15 Event Number Time Date The Microtip then operates automatically The user reads the concentration directly from the display The display updates itself each half second The following describes the procedure for setup and calibration of the MicroTip Consult the manual for other information and instructions SETUP Press SETUP and step through the options Press ENTER to accept the displayed data or enter a numerical value using the keypad and then press ENTER If no values are entered the display reverts to normal To set up the instrument 1 Press SETUP 2 The first step sets the full scale range for the bar graph display the graph outp
455. o four feet Rotate the tubing and implant counter clockwise threading the implant into the anchor If there was any soil intrusion during the push the implant may not dock If the implant does not dock it is possible to salvage the installation by removing the implant and sealing the small hole on the bottom of the implant with foil or with a small sheet metal screw then returning the implant to the hole After the implant has been docked use a pull cap and pull the probe rod approximately one foot exposing the implant Observe the tubing to make sure that anchor remained in place and is not being pulled with the rod If the implant remained in place slowly pour a measured amount of 60 100 mesh glass beads down the inside of the probe rod The glass beads are used as a filter pack around the implant Ideally the implant should be covered with beads with approximately six inches of beads above the top of the implant The volume of beads should be calculated based on the length of implant used While pouring the beads it is advisable to gently shake the tubing to prevent the beads from bridging inside the probe rod After placing the beads the implant is sealed using a flowable mixture of the glass beads and fine powdered bentonite To accomplish this two to three feet of rod is pulled and the mixture is slowly poured into the rod above the bead packed implant As with the bead placement similar care should be taken to avoid bridging of thi
456. o great leave the area immediately 5 Touch tank opening equipment to the bolts in the hatch lid and allow electrical conductive path to form Slowly remove bolts and or hatch with spark resistant tools brass beryllium If a pressure build up is encountered or detected cease opening activities and leave the area 6 Screen tanks for explosive flammable gases and toxic vapors with air monitoring instruments Depending on the study objectives and site conditions conduct characteristic screening e g pH halogen etc as desired Collect a small volume of sample for flash point testing if warranted Note the state quantity number of phases and color of the tank contents Record all relevant results observations and information in a logbook Compare the screening results with any pre existing data to determine if the tank should be sampled 7 Select the appropriate sampling equipment based on the state of the material and the type of tank Sampling equipment should be constructed of non reactive materials that will meet the study s objective s 8 Place oil wipe as necessary sampling equipment and sample containers near tanks s to be sampled EISOPQAM 13 9 November 2001 AIR MONITORING FOR TOXIC VAPORS EXPLOSIVE GASES AND OXYGEN DEFICIENT ATMOSPHERES SHOULD BE CONTINUOUS DURING TANK SAMPLING Liquids Slowly lower the bailer bacon bomb Dipstick COLIWASA or Teflon tubing to the desired sampling depth NOTE In w
457. o the desired sampling interval such as the Direct Push Wellpoint the Geoprobe and the Hydropunch As such the efforts to remove several volumes of water to replace stagnant water do not necessarily apply in these situations because generally stagnant water is non existent It is important to note however that the longer a temporary well is in place and not sampled the more appropriate it may be to apply to the extent possible standard permanent monitoring well purging criteria to it In cases where the temporary well is to be sampled immediately after installation purging is conducted primarily to mitigate the impacts of installation In most cases temporary well installation procedures disturb the existing aquifer conditions resulting primarily in increased turbidity Therefore the goal of purging is to reduce the turbidity and remove the volume of water in the area directly impacted by the installation procedure Low turbidity samples in these types of wells are typically and routinely achieved by the use of low flow purging and sampling techniques The following low flow purging technique using peristaltic pumps has been used routinely to achieve acceptably low NTU values in a variety of temporary monitoring well applications In purging situations where the elevation of the top of the water column is no greater than approx imately 25 feet below the pump head elevation a peristaltic pump may be used to purge temporary wells Eno
458. ob equally as well The following discussion of methods and procedures for designing and installing monitoring wells will cover the different aspects of selecting materials drilling boreholes and installing monitoring devices EISOPQAM 6 1 November 2001 6 3 Drilling Methods The following drilling methods are listed in general order of preference however final selection should be based on actual site conditions In all cases the proper field QA QC procedures should be initiated before and during drilling to minimize the potential for contamination These QA QC procedures include but are not limited to sampling and analyzing of all drilling materials such as drilling muds filter sand bentonite pellets grouts and any potable water introduced during drilling 6 3 1 Hollow Stem Auger This type of auger consists of a hollow steel stem or shaft with a continuous spiraled steel flight welded onto the exterior stem A hollow auger bit generally with carbide teeth disturbs soil material when rotated whereupon the spiral flights transport the cuttings to the surface This method is best suited in soils that have a tendency to collapse when disturbed A monitoring well can be installed inside of hollow stem augers with little or no concern for the caving potential of the soils and or water table However retracting augers in caving sand conditions while installing monitoring wells can be extremely difficult or impossible especially since th
459. ocations SWMUS topography ground water flow direction etc e Well depth ground water elevations e CME checklist Internal Peer Review and Report Recipients All RCRA plans and reports will be reviewed internally Final copies of the plan report will be sent to the requestor If facility or state personnel request a copy of the report this will be indicated in the report transmittal memorandum 2 8 Underground Storage Tank UST Investigations 2 8 1 Introduction USTs were traditionally investigated because of potential or actual contamination of the environment from petroleum products More recently UST investigations have been conducted because tanks contain hazardous substances UST field investigations are requested by the Water Management Division Ground Water Drinking Water Branch UST Section and usually involve ground water and or soil sampling for UST constituents or related products UST investigation objectives may include e Determining if there has been a release to the environment from the UST e Determining if potable wells are contaminated with UST constituents e Determining if ground water is contaminated with UST constituents e Determining if vicinity soils have been contaminated with UST constituents e Determining the direction of the contamination plume and the source of the contamination EISOPQAM 2 16 November 2001 2 8 2 Investigation Study Plans Study plans are prepared for all UST investigations a
460. ocities at frequent longitudinal intervals and the calculation of average velocity in the stream constitutes a time consuming method of obtaining time of water travel The longitudinal intervals at which cross sections should be measured vary with the characteristics of the stream channel One cross section per mile may be adequate for streams with reasonably uniform channels Cross sections at every tenth of a mile may be desirable for streams with irregular channels Tracers The most accurate method of measuring time of travel involves following and measuring a tracer Some conservative constituents such as salt or radioisotopes may serve as tracers however Rhodamine WT dye is the most common tracer used Rhodamine WT is water soluble and can be detected at concentrations as low as 0 01 ppb by a fluorometer Prior to injection into the stream the concentrated dye is often diluted with stream water This insures immediate maximum dispersion Addition of concentrated dye without dilution may result in incomplete dispersion particularly in shallow streams Calibration curves should be developed for each study with particular emphasis on accounting for natural background fluorescence The dye should be distributed across the stream at the upstream point as nearly instantaneously as possible The ideal distribution produces a narrow band of tracer in a uniform concentration across the stream The band of tracer mixes with water ahead of and behind
461. oeer PSI IEEE RM SERRE UI d SR 2 8 2 Investigation Study Plans 2 4 22 itccendsasecss RE RE RAE REX 2 8 3 Investigation Reports eos exerko ie wk xaE RS x REVRRRSER Peek aaen E EE RG RE 2 9 Underground Injection Control UIC Investigations 2 9 1 DAN GQUCHION rsrs eii eorr ae ya PUR pon DE EE E ac EE eas ee qo EE 2 9 2 Investigation Study Plans 2 s 2ide0 cde ERR REP E Ra eR dn dex 2 9 3 Investigation Reports i 2scau eR RR ee vi bee RAE RR RAE EE RE E 2 10 Ambient Air Monitoring Evaluations and Audits EISOPQAM ToC i November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS 2 10 1 InttOdUClol iso sees Ve bRS RawaexecCeERx4aed Re n adc dura e eR mad ecd 2 19 2 10 2 NAMS SLAMS Site Evaluations 0 e eee eee eens 2 19 Table 2 10 1 Guidelines for PM and SO NAMS Network Size 2 21 Table 2 10 2 Population Levels for which NAMS Monitoring of Pollutants other than PM and SO is Required 00000 2 22 Table 2 10 3 Summary of Spatial Scales Usually Needed for SLAMS amp NAMS 2 22 Table 2 10 4 Summary of Probe Siting Criteria 0000 2 24 Table 2 10 5 Minimum Distance between Sampling Probe and Roadways 2 25 2 10 3 State and Local QA Plan Reviews 0 ccc eee eee eee 2 26 2 10 4 Performance Audits 00 0 eens 2 26 2 10 5 Air Monitoring Technical System Audit Ls 2 28 2 10 6 National P
462. of air when determining the concentration of a gas because air is not considered a contaminate and can be removed during the recycling process The instrument detects and indicates either R12 orR 134a if the sample is at least 98 pure The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA has an accuracy of 1 the concentration of contaminates in the 0 5 range and 2 the concentration of air after a 30 minute warm up period If a hydrocarbon refrigerant is detected in a mixture sufficient to constitute a potential flammability problem a horn will sound and a hydrocarbon LED will light The instrument is designed to sample gas concentrations If the liquid phase is sampled by mistake and contains lubricating oil the pre filter will turn red and the instrument may need to be returned to the manufacturer for repair References The Neutronics Model RI 2002PA Portable Automotive Refrigerant Identifier Operation amp Instructions Manual Field Screening Procedure The operator of the Neutronics Model RI 2002PA should be familiar with the detailed procedures as described in the Neutronics Model RI 2002PA Portable Automotive Refrigerant Identifier Operation amp Instructions Manual The following Quick Instructions are from page 9 of the manual and give a brief description of how to operate the instrument l Read and follow the Safety Messages on pages 3 and 4 of the Neutronics Model RI 2002PA Portable Automotive Refrigerant Identifier Operation amp Instructions
463. of samples Comments How many samples were collected Comments 3 4 Were background and or control samples collected Comments 5 Were grab or composite samples collected Comments 6 How many aliquots were taken for the composite sample Comments 7 What procedures and equipment were used to collect the samples Comments 8 Were samples collected directly into sample containers Comments 9 Did the sampler wade in the stream to collect the samples Comments 10 Were the samples collected upstream from the sampler Comments 11 Did the sampler insure that roiled sediments were not collected along with the water samples Comments 12 Were representative samples collected Comments 13 Was the pH of preserved samples checked to insure proper preservation Comments 4 14 Were samples iced immediately after collection Comments 15 For what analyses were the samples collected Comments 16 If samples were split what were the sample station numbers for these Comments T 1 Other comments or observations EISOPQAM 2 41 November 2001 SECTION 5 WASTE SAMPLING DRUMS TANKS BARRELS ETC Containerized What was the objective of the sampling investigation Comments Description of units or sources sampled closed open etc Comments General description of samples Oil sludge waste Comments How many samples were collected Comments Were grab or composite samples collected Comments
464. of tracer dyes make them the technique of choice In dilution studies the tracer dye is precisely metered into the waters to be traced and then monitored after mixing via a fluorometer at downstream stations This series of events requires highly controlled metering rates and very accurate fluorometric analyses State of the art fluorometers make the dilution study methods valuable assessment tools The principal of superposition as developed by Kilpatrick et al 13 of the USGS is a reliable method to determine dilution levels of wastewaters in receiving estuaries A tracer dye is metered into the wastewater stream during a tidal cycle Successive slack tide measurements of dye concentrations in the estuary at selective distances from the outfall produce a series of concentration curves By superposition the accumulative concentration at each station provides a determination of the ultimate concentrations or steady state concentration of a continuous discharge By simple proportioning with due regard to any tracer photo decay the dilution levels of the discharge can be produced for selective points in the estuary EISOPQAM 15 25 November 2001 Calculation Procedure C C e XVw Vt Where C Ultimate concentration of wastewater at point of interest C Ultimate concentration of tracer by superposition at point of interest t Tidal days to ultimate concentration e Photo decay of tracer V Wastewater discharge per tidal day
465. of two feet Comments If bentonite pellets were used for the seals above the filter packs were they allowed to hydrate a minimum of 8 hours Comments 39 Did contractor driller have documentation from manufacturer stating recommended hydration time Comments Was the tremie tube method used to place the bentonite pellets Comments Was the annulus grouted from the seal to within two feet of the ground surface or below the frost line Comments Was the tremie tube method used to place the grout in the annulus Comments If no to 42 what method was used Comments What type of grout was used to seal the annulus neat cement cement bentonite cement sand etc Comments What grout mix ratio was used should be stated in the POP Comments What was the density of the grout Ib gal etc Comments If bentonite grout was used was the density at least 9 4 Ib gal Comments 48 Was the density determined using a mud balance Comments 49 Was the grout allowed to set a minimum of 24 hours before the surface pad was installed Comments Was a concrete surface pad installed with an outer protective casing and locking cap Comments How far below the ground surface did the concrete pad extend Comments EISOPQAM 2 46 November 2001 What were the dimensions of the concrete pads Comments Did the well casings extend to a minimum of 2 5 feet above the ground surface Comments How far above the ground
466. ogger L Upon returning to the site select Navigation in the data logger Asset Surveyor software main menu Move the curser to the waypoint listed and press Enter Move in the direction indicated by the data logger until the waypoint is reached Waypoints can also be edited on the fly and or added to the list in the field and transferred back to Pathfinder Office software on the PC for updating and or exporting back to GIS LL 15 3 Vertical Location Elevation Surveys 15 3 1 Introduction The field of surveying that pertains to measuring the relative differences in elevation of two or more points is called running levels or Leveling The two most commonly used methods are Differential Leveling and Trigonometric Leveling Differential leveling is the most precise and easiest method because it utilizes level measurements with simple addition and subtraction Trigonometric leveling is slightly less precise and more difficult as it uses vertical angle and distance measurements combined with the principles of trigonometry Global Positioning System GPS equipment can obtain elevation measurements however this new technology is less accurate than horizontal measurements and is not recommended for vertical locations This subsection discusses the standard procedures and techniques used to obtain differences in elevation and are described in more detail in basic surveying and field geology textbooks See References 1 2 and 3 EISOPQAM 15
467. ollowed by air rotary and mud rotary Due to the introduction of the various circulating fluids the use of rotary methods requires that the potential for contamination by these fluids be evaluated Water and mud rotary methods present the possibility of trace contamination of halogenated compounds when municipal water supplies are used as a potable water source Air rotary drilling can introduce contamination through the use of lubricants or entrained material in the air stream In any of the rotary or sonic methods care must be exercised in the selection and use of compounds to prevent galling of drill stem threads Water Rotary When using water rotary potable water that has been analyzed for contaminants of concern should be used If potable water or a higher quality water is not available on site then potable water will have to be transported to the site or an alternative drilling method will have to be selected Water rotary is the preferred rotary method because potable water is the only fluid introduced into the borehole during drilling Water does not clog the formation materials reducing well development time however this potable water EISOPQAM 6 3 November 2001 will flow out into the surrounding formation materials if permeable and mix with the natural formation water This mixing of the drilling water and the natural formation water should be evaluated when determining the drilling method Generally a large majority of the dri
468. on These cases are normally characterized by a lack of previous sampling data thereby requiring that sample types and locations be determined by site history and a site survey In these instances an authoritative design is normally used EISOPQAM 5 9 November 2001 Authoritative sampling usually involves a limited number of locations 10 to 15 from which grab samples are collected Locations are selected where there is a good probability of finding high levels of contamination Examples may include areas where significant releases or spillage occurred according to the site history or areas of visible staining stressed vegetation or surface drainage are noted in the site survey An authoritative design usually involves the selection of two or three control sampling locations to measure possible contaminants migrating onto the site from adjacent sources not involved in the study The selection of control locations is similar to the selection of other sampling locations except that upstream or upgradient control samples are expected to be unaffected by site contaminants Because of the biased nature of an authoritative design the degree of representativeness is difficult to estimate Authoritative samples are not intended to reflect the average characteristics of the site Since determining representativeness is not an issue with this type of design duplicate samples designed to estimate variability are not normally collected However split samples
469. on file that is near the particular site being investigated Several state or federal agencies which are also good sources of useful data include State highway or transportation departments State geodetic or land surveying offices State natural or water resources bureaus State geological surveys NOAA National Geodetic Survey United States Geological Survey Corps of Engineers Department of the Army Soil Conservation Service Tennessee Valley Authority Bureau of Land Management EISOPQAM 15 2 November 2001 When the exact locations of sampling points or other physical features at a site are needed surveying methods must be based on existing control data If necessary the site property boundary survey legal description and any physical property corners or monuments must be located by a professional Registered Land Surveyor RLS Often before or when the surveyor is at a site the registered surveyor could be requested to set control data points for latter use Ata minimum the registered land surveyor would be asked to establish at least two control points upon which the elevation and the State Plane coordinates are set The data on control points shall be of at least third order accuracy The control points will be permanent markers set at locations that are unlikely to be disturbed by future site activities If no existing control data exists in the site vicinity two arbitrary points may be established at a pe
470. on in the left LCD display The new cell constant will now be shown in the meter C display right LCD display Document the readings before proceeding EISOPQAM 16 3 November 2001 Procedures 1 Collect the sample check and record its temperature If possible allow the sample to come to room temperature 23 to 27 C 2 Correct the instrument s temperature adjustment to the temperature of the sample if required 3 Immerse the probe in the sample keeping it away from the sides and bottom of the container It is important that the center portion of the probe be wetted by the sample 4 Allow meter to stabilize Record the results in a log book 5 Rinse probe with de ionized water Units The Orion Model 140 conductivity meter has automatic temperature compensation and will read out directly in umhos cm corrected to 25 C If another meter is used that is not temperature correcting a correction must be applied If the sample temperature is below 25 C add 296 of the reading per degree If the temperature is above 25 C subtract 2 of the reading per degree Results should be reported to the nearest ten 10 units for readings below 1 000 4mohs cm 25 C and to the nearest one hundred 100 units for reading above 1 000 umohs cm 25 C 16 4 Hydrogen Ion Concentration pH The pH is defined as the negative logarithm of the effective hydrogen ion concentration For routine work use a pH meter accurate and reproducible to 0 1 pH
471. on level in the initial survey Adaptive cluster sampling is a beneficial design for sites where a contaminant of concern is sparsely distributed but highly concentrated Simple random or systematic grid sampling can be used in conjunction with adaptive cluster sampling designs EISOPQAM 5 7 November 2001 5 4 General Considerations for Sampling Designs Priorto commencing work on any project the objective of the study in terms of the purpose the data generated is to serve should be known Some examples of uses for which data are generated include e RCRA waste identification investigations e RCRA or Superfund screening investigations presence or absence of contaminants e Superfund Remedial Investigations Removal Actions or Feasibility Studies e Surface water and sediment studies e Wastewater treatment plant evaluations Monitoring investigations e UST UIC investigations and e Special environmental characterization investigations The purpose of data collection is to meet the objectives of the investigation The process of designing an investigation typically follows a logical series of steps Proper evaluation of these steps will greatly enhance the project leader s ability to choose a design which adequately serves the purpose of the study The DQO process may not be strictly followed but the elements of the process are always considered during study planning These elements include e State the environmental problem e Co
472. on maps Generally surveying can be divided into two categories or classes horizontal control surveying and vertical control surveying Horizontal control surveying pertains to the measurement of the relative difference in the horizontal location of two or more control points Vertical control surveying involves the measurement of the relative difference in vertical location or elevation of two or more control points and is treated separately in Section 15 3 This Section discusses the standard procedures techniques and methods used to survey or locate sample points or site features horizontally Basic surveying and field geology textbooks should be consulted for more detailed information on this topic See References 1 2 and 3 Several field methods from traditional or classical methods to Global Positioning System GPS techniques may be used to horizontally locate sample points or various site features during site investigations Traditional traverse methods utilize horizontal angle or direction azimuth bearing measurements and calculated horizontal distances from a starting point to a second point and from the second to the third and so forth to the last point The last point in a traverse is usually a return to the starting EISOPQAM 15 1 November 2001 point thus making a closed loop During a traverse for site control sample points or site features may be located by employing various techniques at the traverse control points i e
473. on of bubbles when filling the bottle Duplicate analyses should agree within 0 1 mg l Units Units should be reported in mgl Limitations e Dissolved inorganic salts are a factor with the performance of DO probes Note Make note if inorganic salts are present in levels that may represent possible interferences e Dissolved oxygen ME probes are temperature sensitive and temperature compensation is normally provided by the manufacturer see manufacturer s instructions EISOPQAM 16 9 November 2001 16 8 Total Residual Chlorine Meter s available e Pocket colorimeter 8 Specific ion electrode e Hach DR 100 Colorimetric DPD kit n n diethyl p phenylenediamine DPD may be used for natural waters or waters treated with chlorine Note The Hach reagents and colorimeter or spectrophotometer are accepted by the US EPA for NPDES monitoring if used in accordance with approved procedures The pre printed calibration scales provided by the manufacturer are based on factors developed under ideal conditions and are only acceptable if verified The calibration scale must be initially verified using multiple 4 5 standards and a blank The calibration scale or curve must be verified at least daily using a blank and one high and one low standard representative of the linear working range These standard checks must agree within 10 of the original scale or a new curve must be prepared Verification data should be recorded and
474. on of the calibration process The automated calibration is initiated using the front panel control The steps are outlined as follows From the MAIN MENU screen use the arrow keys to highlight CALIBRATE and press lt Enter gt to start the calibration From the CALIBRATE MENU screen highlight TYPE and press Enter Select the SOURCE option From the CALIBRATE MENU screen highlight CALIB and press Enter From the CALIBRATE CYCLE screen highlight FULL and press lt Enter gt From the CALIBRATE CALIB screen highlight BOTH and press Enter It is important to routinely verify the permeation rate of the Tekran 2357A s internal permeation tube A manual calibration procedure must be performed to certify the internal permeation rate The manual calibration procedure utilizes the well documented vapor pressure of mercury to produce a primary standard When elemental mercury is enclosed in a sealed chamber at a fixed temperature it reaches equilibrium and a gaseous concentration of mercury of fixed concentration is present The amount of mercury contained per unit volume at a given temperature is a well known function that is available in tables To simplify this calibration the Tekran model 2505 mercury vapor calibration unit is used It is typically operated at 15 C it should be maintained at least two degrees below ambient to prevent condensation of mercury on the syringes The User s Manual provides much more detail than
475. onally an X will be placed in the Protective Equipment section All secondary containing pails will be secured in the vehicles while transporting the samples from the field to the laboratory for analyses In addition each pail should indicate when protective equipment is recommended to handle the actual waste sample material 13 7 Particle Size Reduction Particle size reduction of waste samples is periodically required in order to complete an analytical scan or the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure TCLP test Samples that may require particle size reduction include slags bricks glass mirror cullet wire etc Method 1311 TCLP states Particle size reduction is required unless the solid has a surface area per gram of material equal to or greater than 3 1 cm or is smaller than 1 cm in its narrowest dimension i e capable of passing through a 9 5 mm 0 375 inch standard sieve If the surface area is smaller or the particle size larger than described above prepare the solid portion of the waste for extraction by crushing cutting or grinding the waste to a surface area or particle size as described above 55 FR 26990 The method also states that the surface criteria are meant for filamentous paper cloth etc waste materials and that Actual measurement of the surface area is not required nor is it recommended Also the loss of volatile organic compounds could be significant during particle size reduction
476. oncentrations exceed 60 of the primary or 100 of the secondary NAAQS PM Ambient concentrations are less than 80 of the NAAQS SO Ambient concentrations are less than 60 of the primary or 100 of the secondary NAAQS EISOPQAM 2 21 November 2001 TABLE 2 10 2 POPULATION LEVELS FOR WHICH NAMS MONITORING OF POLLUTANTS OTHER THAN PM AND SO IS REQUIRED POLLUTANT POPULATION 500 000 500 000 200 000 1 000 000 N A 35 50 sites total a The minimum is also a SLAMS requirement NAMS monitoring is also required whenever the NAAQS has been exceeded in any of the last eight quarters TABLE 2 10 3 SUMMARY of SPATIAL SCALES USUALLY NEEDED for SLAMS and NAMS Scale Appropriate for SLAMS Spatial Scale wai Exe ep coe e Nigoh x x x x x x x i a qox oer xx omues x x x x x Neighborhood Lm cio xus p p o pes omues o ooo poo o jo jo X Only permitted if representative of many such micro scale environments in a residential district for middle scale at least two Either urban or regional scale for regional transport sites EISOPQAM 2 22 November 2001 Monitoring Methodology The monitoring methods that must be used in NAMS SLAMS are specified in 40 CFR 58 Appendix C hereafter referred to as Appendix C Reference methods or their equivalent must be used for all regulatory purposes An analyzer with a nonconforming range greater than twice the upper limit may be used i
477. one of the above methods and a reference to the appropriate multiplication of that volume i e a minimum three well volumes clearly identified as a purge volume goal With respect to the ground water chemistry an adequate purge is achieved when the pH specific conductance and temperature of the ground water have stabilized and the turbidity has either stabilized or is below 10 Nephelometric Turbidity Units NTUs twice the Primary Drinking Water Standard of 5 NTUs Although ten NTUs is normally considered the minimum goal for most ground water sampling objectives 1 NTU has been shown to be easily achievable and reasonable attempts should be made to reach this level Stabilization occurs when pH measurements remain constant within 0 1 Standard Unit SU specific conductance varies no more that 10 percent and the temperature is constant for at least three consecutive readings There are no criteria establishing how many sets of measurements are adequate for the determination of stability If the calculated purge volume is small the measurements should be taken frequently to provide a sufficient number of measurements to evaluate stability If the purge volume is large measurements taken every 15 minutes may be sufficient If after three well volumes have been removed the chemical parameters have not stabilized according to the above criteria additional well volumes up to five well volumes should be removed If the parameters have not stabi
478. one to pull and another to reel in the hose and power lead E 4 2 Safety l Place the generator on dry ground or plastic sheeting as far as practical from the well in the down wind direction and ground it Several grounding kits consisting of a roll of copper wire and a grounding rod are available Wet the ground thoroughly with tap water at the grounding location if dry and drive the grounding rod several feet into the ground Inspect the electrical extension cord as well as the lead to the pump for frays breaks exposed wiring etc Check the head space of the well for the presence of an explosive atmosphere with a combustible gas meter Wear rubber boots to insulate against shock hazards If purge water is not collected direct the discharge away from the well and generator preferably downgradient of the area Make sure that the generator is set to the proper voltage Do not add gasoline or oil to the generator while it is running Carry the generator gasoline and oil in a trailer dedicated to this type of equipment Do not haul this equipment in the back of any passenger vehicle or with any sampling equipment or containers E 4 3 Pre loadout Checkout Procedures 1 Check the oil and gasoline in the generator making sure that there is enough gasoline to test the generator prior to loading onto the trailer Take the generator outside and start Place a load on the generator if possible Inspect the pump and all h
479. onitored i e body temperature blood pressure and heart rate If deemed necessary by the site safety officer workers will be fitted with heat stress monitors Monitoring of vital signs will be mandatory during modified Level C or higher level operations when ambient temperatures exceed 80 F e Adequate shade will be provided to shelter workers from direct exposure to the sun during rest periods e Work teams will be rotated so that an individuals time on stressful jobs is minimized e Field personnel are encouraged to maintain their physical fitness Intake of diuretics coffee or alcohol should be minimized prior to field work Cold Stress Exposure to extreme cold can result in hypothermia Field work during periods of low temperatures and high winds should be conducted to minimize the possibility of hypothermia The following protocols are to be followed e Workers will dress as warmly as possible using the principle of layering their clothing to maximize protection e Gloves should be worn when handling metal equipment e At the discretion of the SSO work tours will be limited to minimize exposure to the cold Warm shelter will be made available for workers during breaks Use of vehicles for warm shelter is discouraged due to the possibility of carbon monoxide exposure The SSO will carefully observe workers for signs of hypothermia frostbite EISOPQAM 4 14 November 2001 Site Control Site control serves to minimize
480. ons and Quality Control Manual ASBOQCM The senior analyst shall notify the Project Leader as results become available Final analytical data shall be reported directly to the Project Leader after all QA QC procedures have been completed Any analytical problems or deviations concerning holding times analytical procedures etc shall be reported to the Project Leader When requested by the Case Agent this information shall be documented in a memorandum stamped CONFIDENTIAL and transmitted to the Project Leader who shall immediately notify the Case Agent A copy of the memorandum shall also be immediately sent to the Technical Coordinator and the Case Agent as requested F 7 Final Report The Project Leader is responsible for preparing a final investigative report A draft report shall be prepared for internal review by all core team members and the Case Agent The draft report may also be reviewed by other appropriate staff e g supervisors and technical experts All draft reports shall be destroyed upon completion of the final report A final investigative report will be prepared by the Project Leader This report shall be limited to factual information and observations concerning SESD activities e g sampling analyses etc but shall not contain conclusions recommendations or personal opinions At the request of the Case Agent a memorandum will be prepared containing conclusions recommendations or personal opinions When this i
481. ons by the defense Analytical Requirements an estimate of the number of samples to be collected required analyses and which laboratory s will analyze the samples Logistics an estimate of manpower requirements and a general description of specific functions of project personnel special equipment and vehicles to be used use of mobile laboratories how samples are to be transported to the laboratory etc and Safety Plan a safety contingency plan will be included F 5 Field Investigation The field investigation will be conducted under the direct supervision of the Project Leader and the general supervision of the Case Agent responsible for conducting the investigation SESD will endeavor to meet all objectives set forth in the study plan and any on scene changes or additional activities requested by the Case Agent The SESD Project Leader or the SESD Safety Officer shall have sole responsibility for enforcing the provisions of the safety plan The study will be conducted conforming to the requirements and objectives of the study plan and appropriate Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals Any deviations from the study plan or the appropriate Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals must be approved and documented by the Project Leader Any deviations must produce evidence which can withstand objections by the defense During the field study the Project Leader or designee is responsible for
482. ooler will be opened and one plugged DNPH cartridge will be removed wearing clean polyethylene latex or nylon gloves and the two end plugs will be removed from each end of the DNPH cartridge which will be immediately placed on the sampling train If it is the SKC brand the glass ends of the tubes must be broken off A trip blank will be placed in a sampler enclosure at one of the sites for the duration of the sampling event The sampler will be manually turned on and allowed to run for five minutes An initial flowrate should be recorded on the sample data sheet The timer should be set to turn the sampler on and off at the desired times The operator should retrieve and secure the sample as soon as possible after the sampling period ends The sampler should manually be turned on and allowed to run for five minutes and a final flowrate and the elapsed time from the time meter should be recorded on the sample data sheet The exposed DNPH cartridge will then be removed from the sampling train wearing clean polyethylene latex or nylon gloves The two end caps will be placed on the ends of the DNPH cartridge The DNPH cartridge will be placed back into the cooler The same procedure is to be followed at each sampling site e At the end of each day on which the samples are collected the exposed DNPH cartridges shall be either placed in a refrigerator for storage overnight or stored in the cooler The cooler will be used to transport the samples
483. oorair point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Munieffwater point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Indeffwater point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Periphyton point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Tissue point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Lithology point Sample_ID text 30 Station_ID text 30 Fence line Type text 30 Road line Name text 30 Railroad line Name text 30 Stream line Name text 30 Structure area Type text 30 TEMPLATE 3 Data Dictionary Transfer To Data Logger or Geoexplorer II d EISOPQAM 15 12 Connect the GPS unit to the COMI port of the PC using the appropriate cable that is attached to the COMI port of the data logger or in the case of the Geoexplorer II attached to the input port Select File Transfer in the data logger Asset Surveyor software main menu or Data Transfer in the Geoexplorer II main menu In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select Utilities then Data Transfer Note Device should be set to GIS Data logger and Data Type should be set to Data Dictionary Under Available Files highlight the data dictionary name and under Selected Files choose Add Under Direction choose Send Then click Transfer Once the data dictionary has been transferred Close the Data Transfer window and exit the data logger or Geoexplorer II Note Several data d
484. ooth flowing water stream at moderate pressure without splashing should be used The sample should be collected without changing the water flow It may be appropriate to reduce the flow for the volatile organic compounds aliquot to minimize sample agitation EISOPQAM 8 1 November 2001 Occasionally samples are collected to determine the contribution of system related variables e g transmission pipes water coolers water heaters holding tanks pressurization tanks etc to the quality of potable water supplies In these cases it may be necessary to insure that the water source has not been used for a specific time interval e g over a weekend or a three or four day holiday period Sample collection may consist of collecting a sample of the initial flush collecting a sample after several minutes and collecting another sample after the system being investigated has been completely purged When sampling for bacterial content the sample container should not be rinsed before use due to possible contamination of the sample container or removal of the thiosulfate dechlorinating agent if used When filling any sample container care should be taken that no splashing drops of water from the ground or sink do not enter into either the bottle or cap When sampling at a water treatment plant samples are often collected from the raw water supply and the treated water after chlorination Obtain the name s of the resident or water supply owner ope
485. operated to withdraw a sample from the water or wastewater stream If a pump is used it is imperative that all components of the pump that come in contact with the sample are properly cleaned Appendix B to ensure the integrity of the sample In general samples are manually collected by first selecting a location in the wastestream that is well mixed Section 9 1 then dipping the container in the water or wastewater stream so the mouth of the container faces upstream The container should not be overfilled if preservatives are present in the container EISOPQAM 9 5 November 2001 9 6 Special Sample Collection Procedures 9 6 1 Organic Compounds and Metals Trace organic compounds and metals detection limits are usually in the parts per billion or parts per trillion range so extreme care must be exercised to ensure sample integrity All containers composite bottles tubing etc used for sample collection for trace organic compounds and metals analyses should be prepared as described in Appendix B When possible the sample should be collected directly into the appropriate sample container If the material to be sampled cannot be physically reached an intermediate collection device may be used This should be a Teflon glass or stainless steel vessel on a pole or rope or Teflon tubing via a peristaltic type pump and a Teflon amp vacuum container attachment which converts a sample container into a vacuum container The device which is use
486. or most media If a particular media to be sampled is very light more sample may be required to obtain the necessary mass for the analysis 2 Container Type G Glass P Polyethylene E Encore C Cubitainer S Septum Seal A Amber W Whirl Pak NaHSO CH4OH HCl H SO NaOH HNO NA 4 Holding Time EISOPQAM Sufficient ice must be placed in the shipping transport container to ensure that ice is still present when the samples are received at the laboratory The proper amount of NaHSO Sodium Bisulfate is added to the sample container at the laboratory prior to sampling The proper amount of CHOH Methanol is added to the sample container at the laboratory prior to sampling HCI Hydrochloric Acid used as a preservative must be present at concentrations of 0 04 or less by weight pH about 1 96 or greater as specified in 40 CFR 136 3 Table IL footnote 3 The proper amount of HCl is added to the sample container at the laboratory prior to sampling H SO Sulfuric Acid used as a preservative must be present at concentrations of 0 35 or less by weight pH about 1 15 or greater as specified in 40 CFR 136 3 Table II footnote 3 Approximately 5 ml of the laboratory prepared preservative is added to the sample NaOH Sodium Hydroxide used as a preservative must be present at concentrations of 0 080 or less by weight pH about 12 30 or less as specified in 40 CFR 136 3 Table
487. organic analyses C 3 7 Bottle Siphons for Composite Containers Tubing should be rinsed with solvent and dried in the drying oven overnight before use The ends of the siphon should be capped with aluminum foil and or Teflon film for storage The tubing will be sealed in plastic and labeled The siphon should be flushed with sample thoroughly before use C 3 8 Reusable Teflon Composite Mixer Rods 1 Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to remove any particulate matter or surface film 2 Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water 3 Rinse equipment with at least a 10 percent nitric acid solution 4 Rinse equipment thoroughly with tap water 5 Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water 6 Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 7 Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and label When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to remove materials it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with Step 1 In extreme cases it may be necessary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step 1 If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures it shoul
488. ork areas where explosive flammable atmospheres could occur peristaltic pumps powered by 12 V batteries should not be used Close the sampling device or create a vacuum and slowly remove the sampling device from the tank Release the sample from the device into the sample container Repeat the procedure until a sufficient sample volume is obtained Solids Semi Solids Use a push tube bucket auger screw auger Mucksucker or if conditions permit a pneumatic hammer drill to obtain the sample Carefully extrude the sample from the sampling device or use a clean stainless steel spoon to place the sample into containers for analyses 9 Close the tank when sampling is complete Segregate contaminated sampling equipment and investigative derived wastes IDW containing incompatible materials as determined by the screening procedure Step 6 At a minimum contaminated equipment should be cleaned with laboratory detergent and rinsed with tap water prior to returning it from the field IDW should be managed according to Section 5 15 and Region 4 s Contaminated Media Policy 13 5 Miscellaneous Contaminated Materials Sampling may be required of materials or equipment e g documents building materials equipment etc to determine whether or not various surfaces are contaminated by hazardous constituents or to evaluate the effectiveness of decontamination procedures Wipe or swab samples may be taken on non absorbent smooth surfaces such as m
489. orkers will not attempt to scrub the site workers suits above chest height This procedure is to prevent the cleaning solution carrying contaminants from splashing into the open facial area of the impermeable suit When scrubbing the impermeable suit and SCBA equipment below chest level decontamination workers will apply water from a pump sprayer and use long handle brushes which have not come into contact with the water in the washtub bucket Following this step decontamination workers will clean areas ofthe impermeable suit and SCBA above chest level as necessary with paper towels wetted with the cleaning solution from the pump sprayers Immediately following this step the decontamination workers will discard their outer gloves and don clean ones Areas above chest level of the site workers will then be rinsed with clean water from a pump sprayer 2 Once cleared from the first decontamination washtub bucket area site workers will then step into the rinse water washtub bucket At this location decontamination workers will thoroughly scrub the site workers boots and gloves with water from the washtub bucket using a long handle brush The site worker will then be rinsed with water from a pump sprayer Following this the decontamination workers will thoroughly scrub site workers below chest level only with a long handle brush which is not allowed to contact the contaminated water in the washtub bucket Site workers will be rinsed a second time with
490. orn whenever handling any of the DNPH cartridges in the extraction laboratory during preparation for shipment during field set up in the field during preparation for return shipment and in the laboratory during preparation for analysis and during analysis EISOPQAM 14 7 November 2001 e All padding material shall be either clean tissue paper or polyethylene air bubble padding Never use polyurethane foam cardboard or newspaper as padding material DNPH cartridges which have been properly prepared for shipment should be shipped in coolers with eutectic salt packs Blue Ice e Chain of custody shall be maintained for all samples Aminimum of one trip blank shall be transported per one to ten samples collected Due to shelf life limitations only the number of DNPH cartridges needed for a maximum of 180 days including trip blanks and extra DNPH cartridges for breakage should be ordered at any one time e On the date of shipment or when loading out for a study the Air Monitoring Staff will remove the capped DNPH cartridges from the refrigerator in the Air Laboratory e An appropriate amount of packing material shall be placed in the shipping container to prevent breakage of the glass DNPH tubes The DNPH tubes should be shipped in coolers containing eutectic salt packs e g Blue Ice to maintain a temperature of approximately 4 C The DNPH cartridges shall be shipped the same day they are packed At each sampling location the c
491. ortion of a data file was not corrected with the real time broadcast signal a base station file must be obtained in order for all positions in the file to be differentially corrected EISOPQAM 15 14 November 2001 d d Template 9 OOo oO U D D LLLLL In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select File then Open Select the data file s to look at then Ok After a brief scan of the features one by one identify the features and file name s that need a base station file for differential correction then Close the file s Obtain base station file s from a base station as close to the site as possible and that match the month date and UTC hour of the data file s exactly and place in the Base subdirectory of the Project directory in Pathfinder Office software on the PC C Pfdata Project Base These can be obtained through modem internet email or disk via regular mail As in Template 5 with data files the base station files use a similar file naming convention and will identify the month date and UTC hour that the base station file was collected The following is the base station file naming convention CITY YEAR MONTH DATE HOUR UTC A 9 02 15 14 These websites are good starting points for base station files and cover our entire region http www ngs noaa gov CORS cors data html http www fs fed us database gps clickmap cbsmap htm ftp ftp dep state fl us pub Once base sation files are obtained that match
492. ose Analyte free water should be stored in cleaned containers that can be closed when not being used It may be applied from squeeze bottles Organic analyte free water should be stored in cleaned glass Teflon or stainless steel containers prior to use It may be applied using Teflon squeeze bottles or directly from the system Nitric acid should be kept in the glass container it is received in and placed in squeeze bottles prior to application C 1 3 Disposal of Spent Cleaning Solutions Procedures for safe handling and disposition of spent cleaning solutions including washwater rinse water spent acid solutions and spent solvents are as follows Washwater Since equipment is decontaminated before its return to the FEC the washwater may be disposed in the sanitary drain in the washroom When large equipment vehicles augers etc is washed outside it may wash onto the ground without recovery of the washwater EISOPQAM C 2 November 2001 Rinsewater Since equipment is decontaminated before its return to the FEC the rinsewater may be disposed in the sanitary drain in the washroom When large equipment vehicles augers etc is rinsed outside it may go onto the ground without recovery Nitric Acid Nitric acid cleaning solutions are to be diluted to a pH greater than 2 0 and flushed down the sanitary drain in the washroom If used outdoors this material should be captured and diluted to a pH greater than 2 0
493. oses rope and electrical cord and connections In particular open the water reservoir on the bottom of the pump and check to make sure that it is full of water If not using the syringe in the controller case top the reservoir off with organic analyte free water Return the pump to its operating vertical position and shake Re open the reservoir and add additional water if needed to top it off a second time E 4 4 Operation 1 Place the pump the controller and enough hose for the measured well depth on plastic sheeting next to the well Set the generator in a dry safe location downwind of the well but do not plug the cord from the controller into the generator After checking the head space of the well for safety lower the pump power lead and hose into the well placing the pump approximately five feet into the water column EISOPQAM E 7 November 2001 3 Start the generator then connect the power cord from the pump Make sure the proper voltage has been selected 4 After starting the pump closely observe operation to determine if drawdown is occurring in the well If the water level is not pulled down raise the pump in the water column one to two feet from the top of the water column and continue to purge If the water level drops however lower the pump to keep up with the drawdown Do not allow the pump to run dry This condition will create a thermal overload and shut the pump down While this may not necessarily damage
494. ote The intermediate stock should be stable for approximately 5 days if kept cool and away from light e Potassium permanganate calibration standards Prepare calibration standards from the intermediate stock solution and or KMnO calibration standard solutions for each day of use The calibration standards are good for about 2 hours and will fade rapidly within 15 minutes if chlorine demand free water is not used Calibration Standard mg l mls of Intermediate Stock 100 mls 100 of 05 mpl std 100 of L0 mgl 50 of 10 mpl 100 of 10 mpl 209 o 10 mg Procedures for total chlorine concentrations ranging between 0 2 mg l 1 Fillaclean 2 5 cm cell to the 10 ml mark with a sample Note The sample should have a pH between 6 and 7 SU If necessary adjust with 1N sulfuric acid or 1N sodium hydroxide 2 Open a DPD total chlorine powder packet and add the contents to the sample cell 3 Replace the cap on the cell and swirl to mix Note Itis not necessary for all of the particles to dissolve to obtain an accurate reading The pH of the sample containing the DPD buffer packet must be between 6 2 and 6 5 SU 4 Allow atleast 3 minutes but not more than 6 minutes before moving to the next step see and follow manufacturer s instructions for reaction times The reaction times for standards and samples should be as close to each other as possible 5 Open the light shield turn the right set knob fully clockwise and place the 1 cm ce
495. otential constituent contribution to the ground water In cases where a driven casing is used or a high strength outer casing is needed carbon steel may be acceptable in non corrosive aquifers This outer casing should have threaded connections Welding casing is not an acceptable practice unless all relevant safety issues have been adequately addressed The minimum nominal casing size for most permanent monitoring wells will be 2 Where a complete program of installation monitoring and abandonment is being designed smaller wells may be installed if suitable purging and sampling equipment for the smaller diameter wells can be specified and obtained The length of well screens in permanent monitoring wells should be long enough to effectively monitor the interval or zone of interest However well screens designed for long term monitoring purposes should normally not be less than 5 feet in length Well screens less that 5 feet long are acceptable in only temporary monitoring wells where ground water samples are collected for screening purposes 6 6 3 Filter Pack Materials The filter pack materials should consist of clean rounded to well rounded hard insoluble particles of siliceous composition The required grain size distribution or particle sizes of the filter pack materials should be selected based upon a sieve analysis conducted on the soil samples collected from the aquifer materials and or the formation s to be monitored Filter pack mater
496. other site features See Reference 5 EISOPQAM 15 10 November 2001 TEMPLATE 1 Planning To Capture GPS Data d d d d Training in the use of GPS equipment is critical to the success of a field project The objectives and accuracy requirements should be established and factors that might limit the use of the GPS equipment should be assessed Check the availability of the GPS equipment and test it prior to going in the field in order to ensure that it works properly and meets the requirements of the field project Decide what features points lines or areas and their attributes at a site that locational information will be captured with GPS equipment and create a Data Dictionary on the PC with Pathfinder Office software Transfer the Data Dictionary to Asset Surveyor on the Data logger Check the availability of horizontal control point data at or near the site for GPS equipment precision and accuracy check If none exists remember to log at least four points that surround the site and that can be seen in aerial photographs or topographic maps for checking and GIS georeferencing Check the availability of base station coverage if the project is not dependant on collecting real time data TEMPLATE 2 Creating A New Data Dictionary CULL In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select Data Dictionary Editor from the Utilities menu Select New to generate a new dictionary Enter the name of the new data dictionary and an
497. ould be addressed in the study plan To reduce the volume for transportation back to the FEC it may be necessary to compact the waste into a reusable container such as a 55 gallon drum EISOPQAM 5 38 November 2001 If the waste is from an active facility permission should be sought from the operator of the facility to place the non hazardous PPE disposable equipment and or paper cardboard wastes into the facilities dumpsters If necessary these materials may be placed into municipal dumpsters with the permission of the owner These materials may also be taken to a nearby permitted landfill On larger studies waste hauling services may be obtained and a dumpster located at the study site Non hazardous IDW may also be buried on site near the contamination source with the burial location noted in the field logbook Disposal of non hazardous IDW such as drill cuttings purge or development water decontamination washwater drilling muds etc should be specified in the approved study plan It is recommended that these materials be placed into a unit with an environmental permit such as a landfill or sanitary sewer These materials must not be placed into dumpsters If the facility at which the study is being conducted is active permission should be sought to place these types of IDW into the facilities treatment system It may be feasible to spread drill cuttings around the borehole or if the well is temporary to place the cuttings back into th
498. ove When code pseudorange is used with differential GPS this is either real time or post processed the position measurements will be less than 1 meter for both the Pathfinder Pro XR or Geoexplorer II Note the Pathfinder Pro XR is capable of real time differential GPS i e it has a beacon receiver built in while the Geoexplorer IL is not When carrier phase is employed both receiver data loggers can obtain sub meter accuracy for points to be logged only not waypoint navigation and it is necessary to occupy each point feature a minimum of 5 minutes So although the basic procedures are simple and easy some thought must be put into the planning of the data collection effort in order to define the features to be logged capitalize on the accuracy and to meet the objectives of the project All professional staff and field technicians must be trained in the use of the GPS equipment by qualified staff before using this equipment Specific procedures on the operation and setup of the GPS equipment are described in detail in the operations manuals for each of the instruments All instruments will be used consistent with the instructions contained within these manuals A copy of each of the manuals will be maintained by a designated person within the Region The following templates list the methods and procedures to be considered and performed if differential GPS procedures will be used to data log GPS positions or horizontally locate sampling points or
499. ove any particulate matter or surface film Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and label When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to remove materials it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with the first step In extreme cases it may be necessary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step 1 If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures it should be discarded C 2 3 Reusable Composite Sample and Organic Analyte Free Water Containers C3 C 3 1 C 3 2 These containers will be rinsed with organic analyte free water and the rinse water will be submitted to the Region 4 laboratory This activity may be conducted in the event of a special civil or criminal investigation Automatic Wastewater Sampling Equipment ISCOO and Other Automatic Samplers The exterior and accessible interior excluding the waterproof timing mechanism portions of the automatic samplers will be washed with soap and tap water then rinsed with tap water De
500. ove materials it may be necessary to rinse the containers several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with Step 1 Any bottles that have a visible film scale or discoloration remaining after this cleaning procedure shall also be discarded C 3 5 Plastic Reusable Composite Sample Containers 2700 5 gal 3700 4 gal 1 3v 6 Wash containers thoroughly with hot tap water and laboratory detergent using a bottle brush to remove particulate matter and surface film Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water Cap with aluminum foil or Teflon film Any plastic composite sample containers that have a visible film scale or other discoloration remaining after this cleaning procedure will be discarded EISOPQAM C 6 November 2001 C 3 6 ISCO 1680 2700 and 3700 Glass Sequential Bottles for GC MS Analyses 1 Rinse with 10 percent nitric acid 2 Rinse thoroughly with tap water 3 Wash in dishwasher at wash cycle using laboratory detergent cycle followed by tap and analyte free water rinse cycles 4 Rinse twice with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 5 Replace in covered automatic sampler base cover with aluminum foil for storage and mark the base as follows Cleaned for
501. oves will be worn during all cleaning operations e Solvent rinsing operations will be conducted in the open never in a closed room Noeating smoking drinking chewing or any hand to mouth contact should be permitted during cleaning operations B 1 6 Handling of Cleaned Equipment After field cleaning equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean gloves to prevent re contamination In addition the equipment should be moved away preferably upwind from the cleaning area to prevent recontamination If the equipment is notto be immediately re used it should be covered with plastic sheeting or wrapped in aluminum foil to prevent re contamination The area where the equipment is kept prior to re use must be free of contaminants B 2 Field Equipment Cleaning Procedures Sufficient clean equipment should be transported to the field so that an entire study can be conducted without the need for field cleaning However this is not possible for some specialized items such as portable power augers Little Beaver well drilling rigs soil coring rigs and other large pieces of field equipment In addition particularly during large scale studies it is not practical or possible to transport all of the precleaned field equipment required into the field In these instances sufficient pre cleaned equipment should be transported to the field to perform at least one days work The following procedures are to be utilized when equipment mu
502. ow subsurface soil samples Surface soils are generally classified as soils between the ground surface and 6 to 12 inches below ground surface The shallow subsurface interval may be considered to extend from approximately 12 inches below ground surface to a site specific depth at which sample collection using manual methods becomes impractical Surface Soils Surface soils may be collected with a wide variety of equipment if constructed of appropriate materials Spoons or hand augers are typically used to collect surface soil samples If a thick matted root zone 1s encountered at or near the surface it should be removed before the sample is collected The collected soil is placed in a pan thoroughly mixed Section 5 13 8 and placed in the appropriate sample container s Section 12 4 contains specific procedures for collecting and handling soil samples for volatile organic compounds analysis Shallow Subsurface Soils Hand augers are the most common equipment used to collect shallow subsurface samples Typically 4 inch auger buckets with cutting heads are pushed and twisted into the ground then removed as the buckets are filled The auger holes are advanced one bucket at a time The practical depth of investigation using a hand auger depends upon the soil properties In sand augering is usually easily performed but the depth of collection is limited to the depth at which the sand begins to flow At this depth the bore hole will usually co
503. pending on the softness of the sediment Spreading occurs s when the sediment is pushed or moved to the side during the advancement of the core tube Compaction is when the sediment is being pushed downward as the core tune is advanced Both phenomenon can effect the physical integrity of core sample For instance the core tube may be advanced through the sediment to a depth of 36 inches but upon examination of the recovered core there is only 24 inches of sediment in the core tube EISOPQAM 11 3 November 2001 Vibratory Core Tube Drivers Vibracore facilitates sampling of soft or loosely sedimented saturated soil deposits with minimal compaction or spreading using lined or unlined core tubes It is designed for use with core tubes having nominal diameters ranging from 2 to 4 OD The Vibracore uses an electric motor to create vibration ranges from approximately 6 000 RPM to 8 000 RPM 100 Hz to 133 Hz depending on the resistance afforded by the soil the greater the resistance the higher the frequency The actual vibrational displacement of the Vibracore is on the order of a few tens of thousandths of an inch so essentially no mixing of the sediment within the tube occurs The vibrational energy tends to re orient the soil particles at the lower end of the core tube causing them to move out of the way of the advancing wall of the core tube and into a more efficient i e denser packing This action advances the core tube with minimal compact
504. permit specifically states that this is permissible The following methods are included only to enable the field investigator to make accurate flow estimates when necessary Volumetric Techniques Volumetric flow measurement techniques are among the simplest and most accurate methods for measuring flow These techniques basically involve the measurement of volume and or the measurement of time required to fill a container of known size Vessel Volumes The measurement of vessel volumes to obtain flow data is particularly applicable to batch wastewater discharges Accurate measurements of the vessel volumes and the frequency that they are dumped are all that is required An accurate tape to verify vessel dimensions and a stop watch are the only required field equipment The NPDES Compliance Inspection Manual 2 is a useful reference on the equations for calculating volumes of various containers Sump Pumps This measurement is made by observing the sump levels when the pumps cut on and off and calculating the volume contained between these levels This volume along with the number of pump cycles will give a good estimate of the daily wastewater flow The inspector must also account for the quantity of wastewater that flows into the sump during the pumping cycle Bucket and Stop Watch The bucket and stop watch technique is particularly useful for the measurement of small wastewater flows Itis accurate and easy to use The only equipment requi
505. physical evidence or any other document associated with a criminal investigation shall be disposed of without written permission from EPA s Criminal Investigations Division e Samples associated with routine inspections may be disposed of following approval from the project leader Sample tags will be discarded along with the samples 3 8 Field Operations Records Management System FORMS PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To introduce the procedure for streamlining sample documentation FORMS is a computer program designed to streamline the documentation required by SESD and or the Contract Laboratory Program CLP for sample identification and chain of custody Once the appropriate information is entered into the computer FORMS will generate stick on labels for the sample tags and sample containers CLP and will generate sample receipt forms and chain of custody records for the appropriate laboratory The advantages to this system include faster processing of samples and increased accuracy Accuracy is increased because the information is entered only once and consequently consistent for the tags bottle labels sample receipt forms and chain of custody records Operating instructions are available for use with the FORMS program EISOPQAM 3 11 November 2001 FIGURE 3 1 CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORM 66 9 i G 6 6 0 VV sjojdues Aq peureje1 Ados Molla sjejduJes oj paunga s Adoo apum Voye1oqe Aq peureje1 Adoo Yuld Aloyesoge 0 jue
506. pliance Monitoring Inspections 2 5 1 Introduction vues max Gowen ox ede ea enh CARI ENG ERE Res C Eg d 2 9 2 CWA Inspection Types scuioeenieexs tr RP EREROEEREREPQCRHRP ERI EE RES 2 5 3 Study Plans 3 4s ye ence yo E ee Gute qe d er E eee E dix E S ew E RSE 2 5 4 NPDES Compliance Inspection Reports 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 2 6 Superfund Investigations Technical Assistance and Overview Activities 2 6 1 Intr cuello bad esr eoeek oh eee eee OE ERR PN eee ee 2 6 2 Superfund Investigation Types 20 0 cece eee eens 2 6 3 Planning for Field Investigative Support 0 0 eee eee eee 2 6 4 Requests for Superfund Studies 0 0 eee eee eee 2 6 5 Investiedtion Study Plans 2vcus05sivudee EFE US EE Eee e sears eee 2 6 6 Investigation Reports 2 222 c02 60cbeebesedadeseaaeedtugeeeee RE RR A 2 7 RCRA Inspections Investigations and Overview Activities 2 7 1 Introduction 12s dokxdkR era as ri deRwa d ACT e ade AEE ER ERR aces 2 1 2 RCRA Investigation Types 2204254 seeeu debs Rs RR du ERRARE 2 7 3 Planning for Field Investigative Support llle 2 7 4 Requests for RCRA Studies duse ue eevee books er E x aaa ch E 2 1 5 Investigation Study Plans gas lt 2id s ends aseaake cider RR RM ex RECT RP ex 2 7 6 Investigation Repotiss coven cdd edes eue dxRelx eR dae EAM du ears 2 8 Underground Storage Tank UST Investigations 2 8 1 INN GCUCHION 65425646 64 02 oy te
507. pment Quality Control Procedures Field surveying methods using this equipment should be made only by those personnel who have been trained to use them AII field investigators must be trained and checked out in surveying procedures by qualified staff before using this equipment Each piece of field equipment as appropriate should be numbered and a log book should be kept containing all maintenance and calibrations made on the equipment The specific maintenance and calibration procedures found in Section 15 2 3 should be used for all equipment listed above 15 3 4 Procedures for Differential Leveling The level or instrument is set up by the instrument man at a location not more than 250 feet from the benchmark and at a height above the benchmark and the next point s The level is attached to the plate of the tripod by a fastening screw and the bubble in the bullseye level is centered or brought level by adjusting the three screw leveling heads accordingly Once the bullseye bubble is centered the level is rotated 90 degrees at a time and the horizontal level bubble is checked and brought level using the three screw leveling heads The levelis ready for use when after repeated rotations the bubble in the horizontal level remains exactly in the center or middle of its housing The rodman holds the rod as plumb vertical as possible on the benchmark so that the instrument man can read where the horizontal cross hair in the telescope of the l
508. pment for the investigation Comments Are investigative sampling personnel classified as to the type of investigations they can conduct Comments Have investigative sampling personnel had comprehensive physicals Comments Do investigative sampling personnel participate in a medical monitoring program Comments Give a general evaluation of the activities observed during the overview and note any other comments or observations Comments EISOPQAM 2 50 November 2001 EXHIBIT 2 3 STATE PROGRAM EVALUATION HAZARDOUS WASTE FIELD ACTIVITIES RCRA or CERCLA PART 1 FIELD ACTIVITY STAFFING Description of Field Activity Field Activity Personnel Staffing NAME s TRAINING EXPERIENCE Field Safety Program Personnel categorized as to activity and Training Ww Does a formal safety training program exist Does a formal safety training tracking system exist Does a formal medical monitoring program exist Safety Training In House Outside EPA Received Safety Program Needs Field Activity Adequately Staffed to meet Existing RCRA or CERCLA Inspection and Investigation Needs Adequate Inadequate Projected Staffing Needs EISOPQAM 2 51 November 2001 PART 2 FIELD OPERATING PROCEDURES Does a standard operating procedures manual exist or is one being prepared Comments Are inspection schedules and study plans prepared Comments Are these inspections and studies coordinated with the lab Comments 4 Add
509. point the PRT system has been installed and is ready for sampling If the sample can not be collected immediately the end of the tubing should be capped PRT System Sampling Methodology Soil gas samples may be collected from the installed PRT system using several methods These are listed below Cannister Sampling After purging the PRT system tubing to introduce representative soil gas into the system an evacuated SUMMA cannister is attached using a Swagelok or other suitable secure connection After connection the valve on the SUMMA cannister is opened pulling soil gas from the exposed soil interval into the cannister Continuous Sampling Continuous sampling may be conducted using appropriate analytical instrumentation Special Considerations for Sampling The tubing used to complete the PRT system should be Teflon As most soil gas sampling will be conducted to investigate the presence or extent of organic compounds Teflon tubing is required to ensure the integrity of the sample 19 1 3 Geoprobe Permanent Soil Gas Implants Long term soil gas sampling may be conducted using permanent soil gas sampling implants installed with the Geoprobe Stainless steel implants may be installed at any depth achievable by the Geoprobe and may be installed in 1 0 inch and 1 25 inch diameter probe rod in custom lengths using 6 inch 152 mm or 21 inch 533 mm screens which can be connected in any combination The screens are
510. ppropriate and cap 5 Store in a contaminant free area EISOPQAM C 15 November 2001 C 6 5 Plastic Bottles for ICP Analytes These procedures are to be used only if the supply of pre cleaned certified sample bottles is disrupted procedures The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper implementation of these When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared they should be cleaned in standard sized lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5 14 1 2 Wash bottles and caps in hot tap water with soap Rinse both with 10 nitric acid solution Rinse three times with analyte free water Invert bottles and dry in contaminant free environment Cap bottles Store in contaminant free area EISOPQAM C 16 November 2001 APPENDIX D SAMPLE SHIPPING PROCEDURES D 1 Introduction Samples collected during field investigations or in response to a hazardous materials incident must be classified prior to shipment as either environmental or hazardous materials samples In general environmental samples include drinking water most groundwater and ambient surface water soil sediment treated municipal and industrial wastewater effluent biological specimens or any samples not expected to be contaminated with high levels of hazardous materials Samples collected from process wastewater streams drums bulk storage tanks soil sediment or water samples from areas suspec
511. prehensive Ground Water Monitoring Evaluation CME The CME is an overall review of a facility s compliance with all applicable RCRA requirements to determine adequacy of the ground water monitoring system It includes an on site examination of records and other documents and an evaluation of the facility s compliance with applicable RCRA requirements Also evaluated is the effectiveness of the ground water monitoring system and the facility s hydrogeological conditions Sampling and analysis of the ground water are usually conducted Guidance for conducting CMEBES is included in the RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Guidance Document 6 RCRA Facility Assessment RFA The RFA is an agency lead activity which is the first step in a corrective action program The purpose of the RFA is to identify known and or probable releases of hazardous wastes or other constituents at solid waste management units SWMUS and at previously unaddressed regulated units It includes a desk top review of information submitted by the owner operator to EPA and State Agencies The RFA also consists of an on site visit and potentially a subsequent sampling investigation confirmatory sampling to determine whether or not releases of hazardous wastes or constituents have occurred Guidance for conducting the RFA is in the RCRA Facility Assessment Guidance 7 Case Development Investigation Evaluation CDIE These include all RCRA field investigations other than C
512. procedures are to be used C 2 1 Teflon and Glass 1 Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to remove any particulate matter or surface film 2 Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water 3 Rinse equipment with 10 percent nitric acid solution Small and awkward equipment such as vacuum bottle inserts and well bailer ends may be soaked in the nitric acid solution instead of being rinsed with it Fresh nitric acid solution should be prepared for each cleaning session 4 Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water 5 Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 6 Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a tab to allow for easy removal Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and label When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to remove materials it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide grade acetone hexane or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with the first step In extreme cases it may be necessary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step 1 If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures it should be discarded EISOPQAM C 4 November 2001 C 2 2 Stainless Steel or Steel 1 Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to rem
513. quired Situations where the distribution of contaminants is strongly non random heterogeneous distributions are the most difficult to plan for and characterize Composite samples should consist of five to nine aliquots per sample located on compass points within the grid cell Greater than nine aliquots per sample can result in dilution of fairly high concentrations down to a value below the analytical detection limits Less than 5 aliquots may limit the representativeness of the sample with no added value over a single grab sample within the grid cell A certain number of samples are collected 10 percent of the grid cells is often selected during the investigation for variability determinations based on rotating the aliquot distribution pattern on the points of the compass within the grid cell EISOPQAM 5 13 November 2001 Surface vs Sub Surface Samples The two main considerations for sub surface soil samples are contaminant mobility and type of deposition A contaminant that is relatively immobile in soil will naturally be found in the same area in which it was deposited Mobile contaminants require specialized consideration of the likely extent of their migration in order to determine sub surface soil sampling locations and depths Airborne deposition of mobile contaminants normally require a considerable amount of sub surface soil sampling to determine their extent in a systematic design 5 6 Ground Water Sampling Designs Sampling design
514. quirements skill needs laboratory support etc The Project Leader shall discuss the technical and workload requirements with his her immediate supervisor A core team shall then be selected which will eventually conduct the study coordinate analytical support and or provide other technical support When required additional staff will be assigned from other Sections or Branches with the approval of the appropriate Branch Chief or SESD Director Once the core team has been selected initial planning for the investigation shall begin under the direction of the Project Leader and in concert with the Case Agent F 4 Project Planning After the appropriate or available background material has been obtained specific assignments will be given to each member of the core team for development of a study plan Concurrently the Project Leader shall discuss analytical requirements and time frames with appropriate SESD Analytical Support Branch personnel The study plan and site safety plan shall be assembled under the direction of the Project Leader and submitted to the appropriate management and Case Agent for review and concurrence The time frame for receiving comments will depend upon the urgency of the investigation but shall not exceed 10 working days During emergencies an investigation may be conducted without the preparation of a detailed study plan However during these situations a memorandum shall be prepared by the Project Leader briefly desc
515. r inorganic constituent analyses C 5 7 Field Analytical Equipment Field instruments for in situ water analysis should be wiped with a clean damp cloth The probes on these instruments pH conductivity DO etc should be rinsed with analyte free water and air dried Any desiccant in these instruments should be checked and replaced if necessary each time the equipment is cleaned C 5 8 Ice Chests and Shipping Containers Ice chests and reusable containers shall be washed with soap interior and exterior and rinsed with tap water and air dried before storage If in the opinion of the field investigators the container is severely contaminated with concentrated waste or other toxic material it shall be cleaned as thoroughly as possible rendered unusable and properly disposed C 5 9 Pressure Field Filtration Apparatus 1 Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush to remove any particulate matter or surface film 2 Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water 3 Rinse equipment with 10 percent nitric acid solution EISOPQAM C 11 November 2001 4 Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water 5 Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours 6 Assemble the apparatus and cap both the pressure inlet and sample discharge lines with aluminum foil to prevent contamination during storage 7 Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil Roll edges of foil into a
516. r after conducting appropriate air monitoring include building interiors if possible the field investigator s should attempt to ventilate the enclosed area by opening doors and windows trenches less than 3 feet deep low lying areas in tank farms tractor trailers sumps and behind barriers such as tall buildings or tanks At a minimum field investigators should use direct reading instruments such as the combustible gas indicator CGD oxygen meter and an organic vapor analyzer OVA to monitor the atmosphere in areas that may unexpectedly trap harmful vapors or have a depleted oxygen supply 4 3 5 Training Status Tracking System A computer system is used for tracking the status of required safety training for all personnel involved in hazardous waste field operations within the Division The system tracks the following safety training e Medical monitoring physical annual renewal 40 hour hazardous waste training no required renewal 8 hour refresher training annual renewal Cardio pulmonary resuscitation CPR certification annual renewal e First aid certification tri annual renewal Fire extinguisher operation annual renewal International Air Transport Association bi annual renewal and Hazard Communication no required renewal It is the responsibility of the Branch safety officer or their designee to notify field investigators or their supervisor when renewals of required training are due Notific
517. r inside a hollow stem auger or an open borehole after the auger s have been temporarily removed The spoon is driven with a 140 pound hammer through a distance of up to 24 inches and removed Continuous split spoon samplers may be used to obtain five foot long continuous samples approximately 3 to 5 inches in diameter These devices are placed inside a five foot section of hollow stem auger and advanced with the auger during drilling As the auger advances the central core of soil moves into the sampler and is retained Before the soil is placed in a pan itis necessary to remove the top several inches of soil to minimize the possibility of cross contamination of the sample from fall in of material from the upper portions of the hole Once the soil is placed in a pan it is thoroughly mixed Section 5 13 8 and placed in the appropriate sample container s Section 12 4 contains specific procedures for collecting and handling soil samples for volatile organic compounds analysis Direct Push Rigs This method uses a standard split spoon modified with a locking tip which keeps the spoon closed during the sampling push Upon arrival at the desired depth the tip is remotely released and the push continued During the push the released tip moves freely inside of the spoon as the soil core displaces it This technique is particularly beneficial at highly contaminated sites because no cuttings are produced The push rods are generally retrieved with
518. r pre prepared 40 mL vials may be used required for sub sampling collection The specific sample containers and the sampling tools required will depend upon the data quality objectives established for the site or sampling investigation The various methods are described below 12 4 2 Sampling Methodology Low Concentrations When total VOC concentrations in the soil sediment are expected to be less than 200 g kg the samples may be collected directly with the EnCore sampler or syringe If using the syringes the sample must be placed in the sample container 40 ml pre prepared vial immediately to reduce volatilization losses The 40 ml vials should contain 10 ml of organic free water for an un preserved sample or approximately 10 ml of organic free water and a preservative It is recommended that the 40 ml vials be prepared and weighed by the laboratory commercial sources are available which supply preserved and tared vials When sampling directly with the EnCore sampler the vial must be immediately capped A soil sediment sample for VOC analysis may also be collected with conventional sampling equipment as described in Sections 11 and 12 of this SOP A sample collected in this fashion must either be placed in the final sample container EnCore or 40 ml pre prepared vial immediately or the sample may be immediately placed into an intermediate sample container with no head space If an intermediate container usually 2 oz soil jar is
519. r should be attached to the nitrogen line after the regulator to remove any trace impurities Sample Collection The canister is connected to the liquid port of the refrigerant container NOTE Some refrigerant containers will need to be rolled or inverted to collect a liquid sample depending on their construction EISOPQAM Connect the pre evacuated sampling canister to the refrigerant container using the appropriate tubing e g 1 4 inch outside diameter thick wall Teflon tubing and fittings Open the sampling canister valve Slowly open the refrigerant valve Verify liquid CFC flowing through the tubing Fill the sampling canister approximately one half full Close the refrigerant container valve while the sampling canister is still filling Then close the canister sampling valve This will prevent CFCs venting during the sampling process After the sample has been collected the canister should be capped an EPA pre numbered tag should be completed and attached to the canister and the canister valve sealed with EPA sample custody tape A Chain Of Custody Record should be completed detailing time of sampling refrigerant container identification and signed by the person collecting the sample The samples are returned to the SESD laboratory for analysis 14 21 November 2001 SECTION 15 FIELD PHYSICAL MEASUREMENTS SECTION OBJECTIVE Present the standard practices used for making field physical measurements 15 1 I
520. r the composite sample Comments 9 What procedures and equipment were used to collect samples Comments 10 Were samples thoroughly mixed prior to putting them into the sample containers Comments 11 Were samples properly placed into sample containers Comments 1 12 Were samples iced immediately after collection Comments 13 For what analyses were the samples collected Comments 14 If samples were split what were the sample station numbers for these Comments 15 Was a drilling rig back hoe etc used to collect soil samples Comments 16 Were the drilling rig s backhoe s etc properly cleaned according to the SOP Appendix B prior to arriving on site Comments 17 What was the condition of the drilling and sampling equipment when it arrived on site Comments EISOPQAM 2 39 November 2001 18 Was a decontamination area located where the cleaning activities would not cross contaminate clean and or drying equipment Comments 19 Was clean equipment properly wrapped and stored in a clean area Comments 20 Was the drilling rig s properly cleaned between well borings Comments 21 Were the cleaning and decontamination procedures conducted in accordance with the SOP Comments 22 Other comments or observations EISOPQAM 2 40 November 2001 SECTION 4 SAMPLING SURFACE WATER Pond Stream River Leachate Etc 1 Type of samples collected Comments 2 General description
521. r the probe line inlet Observe that the monitors pump stops Observe also that when the 76 OXYGEN meter falls to approximately 19 the ALARM light illuminates and the alarm horn sounds Remove your thumb from probe inlet line When 76 OXYGEN meter returns to 20 8 press RESET button Rotate the ZERO LEL knob clockwise until the ALARM light illuminates and the alarm horn sounds This should occur at about 2596 of LEL Return the LEL meter to a reading of zero and reset the alarms EISOPQAM 17 3 November 2001 Calibration 1 Assemble a calibration manifold as described in Section 17 1 Upon introduction of the calibration gas to the monitor the LEL response should be approximately 50 Record the response 2 Disconnect the monitor from the calibration manifold and reset the alarms 3 Insure that the function switch is in the ON position and that the green flow indicator is steadily illuminated 4 Attach the probe to the probe line 17 3 Photovac Microtip Photoionization Detector Note Some Microtips are NOT instrinscially safe Introduction The detector is capable of measuring concentrations down to about 1 ppm sensitivity for certain compounds It cannot be used to identify unknown substances it can only quantify them Wind and high humidity will affect measurement readings Foggy or high humidity conditions can cause condensation on the lamp thus affecting measurements As a general rule the PID should be used t
522. r to use and should agree within 4 0 C Corrections must be applied for measurements up to 4 0 C but the instrumentation must be repaired or replaced beyond that range Inspection All thermometers should be inspected for leaks cracks and or function prior to use Procedures Make measurements in situ when possible 1 Clean the probe end with de ionized water and immerse into sample 2 Swirl the thermometer in the sample for mixing and equilibration 3 Allow the thermometer to equilibrate with the sample for at least one minute 4 Suspend the thermometer away from the sides and bottom to observe the reading 5 Record the reading in the log book Report temperatures readings to the nearest 0 5 C for most applications Note Always clean the thermometer prior to storage and or use Units Degrees Celsius C or Degrees Fahrenheit F Conversion Formulas F 9 5 C 32 or C 5 9 F 32 EISOPQAM 16 2 November 2001 16 3 Conductivity Specific Conductance Conductivity is a measure of the ability of an aqueous solution to conduct an electric current Conductivity is customarily reported in micromhos per centimeter umhos cm at 25 C It is important to note that if the conductivity measurements are for NPDES reporting purposes the meter and conductivity cell should be verified by comparing against a laboratory meter with a platinum electrode type conductivity cell Equipment available e Orion Mo
523. rable Also the filter pack serves as a barrier between the bentonite seal and the screened interval Rubber inflatable packers have been used to place the bentonite seal when the filter pack is omitted but the packers have to remain in the well permanently and over a period of time will decompose and possibly contribute contaminants to the monitoring zone 6 6 Well Construction Materials 6 6 1 Introduction Wellconstruction materials are chosen based on the goals and objectives of the proposed monitoring program and the geologic conditions at the site s In this section the different types of available materials will be discussed 6 6 2 Well Screen and Casing Materials When selecting the materials for well construction the prime concern should be to select materials that will not contribute foreign constituents or remove contaminants of concern from the ground water If the monitoring program is designed to analyze for organic compounds stainless steel materials are the preferred choice If the monitoring program calls for the analyses of only inorganic compounds or the contaminants or formation are highly corrosive then rigid PVC materials meeting National Sanitary Foundation NSF Standard 14 type WC Well Casing are acceptable PVC materials may be acceptable for monitoring identified organic compounds in a soluble aqueous phase where incompatibilities are known to not exist EPA document EPA 540 S 95 503 Nonaqueous Phase Liquids Compa
524. ractical planning for environmental data collection activities while the quantitative steps use statistical methods to design a data collection operation that will efficiently control the probability of making an incorrect decision Although the quantitative steps of the DQO process are important investigators and decision makers may choose not to apply statistics to every environmental field investigation In some cases the planning team may only utilize the qualitative steps of the DQO process during the investigation planning phases to generate authoritative data which may be used to confirm site characteristics 5 13 Specific Sample Collection Quality Control Procedures 5 13 1 Introduction This subsection provides guidelines for establishing quality control procedures for sampling activities Strict adherence to all of the standard operating procedures outlined in this subsection form the basis for an acceptable sampling quality assurance program 5 13 2 Experience Requirements There is no substitute for field experience Therefore all professional and paraprofessional investigators shall have the equivalent of six months field experience before they are permitted to select sampling sites on their own initiative This field experience shall be gained by on the job training using the buddy system Each new investigator should accompany an experienced employee on as many different types of field studies as possible During this training period
525. rator the resident s exact mailing address and the resident s home and work telephone numbers The information is required so that the residents or water supply owner operators can be informed of the results of the sampling program See Section 2 2 Sampling Technique 1 The following procedures should be followed when collecting samples from potable water supplies 1 Ideally the sample should be collected from a tap or spigot located at or near the well head or pump house and before the water supply is introduced into any storage tanks or treatment units If the sample must be collected at a point in the water line beyond a pressurization or holding tank a sufficient volume of water should be purged to provide a complete exchange of fresh water into the tank and at the location where the sample is collected Ifthe sample is collected from a tap or spigot located just before a storage tank spigots located inside the building or structure should be turned on to prevent any backflow from the storage tank to the sample tap or spigot It is generally advisable to open several taps during the purge to ensure a rapid and complete exchange of water in the tanks 2 Purge the system for at least 15 minutes when possible After purging for several minutes measure the turbidity pH specific conductivity and temperature of the water Continue to monitor these parameters until three consistent readings are obtained If possible obtain three consist
526. rease In order to design a fairly stable filter pack with a minimum head loss the d30 size should be multiplied by a factor of four EISOPQAM 6 12 November 2001 3 Plot the point from step 2 on the d30 abscissa of a grain size distribution graph and draw a smooth curve with a uniformity coefficient of approximately 2 5 4 A curve for the permissible limits of the filter pack is drawn plus or minus 8 per cent of the desired curve with the Cu of 2 5 5 Select the slot openings for the well screen that will retain 90 per cent or more of the filter pack material The specific steps and procedures for sieve analysis and filter pack design can be found in soil mechanics ground water and water well design books The staff geologists and or engineers should be responsible for the correct design of the monitoring wells and should be able to perform the design procedures 6 7 Safety Procedures for Drilling Activities A site health and safety plan should be developed and approved by the Branch Safety Officer or designee prior to any drilling activities and should be followed during all drilling activities The driller or designated safety person should be responsible for the safety of the drilling team performing the drilling activities All personnel conducting drilling activities should be qualified in proper drilling and safety procedures Before any drilling activity is initiated the area should be surveyed with the necessary detection equip
527. red calibrate only that detector INSTRUMENT STARTUP PROCEDURES 1 2 9 Ensure that internal battery is charge Connect sample probe Fill install the hydrogen tank left handed thread turn counter clockwise until resistance is felt Turn red H Supply valve to ON position if using FID Press ON key Wait for self test diagnostic to complete Press CONTROL Press 1 Pump on Press CONTROL 10 Press 2 Ignite 11 Press CONTROL EISOPQAM 17 12 November 2001 12 Press 3 2 Turn PID On Allow instrument to warm up for approximately 30 minutes INSTRUMENT SETUP While instrument is warming up check the following ALARMS 1 From Main Menu press 2 Setup 2 Press 2 Alarms 3 Press 1 STEL if needed Press 1 Both Enter STEL value press Enter Accept 4 Press 2 Low Ceiling Press 1 Both Set level at 5 0 ppm press Enter Accept 5 Press 3 High Ceiling Press 1 Both Set level at 200 ppm press Enter Accept 6 Press EXIT INFO 1 From Main Menu press 3 Info 2 Press the UP or DOWN arrows to scroll through information about instrument Pressing the UP arrow once will show screen with battery status 3 Press EXIT OTHER SETTINGS 1 From Main Menu press 2 Setup 2 Press 5 Othr 3 Press 2 Time to verify time change if needed if not press EXIT 4 Press 3 Date to verify date change if needed if not press EXIT 5 Press 4 User Options 6 Press 1 Key Click 7 Press 12On or 2 Off User choice EISOPQAM 17
528. red to make this measurement is a calibrated container bucket drum tank etc and a stop watch A minimum of 10 seconds to fill the container is recommended Three consecutive measurements should be made and the results should be averaged EISOPQAM 18 3 November 2001 Dilution Methods Dilution methods for water and wastewater flow measurements are based on the color conductivity fluorescence or other quantifiable property of an injected tracer The dilution methods require specialized equipment special attention to detail by the investigator and are time consuming Dilution methods are described in the EABSOP Section 14 2 3 3 18 2 6 Open Channel Flow Measurements Measurement of wastewater flow in open channels is the most frequently encountered situation during field investigations An open channel is defined as any open conduit such as a channel or flume or any closed conduit such as a pipe which is not flowing full The most commonly encountered methods in measuring open channel wastewater flows are described in this section Several flow estimation techniques are also presented Measurement accuracies quoted in this section apply only to the specific method or to the primary flow device being discussed The total error involved in a continuous flow measurement system which is the sum of the errors of each component is beyond the scope of this discussion The reader is referred to the list of references at the end of this ch
529. rement System Volume II Part 1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program Quality System Development US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Research Triangle Park NC commonly referred to as the Red Book EISOPQAM Calibration systems will meet Federal Register equivalent method specifications Calibration systems will be verified calibrated before use in accordance with procedures detailed in the calibration instrument manual Monitor enclosures will meet the specifications of monitor reference equivalent designation for temperature control Probes must meet the requirements stated in 40 CFR Part 58 for materials and sample residence time All flow calibrations will be traceable to a primary authoritative standard Flows will be corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure 25 C and 760 mm Hg Chain of custody must be maintained at all times 14 4 November 2001 Monitoring Procedure Monitoring will be conducted using the procedure as described and in accordance with Federal Register equivalent method specification e Procedures detailed in the approved instrument manual will be used for installation calibration quality assurance QA checks maintenance and repairs e Monitors will be calibrated at the beginning and end of each study and at least quarterly during the study e Monitors will be calibrated after major maintenance or when a QA check shows an out of control condition exists
530. required amount of material for analysis Because it is believed that this disadvantage is offset by the advantages coring devices are recommended in sampling sediments for trace organic compounds or metals analyses EISOPQAM 11 2 November 2001 In shallow wadeable waters the direct use of a core liner or tube manufactured of TeflonG plastic or glass is recommended for the collection of sediment samples Plastic tubes are principally used for collection of samples for physical parameters such as particle size analysis Their use can also be extended to deep waters when SCUBA diving equipment is utilized Teflon or plastic are preferred to glass since they are unbreakable which reduces the possibility of sample loss Stainless steel push tubes are also acceptable and provide a better cutting edge and higher strength than Teflon The use of glass or Teflon tubes eliminates any possible metals contamination from core barrels cutting heads and retainers The tube should be approximately 12 inches in length if only recently deposited sediments 8 inches or less are to be sampled Longer tubes should be used when the depth of the substrate exceeds 8 inches Soft or semi consolidated sediments such as mud and clays have a greater adherence to the inside of the tube and thus can be sampled with larger diameter tubes Because coarse or unconsolidated sediments such as sands and gravel tend to fall out of the tube a small diameter is required for them
531. ressed in the SOP Comments Are formal inspection and investigation reports prepared Comments Are the field activities adequately addressed in the SOP Manual Comments Does the SOP address Sample Collection Ground Water Surface Water Surface Soil Subsurface Soil Waste Pits Ponds Lagoons Waste Closed Container Tissue Fish etc Air QC Comments Does the SOP address Sample Handling Techniques Standard Sampling Containers Field Equipment amp Sample Container Cleaning Procedures Sample Identification Sample Chain of Custody Sample Packaging Techniques Identification of Hazardous Samples to Lab Sample Preservation amp Holding Times L d 3 QC Comments EISOPQAM 2 52 November 2001 Does the SOP address Field Documentation and Records Field Documentation or Bound Record Books Comments Photographs Comments Site Mapping Sketching of sites Comments PART 3 FIELD CONTRACTORS Are field contract personnel used to conduct field investigations Comments What activities do field contractors perform Comments If yes does a quality control program exist to monitor contractor activities Comments PART 4 FACILITIES 1 Is adequate space provided for the storage of field equipment Comments Are facilities and or space provided for the cleaning repair and preparation of field equipment Comments Specific Facility Needs EISOPQAM 2 53 November 2001 T
532. rge Using Tracers Applications of Hydraulics Book 3 Chapter A16 United States Department of Interior Geologic Survey 1985 12 Measurement of Time of Travel in Streams by Dye Tracing Applications of Hydraulics Book 3 Chapter A9 United States Department of Interior Geologic Survey 1989 13 Simulation of Soluble Waters Transport and Buildup in Surface Waters Using Tracers United States Geological Survey Open File Report 92 457 1992 EISOPQAM 15 35 November 2001 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 25 26 Discharge Measurement System Using an Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler with Applications to Large Rivers and Estuaries Water Supply Paper 2395 United States Geological Survey 1993 Technical Support Document for Water Quality based Toxics Control US EPA Office of Water EPA 505 2 90 001 March 1991 SESD Ecological Investigations Branch Standard Operating Procedures Benson Richard Robert A Glaccum and Michael R Noel Geophysical Techniques for Sensing Buried Wastes and Waste Migration National Water Well Association Dublin Ohio 1988 Milson John Field Geophysics Halsted Press 1989 Operating Manual for EM31 D Non Contacting Terrain Conductivity Meter Geonics Ltd Missassauga Ontario Canada June 1984 EM34 3 Operating Instructions Geonics Ltd Missassauga Ontario Canada February 1987 McNeill J D Technical Note TN 8 EM34 3 Survey Interpre
533. ribing the technical work to be accomplished and stating that the investigation will strictly conform to appropriate SESD Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals and Safety Manuals EISOPQAM F 2 November 2001 A final study plan will be prepared once all appropriate comments are received by the Project Leader In general these study plans should contain the following elements However upon advice of the Case Agent the content and format of any study plan may be substantially changed to meet the needs of the particular investigation Introduction a brief statement of the problem to be investigated Background a short but concise history of the case history Objectives a statement as to what the investigation is to accomplish and what specific laws and regulations may have been violated Scope a definition of the limits of the study Time Schedule a statement outlining when the study will be conducted analytical results will be available the draft report will be written and the final report will be completed Methodology specific field techniques to be employed A statement that the techniques in the SESD s Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals will be employed shall be included The use of any techniques not included in the Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manuals shall be thoroughly justified and must produce evidence which can withstand objecti
534. rience XRequitemelils 41czceo cuu oo x s tut o E E pe aet 5 31 Traceability Requirements 41 euet osurexex ober E pur v EE E Cu 5 31 Cham or Custody 62e ed ans Uu fe ERR uA IHR REESE Ca Rt mdi d 5 32 Sampling Equipment Construction Material llle ees 5 32 Sample Preservation 2 2ulie i9 aed hed ia Daw bea EIER RE hee US 5 32 Special Precautions for Trace Contaminant Sampling 5 32 Sample Handling and Mixing seseeeeeee ee 5 33 Special Handling of Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds VOCs Analysis 5 34 Estimating Variability iu ovale sie ois dnd oe eS Wenn eed eG en ex ee aie 5 34 Special Quality Control Procedures for Water Samples for Extractable Organic Compounds Pesticides or Herbicides Analysis Matrix Duplicate 5 36 Special Quality Control Procedures for EPA Contract Laboratories 5 36 Special Quality Control Procedures for Dioxins and Furans 5 37 Internal Quality Control Procedures 00 0 e ee aee 5 37 Introductio ess dos peu a TER edes xa itt as aere x ERN DOE 5 37 Traceability Requirements 2 8 2c fies eats Poy eiu ERR YE YR eu QNA p 5 37 Specific Quality Control Checks oss eee RE fe eg he ee oer EY e AR 5 38 Investigation Derived Waste IDW sees 5 38 Types of IDW 5i oss ce e dace RO SION a Me M a dete ex IR 5 38 Management of Non Hazardous IDW 0 cece eee eee 5 39 Management of Hazardo
535. rmally used as a power source Measurements should be made and recorded to the nearest 0 01 foot Weighted Tape This method is similar to the bell sounder method except that any suitable weight not necessarily one designed to create an audible pop can be used to suspend the tape The weight should ideally be made of a relatively inert material and should be easily cleaned Measurements should be made and recorded to the nearest 0 1 foot Chalked Tape Chalk rubbed on a weighted steel tape will discolor or be removed when in contact with water Distance to the water surface can be obtained by subtracting the wet chalked length from the total measured length The tape should be withdrawn quickly from the well because water has a tendency to rise up the chalk due to capillary action Measurements should be made and recorded to the nearest 0 01 foot This method is not recommended if samples are to be collected for analyses of organic or inorganic contaminants Other Methods There are other types of water level indicators and recorders available on the market such as the sliding float method air line pressure method and electrical and automatic recording methods These methods are primarily used for closed systems or permanent monitoring wells Acoustic water level indicators are also available which measure water levels based on the measured return of an emitted acoustical impulse Accuracies for these methods vary and should be evaluated
536. rmanent location e g set a nail or spike beneath the ground or set a nail and cap in asphalt or foundation The point where the instrument is first set should be the starting point and it is recommended that the arbitrary coordinates for this point be 10 000 north and 10 000 east or 10000 10000 This is so all other points relative to the starting point will hopefully be positive Note that when listing points such as 10000 10000 or latitude and longitude that the order is usually y x or northing and eastings Also recall from geometry that movement to the north or east is in a positive direction The second arbitrary point called the back sight should be tied or referenced to a bearing or azimuth so the other points will truly be spatially relative However the coordinates for those points and therefore all other points should be determined at a later date As with all field work the location of all control data used and all field measurements shall be recorded in the field logbook as outlined in Section 3 5 15 2 2 Equipment Available The following equipment is available for field use in conducting horizontal surveys in support of site investigations Topcon GTS 2 total station theodolite electronic distance meter EDM e Trimble Pathfinder Pro XR 12 channel or Geoexplorer II GPS receivers tripod s e reflector prism s e prism pole e steel tape cloth tape right angle prism compass 15 2 3 Specific Equipment Qual
537. rom islands e Downstream from obstructions and e Areas of flow reversals such as back shoots Sites that are located immediately upstream or downstream from the confluence of two streams or rivers should generally be avoided since flows from two tributaries may not immediately mix and at times due to possible backflow can upset the depositional flow patterns When several locations along a stream reach are to be sampled they should be strategically located e At intervals based on time of water travel not distance e g sampling stations may be located about one half day time of water travel for the first three days downstream of a waste source the first six stations and then approximately one day through the remaining distance e Atthe same locations if possible when the data collected is to be compared to a previous study EISOPQAM 5 17 November 2001 e Whenever a marked physical change occurs in the stream channel Example A stream reach between two adjacent stations should not include both a long rapids section of swift shallow water with a rocky bottom and a long section of deep slow moving water with a muddy bottom Stations at each end of the combined reach would yield data on certain rates of change such as reaeration that would be an unrealistic average of two widely different rates The actual natural characteristics of the stream would be better defined by inserting a third sampling station within the reach between the
538. roper disposal See Section 5 15 of this SOP for proper handling and disposal of these materials If the decontamination pad has leaked excessively soil sampling may be required B 2 2 Classic Parameter Sampling Equipment Classic Parameters are analyses such as oxygen demand nutrients certain inorganics sulfide flow measurements etc For routine operations involving classic parameter analyses water quality sampling equipment such as Kemmerers buckets dissolved oxygen dunkers dredges etc may be cleaned with the sample or analyte free water between sampling locations A brush may be used to remove deposits of material or sediment if necessary If analyte free water is unavailable the samplers should be flushed at the next sampling location with the substance water to be sampled before the sample is collected Flow measuring equipment such as weirs staff gages velocity meters and other stream gaging equipment may be cleaned with tap water between measuring locations if necessary The previously described procedures are not to be used for cleaning field equipment to be used for the collection of samples undergoing trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses B 2 3 Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic and Inorganic Compounds The following procedures are to be used for all sampling equipment used to collect routine samples undergoing trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses 1 Clean with tap
539. rrors such as unclean sampling equipment cross contamination etc or a negative bias due to improper containers or sample preservation Accuracy a measure of agreement between the true value and the measured value of a parameter Precision measure of the agreement among individual measurements of a sample Bias consistent under or over estimation of the true value due to sampling errors sample handling errors or analytical errors Grab Sample an individual sample collected from a single location at a specific time or period of time Grab samples are generally authoritative in nature Composite Samples a sample collected over a temporal or spacial range that typically consists of a series of discrete equal samples or aliquots which are combined or composited Four types of composite samples are listed below 1 Time Composite TC a sample comprised of a varying number of discrete samples aliquots collected at equal time intervals during the compositing period The TC sample is typically used to sample wastewater or streams 2 Flow Proportioned Composite FPC a sample collected proportional to the flow during the compositing period by either a time varying constant volume TVCV or time constant varying volume TCVV method The TVCV method is typically used with automatic samplers that are paced by a flow meter The TCV V method is a manual method that individually proportions a series of discretely collect
540. rrying out Agency functions under a particular Act As a matter of practice requests for confidential information can only be signed by an Agency employee who has had the appropriate Confidential Business Information CBI training and certification In compliance with EPA regulations an EPA request for company information pursuant to statutory authority will contain a statement allowing the facility to designate all or part of the information requested by the Agency as confidential by marking it according to Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 2 Section 203 41 or Federal Register 41 FR 36902 In addition to citing the appropriate regulations the request for confidential information will state that l The company may if it desires assert a business confidentiality claim covering part or all of the information in the manner described by the applicable regulation and that information covered by such a claim will be disclosed by EPA only to the extent and by means of the procedures set forth in the applicable regulations and that 2 If no such claim accompanies the information when it is received by EPA it may be made available to the public by EPA without further notice to the company If the collection of confidential information is required to carry out the responsibility of the Branch personnel should consult carefully with the appropriate operating Division staff and the Office of Regional Counsel attorneys In general
541. rs between the bumper posts can provide additional strength and protection in high traffic areas but the protective bumpers should not be connected to the protective casing 6 5 Construction Techniques 6 5 1 Well Installation The borehole should be bored drilled or augered as close to vertical as possible and checked with a plumb bob or level Deviation from plumb should be within 1 per 50ft of depth Slanted boreholes will not be acceptable unless specified in the design The depth and volume of the borehole including the overdrilling if applicable should have been calculated and the appropriate materials procured prior to drilling activities The well casings should be secured to the well screen by flush jointed threads and placed into the borehole and plumbed by the use of centralizers and or a plumb bob and level Another method of placing the well screen and casings into the borehole and plumbing it at the same time is to suspend the string of well screen and casings in the borehole by means of the wireline on the drill rig The string of well screen and casings can be placed into the borehole and plumbed in one easy operation This wireline method is especially useful if the borehole is deep and a long string of well screen and casings have to be set and plumbed No lubricating oils or grease should be used on casing threads Teflon tape can be used to wrap the threads to insure a tight fit and minimize leakage No glue of any type should be us
542. rsonnel involved will use appropriate safety measures Vehicles shall be equipped with trash bags and or trash containers to facilitate vehicle cleaning Field investigators are responsible for keeping field vehicles clean by removing trash and other debris Contaminated trash and equipment should be kept separate from ordinary trash and should be properly disposed on site or upon return Section 5 15 C 6 Preparation of Disposable Sample Containers C 6 1 Introduction No disposable sample container with the exception of the glass and plastic compositing containers may be reused All disposable sample containers will be stored in their original packing containers When packages of uncapped sample containers are opened they will be placed in new plastic garbage bags and sealed to prevent contamination during storage Specific pre cleaning instructions for disposable sample containers are given in the following sections C 6 2 Plastic Containers used for Classical Parameters Plastic containers used for oxygen demand nutrients classical inorganics and sulfides have no pre cleaning requirement However only new containers may be used EISOPQAM C 14 November 2001 C 6 3 Glass Bottles for Semi Volatile GC MS Analytes These procedures are to be used only if the supply of pre cleaned certified sample bottles is disrupted The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper implementation of these procedures If desired
543. ry or other organizational elements To simplify the Chain of Custody Record and eliminate potential litigation problems as few people as possible should have custody of the samples or physical evidence during the investigation This form shall not be used to document the collection of split samples where there is a legal requirement to provide a receipt for samples see Section 3 4 The Chain Of Custody Record also serves as a sample logging mechanism for the laboratory sample custodian A separate Chain of Custody Record should be used for each final destination or laboratory used during the investigation All information must be supplied in the indicated spaces Figure 3 1 to complete the field Chain Of Custody Record The reverse side of the Chain of Custody Record Figure 3 2 describes the requirements for station ID sample ID and media codes All samplers and sampling team leaders if applicable must sign in the designated signature block e One sample should be entered on each line and not be split among multiple lines If multiple sampling teams are collecting samples the sampling team leader s name should be indicated in the Tag Number column or adjacent to this column for the appropriate sample s EISOPQAM 3 5 November 2001 e Ifthe individual serving as the field sample custodian is different from the individual serving as the project leader the field sample custodian s name and the title of the sample custodian e
544. s 19 Were the wells double cased Comments 20 If yes to 19 explain procedure Comments 1 PERMANENT WELL INSTALLATION 2 What type of well casing s and screen s were used Comments 22 What diameter were the well casing s Screen s Comments 23 Was there a minimum two inch annulus around the casing between casing and borehole was or inside augers Comments 24 What was the length of the well screen s Comments 25 What was the slot size of the well screen s Comments 26 Was the well screen s commercially manufactured If so by whom Comments 27 Was the bottom of the well screen s plugged or capped Comments 28 Were sand and or gravel filter packs installed Comments 29 Specify type of materials in 28 play sand Ottawa sand etc and grain size 20 30 20 40 etc if known Comments Comments 1 Were the wells installed to the proper depths Comments 30 Was a sieve analysis conducted to determine well screen slot size and filter pack grain size 2 3 i 3 Were well screens placed at the proper intervals Comments 33 Were the filter packs placed a minimum of two feet above the well screens Comments EISOPQAM 2 45 November 2001 Was the tremie tube method used to place the filter packs Comments Were seals placed above the filter packs Comments If yes to 35 what material was used for the seals Comments Was the vertical thickness of the seals a minimum
545. s e The individual sample aliquot must be at least 100 mls e The automatic sampler should be capable of providing a lift of at least 20 feet and the sample volume should be adjustable since the volume is a function of the pumping head The pumping velocity must be at least 2 ft sec to transport solids and not allow solids to settle e The intake line leading to the pump must be purged before each sample is collected The minimum inside diameter of the intake line should be 1 4 inch An adequate power source should be available to operate the sampler for the time required to complete the project Facility electrical outlets may be used if available EISOPQAM 9 3 November 2001 Facility automatic samplers should only be used if 1 field conditions do not allow for the installation of EPA sampling equipment and 2 the facility sampling equipment meets all of the requirements of this SOP Specific operating instructions capabilities capacities and other pertinent information for automatic samplers are included in the respective operating manuals 9 4 2 Conventional Sampling Inorganic Parameters Conventional sampling includes all inorganic parameters e g BOD TSS COD nutrients that can be collected using an automatic sampler New tubing Silastic or equal in the pump and either Teflon or Tygon or equal in the sample train will be used for each sampler installation Installation procedures include cutting the
546. s ELSA for enclosed area initial entry Boot covers disposable OPTIONAL Hard hat Face shield ELSA for other than initial operations Thermal weather protection coat overalls sweater hat rain gear cool vests and heat stress monitors LEVEL C The atmospheric contaminants liquid splashes or other direct contact will is used when not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed skin The types of air contaminants have been identified concentrations measured and an air purifying respirator is available that can remove the contaminants All criteria for the use of air purifying respirators are met NOTE Level C operations require decontamination of personnel and equipment Also zones of protection are required Level C is not considered hazardous duty because adequate safety precautions have been taken to reduce the degree of risk EISOPQAM 4 10 November 2001 MODIFIED LEVEL C LEVEL C modified to include chemically resistant splash suit and triple REQUIRED glove system Cool vests and heat stress monitors if ambient temperature exceeds 80 F see below Splash shield ELSA for enclosed area initial entry Boot covers disposable OPTIONAL Hard hat ELSA for other than initial operations Cool vests and heat stress monitors are optional if ambient temperature is 80 F or less Modified All requirements for atmospheric contaminants and APR use related to Level C normal Level C have been met
547. s SLAMS A SLAMS network should be designed to meet a minimum of four basic monitoring objectives Each SLAM site within a network must meet at least one of the following objectives e To determine the highest concentrations expected to occur in the area covered by the network To determine representative concentrations in areas of high population density e To determine the impact of ambient pollution levels of significant sources or source categories e To determine the general background concentration levels National Air Monitoring Stations NAMS NAMS are a selected subset of the SLAMS sites covering urban and multi source areas The emphasis is on areas of maximum concentrations and high population density NAMS like SLAMS must conform to EPA siting criteria and operate according to quality assurance procedures that meet or exceed EPA s minimum specifications The NAMS differ from the SLAMS in that NAMS must use continuous automated instruments for gaseous pollutants EISOPQAM 2 19 November 2001 The NAMS fall into two categories e Category a stations in areas of expected maximum concentrations usually middle scale e Category b stations in areas with both poor air quality and high population density These areas are not necessarily those with expected maximum concentrations They will usually be densely populated neighborhoods but may be areas where sensitive individuals are likely to live or work if such areas are co
548. s When the vessel is underway all equipment should be placed in the boat and secured Boats need to be checked out through the Boat Log in F107 Upon return to the SESD facility all temporary portable gas cans must be removed from the boats and placed in the Boat Hotel Hazardous Materials Building Consumption of alcohol will not be permitted on any boat at any time Smoking will not be permitted on any boat at any time The law prohibits the throwing discharging or depositing of any refuse matter of any kind including trash garbage oil or hazardous substances into the waters of the United States to a distance of three miles from the coastline Required Equipment Outboard motorboats less than 26 feet in length which are so constructed that entrapment of flammable vapors cannot occur are not required to carry fire extinguishers but they are recommended and should be capable of extinguishing fires involving flammable liquids and grease class B fires 1 all recreational boats less than sixteen 16 feet in length including sailboats and rowboats and all kayaks and canoes carry at least one Coast Guard Approved Type I II III or IV Personal Flotation Device PFD for each person on board and 2 all recreational boats sixteen 16 feet or over in length including sailboats and rowboats carry at least one Type I II or III wearable PFD for each person on board and one Type IV throwable PFD in each boat Weather or worki
549. s grams of sample and preserve may be composited used in field w methanol or sodium bisulfate Longer holding time and 1 2 oz glass w septum lid for screening and moisture Collect 1 2 oz glass w septum Lab conducts all May have significant lid for analysis and 96 moisture preservation preparation VOC loss procedures EISOPQAM 12 9 November 2001 SECTION 13 WASTE SAMPLING SECTION OBJECTIVE To describe equipment and procedures that can safely be used to collect waste samples 13 1 Introduction Hazardous wastes are regulated by the US EPA under 40 CFR Parts 260 265 As a consequence many of the methods that are used to manage store treat and dispose hazardous wastes and potential hazardous wastes are of concern to both the regulators and the regulated community Samples are often required of regulated or potentially regulated materials While it is understood that each facility and wastestream may present its own unique sampling and analytical challenges this section will list equipment and procedures that have been used to safely and successfully sample specific waste units 13 1 1 Safety Sampling of waste units should be assessed for potential hazards by both the project leader and the site safety officer SSO It is the SSOs responsibility to enforce the site safety plan and to ensure that procedures used during waste sampling are in accordance with Branch safety procedures and protocols found in Section
550. s http rsori rtpnc epa gov which is EPA s remote sensing home page If only maps are available collect enough site feature information to improve the existing maps Collect at least four GPS points surrounding the site that can be seen in the field and on the existing maps and or areal photographs intersections of roads manhole covers etc so the existing maps and or areal photographs can be georeferenced and rectified to the same coordinate system datum and projection back in the office with GIS techniques Data Logger Files To PC Connect the data logger to COMI of the PC using the appropriate cable that is attached to the COM I port of the data logger or in the case of the Geoexplorer II attached to the input port In Pathfinder Office software on the PC select the appropriate project then Utilities then Data Transfer Note Device should be set to GIS Data logger and Data Type should be set to Data Under Available Files highlight the files to be downloaded and under Selected Files choose Add or Add All Under Direction choose Receive Then click Transfer The data file s will be converted to files with a ssf extension Once the data files have been transferred Close the Data Transfer window and exit the data logger Differential Correction If a real time GPS unit was used for data capture the data file s must be checked to see if all positions were differential corrected through the real time broadcast signal If any p
551. s lagoons ponds and shallow water bodies It is a good device use when collecting sludge and sediment containing hazardous constituents because the size of the dredge makes it more amenable to field cleaning 11 2 3 Coring Core samplers are used to sample vertical columns of sediment They are particularly useful when a historical picture of sediment deposition is desired since they preserve the sequential layering of the deposit and when it is desirable to minimize the loss of material at the sediment water interface Many types of coring devices have been developed depending on the depth of water from which the sample is to be obtained the nature of the bottom material and the length of core to be collected They vary from hand push tubes to electronic vibrational core tube drivers Coring devices are particularly useful in pollutant monitoring because turbulence created by descent through the water is minimal thus the fines of the sediment water interface are only minimally disturbed the sample is withdrawn intact permitting the removal of only those layers of interest core liners manufactured of glass or Teflon can be purchased thus reducing possible sample contamination and the samples are easily delivered to the lab for analysis in the tube in which they were collected The disadvantage of coring devices is that a relatively small surface area and sample size is obtained often necessitating repetitive sampling in order to obtain the
552. s are available When the instrument is used for onsite sampling analysis the analyst must take care to link the readout to the appropriate sample EISOPQAM 14 13 November 2001 safety The instrument itself presents few Health amp Safety concerns However the instrument is typically used in areas where mercury contamination is suspected The individual responsible for sampling the air should use personal protective equipment PPE stipulated by the site safety officer The manufacturer includes a tube filled with activated charcoal that can be placed on the vents to absorb the mercury vented from the instrument The mercury lamp emits UV radiation never look directly into the lamp and avoid exposing skin and eyes to the UV rays Interferences Due to the unique design of the Tekran there are no known chemical interferences The only materials that enter the instrument are gases and vapors and the only material that is retained by the gold screen is mercury All other materials pass through the cartridge The mercury is desorbed and analyzed with no other materials present to interfere with the fluorescence detection Required Equipment e The Tekran 2537A The Tekran Model 2505 Mercury Vapor Calibration Unit This item is used only at the SESD base laboratory Although this item is transportable movement can disrupt the internal mercury bead If any of the internal mercury adheres to the syringe during calibration the actual amou
553. s done the memorandum will be stamped CONFIDENTIAL on each page and delivered to the Case Agent The final report s shall be delivered to the Case Agent who shall be responsible for ultimate distribution F 8 Document Control The core team members are responsible for the initial collection and maintenance of all SESD documents records and evidence obtained during the field investigation The documents records and evidence shall be delivered to the Project Leader at the competition of the field investigation The Project Leader shall immediately construct an inventory of all such materials obtained If requested the Project Leader will deliver all such materials to the Case Agent All original analytical data and supporting documentation e g chromatograms mass spectra QA QC records calculations etc shall be maintained by the Analytical Support Branch according to their Laboratory Operations and Quality Assurance Manual If requested copies of all records shall be provided to the Case Agent Dissemination of such records shall only occur under federal court order as directed by DOJ or as directed by the prosecuting attorney The Laboratory Coordinator shall construct a project file of all laboratory data and supporting documentation immediately after completing analyses and reporting of data to the Project Leader An inventory of that file will be prepared and furnished to the Project Leader and the Case Agent EISOPQAM F 4 Novem
554. s from these procedures should be documented in the approved study plan field records and investigative reports C 1 1 Specifications For Cleaning Materials The specifications for standard cleaning materials referred to in this appendix are as follows e Soap shall be a standard brand of phosphate free laboratory detergent such as Liquinox e Disinfectant soap shall be a standard brand of disinfectant cleaner e Solvent shall be pesticide grade isopropanol Tap water may be obtained from any spigot at the FEC e Nitric acid solution 10 shall be made from reagent grade nitric acid and deionized water e Analyte free water deionized water is tap water that has been treated by passing it through a standard deionizing resin column At a minimum it should contain no detectable heavy metals or other inorganic compounds i e at or above analytical detection limits as defined by a standard Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Spectrophotometer ICP or equivalent scan e Organic analyte free water is defined as tap water that has been treated with activated carbon and deionizing units At a minimum it must meet the analytical criteria of analyte free water and should contain no detectable pesticides herbicides or extractable organic compounds and no volatile organic compounds above minimum detectable levels determined by the Region 4 laboratory for a given set of analyses Organic analyte free water obtained by other methods is accepta
555. s is often be the method of choice when for purposes of the investigation the matrix is considered homogeneous or when the population is randomly heterogeneous If the population contains trends or patterns of contamination a stratified random sampling or systematic grid sampling strategy would be more appropriate EISOPQAM 5 6 November 2001 5 3 8 Systematic Sampling over Time or Space Systematic sampling over time at the point of generation is useful if the material was sampled from a Wastewater sewer a materials conveyor belt or being delivered via truck or pipeline The sampling interval would be determined on a time basis for example every hour from a conveyor belt or pipeline discharge or from every third truck load Systematic sampling over space might involve the collection of samples at defined intervals from a ditch stream or other matrix that is spatially unique 5 3 9 Stratified Random Sampling Stratified random sampling may be useful when distinct strata or homogeneous sub groups are identified within the population The strata could be located in different areas of the population or the strata may be comprised of different layers This approach is useful when the individual strata may be considered internally homogeneous or at least have less internal variation in what would otherwise be considered a heterogeneous population Information on the site is usually required to establish the location of individual strata A grid
556. s mixture If it is appropriate to grout the installation grouting may be accomplished either through pressure grouting through the probe rod as the rods are pulled after placement of the seal or if the hole remains open the grout may be mixed and poured down the open hole after retrieval of the rods For permanent or long term installations efforts should be taken to protect the tubing at the surface using some type of surface completion and protective casing Permanent Soil Gas Sampling Methodology Soil gas samples may be collected from the installed permanent soil gas implant using several methods These are listed below Cannister Sampling After purging implant tubing to introduce representative soil gas into the system an evacuated SUMMA cannister is attached using a Swagelok or other suitable secure connection After connection the valve on the SUMMA cannister is opened pulling soil gas from the implant into the cannister Continuous Sampling Continuous sampling may be conducted using appropriate analytical instrumentation Special Considerations for Sampling The tubing used for the permanent soil gas implant should be Teflon As most soil gas sampling will be conducted to investigate the presence or extent of organic compounds Teflon tubing is required to ensure the integrity of the sample EISOPQAM 19 5 November 2001 19 2 References 1 Description of Service for Soil Gas Applications W L Gore amp A
557. sampling activities At the discretion of the project leader additional preservative blanks can be prepared at intervals throughout the field investigation These blanks are prepared by putting organic analyte free water in the container and then preserving the sample with the appropriate chemical Field Blanks a sample that is prepared in the field to evaluate the potential for contamination of a sample by site contaminants from a source not associated with the sample collected for example air borne dust or organic vapors which could contaminate a soil sample Organic free water is taken to the field in sealed containers or generated on site The water is poured into the appropriate sample containers at pre designated locations at the site Field blanks should be collected in dusty environments and or from areas where volatile organic contamination is present in the atmosphere and originating from a source other than the source being sampled Material Blanks samples of sampling materials e g material used to collect wipe samples etc construction materials e g well construction materials or reagents e g organic analyte free water generated in the field water from local water supplies used to mix well grout etc collected to measure any positive bias from sample handling variability Commonly collected material blanks are listed below Wipe Sample Blanks a sample of the material used for collecting wipe samples The material
558. sampling to demonstrate stabilization or lack thereof These measurements should be documented in the field notes If the ground water sample appears to have either a chemically induced elevated turbidity such as would occur with precipitate formation or a naturally elevated colloid or fine particulate related turbidity filtration will not be allowed If filtration is necessary for purposes of geochemical modeling or other pre approved cases the following procedures are suggested 1 Accomplish in line filtration through the use of disposable high capacity filter cartridges barrel type or membrane filters in an in line filter apparatus The high capacity barrel type filter is preferred due to the higher surface area associated with this configuration Ifa membrane filter is utilized a minimum diameter of 142 mm is suggested 2 Use a 5 um pore size filter for the purpose of determining the colloidal constituent concentrations A 0 1 um pore size filter should be used to remove most non dissolved particles 3 Rinse the cartridge or barrel type filter with 500 milliliters of the solute ground water to be sampled prior to collection of sample If a membrane filter is used rinse with 100 milliliters of solute prior to sample collection Potential differences could result from variations in filtration procedures used to process water samples for the determination of trace element concentrations number of factors associated with filtr
559. sand filter pack for very fine formations will be acceptable practice Table 6 6 1 provides size specifications for the selection of sand packs for fine formation materials ASTM standard D5092 Design and Installation of Ground Water Monitoring Wells in Aquifers may be consulted for further guidance on specifications for sand appropriate for these applications EISOPQAM 6 11 November 2001 Table 6 6 1 Sand Pack Specifications Screen 1 Passing 10 Passing 30 Passing Derived Range for Opening Size d 1 Size d 10 Size d 30 60 Passing Uniformity in in in in Size d 60 Coefficient in 0 005 0 006 3 5 4 7 5 5 6 7 6 7 8 3 8 5 13 4 1 3 2 0 0 010 20 40 9 8 13 8 15 7 19 7 19 7 23 6 20 31 5 1 1 1 6 The following procedure should be used in coarser grained formations The data from the sieve analysis are plotted on a grain size distribution graph and a grain size distribution curve is generated From this grain size distribution curve the uniformity coefficient Cu of the aquifer material is determined The Cu is the ratio of the 60 percent finer material d60 to the 10 percent finer material d10 Cu d60 d10 The Cu ratio is a way of grading or rating the uniformity of grain size For example a Cu of unity means that the individual grain sizes of the material are nearly all the same while a Cu with a large number means a large range of sizes As a general rule a Cu of 2 5 or less should
560. scharge cycle Bladder is perforated Replace bladder Exhaust adapter Remove adapter and installed in wrong replace in correct direction orientation Compressor running Obstruction in ball Remove obstruction pressure low check assembly no water discharged allowing water to be pushed out of pump at check Air supply fittings 5 Check all fittings loose E 4 Small Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps E 4 1 Introduction Included within this category is the Grundfos Redi Flo2 small diameter electric submersible pump With a diameter of approximately 1 75 inches it is designed to be used in 2 inch diameter and larger wells Note If used in any well larger than 4 inch diameter this pump must be equipped with a cooling shroud to prevent the pump from overheating If this condition occurs internal sensors will send a shut off signal to the controller and the pump will not be operable until it cools to a temperature within the operating range The Redi Flo2 is a variable speed pump capable of providing pump rates from less than 100 ml minute to in excess of 8 gallons per minute EISOPQAM E 6 November 2001 The pump depending on the controller being used operates with either 115v or 220v power The pump rate is controlled by adjusting the frequency of the current going to the pump motor It is a light weight pump and can be easily handled by one person when lowering but two people are generally needed when removing the pump
561. sed approaches typically rely on the judgement and experience of the investigators as well as available information on the matrix of concern Probabilistic or statistical approaches may be appropriate when estimates on uncertainty and specific confidence levels in the results are required The probabilistic approaches include simple random sampling stratified random sampling and systematic grid sampling The main feature of a probabilistic approach is that each location at the site has an equal probability of being sampled therefore statistical bias is minimized Professional judgement should always be used to develop both authoritative and probabilistic sampling designs 5 3 5 Determining the Number of Samples to Collect The number of samples to collect as part of a sampling design will typically be based on several factors e g the study objectives properties of the matrix degree of confidence required access to sampling points and resource constraints Practical guidance for determining the number of samples is included in several documents including the ASTM document Standard Guide for General Planning of Waste Sampling 6 the US EPA document Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual Volume 1 Site Investigations 7 the US EPA document Guidance of Choosing a Sampling Design for Environmental Data Collection 8 and Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring by Richard O Gilbert 5 5 3 6
562. should be developed based on the objectives of the investigation Section 5 5 of this SOP contains a discussion of soil sampling strategies After developing a soil sampling strategy the appropriate equipment and techniques must be used to conduct the investigation This section discusses the various soil sample collection methods sample handling and available sampling equipment which has been shown to be technically appropriate 12 20 Equipment Selection of equipment is usually based on the depth of the samples to be collected but it is also controlled to a certain extent by the characteristics of the soil Manual techniques and equipment such as hand augers are usually used for collecting surface or shallow subsurface soil samples Power operated equipment is usually associated with deep sampling but can also be used for shallow sampling when the bore hole begins to collapse or when the soil is so tight that manual sampling is not practical 12 2 1 Precautions for Trace Contaminant Soil Sampling All soil sampling equipment used for sampling trace contaminants should be constructed of inert materials such as stainless steel where possible Pans used for mixing should be made of Pyrex or equivalent glass In no case will chromium cadmium galvanized or plated equipment be used for soil sampling when trace levels of inorganic contaminants are of concern Similarly no painted or plastic equipment may be used where trace levels of organic con
563. should extend above the ground surface a minimum of 3 feet The total length of each bumper guard should be a minimum of 5 feet Afterthe wells have been installed the outer protective casing should be painted with a highly visible enamel paint The wells should be permanently marked with the well number date installed site name elevation etc either on the cover or an appropriate place that will not be easily damaged and or vandalized If the monitoring wells are installed in a high traffic area such as a parking lot in a residential yard or along the side of a road it may be desirable to finish the wells to the ground surface and install water tight flush mounted traffic and or man hole covers Flush mounted traffic and man hole covers are designed to extend from the ground surface down into the concrete plug around the well casing Although flush mounted covers may vary in design they should have seals that make the unit water tight when closed and secured The flush mounted covers should be installed as far above grade as practical to minimize standing water and promote runoff Permanent identification markings should be placed on the covers or in the concrete plug around the cover Expansive sealing plugs may be used in the well riser to prevent infiltration of any water that might enter the flush cover 6 5 2 Double Cased Wells Double cased wells should be constructed when there is reason to believe that interconnection oftwo aquifers by
564. sible and metering pumps e recorders e flow meters and e floats The following equipment is available for flow current measurement e cup type current meters pygmy price e impeller type current meters Endeco e sounding depth equipment and e ADCP 15 4 5 General Quality Assurance Procedures No field investigator shall make flow measurements until they have had at least six months of actual field experience and have performed these measurements under the supervision of a senior field investigator Wastewater flow shall be expressed in million gallons per day MGD or the metric equivalent m day Stream flow shall be expressed in cubic feet per second cfs or the metric equivalent m sec Current velocities shall be expressed in feet per second fps or the metric equivalent m sec Time records associated with hydrological studies shall be 1 kept in local time 2 recorded in 24 hour military format and 3 recorded to at least the nearest five minutes All field equipment shall be operated calibrated and maintained according to manufacturer s specifications All equipment shall be visually inspected prior to deployment to ensure proper operation 15 4 6 Data Records Management All hydrological measurements shall be thoroughly documented in field records All measurements shall be traceable to the personnel making the measurements and the equipment utilized 15 5 Ground Water Level Measurements 15 5 1 General
565. siccant in the flow meters should be checked and replaced if necessary each time the equipment is cleaned The face of the timing case mechanism will be cleaned with a clean damp cloth Tubing sample intake and pump tubing will be discarded after each use New pre cleaned Silastic pump tubing see Appendix C 4 1 will be installed ISCOO 1680 2700 and 3700 Rotary Funnel Distributor and Metal Tube 1 2 3 Clean with hot tap water soap and a brush Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water Replace in sampler EISOPQAM C 5 November 2001 C 3 3 All Automatic Sampler Headers 1 2 3 4 Disassemble header and using a bottle brush wash with hot tap water and soap Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water Dry thoroughly then reassemble header and wrap with aluminum foil Seal in Plastic C 3 4 Reusable Glass Composite Sample Containers 1 6 T Wash containers thoroughly with hot tap water and laboratory detergent using a bottle brush to remove particulate matter and surface film Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water Rinse twice with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours Cap with aluminum foil or Teflon film When these containers are used to collect samples that contain oil grease or other hard to rem
566. soil samples during an emergency These containers would also be acceptable on an emergency basis for the collection of water samples for extractable organic compounds pesticides and metals analyses These jars cannot be used for the collection of water samples for volatile organic compound analyses The rubber sealing ring should not be in contact with the jar and aluminum foil should be used if possible between the jar and the sealing ring If possible the jar and aluminum foil should be rinsed with pesticide grade isopropanol and allowed to air dry before use Several empty bottles and lids should be submitted to the laboratory as blanks for quality control purposes EISOPQAM B 7 November 2001 APPENDIX C FIELD EQUIPMENT CENTER STANDARD CLEANING PROCEDURES PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE To remove contaminants of concern from sampling drilling and other field equipment to concentrations that do not impact study objectives using a standard cleaning procedure C Introduction Cleaning procedures outlined in this appendix are intended for use at the Field Equipment Center FEC for cleaning sampling and other field equipment prior to field use These procedures are not intended to be used in the field Cleaning procedures for use in the field are in Appendix B Sampling and other field equipment cleaned in accordance with these procedures will meet the minimum requirements for Data Quality Objective DQO Definitive Data Collection Deviation
567. spections LSI and Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plant technical assistance TA studies Activities associated with a visit to any facility for a compliance inspection shall not be double counted Thus a single visit cannot be counted as both a CSI and a CEI it must be reported as one or the other However a single visit that encompasses separate activities e g a PAI or legal support investigation will be reported and counted as two separate activities A compliance monitoring inspection all types is not considered complete until the appropriate portions of the Compliance Inspection Report Form EPA Form 3560 3 have been completed and the information from the coding section entered into the permit compliance system PCS Inspection Notification Generally CSIs and CEIs are conducted unannounced unless there is a reason to conduct the inspection on an announced basis Routine PAI s and DE s are typically announced inspections due to the complexity of the logistics involved in these types of investigations 2 5 2 CWA Inspection Types Compliance Evaluation Inspection CED The CEI is a nonsampling inspection designed to verify permittee compliance with applicable permit self monitoring requirements effluent limits and compliance schedules This inspection involves records reviews visual observations and evaluations of the treatment facilities laboratories effluents receiving water etc The CEI examines both chemical and biologi
568. spension These sumps are added to the well screens when the wells are screened in aquifers that are naturally turbid and will not yield clear formation water free of visible sediment even after extensive development The sediment can then be periodically pumped out of the sump preventing the well screen from clogging or silting up If the borehole is overdrilled deeper than desired it can be backfilled to the designed depth with bentonite pellets chips or the filter sand that is to be used for the filter pack 6 4 3 Filter Pack Placement When placing the filter pack into the borehole a minimum of 6 inches of the filter pack material should be placed under the bottom of the well screen to provide a firm footing and an unrestricted flow under the screened area Also the filter pack should extend a minimum of 2 feet above the top of the well screen to allow for settling and to isolate the screened interval from the grouting material In open boreholes the filter pack should be placed by the tremie or positive displacement method Placing the filter pack by pouring the sand into an open drill stem is acceptable with the use hollow stem augers and other methods where the borehole is temporarily cased down to the filter pack 6 4 4 Filter Pack Seal Bentonite Pellet Seal Plug Bentonite pellets consist of ground dried bentonite compacted into pellets available in several sizes Bentonite pellets are compressed to a bulk density of 70 80 Ibs
569. ssociates Inc Elkton MD 2 GORE SORBER Screening Survey Module Storage Installation and Retrieval Information W L Gore amp Associates Inc Elkton MD 3 Geoprobe Systems Tools and Equipment Catalog Kejr Engineering Inc Salinas Kansas 1997 4 The Yellow Field Book Kejr Engineering Inc Salinas Kansas 2000 EISOPQAM 19 6 November 2001 APPENDIX A RECOMMENDED VOLUMES CONTAINER TYPES PRESERVATION and HOLDING TIMES The following tables summarize the amount of sample required typical containers preservative if any and holding times for many analyses by media Soil and Sediment Organic Compounds Analysis Amt Container Preservative Holding FERES PNE RR Dioxin Dibenzofurans Extractable Organic Compounds pesticides oS Extractable Extractable Organic Compounds TCLP Compounds TCLP ocsam eee pne occam eee os e nte Rocrurmass aoe Jo fe h EISOPQAM A 1 November 2001 Soil and Sediment Inorganic Compounds Soil and Sediment Inorganic Compounds Type Time D OOO O e a O O O afew fos T ER 30 10 25 353 eacus e je m o acm re m o o e li aQ ajaja Nitrite 000000 li NS mu rrI total phosphate e E d NS C RN CEN Can RR NS Q aao EISOPQAM A 2 November 2001 Water and Waste Water Biological Analysis Amt Container Preservative Holding INDEM TE Bacteriological 0
570. st be cleaned in the field B 2 1 Specifications for Decontamination Pads Decontamination pads constructed for field cleaning of sampling and drilling equipment should meet the following minimum specifications The pad should be constructed in an area known or believed to be free of surface contamination The pad should not leak excessively If possible the pad should be constructed on a level paved surface and should facilitate the removal of wastewater This may be accomplished by either constructing the pad with one corner lower than the rest or by creating a sump or pit in one corner or along one side Any sump or pit should also be lined e Sawhorses or racks constructed to hold equipment while being cleaned should be high enough above ground to prevent equipment from being splashed e Water should be removed from the decontamination pad frequently EISOPQAM B 3 November 2001 Atemporary pad should be lined with a water impermeable material with no seams within the pad This material should be either easily replaced disposable or repairable At the completion of site activities the decontamination pad should be deactivated The pit or sump should be backfilled with the appropriate material designated by the site project leader but only after all waste rinse water has been pumped into containers for disposal No solvent rinsates will be placed in the pit Solvent rinsates should be collected in separate containers for p
571. stical considerations e g shipment of samples additional supplies etc EISOPQAM 5 25 November 2001 5 10 UST and UIC Sampling Designs UST Designs The UST investigation focuses on determining whether a release from a tank s to the environment has occurred and usually includes both shallow ground water and subsurface soil sampling Usually the area of concern is not large and if it is determined a release has occurred delineation of a contaminant plume will probably be conducted during a subsequent investigation General sampling designs for soil sampling and ground water sampling are included in Section 5 5 and 5 6 of this SOP However specific considerations in developing a UST sampling strategy are e Identification of constituents in the tank Identification of pollutants in ground water e Identification of pollutants in subsurface soil Complexity of the sampling program will vary based on a number of factors Some primary factors are as follows e Size of the target area One small tank or several large tanks e Hydro geological conditions of the target area e Accessibility to potable and ground water monitoring wells UIC Designs The UIC investigation focuses on determining the quality of the ground water in a target area and usually involves sampling ground water from deep wells The UIC source is permitted and should have a monitoring well network General sampling designs for ground water sampling is incl
572. sulting analyses which constituents are present direction of plume movement if determined possible sources of contamination and potable well owners names phone numbers addresses if appropriate Sketches maps Showing sampling locations UST locations direction of plume etc Methodology Reference to field and laboratory SOPs Internal Peer Review and Report Recipients UST reports will be reviewed internally Final copies of the report will be sent to the requestor in the UST Section If private or public potable water supplies are sampled refer to Section 2 2 for reporting requirements EISOPQAM 2 17 November 2001 2 9 Underground Injection Control UIC Investigations 2 9 1 Introduction Laws protecting ground water from contamination by injection of wastes allow for the sampling of injection wells as well as nearby wells UIC field investigations are requested primarily by the Region 4 Water Management Division Ground Water Drinking Water Branch GW amp UIC Section and usually involves ground water sampling for constituents related to the wastes being injected UIC investigation objectives may include e Determining if vicinity potable water wells are contaminated with waste products from the injection wells e Determining if vicinity ground water monitoring wells are contaminated with waste products from the injection wells e Determining the direction of the contamination plume and the source of the contamina
573. surface did the outer protective casings extend Comments Did the outer protective casings have weep holes Comments Were the wells properly developed Comments Describe method of development Comments Give a general evaluation of the activities observed during the installation of the wells Comments TEMPORARY WELL INSTALLATION 59 Describe methods and procedures Comments EISOPQAM 2 47 November 2001 EXHIBIT 2 2 REGION 4 STATE CONTRACTOR OVERVIEW CHECKLIST NOTE This checklist is for overviewing State personnel overviewing a facility or contractor or for overviewing a contractor overviewing contractors PART 1 State Contractor Name Address Facility Site Name Address Facility Contact Phone No Facility Activities Operations Sampling Personnel Other Personnel amp Affiliation Type of study Study Work plan issued Study Work plan reviewed by the Division Acceptable Was the Study Work plan reviewed by the State Contractor Comments Was the study plan followed Comments Was a safety plan prepared for the study Did the State Contractor review the safety plan Was the safety plan adequate Comments Was the safety plan followed Comments Did the State Contractor have their own safety plan Did the State Contractor have a copy of the SOP or have a copy of their own SOP Comments Was the State Contractor familiar with the SOP Additional Comments or Information EIS
574. t Boat operations e Generator operations and Steam cleaning 4 3 3 OSHA Confined Space Entry According to 29 CFR Part 1910 146 an individual must have a permit to enter a space that meets the following definition for a confined space Confined space means a space that is 1 large enough and so configured that an investigator can bodily enter and perform assigned work 2 has limited or restricted means for entry or exit e g tanks vessels silos storage bins hoppers vaults or pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry and 3 is not designed for continuous occupancy Field investigators shall not enter a space if it meets this definition 4 3 4 Entry into Enclosed Areas When conducting hazardous waste site investigations in areas that do not meet the definition in OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 146 or that are enclosed areas that could potentially trap explosive vapors and or have depleted oxygen field investigators should monitor the atmosphere of the area to identify immediately dangerous to life and health IDLH and other dangerous conditions Examples of dangerous conditions that may be encountered when working around enclosed areas other than those listed in 29 CFR Part 1910 146 include areas that may support flammable or explosive atmospheres oxygen deficient environments and highly toxic levels of airborne contaminants Some examples of enclosed areas that field investigators may EISOPQAM 4 6 November 2001 ente
575. t should be noted in the field notes and the inspection or study report Recommendations and reasons for a change in sampling locations should be given to the appropriate permitting authority EISOPQAM 9 1 November 2001 9 2 1 Influent Influent wastewaters are preferably sampled at locations of highly turbulent flow in order to ensure good mixing however in many instances the most desirable location is not accessible Preferable influent wastewater sampling locations include 1 the upflow siphon following a comminutor in absence of grit chamber 2 the upflow distribution box following pumping from main plant wet well 3 aerated grit chamber 4 flume throat 5 pump wet well when the pump is operating or 6 downstream of preliminary screening When possible influent samples should be collected upstream from sidestream returns 9 2 2 Effluent Effluent samples should be collected at the site specified in the permit or if no site is specified in the permit atthe most representative site downstream from all entering wastewater streams priorto discharge into the receiving waters If a conflict exists between the permittee and inspector regarding the source being sampled or the location of the most representative site follow the procedures previously described under Site Selection 9 2 3 Pond and Lagoon Sampling Generally composite effluent wastewater samples should be collected from ponds and lagoons Even if the ponds or lagoons hav
576. t tendency to stress the well during purging should be selected for use For example if a bailer and a peristaltic pump both work in a given situation the pump should be selected because it will greatly minimize turbidity providing a higher quality sample Section 7 2 4 contains a description of low flow purging and sampling with a peristaltic pump used in a temporary well If a Fultz pump or a Grundfos Redi Flo2 could both be used the Redi Flo2 may be given preference because the speed can be controlled to provide a lower pump rate thereby minimizing turbidity Low Flow Low Volume Purging Techniques Procedures Alternatives to the low flow purging procedures exist and may be acceptable The low flow low volume purging is a procedure used to minimize purge water volumes The pump intake is placed within the screened interval at the zone of sampling preferably the zone with the highest flow rate Low flow rate purging is conducted after hydraulic conditions within the well have re stabilized usually within 24 to 48 hours Flow rates should not exceed the recharge rate of the aquifer This is monitored by measuring the top of the water column with a water level recorder or similar device while pumping These techniques however are only acceptable under certain hydraulic conditions and are not considered standard procedures 7 2 3 Purging Techniques Wells with In Place Plumbing Wells with in place plumbing are commonly found at municipa
577. t will automatically shut itself off when fully charged Only operate the RAE in the survey mode The RAE has been pre set to automatically start in the survey mode Operating Procedures 1 Power On Off To Turn On the RAE press the on key The audio buzzer will beep once and the display will show HG x xx or Su x xx to indicate the operating mode and software version number The unit will then go through a self diagnostic routine to check the key components of the unit A diag message will be displayed with a red back light turned on while the self diagnostic routine is executing The red LED and back light will flash once and the buzzer will beep once to ensure that they are functional The sampling pump will be turned on and start to draw air sample To turn Off the RAE press the on key The message off will flash on the LED display press the enter key to confirm and the unit will be turned off Pressing any other key will return the unit to normal operation EISOPQAM 17 18 November 2001 Calibration The RAEcan display five different readings instantaneous gas concentration STEL TWA and peak and battery voltage Most of these functions have either been pre set or do not apply to most Branch surveys Only press enter to scroll through each display Alarm Signal The built in microcomputer constantly updates and monitors real time gas concentrations and compares it with the programmed alarm limits Whenever th
578. ta should be recorded in a log book 15 6 Surface Geophysical Studies 15 6 1 General 17 18 The science of geophysics can be defined as the study of the earth s physical properties Surface geophysical studies are investigations which use indirect measurement instrumentation and techniques to evaluate these properties from points on or above the earths surface Many of the surface geophysical methods used today for hazardous waste site investigations found their start almost exclusively in geophysical prospecting for oil gas and minerals Geophysical methods typically obtain and provide data measurements in a one or two dimensional pattern It is sometimes possible using data output from some of the two dimensional patterns to generate three dimensional interpretations of the data clearly showing the locations and relative intensities of the anomalies These techniques provide a much more rapid safe and economical way to investigate the subsurface at hazardous waste sites as compared to direct sampling techniques such as monitoring well installation and subsurface soil sampling Measurements obtained from available geophysical instrumentation can be used to locate buried materials or areas of disturbance to characterize the geologic setting or to locate a contaminant plume When planning a hazardous waste site investigation strong consideration should be given to incorporating the use of geophysical methods in the investigation Geophysical eq
579. tainers Samples to be analyzed for extractable organic compounds metals and cyanide can be collected using this system Because the one gallon 4 liter containers used by the Branch are rinsed with nitric acid during cleaning they cannot be used for collecting samples to be analyzed for nitrogen sensitive parameters If additional sample volume is needed replace the transfer cap assembly turn the pump on and collect additional volume The use of Teflon valves or ball check devices to retain the water column in the sample delivery tubing during the transfer phase when large volumes of sample are required is acceptable These devices however must be constructed so that they may be completely disassembled and cleaned according to the procedures in Appendix C 2 1 When sampling is completed all Teflon tubing should be discarded EISOPQAM E 2 November 2001 E 2 Large Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps E 2 1 Introduction Pumps included within this category are any of the typical large diameter 3 inch to 4 inch electric submersibles such as Goulds Grunfos or Jacuzzi These pumps are necessary when large amounts of water must be removed from wells such as deep 4 inch monitoring wells and drilled or bored potable wells These pumps are generally powered by 120 volt generators and require a minimum of two persons for operation As such utmost care should be observed to ensure the safe operation of this equipment particularl
580. take tubing should be carefully installed upstream and away from the conduit to prevent metals contamination This can be accomplished by clamping the tubing upstream of the conduit using laboratory clamps and wrapping the submerged portion of conduit pipe with a protective barrier e g duct tape 9 4 4 Extractable Organic Compounds Pesticides and PCBs When an automatic sampler is used for collecting samples for the analyses of extractable organic compounds pesticides and or PCBs the installation procedures include cutting the proper length of new Teflon tubing rinsing of the entire sampler collection system with organic analyte free water and collection of appropriate blanks for organic compounds analysis For the organic analyte free water rinse approximately one half gallons is initially pumped into the composite sample container and discarded An additional one and one half gallons approximate are then pumped into the composite sample container for distribution into the appropriate blank container Finally the collection tubing should be positioned in the wastewater stream and the sampler programmed and initiated EISOPQAM 9 4 November 2001 9 4 5 Automatic Sampler Security Field investigators should take whatever steps are necessary to prevent tampering with EPA equipment A lock or custody seal may be placed on the sampler to detect tampering However this does not prevent tampering with the sample collection tubing If necessar
581. taminants are of concern Paint scaly or heavy rust and grease must be removed before use most often by sandblasting the equipment Ancillary equipment such as auger flights may be constructed of other materials since this equipment does not come in direct contact with the samples The procedures outlined in Section 5 13 7 should be followed The procedures outlined in Section 5 13 7 should be followed EISOPQAM 12 1 November 2001 12 3 Sampling Methodology This discussion of soil sampling methods reflects both the equipment used to collect the sample as well as how the sample is handled and processed after retrieval Selection of equipment is usually based on the depth of sampling but it is also controlled to a certain extent by the characteristics of the material Simple manual techniques and equipment such as hand augers are usually selected for surface or shallow subsurface soil sampling As the depth of the sampling interval increases some type of powered sampling equipment is usually needed to overcome the friction induced by soil resistance and depth The following is an overview of the various sample collection methods employed over three general depth classifications surface shallow subsurface and deep subsurface Any ofthe deep collection methods described may be used to collect samples from the shallower intervals 12 3 1 Manual Collection Techniques and Equipment These methods are used primarily to collect surface and shall
582. tance relative to obvious and permanent landmarks for future reference A typical coordinate grid where the station and line numbers are all defined as positive and which extend from the grid origin in the north Y and east X directions eliminates confusion while recording and processing data Review data as much as possible while it is being recorded for erroneous readings Reoccupy station locations to verify data if necessary 15 6 2 Specific Surface Geophysical Methods The following is a brief description of the electromagnetic and magnetic geophysical instruments used by Branch personnel their capabilities and some of their limitations Electrical Methods Metal Detection Metal detectors are used to detect changes in electrical conductivity caused by the presence of metallic materials both ferrous and non ferrous Metal detectors 1 are generally limited to shallow depths 1 to 3 meters 2 can detect large metallic objects such as buried ferrous material and or metallic laden wastes at depths of 3 to 6 meters 3 are insensitive to soil moisture and small metallic objects and 4 are light weight and economical Several different metal detectors are available for use These are described below e Standard Treasure Seeker Metal Detector This is the typical hand held unit with a disk that is swept across the ground surface It is useful for locating items of small mass that are located at or just below the groun
583. tandards Region 4 Office of Technical Services http www epa gov region4 wastepgs oftecser oftecser htm Region 3 Risk Assessment tables http www epa gov reg3hwmd risk riskmenu htm Region 9 Risk Assessment tables http www epa gov region09 waste sfund prg index html NCEA ORD Cinn web page http www epa gov ncea biblio htm Oak Ridge National Laboratory risk http risk Isd ornl gov homepage rap tool htm assessment page EPA s Intergrated Risk Information http www epa gov ngispgm3 iris System ref doses and slope factors EISOPQAM 2 2 November 2001 2 3 Civil Enforcement Investigations and Studies 2 3 1 Introduction This SOP covers the field and operational aspects of conducting field investigations however it is beyond the scope of this manual to cover all aspects of enforcement activities Each enforcement investigation must be tailored to meet the needs of the anticipated enforcement action The lead attorney and compliance specialists should be consulted on a continuing basis during the planning conducting and report writing phases of enforcement investigations Civil investigations are conducted for the Water and Waste Management Divisions and the Air Pesticides and Toxics Management Division to determine if a facility site or project is meeting the terms of a Consent Decree order water permit etc These investigations are conducted under a number of environmental laws which include The Clean Water Act CW
584. tated where a high level of dissolved solids or a particular dissolved constituent would prevent proper gelling of a bentonite grout Neat cement grouts should be mixed using 6 5 to 7 gallons of water per 94 Ib bag of Type 1 Portland cement The addition of bentonite 5 to 10 percent to the cement grout is generally used to delay the setting time and may not be needed in all applications The specific mixtures and other types of cement and or grout proposed should be evaluated on a case by case basis by a senior field geologist 6 4 6 Above Ground Riser Pipe and Outer Protective Casing The well casing when installed and grouted should extend above the ground surface a minimum of 2 5 feet A vent hole should be drilled into the top of the well casing cap to permit pressure equalization if applicable An outer protective casing should be installed into the borehole after the annular grout has cured for at least 24 hours The outer protective casing should be of steel construction with a hinged locking cap Generally outer protective casings used over 2 inch well casings are 4 inches square by 5 feet long Similarly protective casings used over 4 inch well casings are 6 inches square and 5 feet long Round protective casings are also acceptable All protective casings should have sufficient clearance around the inner well casings so that the outer protective casings will not come into contact with the inner well casings after installation The protec
585. tation Techniques Geonics Ltd Missassauga Ontario Canada January 1983 McNeill J D Technical Note TN 5 Electrical Induction of Soils and Rocks Geonics Ltd Missassauga Ontario Canada October 1980 McNeill J D Technical Note TN 6 Electromagnetic Terrain Conductivity Measurements at Low Induction Numbers Geonics Ltd Missassauga Ontario Canada October 1980 ABEM WADI Instruction Manual Atlas Copco Bromma Sweden Breiner S Applications Manual for Portable Magnetometers Geometrics Sunnyvale CA 1973 Model G 856 Proton Precession Magnetometer Operators Manual EG amp G Geometrics Sunnyvale CA EISOPQAM 15 36 November 2001 SECTION 16 FIELD MEASURABLE PHYSICAL CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES To measure physical chemical characteristics of a sample that are representative of field conditions as they exist at the time of sample collection by selecting the appropriate meter instrument s and by properly calibrating or verifying each instrument 16 1 Introduction Temperature specific conductance conductivity hydrogen ion concentration pH turbidity dissolved oxygen DO chlorine salinity flash point and the halogen test are discussed in this section The order in which the measurements are made may be important in some field investigations The parameters will be discussed in the most applicable order References for each parameter can be found at the end of t
586. tc where more than a small area or short stream reach is to be investigated then several factors become interrelated and need to be considered in sampling location selection An excellent reference guide to conducting surface water stream studies is F W Kittrells A Practical Guide to Water Quality Studies 9 EISOPQAM 5 16 November 2001 Before any sampling is conducted an initial reconnaissance should be made to locate suitable sampling locations Bridges and piers are normally good choices as sampling sites since they provide ready access and permit water sampling at any point across the width of the water body However these structures may alter the nature of water flow and thus influence sediment deposition or scouring Additionally bridges and piers are not always located in desirable locations with reference to waste sources tributaries etc Wading for water samples in lakes ponds and slow moving rivers and streams must be done with caution since bottom deposits are easily disturbed thereby resulting in increased sediments in the overlying water column On the other hand wadeable areas may be best for sediment sampling In slow moving or deep water a boat is usually required for sampling Sampling station locations can be chosen without regard to other means of access if the stream is navigable by boat especially in estuarine systems where boats frequently provide the only access to critical sampling locations Fresh water enviro
587. te divide the population into strata that have relatively homogenous characteristics Determine the time frame to which the decision applies EISOPQAM 5 29 November 2001 gt Determine when to collect the data gt Define the scale of the decision making gt Identify any practical constraints on data collection Step 5 Develop a Decision Rule Step 6 Step 7 Purpose Develop a logical If then statement that defines the conditions that would cause the decision maker to choose among alternate actions Activities gt Specify the parameter s that characterizes the population of interest gt Specify the action level for the decision gt Confirm the measurement detection limits will allow reliable comparisons with action level gt Combine the outputs from the previous DQO steps and develop a decision rule Specify Limits of Decision Errors Purpose To specify the decision maker s tolerable limits on decision errors which are used to establish performance goals for limiting uncertainty in the data Note that a probabilistic sampling design is necessary to develop limits on decision errors Activities Determine the possible range of the parameter of interest gt Define both types of decision errors and their potential consequences and select the baseline condition gt Specify a range of possible parameter values where the consequences of a false negative decsion error are relatively minor
588. te sites EISOPQAM 4 1 November 2001 Field Health and Safety Manual USEPA Region IV 1990 This manual covers safety involved in all field activities performed in Region 4 It includes regional policy regarding training requirements medical monitoring and personal protection Safety Health and Environmental Management Program Procedures and Policy Manual This manual covers safety practices and rules governing activities at SESD facilities and field sites The remaining parts of this section cover hazard communication safety protocols training and equipment that are to be used when conducting hazardous waste investigations 4 2 Hazard Communication Procedure 4 2 1 Introduction The purpose of this hazard communication procedure is to ensure that the hazards of all chemicals used by the Branch are evaluated and that information concerning their hazards are transmitted to Branch personnel The transmittal of information is to be accomplished by means of a comprehensive hazard communication program which includes container labeling and other forms of warning material safety data sheets MSDS and employee training 4 2 2 Scope This hazard communication procedure covers activities involving the use and storage of hazardous chemicals 4 2 3 Labels and Other Forms of Warnings Personnel responsible for receiving and storage of hazardous chemicals from manufacturers and suppliers will ensure that the containers are marked with the follo
589. te that while collecting positions for one feature for example the positions along a road you can Nest other features for example wells or other sample points on one side of the road or the other then press Ok to accept and store the wells or other sample points feature and attribute values and continue logging the road When finished press Esc to exit Data Capture and return to Main Menu in the Geoexplorer II scroll to Close File and select Yes to return to Main Menu CONSIDERATIONS m Template 7 d d Template 8 m Check the horizontal control point data at or near the site for GPS equipment precision and accuracy To obtain a nearby National Geodetic Survey NGS control point search the website www ngs noaa gov and click NGS Products and Services then go into Data Sheets until NGSmap is found This is an interactive NGS data sheet retrieval tool that will produce a map of up to 32 control points near the site Use the data sheets to find the horizontal control point and record a separate point generic feature data file at the control point as a check of the manufacturers specifications for the GPS unit When collecting GPS locational information keep in mind the available maps or areal photographs of the site Note The GIS group has electronic georeferenced coverage of most of the region with USGS Topographical Maps or Aerial Photography One of the best websites to obtain aerial photographs of a site i
590. ted of being highly contaminated may require shipment as dangerous goods Regulations for packing marking labeling and shipping of dangerous goods by airtransport are promulgated by the International Air Transport Authority IATA which is equivalent to United Nations International Civil Aviation Organization UN ICAO 1 Transportation of hazardous materials dangerous goods by EPA personnel is covered by EPA Order 1000 18 2 D 2 Shipment of Dangerous Goods The project leader is responsible for determining if samples collected during a specific field investigation meet the definitions for dangerous goods If a sample is collected of a material that is listed in the Dangerous Goods List Section 4 2 IATA then that sample must be identified packaged marked labeled and shipped according to the instructions given for that material If the composition of the collected sample s is unknown and the project leader knows or suspects that it is a regulated material dangerous goods the sample may not be offered for air transport If the composition and properties of the waste sample or highly contaminated soil sediment or water sample are unknown or only partially known the sample may not be offered for air transport In addition the shipment of pre preserved sample containers or bottles of preservatives e g NaOH pellets HCL etc which are designated as dangerous goods by IATA is regulated Shipment of nitric acid is forbidden on all
591. tely the responsibility of each individual worker Field investigators will not be required to participate in any operation which violates OSHA and EPA regulations guidance The safety protocols in this section are written in accordance with those defined by the following regulations guidance documents and manuals 29 CFR Part 1910 120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response These OSHA regulations govern workers at hazardous waste sites and include requirements for training equipment and practices involved in handling of hazardous materials 29 CFR Part 1910 1200 Hazard Communication These OSHA regulations govern workers handling hazardous materials and include requirements for training labeling and documentation involved in handling hazardous materials 29 CFR Part 1910 134 Respiratory Protection These OSHA regulations govern the use and maintenance of respiratory protection equipment used by personnel handling hazardous wastes Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazard Waste Activities This NIOSH OSHA USCG and EPA guidance manual is for those who are responsible for occupational safety and health programs at hazardous waste sites It assumes a basic knowledge of science and experience in occupational safety and health It is the product of four Agencies NIOSH OSHA USCG and EPA mandated by CERCLA section 301 f to study the problem of protecting the safety and health of workers at hazardous was
592. ter samples from these installations see Section 7 Ground Water Sampling for a detailed description of these techniques and methods 6 11 4 Special Considerations for Screen Point 15 Installations Grouting In many applications it may be appropriate to grout the abandoned probe hole where a Screen Point 15 sampler was installed This is accomplished via pressure grouting through the probe rod during sampler retrieval To accomplish this the grout plug is knocked out of the bottom of the screen using a grout plug push adapter and a grout nozzle is fed through the probe rod extending just below the bottom of the screen As the probe rod and sampler are pulled grout is injected in the open hole below the screen at a rate that just fills the open hole created by the pull Teflon grout plugs are used for all EIB investigations using this method of abandonment Screen Material Selection Screen selection is also a consideration in sampling with the Screen Point 15 sampler The screens are available in two materials stainless steel and PVC Because of stainless steel s durability ability to be cleaned and re used and overall inertness and compatibility with most contaminants it is the choice of materials for all EIB investigations EISOPQAM 6 19 November 2001 6 12 References 1 National Ground Water Association Manual of Water Well Construction Practices NGWA Westerville OH 2 US EPA Handbook of Suggested Practices for th
593. terization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual Volume 1 Site Investigations EPA 600 4 84 075 8 US EPA Guidance of Choosing a Sampling Design for Environmental Data Collection EPA QA G5 58S Peer Review Draft August 2000 9 Kittrell F W A Practical Guide to Water Quality Studies 10 US EPA Order 5360 1 Policy and Program Requirements for the Mandatory Agency wide Quality System May 5 2000 EISOPQAM 5 41 November 2001 SECTION 6 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF MONITORING WELLS PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES Ensure that the monitoring well will provide high quality samples Ensure that the monitoring well is constructed properly and will last the duration of the project Ensure that the monitoring well will not serve as a conduit for contaminants to migrate between aquifers 6 1 Introduction Methods and procedures for the design and installation of monitoring wells to be employed in Region 4 are contained in this section They are to be used for all permanent and temporary monitoring wells installed for collecting ground water samples for analysis 6 2 Permanent Monitoring Wells Design Considerations The design and installation of permanent monitoring wells involves drilling into various types of geologic formations that exhibit varying subsurface conditions Designing and installing permanent monitoring wells in these geologic environments may require several different drilling methods and installation proced
594. terns are known 5 6 2 Multiple Source Area Grided Programs Some ground water screening investigations involve identifying multiple source areas and determining the size and shape delineation of the associated plumes over relatively large areas In these cases it may be appropriate to pre determine and establish a grid pattern to direct the collection of ground water samples As the apparent contaminant pattern begins to develop it may be appropriate to disregard established but unsampled sampling locations and concentrate on other areas within the grid pattern It may even be appropriate to expand the area of investigation by establishing additional sampling locations These locations may be determined by using a grid or may be located using best judgement in an iterative manner Considerations regarding non aqueous phases must be observed here as well If aqueous phase sample analysis indicates that DNAPL constituents may be present sampling should be conducted at the surface of the confining unit to determine if product layers are present 5 6 3 Typical Ground Water Screening Devices Listed below are numerous tools devices and techniques available to field investigators that can be used to effectively collect ground water samples for rapid field screening and plume delineation Temporary wells Well casing can be installed temporarily either inside hollow stem augers or in an open hole after removal of hollow or solid stem augers
595. th the portable system Note Hand pump sprayers generally are not acceptable storage or application containers for the above materials with the exception of tap water This also applies to stainless steel sprayers All hand sprayers have internal oil coated gaskets and black rubber seals that may contaminate the solutions B 1 3 Disposal of Solvent Cleaning Solutions Procedures for the safe handling and disposition of investigation derived waste IDW including used wash water rinse water and spent solvents are in Section 5 15 B 1 4 Equipment Contaminated with Concentrated Wastes Equipment used to collect samples of hazardous materials or toxic wastes or materials from hazardous waste sites RCRA facilities or in process waste streams should be field cleaned before returning from the study At a minimum this should consist of washing with soap and rinsing with tap water More stringent procedures may be required at the discretion of the field investigators EISOPQAM B 2 November 2001 B 1 5 Safety Procedures for Field Cleaning Operations Some of the materials used to implement the cleaning procedures outlined in this appendix can be harmful if used improperly Caution should be exercised by all field investigators and all applicable safety procedures should be followed At a minimum the following precautions should be taken in the field during these cleaning operations e Safety glasses with splash shields or goggles and latex gl
596. that these samples were split with the Region 4 laboratory 5 13 13 Special Quality Control Procedures for Dioxins and Furans All samples collected for dioxins and furans analyses are analyzed by other EPA laboratories or through contract laboratories The Region 4 laboratory does not conduct in house analyses for dioxins and furans The Region 4 laboratory should be consulted for the current quality control procedures for dioxin and furan samples prior to the sampling event 5 14 Internal Quality Control Procedures 5 14 1 Introduction The focus of this subsection is on Field Equipment Center FEC operations involving preparation of sampling and support equipment for field operations as well as for field data generated under the Specific Sample Collection Quality Control Procedures discussed in Section 5 13 Quality control checks of these operations insure that field sampling teams are provided with equipment that is suitable for sampling use and that field sampling is conducted using proper procedures EISOPQAM 5 36 November 2001 5 14 2 Traceability Requirements Records in the form of bound notebooks will be kept by FEC personnel documenting the dates of operations and the person performing operations for the following Organic Analyte Free Water System Maintenance Field and FEC Systems Maintenance on field systems will be performed immediately following every major study or at least once per calendar quarter FEC system mainte
597. the Technical Coordinator to assure that requests for technical support are directed to the appropriate Regional Program and SESD offices After a decision by the SAC to request technical support for a criminal investigation the Technical Coordinator will discuss the case with the SESD Director or their designated representative The SESD Director in consultation and with the concurrence of the Deputy Regional Administrator DRA will decide whether or not technical support will be provided by SESD Following a decision that technical support will be provided by SESD the SAC will prepare a written request addressed through the DRA to the SESD Director Copies of the request will be routed to the appropriate Regional program offices Prior to conducting of the investigation the Technical Coordinator will discuss the case with SESD personnel and will inform the Case Agent of any technical requirements that may influence project planning Conversely it is the responsibility of the Technical Coordinator to inform SESD personnel of all known technical aspects of a case including the presence of any known situations which may pose health and or safety risks or otherwise interfere with their operations Subsequent to the field investigation the Technical Coordinator in consultation with the Case Agent will discuss with SESD personnel the progress of scheduled analyses and the potential need for additional or more detailed analyses Information regarding t
598. the column This is done so that the purging will pull water from the formation into the screened area of the well and up through the casing so that the entire static volume can be removed If the pump is placed deep into the water column the water above the pump may not be removed and the subsequent samples particularly if collected with a bailer may not be representative of the ground water EISOPQAM 7 4 November 2001 It is recommended that no more than three to five feet of hose be lowered into the water column If the recovery rate of the well is faster than the pump rate and no observable draw down occurs the pump should be raised until the intake is within one foot of the top of the water column for the duration of purging If the pump rate exceeds the recovery rate of the well the pump will have to be lowered as needed to accommodate the draw down After the pump is removed from the well all wetted portions of the hose and the pump should be cleaned as outlined in Appendix B of this SOP Careful consideration shall be given to using pumps to purge wells which are excessively contaminated with oily compounds because it may be difficult to adequately decontaminate severely contaminated pumps under field conditions When wells of this type are encountered alternative purging methods such as bailers should be considered General Low Flow Low Stress Method Preference The device with the lowest pump or water removal rate and the leas
599. the gray region gt Assign probability values to points above and below the action level that reflect the tolerable probability for the occurrence of decision errors Optimize the Design for Obtaining Data Purpose To identify resource effective sampling and analysis design for generating data that are expected to satisfy the DQO s Activities gt Review the DQO outputs and existing environmental data gt Develop general data collection design alternatives Formulate the mathematical expression necessary for each design alternative gt Select the sample size that satisfies the DQOs for each design alternative gt Select the most resource effective design that satisfies all DQOs gt Document the operational details and theoretical assumptions of the selected design in the study plan or quality assurance project plan QAPP There are several benefits of using the DQO process including providing a reliable methodology for clarifying how decisions about the site will be supported by environmental data and for establishing site specific performance criteria for these decisions Other benefits are it helps conserve resources by determining which data collection and analytical methods are most appropriate and it provides investigators with an end point to make defensible decisions EISOPQAM 5 30 November 2001 The DQO process has both qualitative and quantitative components The qualitative steps encourage logical and p
600. the latest training received and by whom was it provided Comments 15 What equipment was available and or used during the investigation Comments EISOPQAM 2 49 November 2001 16 Did equipment appear to have been properly cleaned and protected from possible contamination prior to bringing it to the field Comments 17 What type of samples were collected Comments 18 For what analyses were the samples collected Comments 19 Was sampling conducted in accordance with standard operating procedures specified by the State or EPA Comments 20 Did investigative sampling personnel conduct a comprehensive investigation evaluation or only collect samples Comments 2 If investigative sampling personnel only collected samples how were their sampling efforts coordinated with the rest of the investigation Comments 22 If facility personnel collected samples did the State Contractor accept split samples Comments 23 Were adequate field records kept in a bound log book Comments 3 24 Were photographs taken and a photo log maintained Comments 25 Were QA QC procedures adequate for the type of study being conducted and type number of samples being collected Comments Had investigative sampling personnel received appropriate safety training Comments Do investigative sampling personnel undergo periodic refresher safety training Comments Did investigative sampling personnel have appropriate safety equi
601. the pump it will create delays in sampling E 4 6 Maintenance and Precautions 1 Empty the hose of contaminated water before leaving the sampling location Do not bring the hose back to the FEC if it contains purge water from a site 2 Field clean the pump before leaving the sampling location see Appendix B 3 Do not run the generator without first checking the oil 4 Do not put the pump in the trailer with the generator 5 Ifthe pump is equipped with a check valve or back flow preventer periodically check this device to make sure that it is operating This is a common place for debris or other material to accumulate and interfere with the proper operation of the device E 4 7 Trouble Shooting Loose connection at Check wiring at pump pump Repair as needed Generator Running Generator off No Pump Output Cord unplugged at Plug pump back in generator Over voltage on Adjust generator controller display output idle speed allow generator more warm up time 4 Pump out of water 4 Lower pump into water Hose collapsed or Unkink hose kinked Pump will not run or 6 Open cooling water shuts down with reservoir and check thermal overload signal cooling water Add additional organic analyte free water to cooling water reservoir EISOPQAM E 8 November 2001 APPENDIX F REGIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT FOR CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS SESD CID The Science and Ecosystem Support Division SESD provides technic
602. tibility with Materials Used in Well Construction Sampling and Remediation http www epa gov ada download issue napl pdf should be used for guidance in this area and in the use of PVC with Nonaqueous Phase Liquids NAPLs Another concern is to select materials that will be rugged enough to endure the entire monitoring period Site conditions will generally dictate the kind of materials that can be used A preliminary field investigation should be conducted to determine the geologic conditions so that the most suitable materials can be selected The best grade or highest quality material for that particular application should be selected Each manufacturer can supply the qualitative data for each grade of material that is being considered All materials selected for monitoring well installation should be evaluated and approved by a senior field geologist prior to field activities Well screen and casing materials generally used in monitoring well construction on RCRA and Superfund sites are listed in order of preference 1 Stainless Steel 304 or 316 2 Rigid PVC meeting NSF Standard 14 type WC 3 Other where applicable EISOPQAM 6 10 November 2001 There are other materials used for well screens and casings such as black iron carbon steel galvanized steel and fiberglass but these materials are not recommended for use in long term monitoring programs at hazardous waste sites because of their low resistance to chemical attack and p
603. tigation as well as the size and shape of the basin In ponds and small impoundments a single vertical composite at the deepest point may be sufficient Dissolved oxygen pH and temperature are generally measured for each vertical composite aliquot In naturally formed ponds the deepest point is usually near the center in impoundments the deepest point is usually near the dam In lakes and larger impoundments several vertical subsamples should be composited to form a single sample These vertical sampling locations are often collected along a transect or grid The number of vertical subsamples and the depths at which subsamples are taken are usually at the discretion of the field investigators In some cases it may be of interest to collect separate composites of epilimnetic and hypolimnetic zones above and below the thermocline or depth of greatest temperature change EISOPQAM 5 19 November 2001 In lakes with irregular shapes and with several bays and coves that are protected from the wind additional separate composite samples may be needed to adequately determine water quality Similarly additional samples should be collected where discharges tributaries land use characteristics etc are suspected of influencing water quality When collecting sediment samples in lakes ponds and reservoirs the sampling site should be approximately at the center of the water mass This is particularly true for reservoirs that are formed by the impound
604. tion 2 9 2 Investigation Study Plans Study plans are prepared for all UIC investigations and must be issued at least one week prior to the investigation The timing and nature of some emergency requests may preclude the issuance of a study plan A copy of the study plan in draft form will be provided to the requestor to ensure that the plan will meettheir objectives Asa general rule the Data Quality Objectives DQO process will be consulted during the study plan preparation phase The study plan should include as appropriate e Introduction The project leader and support staff requestor from the GW amp UIC Section and the objective s of the investigation e Background Facility compliance history manufacturing processes types of wastes produced waste treatment methods etc e Scope The study design should be discussed in this section including the number and location of the samples to be collected information which will be obtained and records to be reviewed e Logistics The travel and study dates e Methodology Analyses to be conducted and who will conduct analyses field and laboratory SOP references and when samples will be received by the laboratory 2 9 3 Investigation Reports An investigation report containing the following information will be completed Introduction When where and why the investigation was conducted and requesting office Staff who conducted the investigation e Background
605. tion gas If the reading is higher or lower than the standard gas value and continues to rise slowly it means that the calibration gas has not yet stabilized Wait a few seconds until the reading stabilizes and then press the enter key again Every time the enter is pressed the instrument measures the current gas concentration and calibrate accordingly Press the menu key to exit the standard gas calibration procedure and move to next menu item Disconnect the calibration gas bag EISOPQAM 17 20 November 2001 SECTION 18 WASTEWATER FLOW MEASUREMENT 18 1 Introduction The measurement of flow with surface water and wastewater sampling is essential to almost all water pollution control activities Activities such as water quality enforcement studies NPDES permit compliance monitoring water quality monitoring municipal operation and maintenance investigations rely on accurate flow measurements The importance of obtaining accurate flow data cannot be overemphasized particularly with respect to enforcement investigations since these data will be used as evidence in enforcement cases NPDES permits often limit the quantity mass loading of a particular pollutant that may be discharged and calculations of mass loadings are also frequently necessary for water quality studies and other purposes As much attention and care should be given to flow measurement in the design of a sampling program as to the collection of samples and their subsequ
606. tion of the extent of the systems audit is left to the Regional Office s discretion Selection of Monitoring Sites for Inspection Itis suggested that approximately five percent of a state agency s sites be inspected during a systems audit For smaller agencies at least two sites should be inspected One half of the sites to be inspected should be selected by the agency being audited while the other half should be selected by the RO audit team Data Audits A complete systems audit must include a review of the data processing and reporting procedures starting at the acquisition stage and terminating at the point of data entry into the AIRS computer system The guidance for conducting a data audit is given in Appendix 2 Section 2 5 0 Data and Information Management Audits of the Red Book Guidelines for Conducting Systems Audits of State and Local Agencies A systems audit should consist of three separate phases e pre audit activities e on site activities and e post audit activities Each of these activities is discussed in detail in Sections 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 3 3 and Appendix 15 Section 2 of the Red Book Because of the length of these Red Books sections they are incorporated by reference EISOPQAM 2 28 November 2001 Audit Reporting The systems audit report shall include Introduction Observations and Recommendations Field Laboratory Data Review Conclusion Appendix of Supporting Documentation The report s Appendi
607. tion prior to entering the support zone Decontamination personnel will perform decontamination on each other A decontamination line separate from the Level A decontamination line will be set up for this purpose Procedures used on this decontamination line will be those given for Level B decontamination Under no circumstances will decontamination personnel attempt to perform personal decontamination in the Level A decontamination line EISOPQAM 4 16 November 2001 Level B Decontamination Procedures Level B operations pose a limited risk of exposure to decontamination personnel Level B site workers often exit the exclusion zone with moderate levels of contamination on their outer gloves and boots To a lesser extent contamination may be present on their splash suits To protect against exposure to this contamination decontamination workers will perform their functions in Level C protection l Upon exiting the exclusion zone site workers will place all equipment in a designated area provided atthe first station The area will be covered with disposable plastic Following the equipment drop site workers will proceed to the first decontamination washtub bucket area where their boots and outer gloves will be thoroughly scrubbed with the appropriate cleaning solution usually alkaline soap and water Long handle brushes will be provided for use by the decontamination workers While at the first decontamination washtub bucket area decontamination w
608. tive casings should have a minimum of two weep holes for drainage These weep holes should be a minimum 1 4 inch in diameter and drilled into the protective casings just above the top of the concrete surface pads to prevent water from standing inside of the protective casings Protective casings made of aluminum or other soft metals are normally not acceptable because they are not strong enough to resist tampering Aluminum protective casing may be used in very corrosive environments such as coastal areas A protective casing is installed by pouring concrete into the borehole on top of the grout The protective casing is then pushed into the wet concrete and borehole a minimum of 2 feet Extra concrete may be needed to fill the inside of the protective casing so that the level of the concrete inside of the protective casing is at or above the level of the surface pad In areas where frost heave of the surface pad is possible the protective casing should first be pressed into the top surface of the grout seal and concrete poured around the protective casing A granular material such as sand or gravel can then be used to fill the space between the riser and protective casing The protective casing should extend approximately 3 feet above the ground surface or to a height so that the cap of the inner well casing is exposed when the protective casing is opened At each site all locks on the outer protective casings should be keyed alike EISOPQAM 6 6 November
609. to ensure compatibility of all components 1 2 3 4 5 6 Place O ring on PRT expendable point holder and attach to initial section of probe rod Place O ring on expendable point and press into expendable point holder Add drive cap to probe rod and push PRT system into ground Add additional probe rods as needed to push system to the desired sampling depth At the desired sampling depth attach pull cap to probe rod and pull the rod back to disengage the expendable point and expose the soil interval for sampling Remove the pull cap when this step is completed Secure the PRT adapter to a length of tubing sufficient to reach from the sampling interval to the surface with several feet of excess tubing extending beyond the top of the probe rod to facilitate sampling The adapter is secured tightly to the tubing using electrical tape This will not compromise the integrity of the sample to be collected as the sample is pulled directly through the adapter and is never exposed to the tape Run the tubing and adapter into the probe rod and using steady downward pressure turn the tubing counter clockwise to dock the adapter into the top of the expendable point holder Tug gently on the tubing to ensure that the adapter docked firmly into the expendable point holder Failure to dock could indicate that soil intruded during the push or that the expendable point was lost during the push EISOPQAM 19 3 November 2001 7 At this
610. to the laboratory The duration of the non refrigerated period shall be kept to a minimum but absolutely not more than two days including the sampling event Laboratory Upon arrival of the DNPH cartridges at the laboratory the samples shall be stored in the a refrigerator until extraction EISOPQAM 14 8 November 2001 14 3 2 Volatile Organic Compounds VOC Sampling with SUMMA 9Q Electropolished Stainless Steel Canisters or Silcosteel Canisters Using Method TO 15A The following is a synopsis of procedures which should be strictly adhered to for the cleanup and use of Summa canisters for sampling air for Volatile Organic Compounds VOC analysis This summary is adapted from Method TO 15A of the COMPENDIUM OF METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR The following procedures must be followed in the preparation and use of Summa canisters for collecting samples for VOC analysis e Allnew Summa Silcosteel canisters must be individually checked for contamination by the laboratory before use One of each batch of 10 Summa canisters that are subsequently cleaned must be analyzed to check for contamination e All sampler tubing fittings and wetted parts of valves must be solvent washed in hexane and heated to 2100 C These parts should then be assembled and flushed with nitrogen for at least 8 hours prior to use in the sample train or in the canister cleanup apparatus e Each canister s valve and
611. toxic substances requiring controls Compliance Biomonitoring Inspection CBI A CBl is an inspection utilizing a static or flow through bioassay in lieu of or in addition to the collection of samples The objectives of this inspection are to Identify those permittees which may be meeting the minimum technology based requirements of the CWA but whose level of treatment is not sufficient to ensure the biological integrity of the receiving waters Identify those permittees which may have potential toxic substances in their discharge s that have not been identified or included in their NPDES permit and Evaluate compliance with acute or chronic toxicity permit limit requirements In those instances where biomonitoring reveals the presence of toxic substances not addressed in the issued permit the permittee may be required through the 308 process to chemically and or physically characterize the composition of the discharge to identify and quantify the toxic substance or substances CWA Section 308 Guidance for conducting these inspections is given in the Compliance Bio Monitoring Inspection Manual 4 Performance Audit Inspection PAI The PAI is used to evaluate the permittee s self monitoring program As with a CEI the PAI is used to verify the permittee s reported data and compliance through a records check However the PAI provides a more resource intensive review of the permittee s self monitoring program and evaluates th
612. ttach a Operating Procedure or your Agency Quality Assurance Project copy of your current Standard Operating Procedure Plan Who has signature authority for approving corrections Name Program Function Is the group supplying data provided an opportunity to review If yes how data and correct erroneous entries Are corrected data resubmitted to the issuing group for cross checking prior to release 4 Data Processing MH UT Have special procedures been instituted for pollution index reporting Who at the agency has the responsibility for submitting data to AIRS Name Title Are those persons different from the individuals who submit data to PARS EISOPQAM H 16 November 2001 If yes provide name and title of individual responsible for PARS data submittal Name Title How often are data submitted to AIRS PARS Does the agency routinely request a hard copy printout on submitted data emm a 3 om PS es a Are records kept for at least 3 years by the agency in an orderly If yes does this include raw data calculation QC accessible form data andreports Ifno please comment Do field data include the following documentation owm 0 LLL EC TRE EN RN E emss sRsueue 1 mesas wwemenae ECC UNE NN ER RN Are data reduction audits performed on a routine basis mE If yes at what frequency Are precision and accuracy data checked eac
613. ttom of the surface water body in the upstream direction Excess water may be removed from the scoop or spoon However this may result in the loss of some fine particle size material associated with the bottom of the surface water body Care should be taken to minimize the loss of the fine particle sizes Aliquots of the sample are then placed in a glass pan and homogenized according to the quartering method described in Section 5 13 8 of this SOP In surface water bodies that are too deep to wade but less than eight feet deep a stainless steel scoop or spoon attached to a piece of conduit can be used either from the banks if the surface water body is narrow or from a boat Again care should be taken to minimize the loss of the fine particle sizes The sediment is placed into a glass pan and mixed according to Section 5 13 8 of this SOP EISOPQAM 11 1 November 2001 If the surface water body has a significant flow and is too deep to wade a BMH 60 sampler scoop may be used The BMH 60 is not particularly efficient in mud or other soft substrates because its weight will cause penetration to deeper sediments thus missing the most recently deposited material at the sediment water interface It is also difficult to release secured samples in an undisturbed fashion that would readily permit subsampling The BMH 60 may be used provided that caution is exercised by only taking subsamples that have not been in contact with the metal walls of the sampler
614. ture is 80 F to 90 F e Cool vests are required when wearing a totally encapsulated chemical protective suit for more than 15 minutes and the temperature is above 90 F e At the discretion of the SSO a lack of shade may result in the need for cool vests regardless of the temperature Heat stress monitors are optional unless mandated by the SSO EISOPQAM 4 13 November 2001 Stress Field personnel on hazardous waste sites are exposed to both psychological and physiological stress Psychological stress is countered with adequate training and job proficiency Physiological stress is primarily due to exposure of the worker to extremes of heat and cold Heat Stress Heat stress can be the result of working during hot weather or wearing protective clothing that inhibits natural ventilation It can occur even under moderate temperature conditions Whenever possible work should be scheduled during cooler parts of the day or night The following protocols are to be used to counter heat stress e Allow workers to replace lost body fluids water will be available at the site Liquids for electrolyte replenishment will be available at the discretion of the SSO e Cool vests will be made available Their use will be designated during modified Level C or higher protective level operations when ambient temperatures exceed 80 F or at the discretion of the SSO see preceding policy e At the discretion of the SSO workers vital signs will be m
615. ty within the area represented by the sample When appropriate spacial duplicate grab and or composite samples should be collected during major investigations and studies conducted by the Branch A major study would include all investigations where more than twenty 20 samples were collected or those studies where the study objectives dictate that additional quality control samples be collected No more than ten percent of all samples should be collected as spacial duplicates These samples should be collected at the same time using the same procedures the same type of equipment and in the same types of containers as the original samples but collected from a different location within the area represented by the original They should also be preserved in the same manner and submitted for the same analyses as the required samples The collection of spacial duplicate composite samples requires that the sample aliquots be arrayed in a manner different from the original sample and spaced within the same area of representativeness Data from spacial duplicates will be examined by the lead investigator to determine if the samples represent the areas intended in the project work plan Temporal Variability When required temporal variability at a given sampling location will be measured by collecting temporal duplicate samples These samples will be collected from the same sampling location using the same techniques and the same type of equipment but at a
616. uded in 5 6 of this SOP However specific considerations in developing a UIC sampling strategy are e Identification of constituents being injected e Identification of pollutants in ground water e Delineation of contamination plume Complexity of the sampling program will vary based on a number of factors Some primary factors are as follows e Size of the target area e Hydro geological conditions of the target area e Accessibility to potable and ground water monitoring wells EISOPQAM 5 26 November 2001 5 11 A Air Toxics Monitoring Designs Ambient air monitoring strategies vary depending upon the monitoring objective However some elements are important for any air monitoring objective Meteorology measurements should be taken concurrent with any major air monitoring effort At a minimum these measurements should include wind speed and wind direction At least on background sampling location possibly more should be selected to sample an air mass that is representative of the area before it is impacted by any emission from the site being monitored Background samples should be collected concurrent with the site samples An adequate number of sampling locations should be selected to assure representative sampling of the air mass and provide enough data to adequately characterize the contaminant concentrations being emitted from the site Generally at a site with soil contamination sampling should be conducted at the areas of h
617. udius ejduues Auedujoooe sados Yuld pue aU NOLERSISHLISIO Uia Nia A8 Q3AI3034 AG Q3HSIDONIT3H prole a SN GS a es eS rece a eee INE EU eee SUNOS le Ee lt ft Blo a amen E EM NES EET a ERE Eee eee cece es ee SD ee ee poet ccce cere c t Une Sue enemy Oe Rare Res heey eee ree Fi See a ee ee ee ee HORS Ae ee TE Reed a Ludus et i scd n WE nu NP NEM E EN ed ON MR eee eee ee iene c cop ae 3E Lol o ee cedes eee poc uuseEME iut c e o Hu seb e tede E NMHEEBEEDBLEII 3r Egli p EILEen erst HII ta eL s peu pb l e Exc Re E HER S EB B MENOR nT IA el 2 Errem o pe dies ee o gt z 3 8 KNO E E a x 9 a a asn Side R OVE E S mamwys Nouvis OZ42 9090 VIONO39 SNIHLY QVO NOILVLS 39371109 086 NOISIAIG LYOddNS SW31SASOO3 ANY 32N3I2S Td Alv Sx via wadval Loaroud NSIS SUD IWS NOILV901 3AVN LOArOud ON LOarOud AODNFOV NOLLO3 LOHd TVLN3ANOMSIAN3 S N v NOISY Vd E KN Q8023M AAOLSNO 40 NIVH November 2001 3 12 EISOPQAM FIGURE 3 2 MEDIA CODES D Station ID Station ID is required if positional data is recorded for the sample Any combination of letters numbers or other characters Maximum of 20 characters Use this column to identify a sampling station where one or more samples or field measurements are taken A few
618. ue returned by the meter Rinse the probe with de ionized water and store it in the manufacturer s recommended storage solution Leave the meter on until all sample measurements are performed and the results are recorded It is recommended that the meter be checked periodically against the known buffer values if used for extended periods 4 hrs If the meter 1s turned off it must be recalibrated Collect a sample Measure the temperature prior to measuring the pH Note Whenthe pH meter response is slow unstable or non reproducible it may be necessary 2 EISOPQAM to check the conductivity If the conductivity is lower than 20 to 30 umhos cm then add 1 ml of 1M potassium chloride solution per 100 mls of sample Recheck the pH and record Immerse the probe in the sample keeping it away from the sides and bottom of the sample container Allow ample time for the probe to equilibrate with the sample while gently stirring the sample 16 5 November 2001 3 While suspending the probe away from the sides and bottom of the sample container record the pH 4 Rinse the probe with de ionized water and store it in a de ionized water filled container until the next sample is ready Operational check 1 While in use periodically check the pH by rinsing the probe with de ionized water blot dry and immerse it into the pH 7 buffer solution 2 Perform a post calibration verification at the end of the day and record all measurem
619. uene bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically Press 4 Span Press 3 FID Connect Methane bag to probe Press Enter Start In Manual mode after counts stabilize press Enter Accept In Auto mode instrument will accept value automatically Calibration Complete 1 2 Press EXIT From MAIN MENU press 1 Run Check response of each detector by applying the appropriate calibration gases to the instrument Methane for the FID and Toluene for the PID Record responses Instrument is ready to use To power down the instrument press and hold the OFF key Also turn the red H supply handle to the OFF position For more information on multi point calibration logging and data transfer consult manual EISOPQAM 17 10 November 2001 TVA 1000B DISPLAY MENU STRUCTURE RUN EISOPQAM SETUP INFO CALIBRATION CONFIG NUMBER SPAN PTS BACKGROUND CORRECT ACCEPT MODE SAVE MODE RF CALC MODE SPANCONC Enter Span Gas Conc ZERO CALIB SPAN CALIB RESPONSE FACTOR CHANGE NAME VALUE ACCEPT BACKGROUND CONC UPDATE ALARMS STEL LOW CEILING HIGH CEILING LOG NONE AUTO t VOC FE VOC FE CUSTOM PASSCODE NEW PASSCODE ENABLE DISABLE HARDWARE PROBE DISPLAY BASIC E
620. ugh tubing is deployed to reach the bottom of the temporary well screen At the onset of purging the tubing is slowly lowered to the bottom of the screen and is used to remove any formation material which may have entered the well screen during installation This is critical to ensuring rapid achievement of low turbidity conditions After the formation material is removed from the bottom of the screen the tubing is slowly raised through the water column to near the top of the column The tubing can be held at this level to determine if the pump is lowering the water level in the well If not secure the tubing at the surface to maintain this pumping level EISOPQAM 7 6 November 2001 If the water column is lowered and the pump is not variable speed continue to lower the tubing as the water column is lowered If a variable speed peristaltic pump is being used and draw down is observed on initiation of pumping reduce the pump speed and attempt to match the draw down of the well Sustained pumping at these slow rates will usually result in a relatively clear low turbidity sample If the draw down stabilizes maintain that level however if it continues to lower chase the water column until the well is evacuated In this case the recovered water column may be relatively free of turbidity and can be sampled It may take several episodes of recovery to provide enough volume for a complete sample With many of the direct push sampling techniques purgi
621. uipment can be used to screen a site for the presence of metallic or conductive material in a short period of time with fairly accurate results Surface geophysical methods are also valuable aids in determining sampling locations in areas where drilling or direct sampling would be too time consuming and costly or would create a dangerous situation Often times it is these geophysical data measurements that can assist in guiding the latter phases of an investigation When selecting the geophysical method s best suited for a study certain site factors should be considered They include the type of soils the depth to ground water general ground surface conditions wet dry frozen large surface or subsurface ore bodies depth to bedrock type of topography large surface metallic objects building tanks pipes etc power lines and underground cables buried drums and or contaminant plumes etc Once site conditions are known and evaluated then the instrument s have to be selected that will be most applicable to the specific site Geophysical techniques available for site investigations by Branch personnel can be placed into two categories electrical and magnetic The electrical methods include metal detection electromagnetics EM and VLF very low frequency The magnetic method is referred to as magnetometery These will be described in further detail later in this section Other geophysical techniques and methods such as ground penetrat
622. uld be to estimate the variability with confirmation of the estimate being made during the more extensive systematic study If a variability study is to be conducted it will be limited in scope and will use certain default values or assumptions to determine the number of samples to collect for determining site variability The methods used for variability studies are included in the following discussion of systematic sampling strategies Determination of the Number of Samples to Collect When designing a systematic grid sampling investigation the number of samples to be collected must be determined first This can be calculated based on variability information derived from previous sampling data Upon review of the historical data a contaminant or contaminants of concern COCs can be selected COCs are parameters which are closest to or in excess of an action level Their presence is normally the driving force behind the need to determine the extent of contamination EISOPQAM 5 10 November 2001 The following steps are to be followed to determine the number of samples to collect 6 1 Select a margin of error p acceptable for the subsequent use of the data For soil studies a margin of error of 0 20 is not unusual The margin of error may be obtained by dividing the precision wanted in units of concentration e g 10 ppm etc by the known or anticipated mean concentration of the COCs Note that changes in the precision or mean concentr
623. umbers of any sampling equipment used if available sampling station identification e time of sample collection e description of the sample location e description of the sample EISOPQAM 3 8 November 2001 who collected the sample e how the sample was collected e diagrams of processes e maps sketches of sampling locations and e weather conditions that may affect the sample e g rain extreme heat or cold wind etc EISOPQAM 3 9 November 2001 3 6 Document Control PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE e To assure that project files are maintained in accordance with Divisional guidelines Document control refers to the maintenance of inspection and investigation project files All information below shall be kept in project files Investigators may keep copies of reports in their personal files however all official and original documents relating to inspections and investigations shall be placed in the official project files The following documents shall be placed in the project file if applicable request memo from the program office copy of the study plan original Chain Of Custody Records and bound field logbooks copy of the Receipt for Sample forms e records obtained during the investigation e complete copy of the analytical data and memorandums transmitting analytical data official correspondence received by or issued by the Branch relating to the investigation including records of telephone cal
624. ument man then goes ahead of the rodman sets the level up as stated before and takes a rod reading backsight from the previous turning point The rodman then moves ahead of the instrument man for a new turning point rod reading foresight and so forth until the desired final point is located vertically Once the final point is located the instrument man breaks the set up of the level i e changes the H I and re levels the level The instrument man and rodman then run levels from the last or final point to the first point or benchmark This is called making a closed circuit or closed level loop EISOPQAM 15 18 November 2001 When practical leveling should be conducted to form a closed circuit That is the level circuit or loop should close back in close agreement to a benchmark by within 0 02 foot of the original reading or third order accuracy whichever is greater If the level circuit does not close within these limits of accuracy then the level circuit must be repeated until this accuracy is attained Third order accuracy is defined by the formula 0 05 foot x V number of miles run which means for a one mile level circuit the closure should be within five hundredths of a foot Figure 15 3 1 is an example of typical field notations for differential leveling
625. uncontrolled release Investigators should not utilize valves on tanks or bulk storage devices unless they are operated by the owner or operator of the facility or a containment plan is in place should the valve stick or break If the investigator must sample from a tank discharge valve the valving arrangement of the particular tank must be clearly understood to insure that the compartment s of interest is sampled Because of the many different types of designs and materials that may be encountered only general sampling procedures that outline sampling a tank from the top hatch are listed below 1 All relevant information concerning the tank such as the type of tank the tank capacity markings condition and suspected contents should be documented in a logbook 2 The samplers should inspect the ladder stairs and catwalk that will be used to access the top hatch to ensure that they will support the samplers and their equipment LEVEL B PROTECTION IS REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES 3 Before opening ground each metal tank using grounding wires alligator clips and a grounding rod or metal structure 4 Any vents or pressure release valves should be slowly opened to allow the unit to vent to atmospheric pressure Air monitoring for explosive flammable gases and toxic vapors should be conducted during the venting with the results recorded in a log book If dangerous concentrations of gases evolve from the vent or the pressure is to
626. upgrade to Level C respiratory protection Any response above 5 ppm when contaminants are not known will cause an upgrade to Level B respiratory protection A response above 200 ppm when contaminants are not known will cause an upgrade to Level A protection e Inorganic Vapors and Gases There are only a few direct reading instruments with the capability to detect and quantify non specific inorganic vapors and gases PIDs have a very limited capability in this area If specific inorganics are known or suspected of being present an attempt should be made to provide appropriate monitoring if possible In the absence of a monitoring capability always assume a worse case scenario and upgrade the level of protection see below to a level that gives respiratory and skin protection that is appropriate to a worse case assumption e Radiation A radiation survey will be conducted of the site The primary survey instrument will be a Geiger Mueller detector for beta gamma radiation Any response above background will result in evacuation of the area Following the initial survey monitoring will be repeated when new areas of the site are entered or when operations likely to cause a release are being conducted Levels of Personal Protection Personal protective equipment is divided into four categories based on the degree of protection afforded The following table compares the relative protection for each level tees Led LEVELC LEVELD
627. ures The selection of drilling methods and installation procedures should be based on field data collected during a hydrogeologic site investigation and or a search of existing data Each permanent monitoring well should be designed and installed to function properly throughout the duration of the monitoring program When designing monitoring wells the following should be considered short and long term objectives e purpose s of the well s probable duration of the monitoring program contaminants likely to be monitored types of well construction materials to be used surface and subsurface geologic conditions properties of the aquifer s to be monitored well screen placement e general site conditions and potential site health and safety hazards Each of the above considerations can be expanded into many subtopics depending on the complexity ofthe project In designing permanent monitoring wells the most reliable obtainable data should be utilized Once the data have been assembled and the well design s completed a drilling method s has to be selected The preferred drilling procedures for installing permanent monitoring wells are those that temporarily case the borehole during drilling and the construction of the well e g hollow stem augers and sonic methods However site conditions may not always be amenable to using these methods When this occurs alternate methods should be selected that will perform the j
628. us IDW amp ied eee eate re RR bee awe aes 5 39 Table 5 15 1 Disposal of IDW eeeeeeee 5 41 References i oec xxx TOES Mes M Rx her a es tes 5 42 EISOPQAM ToC iv November 2001 EISOPQAM TABLE of CONTENTS SECTION 6 Design and Installation of Monitoring Wells 6 1 6 1 Introduction 634002 ecc RA ERR ERCRAA Y bEREdU EE RARE EXE RISCHEE RS 6 1 6 2 Permanent Monitoring Wells Design Considerations 6 1 6 3 Drilling Methods aono pasen d hr R SOLE dr ced d AOL Pr 6 2 6 3 1 Hollow Stem Auger 22 4 2 244 hehsu RR a E ER RR RR RUE XR RA ARR ES 6 2 6 3 2 Solid Stem AUZE uu eccess ESPERE E Rex RIPE SE ERXEXSEE RIPE da E xS 6 2 6 3 3 Sonic Methods sisi ace x EEE EA E RODA hae aou GR RAE aaa ee 6 3 6 3 4 Rotary Methods 25 secu bars iud nane E REDUX i ae a ed pd ERIS I T EVE 6 3 6 3 5 Other Methods Lia secenesckkechee8EBQ IRAE IA REC Ser shes onde PR Iq E a A 6 4 6 4 Borehole Construction o c iesus Rr OE RE XAR EE ES Bs 6 5 6 4 1 Annular Space 45 ved bre gx iR Hu E bees RE REEEERqGER bere deeds 6 5 6 4 2 Overdrilling the Borehole i224 bres depart or pir Reb aue bre hats 6 5 6 4 3 Filter Pack Placement uu ssa Roxuk aka xA UR X WR A CA RO d eg 6 5 6 4 4 Filter Pack Seal Bentonite Pellet Seal Plug 00000 6 5 6 4 5 Grouting the Annular Space 22s hr REEF vabeee penser ERE E coe 6 6 6 4 6 Above Ground Riser Pipe and Outer Protective Casing 04 6 6 6
629. us phase contaminant or component such as benzene toluene ethyl benzene and xylene BTEX contamination without associated product and there is a high degree of confidence with respect to ground water flow direction In this situation a sample location would be placed in the middle of the source area for source area characterization and several locations would be established downgradient It is not possible to specify the numbers and locations for these sampling points Three points would typically be the minimum number one located immediately downgradient of the source area and two located to either side of the center line If contaminants were detected in any of the downgradient locations additional locations would need to be established downgradient and or side gradient of those locations to complete boundary delineation This process would continue until both the downgradient and lateral extent of the contamination were established EISOPQAM 5 14 November 2001 Asindicated the numbers and locations of these sampling locations are subject to site scale and other factors and can only be determined in the field using best judgement At this point some attention should be given to vertical characterization of the contaminants Additional samples should be collected at locations below the depths at which the contaminants were identified until the vertical extent is determined If this is not accomplished during screening activities it must be don
630. used at each well Comments Were samples properly transferred from the sampling device to the sample containers i e volatile sample first not aerated etc Comments Was pH of preserved samples checked to insure proper preservation Comments Were samples iced immediately after collection Comments For what analyses were the samples collected Comments If samples were split what were the sample station numbers for these Comments Are the ground water samples being filtered Comments If the ground water are being filtered what procedure is being used Comments EISOPQAM 2 37 November 2001 Is low flow low volume sampling being conducted e g is the intake of the pump at the middle of the screen Comments If low flow low volume sampling is being conducted is the water level being measured constantly to insure minimal drawdown of the less than 3 to 4 inches Comments Other comments or observations EISOPQAM 2 38 November 2001 SECTION 3 SAMPLING SOIL SEDIMENT SLUDGE ETC Non containerized 1 Type of samples collected Comments 2 General description of samples Comments How many samples were collected Comments 3 5 4 Were background and or control samples collected Comments Were representative samples collected Comments 6 Were grab or composite samples collected Comments 7 Were composite samples areal or vertical Comments 8 How many aliquots were taken fo
631. ush The site workers suits will be rinsed with water from a pump sprayer scrubbed with a brush which has not been allowed to contact the contaminated water in the washtub bucket and finally rinsed a second time with water from a pump sprayer Once cleared by the decontamination personnel the site worker will exit the rinse tub bucket area and proceed to a location where the outer gloves and boot covers if used will be removed and discarded Having been decontaminated the site worker will exit the contamination reduction corridor and enter the support zone The support zone will be located a distance of at least 25 feet upwind of the last station in the contamination reduction corridor Once in the support zone the site workers may receive a fresh cylinder of air new outer gloves and new boot covers and return through the contamination reduction corridor to the exclusion zone If there is to be no immediate return to the exclusion zone site workers will proceed to the last station At this location site workers will remove their boots first and then remove the suit Following this SCBAs and cool vests if used will be removed Each site worker will then clean their SCBA masks with a soap and water rinse followed by cleaning the inside of the mask with an alcohol wipe Finally the site workers will remove their inner glove systems which will be discarded Decontamination personnel for Level A operations will themselves require decontamina
632. using the law of sines from trigonometry sno sing siny a b c or M ee Fat Dh 113 5 9 sin sin 8 Sin y Example 4 Figure 15 3 4 Spot elevation differences using law of sines EISOPQAM 15 21 November 2001 Spot elevation differences can be determined by taking only three measurements shown enclosed in the boxes of Figure 15 3 4 The measurements can be obtained with the total station theodolite or by using a compass equipped with a clinometer and a measuring tape In Figure 15 3 4 the vertical angle V lt is measured at two locations A and midway between A and C and the horizontal distance Dh between those two measurements is also measured Since the sum of the interior angles of each triangle should equal 180 all the other interior angles are calculated Substituting the measurements into the law of sines and solving for x and y shown in Figure 15 3 4 x 200035 y 161 36 sin 15 sin 10 5 sin 25 5 sin 90 p sin 15 113 5 i _ gin 25 5 161 36 sin 10 5 1 x 161 36 y 69 4 Note that this method above only accounts for the relative difference in elevation between point A and the point in question point B If an instrument such as a compass or theodolite is used at point A the H I at point A must be added to the resulting elevation of the point in question The field notation would include the figure drawing all field measurements and
633. ut the audio output and the 1 volt analog output Use the up and down arrow keys to select the 20 200 or 2 000 parts per million ppm range 3 Next the Cal memory is selected The instrument has five Cal Memories for regular operation and one for High Sensitivity operation Only one Cal memory can be used at a time Select Cal Memory 1 with the up and down arrow keys and press ENTER 4 Next enter the correct values for the current time Press ENTER after each value 5 Enter the numerical values for the day month and year Again press ENTER after each selection The instrument is now set for operation EISOPQAM 17 5 November 2001 ALARM 3 Press ALARM The current alarm is displayed If the value is correct 5 ppm wait for the display to revert to normal in 15 seconds or press EXIT If a new value is to be set enter the value and press ENTER When an alarm condition is detected the instrument status changes to Alarm and remains on until the alarm condition has passed CAL Clean outdoor air is suitable as Zero Gas Toluene is used as the calibration gas 1 7 8 Press SETUP and check all display information Select a Cal Memory usually 1 with the arrow keys and press ENTER Press EXIT to leave the Setup Press BATT and record battery voltage Press ALARM and set the alarm level to 5 0 and then press enter Press CAL and expose the instrument to Zero Gas typically ambient air Press ENTER and t
634. ved This is done by pouring a small volume of sample over the strip Do not place the strip in the sample 7 3 5 Special Sample Collection Procedures Trace Organic Compounds and Metals Special sample handling procedures should be instituted when trace contaminant samples are being collected All sampling equipment including pumps bailers water level measurement equipment etc which comes into contact with the water in the well must be cleaned in accordance with the cleaning procedures described in Appendix B Pumps should not be used for sampling unless the interior and exterior portions of the pump and the discharge hoses are thoroughly cleaned Blank samples should be collected to determine the adequacy of cleaning prior to collection of any sample using a pump Order of Sampling with Respect to Analytes In many situations when sampling permanent or temporary monitoring wells an adequate purge with respect to turbidity is often difficult to achieve Removal and insertion of equipment after the purge and prior to actual sampling may negate the low turbidities achieved during purging and elevate turbidity back to unacceptable levels For this reason it is important that special efforts be used to minimize any disturbance of the water column after purging and to collect the aliquot for metals first Filtering As a standard practice ground water samples will not be filtered for routine analysis Filtering will usually only be performe
635. ved during purging and 2 observe and record the volume of water removed EISOPQAM 7 1 November 2001 Prior to initiating the purge the amount of water standing in the water column water inside the well riser and screen should be determined To do this the diameter of the well should be determined and the water level and total depth of the well are measured and recorded Specific methodology for obtaining these measurements is found in Section 15 5 of this SOP Once this information 1s obtained the volume of water to be purged can be determined using one of several methods One is the equation V 20 041 d h Where h depth of water in feet d diameter of well in inches V z volume of water in gallons Alternatively the volume may be determined using a casing volume per foot factor for the appropriate diameter well similar to that in Table 7 2 1 The water level is subtracted from the total depth providing the length of the water column This length is multiplied by the factor in the Table 7 2 1 which corresponds to the appropriate well diameter providing the amount of water in gallons contained in the well Other acceptable methods include the use of nomographs or other equations or formulae With respect to volume an adequate purge is normally achieved when three to five times the volume of standing water in the well has been removed The field notes should reflect the single well volume calculations or determinations according to
636. versal Time Coordinated which used to be known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT i e the local time at the Greenwich meridian zero degrees longitude For the conversion between Eastern Standard Time EST or Eastern Daylight Time EDT use the following formula EST UTC 5 hours note that this is fall and winter EDT UTC 4 hours spring and summer Data Capture Logging And Considerations Choose Data Capture from the main menu Select Create rover file in the data logger choose Open Rov File in the Geoexplorer II or Reopen rover file when appending to a previous file The Create file screen has three fields File Data Dict and Free Space Press Enter on the Data Dict field to choose your data dictionary Press Ok to start the current file selected Scroll through Start feature in the data logger or scroll to Select Feature in the Geoexplorer II and press Enter A list of features in the data dictionary associated with the current file is displayed EISOPQAM 15 13 November 2001 d d m Select the appropriate feature by pressing Enter Then type the appropriate attribute value s After the minimum number of positions are attained see Template 4 above press Ok to accept and store the feature and all of its attributes values in the Geoexplorer II scroll to Close Feature to accept and store the feature and all of its attributes Proceed to the next site feature and continue this operation for all site features No
637. very little residue resulting in minimal exposure to sampling personnel and reduced IDW EISOPQAM 12 3 November 2001 Before the soil is placed in a pan itis necessary to remove the top several inches of soil to minimize the possibility of cross contamination of the sample from fall in of material from the upper portions of the hole Once the soil is placed in a pan it is thoroughly mixed Section 5 13 8 and placed in the appropriate sample container s Section 12 4 contains specific procedures for collecting and handling soil samples for volatile organic compounds analysis Geoprobe Large Bore Soil Sampler Geoprobe offers several tools for soil sample collection Among these are the Macro Core Soil Sampler and the large bore and dual tube soil sampling systems The Environmental Investigations Branch utilizes the large bore soil sampling system for collection of surface and subsurface soil samples The selection of this system does not preclude the use of the other systems at a future time The Large Bore sampler is a solid barrel piston sealed direct push device for collecting discrete interval samples of unconsolidated materials at depth The sampler is approximately 30 inches 762 mm long and has a 1 5 inch 38 mm outside diameter The Large Bore sampler is capable of recovering a discrete sample core 22 inches x 1 0 inches 559 mm x 25 mm contained inside a removable liner Sample volume measures up to 283 ml The liner is a 24
638. vice Tennessee Valley Authority Bureau of Land Management When the exact elevations of sampling locations or other physical features are needed benchmarks of precisely known elevation should be used when leveling If necessary a registered land surveyor could be requested to set at least two third order accuracy vertical control points or benchmarks The vertical control points should have established elevations referenced to NGVD29 or NAVDSS If no benchmark is located in the site vicinity an arbitrary temporary benchmark should be established on a permanent location e g bridge wingwall foundation or a nail or spike in a tree or telephone pole The elevation of the temporary benchmark and therefore all other points could be determined at a later date As with all field work the location of benchmarks used should be shown on the site sketch map and all field measurements should be recorded in the field logbook as outlined in Section 3 5 15 3 2 Equipment Available The following equipment is available for field use in conducting elevation surveys in support of site investigations Differential Leveling e Sokkia B20 or Lietz B2C precision automatic level tripod e telescoping level rod EISOPQAM 15 17 November 2001 Trigonometric Leveling Topcon GTS 2 total station theodolite electronic distance meter EDM tripod s e reflector prism s prism pole cloth or steel tape e compass 15 3 3 Specific Equi
639. ving parts at the rear of the rig while it is operating 7 Keep the drilling area clear of any excess debris tools or drilling equipment 8 Donotclimb on the drilling rig while it is being operated or attempt to repair the rig while it is being operated The driller will direct all work on the rig 9 Do not move or pick up any drilling equipment unless directed by the driller and or the project leader EISOPQAM 6 13 November 2001 10 Each drill rig will have a first aid kit and a fire extinguisher located on the rig in a location quicklv accessible for emergencies All drilling personnel will be familiarized with their location 11 Work clothes will be firm fitting but comfortable and free of straps loose ends strings etc that might catch on some moving part of the drill rig 12 Rings or other jewelry will not be worn while working around the drill rig 13 The drill rig should not be operated within a minimum distance of 20 feet of overhead electrical power lines and or buried utilities that might cause a safety hazard In addition the drill rig should not be operated while there is lightening in the area of the drilling site If an electrical storm moves in during drilling activities vacate the area until it is safe to return 6 8 Well Development A newly completed monitoring well should not be developed for at least 24 hours after the surface pad and outer protective casing are installed This will allow sufficient ti
640. wastes in piles Once the waste has been placed in an open unit the state of the waste may be altered by environmental factors e g temperature precipitation etc Surface impoundments may contain several phases such as floating solids liquid phase s and sludges Waste piles are usually restricted to solids and semi solids All of the potential phases contained in a waste unit should be considered in developing the sample design to meet the study s objective 13 2 2 Closed Units There are a variety of designs shapes sizes and functions of closed units In addition to the challenges of the various designs and the safety requirements for sampling them closed units are difficult to sample because they may contain liquid solid semi solid sludge or any combination of phases Based on the study s design it may be necessary to obtain a cross sectional profile of the closed unit in an attempt to characterize the unit The following are definitions of types of closed waste units described in 40 CFR Part 260 10 EISOPQAM 13 2 November 2001 e Container any portable device in which a material is stored transported treated disposed or otherwise handled Examples of containers are drums overpacks pails totes and roll offs e Tank a stationary device designed to contain an accumulation of hazardous waste which is constructed primarily of non earthen materials which provide structural support Portable tanks tank trucks and ta
641. water allowed to either gravity drain or be reversed by the pump into the sample vials Note When reversing the pump make sure the discharge tubing is not submerged in purge water This will prevent introducing potentially cross contaminated purge water into the sample Alternatively the tubing can be lowered into the well the desired depth and a gloved thumb placed over the end of the tubing This method will capture the water contained in the tubing It can then be removed from the well and the water collected by draining the contents of the tubing into the sample vials Under no circumstances should the sample for volatile organic compound analysis be collected from the content of any other previously filled container All equipment should be cleaned using the procedures described in Appendix B Also refer to the Potable Water Supply discussion Section 2 2 for additional information When sampling for metals only it is also permissible to collect the sample directly from the pump discharge tubing after an adequate purge has been demonstrated When collecting samples in this manner there are several considerations to be aware of The pump head tubing silastic etc must be changed after each well and a rinsate blank must be collected of a representative piece of the pump head tubing only one blank per investigation Also precautions must be taken to ensure that the end of the discharge tubing is not allowed to touch the ground or other surf
642. water and soap using a brush if necessary to remove particulate matter and surface films Equipment may be steam cleaned soap and high pressure hot water as an alternative to brushing Sampling equipment that is steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above the floor of the decontamination pad PVC or plastic items should not be steam cleaned 2 Rinse thoroughly with tap water 3 Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water 4 Rinse thoroughly with solvent Do not solvent rinse PVC or plastic items 5 Rinse thoroughly with organic analyte free water If organic analyte free water is not available equipment should be allowed to completely dry Do not apply a final rinse with analyte water Organic analyte free water can be generated on site utilizing the portable system 6 Remove the equipment from the decontamination area and cover with plastic Equipment stored overnight should be wrapped in aluminum foil and covered with clean unused plastic EISOPQAM B 4 November 2001 B 2 4 Well Sounders or Tapes 1 Wash with soap and tap water 2 Rinse with tap water 3 Rinse with analyte free water B 2 5 Goulds Pump Cleaning Procedure CAUTION During cleaning always disconnect the pump from the generator The Goulds pump should be cleaned prior to use and between each monitoring well The following procedure is required 1 Using a brush scrub the exterior of the contaminated hose and pump with soap and t
643. water from a pump sprayer 3 Once cleared by decontamination personnel site workers will exit the rinse tub bucket and proceed to a location where the outer gloves and boot covers if used will be removed and discarded Having been decontaminated site workers will exit the contamination reduction corridor and enter the support zone The support zone will be located a distance of at least 25 feet upwind of the last station in the contamination reduction corridor 4 Once in the support zone site workers may receive a fresh cylinder of air new outer gloves and boot covers then return through the contamination reduction corridor to the exclusion zone If there is to be no immediate return to the exclusion zone the site workers will proceed to the last station At this location site workers will remove their boots first then remove their SCBA Following this the impermeable suit and cool vest 1f worn will be removed Each site worker will then clean their SCBA mask with a soap solution and water rinse followed by cleaning the inside of the mask with an alcohol wipe Finally the site workers will remove their inner gloves and discard them 5 Decontamination personnel for Level B operations will require a minimal amount of decontamination before exiting the contamination reduction zone This decontamination will consist of a boot rinse in the rinse water washtub bucket not the decontamination cleaning solution washtub bucket followed by remov
644. when analyses for organic compounds or trace metals are to be conducted Any device used for stirring or tubing used for siphoning must be cleaned in the same manner as other equipment Appendix B However samples collected for volatile organic compound oil and grease bacteria sulfides and phenols analyses may not be transferred using this procedure It is extremely important that waste when appropriate soil and sediment samples be mixed thoroughly to ensure that the sample is as representative as possible of the sample media The most common method of mixing is referred to as quartering The quartering procedure should be performed as follows 1 The material in the sample pan should be divided into quarters and each quarter should be mixed individually 2 Two quarters should then be mixed to form halves 3 The two halves should be mixed to form a homogenous matrix This procedure should be repeated several times until the sample is adequately mixed If round bowls are used for sample mixing adequate mixing is achieved by stirring the material in a circular fashion reversing direction and occasionally turning the material over 5 13 9 Special Handling of Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds VOCs Analysis Water samples to be analyzed for volatile organic compounds should be stored in 40 ml septum vials with screw cap and Teflon silicone disk in the cap to prevent contamination of the sample by the cap The disks should be
645. when such information is needed by Branch personnel the request should state that this information will be transmitted directly to the Office of Regional Counsel In general Branch personnel shall not accept confidential information when conducting a plant evaluation inspection or reconnaissance When Branch personnel must collect or observe confidential information a separate logbook shall be maintained When confidential information is entered into an inspector s logbook the entire logbook and each page containing confidential information shall be marked CONFIDENTIALITY CLAIM Upon returning to the EPA Region 4 facility all such information shall be maintained in a locked filing cabinet and the Office of Regional Counsel shall be notified for ultimate disposition of the material All field investigators conducting investigations or inspections should be familiar with the inspection provisions of these acts i e CWA Section 308 RCRA Section 3007 CERCLA Section 104 and TSCA Section 11 2 3 5 Photographs At no time should field investigators be denied the opportunity to take photographs during an investigation If photographs are denied and no other means can be arranged to get the photographs this is considered a denial of access by the facility At some facilities the process operations and or equipment may be claimed as being proprietary In these cases the facility may make a CBI request to the Office of Regional Council O
646. when the inverse tangent result points in the southwest quadrant direction the negative angle would be subtracted from 270 and a positive inverse tangent result pointing in the northwest quadrant would be added to 270 and then converted to degrees minutes and seconds EISOPQAM 15 8 November 2001 EXAMPLE 5 Traverse Field Notation The following is an example of the field notation for a traverse to horizontally locate sampling points Figures 15 2 5 and 15 2 6 show the field notation on the left hand side of the field log book and the physical features sampling points and traverse control points sketched on the right hand side of the field log book The coordinates for each point are determined and usually entered in red ink after the traverse is finished O2 O1 96 Froject 96E 0001 Landis Surveyor Region 4 Site Name Ben Chmark City State Weather Clear O 5 mph N Set traverse points around property to locate 5 monitoring wells Given TFE N 7935 07 E 6178 78 MCT2 N 3297 79 E CD98 14 MCTS N 7851 76 E 6209 98 TP1 to MCT AN 83 32
647. wing information e Identity of the hazardous chemical s e Appropriate hazard warnings and e Name and address of the chemical manufacturer importer or other responsible party Containers of hazardous chemicals generated during field investigations will be labeled with the following information Identity of the hazardous chemical s contained therein and e Appropriate hazard warnings Exempt from labeling requirements are any containers into which hazardous chemicals are transferred from labeled containers and which are intended only for use by the person who performs the transfer during the same work day which the transfer is made Labels on containers or hazardous chemicals will not be removed or in any way defaced Labels for containers of hazardous chemicals will be provided by the SHEM or a designee Information on the labels will be in English Information in other languages may be added as long as the information presented in English is in no way obscured EISOPQAM 4 2 November 2001 4 2 4 Material Safety Data Sheets MSDSs Personnel responsible for receiving hazardous chemicals from manufacturers or suppliers will ensure that MSDSs are obtained for each shipment received Receipt of hazardous chemicals will be contingent upon both the provision of MSDSs and compliance of the MSDS with requirements set forth in OSHA s Hazardous Communication Final Rules part g The Branch Safety Officer or a designee will ensure that curre
648. with the manufacturers specified calibration procedures and shall only be calibrated by personnel that have been trained to do so The calibration shall be checked periodically to insure accurate readings especially on re entering the study area after having left for a period of time All calibration procedures and pertinent information shall be documented in the field logbook as outlined in Section 3 5 Personnel using the geophysical equipment shall be trained in the use and maintenance of such equipment and shall be able to interpret and present the gathered data in an easily understood manner in charts graphs maps and formal reports It is the responsibility of each project leader to insure that the personnel designated to use the geophysical equipment are qualified in the calibration and use of the equipment and able to gather and interpret the data Training on the calibration and use of geophysical equipment that is currently available will be conducted by qualified Branch personnel and will be given to other Branch personnel during in house training sessions scheduled throughout the year EISOPQAM 15 34 November 2001 15 7 References 1 Breed C B and G L Hosmer The Principles and Practices of Surveying Volume I Elementary Surveying Eleventh Edition John Wiley and Sons Inc New York New York 2 Breed C B and G L Hosmer The Principles and Practices of Surveying Volume II Higher Surveying Eighth Edition John Wi
649. with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise return to FEC for proper disposal Containerize in original containers Clearly identify contents Leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise return to FEC for proper disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with WMD site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with WMD site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with WMD site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum or 5 gallon plastic bucket with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with WMD site manager for testing and disposal Place waste in trash bag Place in dumpster with permission of site operator otherwise return to FEC for disposal in dumpster Decontaminate as per Appendix B Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Identify and leave on site with permission of site operator otherwise arrange with site manager for testing and disposal Containerize in 55 gallon drum with tight fitting lid Ide
650. x of Supporting Documentation contains copies of the completed questionnaire Corrective Action Implementation Request CAIR form and documentation contributing significantly to the audit results 2 10 6 National Performance Audit Program Introduction Appendix A Part 2 4 of 40 CFR Part 58 requires agencies operating SLAMS networks to participate in EPA s National Performance Audit Program NPAP In addition agencies receiving Section 105 grants in Region 4 are required to participate in NPAP The purposes of NPAP are to provide agencies with a means of self appraisal for the specific operation audit and to provide EPA with an index of the data quality reported to the AIRS data bank Air Monitoring Staff The Air Monitoring Staff s role is to coordinate the NPAP between state and local agencies and EPA s Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards OAQPS Audit Survey The audit survey is conducted annually on high volume samplers TSP and PM and semi annually on continuous sampler SO O NO and CO and lead Pb EISOPQAM 2 29 November 2001 2 10 7 PM Federal Reference Method FRM Performance Audit Program PEP Introduction Appendix L of 40 CFR Part 50 provides the Reference Method for the Determination of Fine Particulate Matter as PM in the Atmosphere This method provides for the measurement of the mass concentration of fine particulate matter having and aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 2 5 mi
651. y seals may be placed on the sampling pole and tubing line to further reduce tampering possibilities 9 4 6 Automatic Sampler Maintenance Calibration and Quality Control To ensure proper operation of automatic samplers and thus the collection of representative samples the following maintenance and calibration procedures should be used and any deviations should be documented in the field log book Prior to being used the sampler operation should be checked to ensure proper operation by Field Equipment Center personnel This includes operation forward reverse automatic of at least one purge pump purge cycle checking desiccant and replacing if necessary checking the 12 volt batteries to be used with the sampler and repairing any item if necessary During each field trip prior to initiating the automatic sampler the rinse and purge pump purge cycle shall be checked at least once The pumping volume should be checked at least twice using a graduated cylinder or other calibrated container prior to initiating the sampler For flow proportional sampling the flow meter that activates the sampler should be checked to insure that it operates properly Upon returning from a field trip the structural integrity of the sampler should be examined and repaired if necessary The desiccant will be checked and replaced if appropriate The operation forward reverse automatic etc will be checked and required repairs will be made and documented Th
652. y comments optional then click Ok Select New Feature Enter the name of the feature and under Feature Classification choose Point Line or Area depending on what the feature is on a map then click Ok Select New Attribute Enter the type of attribute Menu Numeric Text Date Time File Name or Separator click Ok and fill in the requested Attribute Name information click Ok then click Close when finished with that attribute Add more features and attributes as necessary Many attributes can be listed for one feature Attributes can be menus numbers character strings dates or times Numeric values require a minimum maximum and default value Character strings require a maximum string length Dates and times can be set for automatic generation in the field Consider putting features that are most commonly used at the beginning of the dictionary and any existing GIS database that may require specific character string lengths At the end of all data dictionaries that are created a generic point line or area is also generated This is in case while in the field a feature not listed in the data dictionary may be tagged and identified The following is an example of the data dictionary used by the region COC_GIS Dictionary Chain of Custody GIS Data Dictionary Surfsoil point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Subsoil point Sample ID text 30 Station ID text 30 Potwater point Sample ID text 30
653. y from an electrical hazard standpoint The following sections detail the safety and operation of these pumps E 2 2 Safety 1 Place the generator on dry ground or plastic sheeting as far as practical from the well in the down wind direction and ground it Several grounding kits consisting of a roll of copper wire and a grounding rod are available Wet the ground thoroughly with tap water at the grounding location if dry and drive the grounding rod several feet into the ground Inspect the electrical cord for frays breaks exposed wiring etc Check the head space of the well for the presence of an explosive atmosphere with a combustible gas meter With the current tripod and spool set up a minimum of two people are required to place retrieve and operate these pumps safely If they are used without the aid of the tripod i e all electrical and suspension lines are spooled separately at least three people are needed to successfully lower and raise the pumps Wear rubber safety boots to insulate against shock hazards If purge water is not collected direct the discharge away from the well and generator preferably downgradient of area Make sure that the generator is set to proper voltage Do not add gasoline or oil to the generator while it is running Carry the generator gasoline and oil in a trailer dedicated to this type of equipment Do not haul this equipment in the back of any passenger vehicle or with any sampling
654. y other approved methods such as the straw method The straw method involves allowing the tubing to fill by either lowering it into the water column or filling it via suction applied by the pump head Upon filling the tubing is removed from the well and allowed to drain into the sample vial This is repeated as necessary until all vials are filled Disconnect the purge tubing from the pump Make sure the tubing is securely attached to the protective casing or other secure object Insert the tubing into one of the ferrule nut fittings of a Teflon vacuum container transfer cap assembly Place a suitable length of Teflon tubing between the remaining transfer cap assembly ferrule nut fitting and the vacuum side of the flexible tubing in the peristaltic pump head Securely hand tighten both fittings Turn the pump on Water should begin to collect in the transfer container typically a 4 liter or 1 gallon sample container within a few minutes If water does not begin to flow into the container within five minutes check the transfer cap fittings and make sure the assembly is tightly attached to the container It may be necessary to tighten the ferrule nuts with a wrench or pliers to achieve a vacuum in the system particularly when approaching the maximum head difference between the pump and water table When the transfer container is nearly full turn off the pump remove the transfer cap assembly and pour the sample into the appropriate con
655. y remove any excess water 2 Let the controller box dry completely Pump Cleaning CAUTION Make sure that the pump is not plugged in 1 Remove garden hose if attached and ball check valve Clean these items separately 2 Using a brush or scrub pad scrub the exterior of the electrical cord and pump with soap and tap water Do not wet the electrical plug 3 Place pump in clean water and have it discharge into a bucket or or another area to clean the inside of the pump using a soap and water mixture first Then run tap water or DI water through the pump and flush out the soap EISOPQAM C 9 November 2001 4 5 Completely air dry Place equipment in clean plastic bag To clean the Redi Flo2 ball check valve 1 2 3 4 5 Completely dismantle ball check valve Check for wear and or corrosion and replace as needed Using a brush scrub all components with soap and hot tap water Rinse with analyte free water Completely air dry Reassemble the ball check valve and re attach to Redi Flo2 pump head Note The analyte free water within the Redi Flo2 pump head should be changed at the FEC upon return from the field according to the manufacturer s instructions C 5 4 Little Beaver The engine and power head should be cleaned with a power washer steam jenny or hand washed with a brush using soap to remove oil grease and hydraulic fluid from the exterior of the unit Do not use degreasers Ri
656. y will be given a minimum of three weeks notice for cleaning and checking the PUF XAD cartridges The cleaned PUF XAD cartridges should be wrapped in aluminum foil and packed in metal cans cushioned by new polyethylene bubble wrap to prevent breakage during shipment Prepared PUF XAD sample cartridges that are pre packed in solvent washed metal cans will be obtained from the extraction laboratory prior to sampling The cans should be packed inside coolers frozen eutectic salt packs Blue Ice to maintain a temperature of less than 15 C Sample Collection The following procedures will be followed for all High Volume PUF XAD sampling Latex gloves will be used when handling all PUF XAD cartridges and quartz particulate pre filters Assure that the red silicon upper and lower gaskets located in the cartridge housing are in place Then remove the PUF XAD cartridge from the shipping can remove from the foil and insert the cartridge into the High Volume sampler s chamber The pre filter should be installed in the filter holder using caution not to over tighten the fittings The foil should be placed back in the shipping can The can should be labeled with site ID operators name and sample date and placed in the High Volume sampler enclosure until the sample is collected The High Volume sampler should be turned on and allowed to run for two minutes An initial flowrate should be recorded on the sample data sheet The timer should be set to turn the sa
657. ygen uptake rate OUR measurements e Mixed liquor microscopic examinations e Sludge blanket depth SBD measurements Additional references are available that provide a more comprehensive evaluation of the methods used to conduct a diagnostic evaluation 4 5 7 and 8 Completion of the Sacramento Operation of Wastewater Treatment Plants course is highly recommended for all personnel prior to serving as the project leader on a Diagnostic Evaluation 6 9 8 Supplementary Data Collection While conducting wastewater sampling the following information will also be obtained if applicable Field measurements pH dissolved oxygen conductivity and temperature see Section 16 for standard field analytical techniques e Flowsassociated with the samples collected continuous flows with composite samples and instantaneous flows with grab samples Section 18 e Diagrams and or written descriptions of the wastewater treatment systems if available Photographs of pertinent wastewater associated equipment such as flow measuring devices treatment units etc keep photolog as specified in section 3 2 e Process control information on the wastewater treatment process if applicable e Completion of applicable forms required during specific investigations EISOPQAM 9 7 November 2001 All observations measurements diagrams etc will be entered in bound field logbooks or attached thereto where applicable as specified in
658. ysis or measurement where the data are recorded directly in bound field logbooks or on the Chain of Custody Record with identifying information while in the custody of the sampling team Examples of such in situ field measurements and analyses include pH temperature dissolved oxygen and conductivity Samples other than those collected for in situ analysis are identified by using a standard sample tag Figure 3 3 which are attached to the sample container In some cases particularly with biological samples the sample tag may have to be included with or wrapped around the sample Sample tags are sequentially numbered and are accountable documents after they are completed and attached to a sample or other physical evidence The following information shall be included on the sample tag using waterproof non erasable ink project number e field identification or sample station number date and time of sample collection e designation of the sample as a grab or composite e avery brief description of the sampling location e the signature of either the sampler s or the designated sampling team leader and the field sample custodian if appropriate e whether the sample is preserved or unpreserved e the general types of analyses to be performed checked on front of tag and relevant comments such as readily detectable or identifiable odor color or known toxic properties Samples or other physical evidence collected during crimina

Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents